MPCW2201SP 6-30-2020 PDF

D262
SERVICE MANUAL
It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained
within this document to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the best
interest of Ricoh USA, Inc. and its member companies.
NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY

FASHION AND DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT THE PRIOR
PERMISSION OF RICOH USA, Inc.
All product names, domain names or product illustrations, including

desktop images, used in this document are trademarks, registered
trademarks or the property of their respective companies.
They are used throughout this book in an informational or editorial fashion
only and for the benefit of such companies. No such use, or the use of
any trade name, or web site is intended to convey endorsement or other
affiliation with Ricoh products.
 2016 RICOH USA, Inc. All rights reserved.

WARNING
The Service Manual contains information
regarding service techniques, procedures,
processes and spare parts of office equipment
distributed by Ricoh USA, Inc. Users of this
manual should be either service trained or
certified by successfully completing a Ricoh
Technical Training Program.
Untrained and uncertified users utilizing

information contained in this service manual to
repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal
injury, damage to property or loss of warranty
protection.
Ricoh USA, Inc.

LEGEND
PRODUCT COMPANY
CODE RICOH
D262 MP CW2201 SP
DOCUMENTATION HISTORY
REV. NO. DATE COMMENTS
* 06/2016 Original Printing
D262
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. PRODUCT INFORMATION ......................................................... 1-1

1.1 MAIN MACHINE, PERIPHERALS, OPTIONS............................................................... 1-1
1.1.1 MODEL NUMBERS AND NAMES ...................................................................... 1-1
1.1.2 CONFIGURATION............................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 GUIDANCE FOR THOSE WHO ARE FAMILIAR WITH PREDECESSOR PRODUCTS1-3
1.2.1 COMPARISON TO MP CW2201 ......................................................................... 1-3
1.3 OVERVIEW .................................................................................................................... 1-4
1.3.1 NEW FEATURES ................................................................................................ 1-4
Auto Nozzle Check .................................................................................................. 1-4
Carriage Unit ........................................................................................................... 1-5
Ink Supply Motors.................................................................................................... 1-6
Carriage LED Lamp................................................................................................. 1-7
New Bypass Feed ................................................................................................... 1-7
Manual Cut .............................................................................................................. 1-8
Configuration ........................................................................................................... 1-8
Locations of Major Electrical Components.............................................................. 1-9
Smart Operation Panel .......................................................................................... 1-10
Roll Paper Setting ................................................................................................. 1-12
1.3.2 ACRONYMS AND IMPORTANT TERMS.......................................................... 1-13
1.3.3 AROUND THE MACHINE ................................................................................. 1-14
1.3.4 MAIN SECTIONS .............................................................................................. 1-23
1.3.5 MAIN COMPONENTS....................................................................................... 1-25
1.3.6 DRIVE LAYOUT ................................................................................................ 1-27
1.3.7 ORIGINAL PATH, PAPER PATHS..................................................................... 1-29
2. INSTALLATION ........................................................................... 2-1

2.1 PREPARATION .............................................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.1 ENVIRONMENT .................................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.2 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS ................................................................. 2-2
2.1.3 CONFIGURATION............................................................................................... 2-3
2.1.4 MACHINE LEVEL ................................................................................................ 2-3
2.1.5 POWER SOURCE............................................................................................... 2-3
2.1.6 INSTALLATION OVERVIEW ............................................................................... 2-4
Installation Flow ....................................................................................................... 2-4
SM i D262
2.2 MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION .................................................................................. 2-6
2.2.1 BEFORE YOU BEGIN ......................................................................................... 2-6
Accessory Boxes ..................................................................................................... 2-6
What You Need ....................................................................................................... 2-7
Accessory List in Box [3] ......................................................................................... 2-7
Accessory List in Box [5] ......................................................................................... 2-9
2.2.2 MAIN UNIT STAND ........................................................................................... 2-10
Accessories: Main Unit Stand ............................................................................... 2-10
Installing the Main Unit Stand................................................................................ 2-11
2.2.3 MOUNTING THE MAIN UNIT ........................................................................... 2-13
2.2.4 ASSEMBLING THE SCANNER STAND ........................................................... 2-16
Accessories: Scanner Stand ................................................................................. 2-16
Installing the Scanner Stand ................................................................................. 2-17
2.2.5 MOUNTING THE SCANNER UNIT .................................................................. 2-19
2.2.6 ROLL UNIT 1 (STANDARD) .............................................................................. 2-22
Accessories: Roll Unit 1 ........................................................................................ 2-22
Installing Roll Unit 1............................................................................................... 2-23
Wiring Roll Unit 1................................................................................................... 2-27
2.2.7 ROLL UNIT 2 (OPTION).................................................................................... 2-30
Accessories ........................................................................................................... 2-30
Installing Roll Unit 2............................................................................................... 2-31
Wiring Roll Unit 2................................................................................................... 2-34
2.2.8 CONTROLLER OPTIONS................................................................................. 2-40
2.2.9 CONNECTING THE SCANNER AND MAIN UNIT ........................................... 2-40
Parts to be Used .................................................................................................... 2-40
Connecting the Harnesses .................................................................................... 2-40
Wiring the Scanner Cable ..................................................................................... 2-42
Clamping the Power Cord ..................................................................................... 2-46
2.2.10 REMOVING TAPES AND SHIPPING MATERIALS .......................................... 2-48
2.2.11 ORIGINAL STACKER, GUIDES........................................................................ 2-50
Installing the Original Stacker, Guides .................................................................. 2-50
2.2.12 INK COLLECTOR TANK STORAGE SHELF.................................................... 2-52
Installing the Ink Collector Tank Storage Shelf...................................................... 2-52
2.2.13 EXIT STACKER ................................................................................................. 2-53
Accessories: Exit Stacker ...................................................................................... 2-53
Installing the Exit Stacker ...................................................................................... 2-54
Changing the mode of the Paper Exit Stacker ...................................................... 2-58
2.2.14 INK FILLING ...................................................................................................... 2-58
Draining and Filling Procedure .............................................................................. 2-59
D262 ii SM
If Draining Fails to Start ......................................................................................... 2-62
2.2.15 SETTING ROLL PAPER.................................................................................... 2-63
Setting the Paper Spool to Roll Paper .................................................................. 2-63
Setting the Paper Roll to the Machine .................................................................. 2-65
2.2.16 CONNECTING TO THE GIGABIT ETHERNET INTERFACE .......................... 2-68
2.2.17 CHECK PRINTING............................................................................................ 2-70
Nozzle Check Pattern............................................................................................ 2-70
When an Unbroken Nozzle Check Pattern Cannot be Produced......................... 2-71
Halftone Check ...................................................................................................... 2-72
2.2.18 FINAL ADJUSTMENTS ..................................................................................... 2-73
Caster Lock ........................................................................................................... 2-73
Level Adjustment ................................................................................................... 2-73
Manual Adjust Head Position ................................................................................ 2-75
Adjust Paper Feed................................................................................................. 2-77
Adjust Print Position .............................................................................................. 2-78
2.2.19 FINAL SETTINGS ............................................................................................. 2-79
2.2.20 AFTER INSTALLATION..................................................................................... 2-79
2.2.21 MOVING THE MACHINE .................................................................................. 2-80
2.3 CONTROLLER OPTIONS ........................................................................................... 2-81
2.3.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................... 2-81
Slots ....................................................................................................................... 2-81
Standard Controller Features ................................................................................ 2-82
2.3.2 SD CARD APPLI MOVE.................................................................................... 2-82
Overview................................................................................................................ 2-82
Move Exec ............................................................................................................. 2-82
Undo Exec ............................................................................................................. 2-83
2.3.3 IEEE 802.11 A/G/N INTERFACE UNIT TYPE M19 .......................................... 2-85
Included Parts........................................................................................................ 2-85
Installation ............................................................................................................. 2-85
Attaching Antennas ............................................................................................... 2-86
Checking the Wireless LAN Interface Connection ................................................ 2-90
2.3.4 OCR UNIT TYPE M13 ....................................................................................... 2-91
Recovery Procedure.............................................................................................. 2-93
2.3.5 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER TYPE M23 (MLB) .............................................. 2-94
Included Parts........................................................................................................ 2-94
Installation of MLB ................................................................................................. 2-94
2.3.6 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT TYPE M19 ........................................... 2-96
Overview................................................................................................................ 2-96
Before You Begin the Procedure ........................................................................... 2-96
SM iii D262
Seal Check and Removal ...................................................................................... 2-97
Installation Procedure............................................................................................ 2-98
2.3.7 R/W NFC PERSONAL AUTHENTICATION IC CARD .................................... 2-100
Included Parts......................................................................................................2-100
Installation Guide .................................................................................................2-100
2.3.8 CHECK ALL CONNECTIONS ......................................................................... 2-106
2.4 SECURITY SETTING ................................................................................................2-107
2.4.1 SECURITY FUNCTION INSTALLATION ........................................................ 2-107
2.4.2 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY ..................................................................... 2-108
Before You Begin the Procedure ......................................................................... 2-108
Using Auto Erase Memory ..................................................................................2-108
2.4.3 HDD ENCRYPTION ........................................................................................ 2-110
Before You Begin the Procedure:........................................................................ 2-110
Enable Encryption Setting ................................................................................... 2-111
Backing Up the Encryption Key........................................................................... 2-113
Encryption Key Restoration................................................................................. 2-114
2.5 @REMOTE SETTING ............................................................................................... 2-116
2.5.1 SETTINGS RELEVANT TO THE SERVICE CONTRACT .............................. 2-116
2.5.2 SETTINGS FOR @REMOTE SERVICE ......................................................... 2-117
3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ................................................... 3-1

3.1 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE TABLES ...................................................................... 3-1
3.2 PM CLEANING POINTS ................................................................................................ 3-2
3.2.1 PM TABLE ........................................................................................................... 3-2
Scanner Unit ............................................................................................................ 3-2
Horizontal Unit ......................................................................................................... 3-5
Waste Ink Collection ................................................................................................ 3-8
3.2.2 OTHER ITEMS FOR CLEANING...................................................................... 3-12
External Covers ..................................................................................................... 3-12
Scanner Unit .......................................................................................................... 3-13
Horizontal Unit ....................................................................................................... 3-15
Paper Feed ............................................................................................................ 3-16
Roll Units ............................................................................................................... 3-17
4. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................ 4-1

4.1 NOTES ON THE MAIN POWER SWITCH .................................................................... 4-1
4.1.1 PUSH SWITCH ................................................................................................... 4-1
Characteristics of the Push Switch (DC Switch) ..................................................... 4-1
Shutdown Method ................................................................................................... 4-3
Forced Shutdown .................................................................................................... 4-4
D262 iv SM
4.2 GENERAL PRECAUTIONS ........................................................................................... 4-5
4.2.1 EXTERNAL COVERS ......................................................................................... 4-5
4.2.2 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT .................................................................................... 4-5
4.2.3 PAPER ................................................................................................................. 4-7
4.2.4 COPY QUALITY .................................................................................................. 4-8
4.2.5 CIS ....................................................................................................................... 4-8
4.2.6 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ........................................................................... 4-8
4.2.7 ADJUSTMENTS AT MACHINE INSTALLATION................................................. 4-8
4.2.8 OTHER PRECAUTIONS ..................................................................................... 4-9
4.2.9 SERVICE PRECAUTIONS................................................................................ 4-10
Scanner Unit Rollers ............................................................................................. 4-10
Main Frame Screws .............................................................................................. 4-10
Right Plate Screws ................................................................................................ 4-11
Maintenance Unit Base Screws ............................................................................ 4-11
Solenoid Bracket Screw ........................................................................................ 4-12
Main Carriage Screws ........................................................................................... 4-13
Temperature/Humidity Sensor Bracket ................................................................. 4-13
Notes on Operation of the Paper Holding Lever ................................................... 4-14
4.3 COMMON PROCEDURES .......................................................................................... 4-15
4.3.1 BEFORE YOU BEGIN ....................................................................................... 4-15
4.3.2 BEFORE SERVICING THE MACHINE ............................................................. 4-16
Rear Output Guides .............................................................................................. 4-16
Original Guides ...................................................................................................... 4-17
Original Stacker ..................................................................................................... 4-17
Ink Collector Tank .................................................................................................. 4-18
Paper Rolls ............................................................................................................ 4-19
4.3.3 MAIN COVERS ................................................................................................. 4-20
Left Cover .............................................................................................................. 4-20
Right Cover............................................................................................................ 4-24
Right Upper Cover................................................................................................. 4-27
Ink Cartridge Cover ............................................................................................... 4-29
Top Cover .............................................................................................................. 4-31
Right Rear Cover. .................................................................................................. 4-33
Left Rear Cover ..................................................................................................... 4-35
Front Cover............................................................................................................ 4-36
Paper Exit Guide ................................................................................................... 4-37
4.3.4 SCANNER UNIT................................................................................................ 4-40
Raise the Scanner Unit Fully................................................................................. 4-40
Scanner Upper Cover............................................................................................ 4-41
SM v D262
Scanner Rear Cover.............................................................................................. 4-45
Scanner Left Cover, Scanner Right Cover ............................................................ 4-46
Original Table......................................................................................................... 4-47
Raise the Left Side of the Scanner Unit. ............................................................... 4-47
Raise the Right Side of the Scanner Unit. ............................................................ 4-50
4.3.5 MOVING THE CARRIAGE UNIT ...................................................................... 4-52
Before You Begin................................................................................................... 4-52
Move the Carriage Unit with SP2-102-4 ............................................................... 4-52
Uncapping the Print Heads and Moving the Carriage Unit Manually ................... 4-54
Capping the Print Heads Manually ....................................................................... 4-57
4.3.6 DISCONNECTING THE MAIN UNIT FROM THE SCANNER UNIT ................ 4-59
Disconnecting the Scanner Cable ......................................................................... 4-60
Separating the Main Unit from the Scanner Unit .................................................. 4-63
4.3.7 OPERATION PANEL ......................................................................................... 4-65
Remove ................................................................................................................. 4-65
Precaution ............................................................................................................. 4-67
4.4 SCANNER .................................................................................................................... 4-68
4.4.1 BEFORE YOU BEGIN ....................................................................................... 4-68
Safety Switch Diagram .......................................................................................... 4-68
4.4.2 ORIGINAL WIDTH SENSORS, ORIGINAL SET SENSOR .............................. 4-69
4.4.3 SAFETY SWITCH ............................................................................................. 4-71
4.4.4 ORIGINAL REGISTRATION SENSOR ............................................................. 4-72
4.4.5 SCANNER MOTOR........................................................................................... 4-73
4.4.6 SIB (SCANNER I/F BOARD)............................................................................. 4-74
Remove ................................................................................................................. 4-74
Precaution ............................................................................................................. 4-75
4.4.7 ORIGINAL FEED ROLLER ............................................................................... 4-76
Remove ................................................................................................................. 4-76
Adjustment............................................................................................................. 4-79
4.4.8 EXPOSURE GLASS ......................................................................................... 4-80
Remove ................................................................................................................. 4-80
Precaution ............................................................................................................. 4-81
4.4.9 CIS UNIT ........................................................................................................... 4-82
Remove ................................................................................................................. 4-82
Precaution ............................................................................................................. 4-83
Adjustment............................................................................................................. 4-85
4.4.10 ORIGINAL EXIT SENSOR ................................................................................ 4-85
4.4.11 ORIGINAL EXIT ROLLER ................................................................................. 4-86
Remove ................................................................................................................. 4-86
D262 vi SM
Adjustment............................................................................................................. 4-89
4.4.12 WHITE PLATE BRACKET................................................................................. 4-90
4.4.13 ORIGINAL STOP SWITCH ............................................................................... 4-91
4.5 ROLL UNITS ................................................................................................................ 4-93
4.5.1 ROLL UNIT 1 ..................................................................................................... 4-93
Remove ................................................................................................................. 4-93
Precaution ............................................................................................................. 4-97
4.5.2 ROLL UNIT 2 (OPTION).................................................................................... 4-99
Remove ................................................................................................................. 4-99
Precaution ...........................................................................................................4-104
4.5.3 REWIND SWITCH ...........................................................................................4-105
Remove ...............................................................................................................4-105
Precaution ...........................................................................................................4-106
4.5.4 LEFT OUTER COVER, LEFT INNER COVER ............................................... 4-106
Remove ...............................................................................................................4-106
Precaution ...........................................................................................................4-107
4.5.5 ENCODER SENSORS ....................................................................................4-107
Remove ...............................................................................................................4-107
Cleaning ..............................................................................................................4-108
4.5.6 ROLL PAPER FEED MOTOR ......................................................................... 4-109
4.5.7 ROLL PAPER FEED CLUTCH ........................................................................ 4-110
Remove ............................................................................................................... 4-110
Precaution ........................................................................................................... 4-114
4.5.8 PAPER RELEASE SENSOR........................................................................... 4-116
Remove ............................................................................................................... 4-116
Cleaning .............................................................................................................. 4-117
Precaution ........................................................................................................... 4-117
4.5.9 FEED ROLLER HOUSING.............................................................................. 4-118
Separate the Feed Roller Housing (Roller Unit 1) .............................................. 4-118
Separate the Feed Roller Housing (Roller Unit 2) .............................................. 4-121
4.5.10 PAPER ENTRANCE SENSORS, EXIT SENSOR .......................................... 4-124
Remove ...............................................................................................................4-124
Cleaning ..............................................................................................................4-126
4.5.11 FEED ROLLER................................................................................................4-127
Remove ............................................................................................................... 4-127
Precaution ...........................................................................................................4-129
4.5.12 ROLL END SENSOR ......................................................................................4-129
4.6 PAPER TRANSPORT ................................................................................................4-131
4.6.1 BYPASS SENSOR ..........................................................................................4-131
SM vii D262
4.6.2 PRE-REGISTRATION SENSOR ..................................................................... 4-132
4.6.3 REGISTRATION END SENSOR ..................................................................... 4-133
4.6.4 PAPER TRANSPORT FAN MOTOR ............................................................... 4-134
4.7 PAPER EXIT ..............................................................................................................4-136
4.7.1 CUTTER ..........................................................................................................4-136
4.7.2 EXIT GUIDE ....................................................................................................4-137
Remove ...............................................................................................................4-137
Precaution ...........................................................................................................4-138
4.7.3 CUTTER UNIT.................................................................................................4-139
4.7.4 CUTTER SWITCH (RIGHT) ............................................................................ 4-142
4.7.5 CUTTER SWITCH (LEFT) .............................................................................. 4-143
4.7.6 CUTTER MOTOR............................................................................................4-143
4.7.7 MOTOR TIMING BELT, CUTTER BELT.......................................................... 4-144
Remove ...............................................................................................................4-144
Precaution ...........................................................................................................4-146
4.7.8 PAPER EXIT SENSOR ...................................................................................4-147
4.7.9 GUIDE PLATE SAFETY SENSOR.................................................................. 4-148
4.8 MAIN SCAN ...............................................................................................................4-150
4.8.1 HORIZONTAL ENCODER SENSOR .............................................................. 4-150
Remove ...............................................................................................................4-150
Precaution ...........................................................................................................4-153
4.8.2 HORIZONTAL ENCODER SHEET ................................................................. 4-153
Remove ...............................................................................................................4-153
Cleaning ..............................................................................................................4-156
Precaution ...........................................................................................................4-156
4.8.3 HORIZONTAL MOTOR ...................................................................................4-158
4.8.4 HORIZONTAL TIMING BELT .......................................................................... 4-160
4.9 SUB SCAN .................................................................................................................4-161
4.9.1 VERTICAL ENCODER SENSOR.................................................................... 4-161
Precaution ...........................................................................................................4-162
4.9.2 VERTICAL ENCODER WHEEL, TIMING BELT ............................................. 4-163
4.9.3 VERTICAL ENCODER HP SENSOR.............................................................. 4-165
4.9.4 VERTICAL MOTOR .........................................................................................4-167
4.9.5 BYPASS STOPPER CLUTCH SENSOR ........................................................ 4-168
4.9.6 BYPASS STOPPER CLUTCH ........................................................................ 4-170
4.10 CARRIAGE UNIT ................................................................................................4-173
4.10.1 BEFORE YOU BEGIN .....................................................................................4-173
4.10.2 DRESS SENSOR ............................................................................................4-175
Remove ...............................................................................................................4-175
D262 viii SM
Cleaning ..............................................................................................................4-177
Adjustment...........................................................................................................4-177
4.10.3 LED ..................................................................................................................4-180
Remove ...............................................................................................................4-180
4.10.4 HRB (HEAD RELAY BOARD) ......................................................................... 4-182
Remove ...............................................................................................................4-182
Precaution ...........................................................................................................4-186
4.10.5 HEAD LIFT MOTOR ........................................................................................4-187
4.10.6 PRINT HEAD UNIT .........................................................................................4-189
Black Print Head Unit Accessories ...................................................................... 4-190
Color Print Head Unit Accessories ...................................................................... 4-191
Carriage Unit Cover Removal ............................................................................. 4-192
Black Print Head Unit Removal ........................................................................... 4-194
New Black Print Head Unit Installation ............................................................... 4-199
Color Print Head Unit Removal ........................................................................... 4-207
New Color Print Head Unit Installation................................................................ 4-213
After the Print Head Unit Replacement ............................................................... 4-221
4.10.7 CARRIAGE UNIT ............................................................................................4-224
Remove Ink Supply Unit ......................................................................................4-225
Free the Harness on the Right Side of the Main Unit ......................................... 4-227
Main Ink Level Sensor Bracket Removal ............................................................ 4-231
Ink Tube Rail Removal ........................................................................................4-233
Horizontal Encoder Sheet Removal .................................................................... 4-234
Tension Bracket Removal ...................................................................................4-235
Right Plate Removal............................................................................................4-237
Carriage Unit Removal ........................................................................................4-241
Precaution ...........................................................................................................4-251
4.11INK SUPPLY ..............................................................................................................4-256
4.11.1 INK SUPPLY UNIT ..........................................................................................4-256
Ink Supply Unit Accessories ................................................................................ 4-256
Before You Begin.................................................................................................4-257
Ink Supply Unit Replacement .............................................................................. 4-257
Carriage Disconnection .......................................................................................4-258
Ink Supply Unit Removal .....................................................................................4-264
New Ink Supply Unit Installation.......................................................................... 4-264
Ink Tube Attachment to the Print Head Unit ........................................................ 4-266
4.11.2 AIR RELEASE SOLENOID ............................................................................. 4-270
4.11.3 INK LEVEL SENSOR AND TEMPERATURE/HUMIDITY SENSOR .............. 4-274
4.12 MAINTENANCE UNIT, WASTE INK COLLECTION ........................................... 4-277
SM ix D262
4.12.1 LEFT INK SUMP .............................................................................................4-277
4.12.2 INK COLLECTOR UNIT ..................................................................................4-278
4.12.3 INK COLLECTOR UNIT CONTACT SWITCH ................................................ 4-279
4.12.4 RIGHT INK SUMP ...........................................................................................4-280
4.12.5 MAINTENANCE UNIT .....................................................................................4-282
4.13 AUTO-NOZZLE CHECK .....................................................................................4-285
4.13.1 AUTO-NOZZLE CHECK UPPER UNIT .......................................................... 4-285
4.13.2 AUTO-NOZZLE CHECK UNIT ........................................................................ 4-287
4.13.3 AFTER REPLACEMENT................................................................................. 4-289
4.14 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ........................................................................... 4-290
4.14.1 REAR COVER .................................................................................................4-290
4.14.2 PCB BOX.........................................................................................................4-291
4.14.3 CONTROLLER BOARD ..................................................................................4-297
Remove ...............................................................................................................4-298
Replacing the NVRAM and Memory ................................................................... 4-299
4.14.4 RFDB (ROLL FEEDER DRIVE BOARD) ........................................................ 4-299
Remove ...............................................................................................................4-300
4.14.5 IOB (INPUT/OUTPUT BOARD) ...................................................................... 4-301
Remove ...............................................................................................................4-301
4.14.6 HDD .................................................................................................................4-302
Remove ...............................................................................................................4-303
Settings................................................................................................................4-304
4.14.7 BICU (BASE IMAGE CONTROL UNIT) .......................................................... 4-304
Remove ...............................................................................................................4-305
EEPROM Replacement.......................................................................................4-306
4.14.8 NVRAM ............................................................................................................4-308
NVRAM on the controller board .......................................................................... 4-308
NVRAM (EEPROM) on the BiCU ........................................................................ 4-310
4.14.9 PSU (POWER SUPPLY UNIT)........................................................................ 4-312
Remove ...............................................................................................................4-313
Precaution ...........................................................................................................4-314
4.15 SENSORS, SWITCHES ......................................................................................4-315
4.15.1 INK COLLECTOR TANK COVER SWITCH .................................................... 4-315
4.15.2 INK-CARTRIDGE COVER SWITCH ............................................................... 4-315
4.15.3 FRONT COVER SAFETY SWITCHES ........................................................... 4-316
4.15.4 FRONT COVER SWITCH ............................................................................... 4-317
Remove ...............................................................................................................4-317
Precaution ...........................................................................................................4-318
4.16 SPECIAL ADJUSTMENTS ..................................................................................4-319
D262 x SM
4.16.1 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT WITH SP MODES ..................................................... 4-319
Step 1: Magnification for Paper Type: Plain ........................................................ 4-319
Step 2: Copy/Main Scan Magnification ............................................................... 4-320
Step 3: Copy/Print Sub Scan Magnification ........................................................ 4-321
Step 4: Scanner Mask Setting ............................................................................. 4-322
Step 5: Erase Margins .........................................................................................4-322
Step 6: Printer: Leading Edge, Side-to-Side Registration................................... 4-323
Step 7: Scanner Mask Setting ............................................................................. 4-324
Step 8: Erase Margins .........................................................................................4-324
Step 9: Scanner Registration .............................................................................. 4-324
Step 10: Printer: Cut Length ................................................................................ 4-325
Step 11: Synchro Cut (Trailing Edge Registration) ............................................. 4-326
4.16.2 CIS ADJUSTMENT WITH SP MODES ........................................................... 4-327
To Print the CIS Adjustment Pattern ................................................................... 4-327
To Adjust the Image at the CIS Joints ................................................................. 4-328
To Adjust the Scan Speed Switching................................................................... 4-330
5. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE REFERENCE .................................... 5-1

5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE ........................................................................................ 5-1
5.2 FIRMWARE UPDATE .................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2.1 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2.2 FIRMWARE TYPE ............................................................................................... 5-1
5.2.3 PROCEDURE...................................................................................................... 5-4
Update procedure.................................................................................................... 5-5
5.2.4 ERROR SCREENS DURING UPDATING .......................................................... 5-9
5.3 RFU UPDATING THE FIRMWARE ............................................................................. 5-17
5.3.1 RFU PERFORMABLE CONDITION ................................................................. 5-17
5.4 PACKAGE FIRMWARE UPDATE ................................................................................ 5-18
5.4.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................... 5-18
5.4.2 IMMEDIATE UPDATE ....................................................................................... 5-19
5.4.3 UPDATE AT THE NEXT VISIT (RESERVE) ..................................................... 5-22
How to Set the Machine to Download Firmware Later (RESERVE) .................... 5-22
How to Check if the Firmware Downloaded with RESERVE ................................ 5-25
How to Install Firmware Downloaded with RESERVE.......................................... 5-26
5.4.4 UPDATE VIA SD CARD .................................................................................... 5-29
5.5 UPDATING JAVAVM .................................................................................................... 5-31
5.5.1 CREATING AN SD CARD FOR UPDATING ..................................................... 5-31
Updating Procedure .............................................................................................. 5-31
List of Error Messages .......................................................................................... 5-32
5.6 CAPTURING THE DEBUG LOGS ............................................................................... 5-35
SM xi D262
5.6.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................... 5-35
Security of the Operation Log ............................................................................... 5-37
5.6.2 RETRIEVING THE DEBUG LOGS ................................................................... 5-37
Procedure for Retrieving the Debug Log with SD Card ........................................ 5-38
5.7 REBOOT/SYSTEM SETTING RESET ........................................................................ 5-39
5.7.1 SYSTEM SETTINGS AND COPY SETTING RESET ....................................... 5-39
System Setting Reset ............................................................................................ 5-39
Copier Setting Reset ............................................................................................. 5-40
5.8 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD ........................................................................ 5-41
5.8.1 UPLOADING CONTENT OF NVRAM TO AN SD CARD ................................. 5-41
5.8.2 DOWNLOADING AN SD CARD TO NVRAM.................................................... 5-42
5.9 ADDRESS BOOK UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD .................................................................. 5-43
5.9.1 INFORMATION LIST ......................................................................................... 5-43
5.9.2 DOWNLOAD ..................................................................................................... 5-43
5.9.3 UPLOAD ............................................................................................................ 5-45
5.10 SMC LIST CARD SAVE FUNCTION .................................................................... 5-46
5.10.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................... 5-46
SMC List Card Save .............................................................................................. 5-46
5.10.2 PROCEDURE.................................................................................................... 5-46
5.10.3 FILE NAMES OF THE SAVED SMC LISTS...................................................... 5-48
5.10.4 ERROR MESSAGES ........................................................................................ 5-49
5.11UP/SP DATA IMPORT/EXPORT.................................................................................. 5-50
5.11.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................... 5-50
Import/export conditions ........................................................................................ 5-50
5.11.2 UP DATA IMPORT/EXPORT ............................................................................. 5-50
Data that can be imported and exported............................................................... 5-50
Data that cannot be imported or exported ............................................................ 5-51
Exporting Device Information ................................................................................ 5-52
Importing Device Information ................................................................................ 5-53
5.11.3 SP DATA IMPORT/EXPORT ............................................................................. 5-54
Data that can be imported and exported............................................................... 5-54
Exporting Device Information ................................................................................ 5-54
Importing Device Information ................................................................................ 5-56
5.11.4 POSSIBLE SOLUTIONS FOR IMPORT/EXPORT PROBLEMS ...................... 5-57
5.12 TEST PATTERN PRINTING.................................................................................. 5-60
5.13 CARD SAVE FUNCTION ...................................................................................... 5-61
5.13.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................... 5-61
Card Save:............................................................................................................. 5-61
5.13.2 PROCEDURE.................................................................................................... 5-61
D262 xii SM
5.13.3 ERROR MESSAGES ........................................................................................ 5-63
6. TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................ 6-1

6.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS...................................................................................... 6-1
6.2 SC100: SCANNING ....................................................................................................... 6-2
6.3 SC200: IMAGE WRITING .............................................................................................. 6-7
6.4 SC300: NOT USED...................................................................................................... 6-24
6.5 SC400: NOT USED...................................................................................................... 6-24
6.6 SC500: PAPER FEED, TRANSPORT ......................................................................... 6-25
6.7 SC600: COMMUNICATION ......................................................................................... 6-35
6.8 SC700: NOT USED...................................................................................................... 6-52
6.9 SC800: FIRMWARE..................................................................................................... 6-53
6.10 SC900: SOFTWARE ............................................................................................. 6-66
6.11PRINTING PROBLEMS ............................................................................................... 6-70
6.11.1 BEFORE YOU BEGIN ....................................................................................... 6-70
6.11.2 WHITE LINES, HORIZONTAL BANDING ......................................................... 6-70
Print heads clogged............................................................................................... 6-70
Other Measures ..................................................................................................... 6-71
6.11.3 HORIZONTAL LINES IN MARGINS.................................................................. 6-71
6.11.4 WHITE, COLOR VERTICAL BANDING ............................................................ 6-72
Print Head Out of Position, Horizontal Encoder Strip Problem ............................. 6-72
6.11.5 OVERALL POOR IMAGE QUALITY ................................................................. 6-72
Gap Adjustment ..................................................................................................... 6-73
Paper Feed Faulty ................................................................................................. 6-73
Horizontal Encoder Strip........................................................................................ 6-73
6.11.6 TEXT SHIFTED OUT OF POSITION ................................................................ 6-74
Obstructed, Faulty Paper Feed ............................................................................. 6-74
6.11.7 INK SCATTER ................................................................................................... 6-75
Gap Adjustment ..................................................................................................... 6-75
Faulty Maintenance Unit, Carriage Unit ................................................................ 6-76
6.11.8 MIXED COLORS ............................................................................................... 6-76
Faulty Maintenance Unit ....................................................................................... 6-77
6.11.9 IMAGE ABRADED, PAPER TORN, INK RUNNING ......................................... 6-77
Gap Adjustment ..................................................................................................... 6-77
Paper Feed Obstruction ........................................................................................ 6-77
Faulty Carriage Unit .............................................................................................. 6-77
6.11.10 COLOR DENSITY TOO LIGHT .................................................................. 6-78
SM xiii D262
Printer Driver Settings ........................................................................................... 6-78
6.11.11 PART OF IMAGE MISSING, TEXT MISALIGNED ..................................... 6-78
Faulty Controller .................................................................................................... 6-78
6.11.12 IMAGE SKEWED ON PAPER .................................................................... 6-79
Obstructed Paper Feed ......................................................................................... 6-79
6.11.13 BOLDED TEXT DOES NOT APPEAR BOLD IN PRINTOUT .................... 6-80
6.12 SCANNING PROBLEMS ...................................................................................... 6-81
6.12.1 FLOW CHART ................................................................................................... 6-81
6.12.2 SCANNING TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................................. 6-82
6.13 JAM CODE TABLES ............................................................................................. 6-86
6.13.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................... 6-86
6.13.2 SCANNER ORIGINAL JAMS ............................................................................ 6-87
6.13.3 PRINTER PAPER JAMS ................................................................................... 6-89
6.14 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ............................................................................. 6-93
6.14.1 SCANNER UNIT................................................................................................ 6-93
6.14.2 MAIN UNIT SENSORS, MOTORS.................................................................... 6-94
6.14.3 ROLL UNITS...................................................................................................... 6-97
6.14.4 INK SUPPLY...................................................................................................... 6-99
6.14.5 CARRIAGE UNIT ............................................................................................6-100
6.14.6 AROUND THE CARRIAGE UNIT ................................................................... 6-103
Maintenance Unit ................................................................................................6-105
6.14.7 BOARDS .........................................................................................................6-107
6.15 FUSES/LEDS/SWITCHES ..................................................................................6-109
6.15.1 SCANNER UNIT..............................................................................................6-109
Operation Panel ..................................................................................................6-109
SIB (Scanner I/F Board) ......................................................................................6-109
LED Status...........................................................................................................6-109
FUSES................................................................................................................. 6-110
6.15.2 MAIN BOARDS (PCB BOX) ............................................................................ 6-111
CONTROLLER BOARD ...................................................................................... 6-111
FUSES................................................................................................................. 6-112
SW1 ..................................................................................................................... 6-112
LED Status........................................................................................................... 6-113
FUSE ................................................................................................................... 6-114
SW1 ..................................................................................................................... 6-114
D262 xiv SM
LED Status........................................................................................................... 6-116
Fuses ................................................................................................................... 6-117
Fuse (100 V) ........................................................................................................ 6-118
Fuse (200V) ......................................................................................................... 6-119
6.15.6 CARRIAGE UNIT ............................................................................................6-120
HRB .....................................................................................................................6-120
7. DETAILED DESCRIPTION .......................................................... 7-1

7.1 OVERVIEW .................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.1 GENERAL OPERATION SEQUENCE ................................................................ 7-1
1 Power ON ............................................................................................................. 7-1
2 Paper Exit and Job End ....................................................................................... 7-2
7.2 SCANNER UNIT ............................................................................................................ 7-3
7.2.1 SCANNER LAYOUT ............................................................................................ 7-3
Side View................................................................................................................. 7-3
Front View ............................................................................................................... 7-5
7.2.2 ORIGINAL WIDTH DETECTION......................................................................... 7-6
7.2.3 SCANNING.......................................................................................................... 7-8
Original Feed, Exit Sequence ................................................................................. 7-8
Auto Image Density Correction ............................................................................... 7-9
Scanning Area ....................................................................................................... 7-10
Scan Magnification Correction .............................................................................. 7-10
7.2.4 ORIGINAL DRIVE MECHANISM ...................................................................... 7-11
Scanning Motor, Rollers ........................................................................................ 7-11
Original Feed Speed.............................................................................................. 7-12
7.2.5 SCANNING MECHANISM ................................................................................ 7-13
CIS Structure ......................................................................................................... 7-13
Printed Image ........................................................................................................ 7-13
7.2.6 LONG ORIGINAL OR SPECIAL ORIGINAL WITH CARRIER SHEET ............ 7-14
7.2.7 RELATED SPS .................................................................................................. 7-15
7.3 IMAGE PROCESSING ................................................................................................ 7-16
7.3.1 FEATURES FOR PRINTING............................................................................. 7-16
7.3.2 IMAGE FLOW .................................................................................................... 7-17
Copy Job Image Data Flow ................................................................................... 7-17
Scan Job Image Data Flow ................................................................................... 7-18
Print Job Image Data Flow .................................................................................... 7-19
7.3.3 COPY MODE IMAGE PROCESSING............................................................... 7-20
7.3.4 PRINT MODE IMAGE PROCESSING .............................................................. 7-21
7.3.5 COPY RESOLUTION: COPY JOBS AND PRINT JOBS .................................. 7-22
SM xv D262
Copy Jobs.............................................................................................................. 7-22
Print Jobs............................................................................................................... 7-23
7.3.6 IMAGE TROUBLESHOOTING.......................................................................... 7-27
7.4 PAPER FEED AND EXIT ............................................................................................. 7-29
7.4.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................... 7-29
7.4.2 ROLL UNIT OPERATION .................................................................................. 7-30
General Operation of Roll Unit .............................................................................. 7-30
Roll Feed Mechanism............................................................................................ 7-31
Initializing the First Paper Roll............................................................................... 7-32
Initializing the Second Paper Roll ......................................................................... 7-36
Roll Rewinding for Removal .................................................................................. 7-36
Roll End ................................................................................................................. 7-39
7.4.3 MAIN UNIT PAPER FEED ................................................................................ 7-40
Registration Roller ................................................................................................. 7-40
Vertical Feed Mechanism ...................................................................................... 7-41
7.4.4 REMAINING PAPER DETECTION ................................................................... 7-43
7.4.5 PAPER TRANSPORT FAN ............................................................................... 7-46
General Operation ................................................................................................. 7-46
Transport Fan Duty Adjustment ............................................................................ 7-47
Normal Paper, Recycled Paper ............................................................................. 7-49
Translucent Paper ................................................................................................. 7-50
7.4.6 FRONT COVER SWITCHES ............................................................................ 7-51
7.4.7 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF PAPER FEED SEQUENCE ............................ 7-52
Paper Feed Layout ................................................................................................ 7-52
Operation Sequence When the First Roll is Set ................................................... 7-53
Operation Sequence When the Second Roll is Set .............................................. 7-54
7.4.8 CUTTING........................................................................................................... 7-56
Manual Cut ............................................................................................................ 7-57
7.4.9 BYPASS FEED .................................................................................................. 7-58
7.4.10 RELATED SPS .................................................................................................. 7-60
7.5 INK SUPPLY ................................................................................................................ 7-61
7.5.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................... 7-61
7.5.2 INK CARTRIDGE .............................................................................................. 7-63
7.5.3 INK SUPPLY MECHANISM .............................................................................. 7-65
7.5.4 CONTROLLING INK SUPPLY TO THE SUB TANKS ....................................... 7-67
The OCFS System ................................................................................................ 7-67
Controlling Ink Supply During Printing .................................................................. 7-69
Air Detection and Air Purging ................................................................................ 7-69
Air Purge Mechanism ............................................................................................ 7-70
D262 xvi SM
After Air Purging .................................................................................................... 7-71
7.5.5 EMERGENCY PRINT........................................................................................ 7-72
Printable Conditions .............................................................................................. 7-72
Printing .................................................................................................................. 7-72
Conditions for Function End .................................................................................. 7-73
Number of Printable sheets ................................................................................... 7-73
Operation of Emergency Print ............................................................................... 7-73
7.6 PRINTING .................................................................................................................... 7-74
7.6.1 PRINTING DRIVE MECHANISM ...................................................................... 7-74
7.6.2 CARRIAGE UNIT .............................................................................................. 7-75
7.6.3 PRINT HEAD UNIT ........................................................................................... 7-78
7.6.4 PRINT HEAD ..................................................................................................... 7-80
7.6.5 DRESS SENSOR .............................................................................................. 7-81
7.6.6 TEMPERATURE MONITORING ....................................................................... 7-83
7.6.7 PRINT HEAD HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT ............................................................. 7-85
Height Adjustment Mechanism.............................................................................. 7-85
Raising and Lowering the Print Heads.................................................................. 7-86
7.6.8 MAINTENANCE UNIT ....................................................................................... 7-87
Overview................................................................................................................ 7-87
Capping/Uncapping ............................................................................................... 7-88
Print Head Cleaning Cycle .................................................................................... 7-90
Manual Print Head Cleaning and Flushing ........................................................... 7-92
Automatic Downtime Cleaning .............................................................................. 7-93
Automatic Mist Cleaning ....................................................................................... 7-95
7.6.9 AUTO-NOZZLE CHECK MODULE ................................................................... 7-96
Overview................................................................................................................ 7-96
Timing for Detection .............................................................................................. 7-97
Detection ............................................................................................................... 7-97
Wiping an Electrode Plate ..................................................................................... 7-98
When Ink Deficiency is Detected ........................................................................ 7-100
Operating Life ......................................................................................................7-101
7.6.10 WASTE INK COLLECTION ............................................................................. 7-102
Ink Collector Tank ................................................................................................7-103
Right Ink Sump ....................................................................................................7-104
Left Ink Sump ......................................................................................................7-105
7.6.11 RELATED SPS ................................................................................................7-106
7.7 PRINT HEAD CLEANING AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................................ 7-108
7.7.1 NOZZLE CHECK PATTERN PRINT ............................................................... 7-108
7.7.2 CLEAN PRINT HEADS ...................................................................................7-109
SM xvii D262
7.7.3 FLUSH PRINT HEADS ................................................................................... 7-110
7.7.4 ADJUST HEAD POSITION ............................................................................. 7-111
Automatic Adjust Head Position .......................................................................... 7-111
Manual Adjust Head Position .............................................................................. 7-112
7.7.5 ADJUST PAPER FEED ................................................................................... 7-113
7.7.6 ADJUST PRINT POSITION ............................................................................ 7-115
7.7.7 PREVENT PAPER ABRASION ....................................................................... 7-116
7.8 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS .................................................................................. 7-118
7.8.1 BOARDS ......................................................................................................... 7-118
Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 7-118
Parts Layout ........................................................................................................ 7-119
7.8.2 SIB (SCANNER I/F BOARD)........................................................................... 7-120
7.8.3 CONTROLLER BOARD ..................................................................................7-121
Electrical Components for the Controller ............................................................ 7-122
7.8.5 HDD .................................................................................................................7-124
7.8.8 OPTION ...........................................................................................................7-126
File Format Converter Type M23 (MLB) ............................................................. 7-126
Color: JPEG.........................................................................................................7-127
7.9 ENERGY SAVE ..........................................................................................................7-128
7.9.1 ENERGY SAVE MODE ...................................................................................7-128
7.9.2 SPECIFICATION .............................................................................................7-129
EU ........................................................................................................................7-129
NA ........................................................................................................................7-130
D262 xviii SM
READ THIS FIRST
Important Safety Notices
Warnings, Cautions, Notes

In this manual, the following important symbols and notations are used.
 A Warning indicates a potentially hazardous situation. Failure to obey a Warning could

result in death or serious injury.
 A Caution indicates a potentially hazardous situation. Failure to obey a Caution could

result in minor or moderate injury or damage to the machine or other property.
 Obey these guidelines to avoid problems such as misfeeds, damage to originals, loss of
valuable data and to prevent damage to the machine.
 This information provides tips and advice about how to best service the machine.
General Safety Instructions

For your safety, please read this manual carefully before you use this product. Keep this manual
handy for future reference.
Safety Information
Always obey the following safety precautions when using this product.
Safety During Operation
In this manual, the following important symbols and notations are used.
[A]: ON
[B]: OFF
[C]: Push ON/Push OFF
[D]: Standby
Switches and Symbols

Where symbols are used on or near switches on machines for Europe and other areas, the
meaning of each symbol conforms with IEC60417.
Safety
Prevention of Physical Injury
1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the machine and peripherals, make sure that the
machine and peripheral power cords are unplugged.
2. The plug should be near the machine and easily accessible.
3. Note that some components of the machine and the paper tray unit are supplied with
electrical voltage even if the main power switch is turned off.
4. Always unplug the power cord from the power source before you move the product. Before
you move the machine, arrange the power cord so it will not fall under the machine.
5. Disconnect all peripheral units (finisher, LCT, etc.) from the mainframe before you move the
machine.
6. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers off or open while the
main switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrified or mechanically driven
components.
7. The machine drives some of its components when it completes the warm-up period. Be
careful to keep hands away from the mechanical and electrical components as the machine
starts operation.
8. The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while the machine is
operating. Be careful to avoid touching those components with your bare hands.
9. To prevent a fire or explosion, keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases, and
aerosols.
10. Do not use flammable sprays or solvent in the vicinity of the machine. Also, avoid placing
these items in the vicinity of the machine. Doing so could result in fire or electric shock.
11. To avoid fire or explosion, never use an organic cleaner near any part that generates heat.
12. Never remove any safety device unless it requires replacement. Always replace safety
devices immediately.
13. Never do any procedure that defeats the function of any safety device.
14. Modification or removal of a safety device (fuse, switch, etc.) could lead to a fire and personal
injury. Always test the operation of the machine to ensure that it is operating normally and
safely after removal and replacement of any safety device.
15. For replacements use only the correct fuses or circuit breakers rated for use with the machine.
Using replacement devices not designed for use with the machine could lead to a fire and
personal injuries.
16. When using a vacuum cleaner around the machine, keep others away from the cleaner,
especially small children.
Observance of Electrical Safety Standards
17. The machine and its peripherals must be installed and maintained by a customer service
representative who has completed the training course on those models with exceptions on
some machines where the installation can be handled by the user.
Safety and Ecological Notes for Disposal

18. Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations.
19. When keeping used lithium batteries in order to dispose of them later, do not put more than
100 batteries per sealed box. Storing larger numbers or not sealing them apart may lead to
chemical reactions and heat build-up.
20. The danger of explosion exists if a battery of this type is incorrectly replaced. Replace only
with the same or an equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Discard used
batteries in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
Safety Instructions for Ink Cartridges

Accidental Exposure To Ink
1. If ink gets on the skin, wash the affected area immediately with soap and cold
running water.
2. If ink gets into the eyes, immediately flush the eyes with cold running water. If there
are signs of irritation or other problems, seek medical attention.
3. If ink is swallowed, drink a strong solution of cold water and table salt to induce
vomiting. Seek medical attention immediately.
4. Ink is difficult to remove from fabric. Work carefully to avoid staining clothing when
perfo
Handling and Storing Ink Cartridges
 Ink is flammable. Never store ink cartridges in a location where they will be exposed to
high temperature or an open flame.
5. Always store ink cartridges out of the reach of children.

6. Always store ink cartridges in a cool, dry location that is not exposed to direct
sunlight.
Ink Cartridge Disposal
7. Attach the caps to empty ink containers for temporary storage to avoid accidental
spillage.
8. Return empty ink cartridges to a local dealer who can accept such items for
collection and recycling or disposal.
9. If the customer decides to dispose of empty ink cartridges, make sure that they are
disposed of in accordance with local laws and regulations.
Symbols and Trademarks
Symbols
Symbol What it means
Bushing
C-ring
Connector
E-ring
FFC (Flexible Film Cable)
Gear
Harness clamp
Hex head screw
Hook (or tab release)
Knob screw (black)
Knob screw (sliver)
Pivot screw
Screw (common screw)
Shoulder screw
Spring x2
Symbol What it means
Standoff
Stud screw
Timing belt
 The notations "SEF" and "LEF" describe how paper is fed from the bypass tray, short edge
first or long edge first.
 "Main Scan" means "horizontal direction", the left to right and right to left movement of the
carriage.
 "Sub Scan" means the "vertical direction", the direction of paper feed.
Trademarks
Adobe is either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United
States and/or other countries.
Firefox is a registered trademark of the Mozilla Foundation.
Google and Chrome are trademarks of Google Inc.
Microsoft, Windows, and Internet Explorer are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Safari is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the United States and other countries.
The SD is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
The proper names of Internet Explorer 8, 9, 10 and 11 are as follows:
 Windows® Internet Explorer® 8
 Windows® Internet Explorer® 9
 Internet Explorer® 10
 Internet Explorer® 11
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of
their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.
PRODUCT INFORMATION
R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY
P ag e Dat e Ad d ed/ Upd at ed/ New
None
Main Machine, Peripherals, Options
1. PRODUCT INFORMATION
Information
Product
1.1 MAIN MACHINE, PERIPHERALS, OPTIONS
1.1.1 MODEL NUMBERS AND NAMES
Model Number Name
D262-17 Ricoh MP CW2201 SP
Gestetner MP CW2201
Savin MP CW2201
Lanier MP CW2201
NRG MP CW2201 SP
1.1.2 CONFIGURATION
SM 1-1 D262
Main Machine, Peripherals, Options
Main Machines and Peripherals
No. Item Machine Code
1 Main Machine and Stand D262
2 Scanning Unit and Stand Standard
3 Roll Unit Standard
4 Exit Stacker Standard
5 Roll Unit RU6550 D3CR (Option)
Other Options
Option No. Slot
Data Overwrite Security Type M19 D3BS SD Card Slot 1
OCR Unit Type M13 D3AC SD Card Slot 1
File Format Converter Type M23 D3CX Board A
IEEE 802.11 a/g/n Interface Unit Type M19 D3BR Board B
NFC Card Reader Type M23 D3DG USB
D262 1-2 SM
Guidance for Those Who Are Familiar with Predecessor Products
1.2 GUIDANCE FOR THOSE WHO ARE FAMILIAR WITH
Information
Product
PREDECESSOR PRODUCTS
1.2.1 COMPARISON TO MP CW2201

The MP CW2201 is a wide-format inkjet printer that incorporates the design of the MP CW2200.
Here is a brief summary of the features of the MP CW2201 and MP CW2200.
MP CW2201 and MP CW2200 Compared
Item MP CW2201 MP CW2200
Output speed (A1 LEF,  3.8 ppm (black-and-white),  3.4 ppm (black-and-white),
high speed mode) 2.0 ppm (color) 1.1 ppm (color)
 5 sheets A1 LEF in 101 s  5 sheets A1 LEF in 109 s
(black-and-white), 175 s (black-and-white), 293 s
(color) (color)
 5 sheets D LEF in 104 s  5 sheets D LEF in 116 s
(black-and-white), 169 s (black-and-white), 318 s
(color) (color)
1st Copy Time  BK: 29sec  BK: 29sec

 FC: 53sec  FC: 84sec
JOB Cancellation Will be improved from MP Limited Support

During Printing CW2200
Manual Cut Will be supported Not Support
Force Print PS Driver, HDI Driver PS Driver
Printer Driver UI Will be improved from MP -

CW2200
Setting Roll Paper Will be improved from MP -

CW2200
Stacker Will be improved from MP -

CW2200
Operation Panel Smart Operation Panel Conventional Panel
Auto-Nozzle Detection Will be supported Not Support
SM 1-3 D262
Overview
1.3 OVERVIEW
1.3.1 NEW FEATURES
Auto Nozzle Check

The auto-nozzle check function detects whether the nozzle drops ink correctly. It checks the
change in electrical charge caused by the ink dropped to the electrode plate at constant intervals.
If ink is not dropped well but the effect is not so severe, the adjacent nozzles drop larger dots for
printing to minimize the effect. If the effect is severe, the nozzles are cleaned automatically.
D262 1-4 SM
Overview
Carriage Unit
Information
Product
MP CW2201
Color print head has two line nozzle for each color and black print head has four line
nozzle.
SM 1-5 D262
Overview
MP CW2200
Color print head has one line nozzle for each color and black print head has four line
nozzle.
Ink Supply Motors

Two ink supply motors are added for color print head addition.
D262 1-6 SM
Overview
Carriage LED Lamp
Information
Product
An LED on the carriage lights during operation to prevent users from opening the front cover by
mistake.
New Bypass Feed

For bypass feed, the user manually feeds a sheet of paper into the front of the machine until the
paper edge contacts the stopper [1].
When the bypass sensor [2] detects the paper, the machine grabs the paper and feeds it through
the machine. On this time, the bypass stopper clutch [3] is ON and then the stopper opens in
coordination with the vertical motor [4].
SM 1-7 D262
Overview
Manual Cut
Manual Cut is to fed and discard paper that is damaged by moisture or paper jam.
Configuration
Scanner harness falls down from center back of scanner unit into the PCB box.
MP CW2200's scanner harness falls down from left back of scanner unit.
D262 1-8 SM
Overview
Locations of Major Electrical Components
Information
Product
MP CW2201
MP CW2200
SM 1-9 D262
Overview
Smart Operation Panel
No. Name No. Name
1 Speaker 12 [Back] key
2 [Login/Logout] key 13 [Check Status] indicator
3 Main power indicator 14 [Check Status] key
Data In indicator (facsimile and printer

4 [Energy Saver] key 15
modes)
5 USB slot for digital cameras 16 Extended Feature key (EX3)
6 HDMI slot 17 Extended Feature key (EX2)
7 USB slot for NFC card readers 18 Extended Feature key (EX1)
8 Microphone 19 Control panel reboot key
9 [Stop] key 20 SD card slot
10 [Menu] key 21 Media access lamp
11 [Home] key 22 USB slot
D262 1-10 SM
Overview
Tilting the operation panel easily

Change the angle freely from 0° to 55° on panel
Information
Product
New smart UI and classic UI are ready
Smart UI Copy
Smart UI Scan
Classic UI
A:Classic UI area is same as MP CW2200's operation panel display.

B:Numeric key area is integrated into touch display.
SM 1-11 D262
Overview
Roll Paper Setting

Roll Paper Setting Position
Roll paper setting position of MP CW2201 changes by 40mm forward and 20mm low
compared to MP CW2200. It can be set the roll paper without having to bend over too much.
New Paper Spool

The levers do not have to be lowered for 2-inch core. The procedure is same for 2-inch core
and 3-inch core paper rolls.
D262 1-12 SM
Overview
1.3.2 ACRONYMS AND IMPORTANT TERMS
Information
Product
Here are some commonly used acronyms and standard terms you should know.
 DRESS. Direct Realization Edge Scanning Sensor. The DRESS sensor is mounted on the left,
lower edge of the carriage unit. It detects skew correction, performs paper registration and
does color registration.
 OCFS. On Carriage Filling Sensor. There are five of these sensors (one for each color)
mounted on the carriage unit. A feeler arm attached to the flexible side of each color tank
swings in and out of the sensor gap as the ink supply in the tank goes low and high. These
sensors are used to monitor the level of the ink in the tanks.
 Sub Scan. This means the vertical direction. It is used in reference to printing, scanning, and
paper feed.
 Main Scan. This means the horizontal direction. It is used in reference to printing, scanning,
and paper feed.
SM 1-13 D262
Overview
1.3.3 AROUND THE MACHINE

Front
1 Original Stacker 6 Paper Exit Guide
2 Operation Panel 7 Auto-Nozzle Check Unit
3 Scanner Unit Cover 8 Paper Holding Lever
4 Original Table 9 Ink Cartridge Cover
5 Front Cover 10 Exit Stacker
D262 1-14 SM
Overview
Original Tray
As each original is scanned, the original guide (1) guides it to the original stacker (2) on top of
Information
Product
the machine.
Scanner Unit Cover

The scanner unit opens easily for removal of paper jams (1), and can be opened to the full
vertical position (2) for servicing (this requires disconnect of the arms on the left and right).
Original Table
The plates on the original table of the scanner unit can be adjusted to accept originals up to
914.4 mm (36 in.) for scanning. Original length is limited to 15 m (49 ft.)
SM 1-15 D262
Overview
Front Cover
The front cover is easily raised and lowered to expose the platen for cleaning and paper jam
removal. The front cover locks in place and remains open after it has been raised. Two
sensors (micro-switches) on either end of the front cover detect when the cover is opened
and closed.
When the pin on the left of the front cover is inserted correctly into its track [A], it slides down
and pushes a micro-switch [B] to the rear. This signals that the front cover is installed correctly.
The open switch signals a cover open error if the front cover is down but not correctly set in
the track.
D262 1-16 SM
Overview
Paper Exit Guide

The paper exit guide guides printed paper from the machine into the exit stacker attached to
Information
Product
the front of the machine.
 Two lock magnets on either end of the guide hold it in place when it is open.
 A micro-switch on the right detects when the guide is opened and closed.
A torque limiter on the right hinge of the paper exit guide acts as a damper to slow the descent
of the guide after it is separated from the lock magnet above. This prevents the guide from
falling abruptly.
Paper Holding Lever

There is no bypass feed tray, but paper can be fed manually for bypass printing.
Raising the paper holding lever [1] lifts the registration rollers [2] so that cut-sheet paper can
be loaded on the right side of the platen. Lowering the lever [3] clamps the paper in place for
paper feed.
SM 1-17 D262
Overview
Ink Cartridge Cover

The ink cartridge cover can be opened and closed for the insertion and removal of the four ink
cartridges. A small sensor (micro-switch) detects when this cover is opened and closed.
Exit Stacker
The exit stacker, attached to the front of the machine, can be adjusted for output: Basket
mode and Stack mode
 Basket Mode. For standard size paper. The exit stacker is shortened so that it is rounded
and deep to hold paper in a small well.
 Stack Mode (for A0 SEF/A1 LEF). The exit stacker is extended to the front until it is flat.
It can hold up to 10 stacked sheets.
 Wire guide mode (for A1 SEF/A2 LEF). Two wire guides can be attached to the rear
rod.
 After configuring the exit stacker for one of these modes, always check the ends of
the rods to confirm that they are set correctly.
D262 1-18 SM
Overview
Easy Installation of Exit Stacker

The exit stacker is assembled as below at shipping from the factory.
Information
Product
Exit stacker installation is easier than MP CW2200.
SM 1-19 D262
Overview
Right Side
The optical cloth holder [1] attached to the right side of the scanner unit holds the accessory
optical cloth [2], which can be used to clean the exposure glass. The scanner stand [3] holds
the scanner unit above the main unit. The ink collector tank cover [4] can be opened and
closed for insertion and removal of the ink collector tank [5].
1 Optical Cloth Holder
2 Optical Cloth
3 Scanner Stand
4 Ink Collector Tank Cover
5 Ink Collector Tank
D262 1-20 SM
Overview
Left Side
The power cord [1], power switch [2], and manual pocket [3] are on the left side of the
Information
Product
machine. There is only one power switch on this machine that can cycle the machine off and
on.
1 Power Cord
2 Power Switch
3 Manual Pocket
SM 1-21 D262
Overview
Back
Four rear output guides [1] can be attached to the back of the machine to hold originals that
exit the back of the machine. The PCB box cover [2] covers the area where the controller
board and all other PCBs are mounted on the back of the machine. Four braided ground
harnesses are connected with screws to the back of the scanner unit and the PCB box cover.
1 Original Output Guides (x4)
2 Rear Cover
D262 1-22 SM
Overview
1.3.4 MAIN SECTIONS
Information
Product
The machine is comprised of five main sections.
[A] Scanner. Five staggered CIS units above the original path scan images from
the original.
 An independent scanner stand supports the scanner. The scanner stand

is docked to the back of the main unit and fastened with four screws to
the base of the main unit.
 Originals fed from the original feed tray exit at the top. If the original
guides are removed, the originals will exit the rear.
 The scanner also holds the operation panel.
SM 1-23 D262
Overview
[B] Paper Feed. The main unit stand supports both the main unit and holds the
paper feed rollers.
 Paper is supplied from one roll unit, provided with the main unit.
 Suction from one fan below the platen holds the paper in position during
feeding and printing.
 One additional roll unit can be installed as an option. Printed sheets from
both rolls exit the machine at the front.
 The stoppers of the paper rolls can be easily adjusted to accommodate
either 2-in. or 3-in. roll cores.
[C] Main Unit. This is the main body of the unit.
 Carriage Unit. The carriage unit holds the print heads and head ink
tanks. The carrier moves horizontally and prints at 64.7 mm/s on one
pass.
 Print heads. The replaceable print heads contain small sub tanks that
can hold 6 cc of ink. There are two K print heads and one head each for
Y1M1, C and Y2M2. The print heads can be replaced on site.
 Main scan unit. Refers to the horizontal motor and horizontal encoder
that move the carriage unit and print heads from left to right during
printing.
 Sub scan unit. Refers to the vertical motor and vertical encoder wheel
and sensors that control operation of the urethane-coated paper feed
roller driven by the vertical motor and controlled by a vertical encoder
wheel.
 Ink supply unit. Ink is supplied through a tube pumping system. The ink
supply pumps are controlled by feedback provided by feeler sensors
attached to the sides of the ink cartridges above the print heads.
 Print head maintenance. The maintenance unit has four head caps and
one cleaning cap. The one cleaning cap (a suction cap) performs head
maintenance for all the heads.
 Waste ink collection. Three receptacles hold waste ink. The ink collector
tank, easily removed from the right side of the main unit. The right ink
sump is located behind the ink collector tank on the right side of the main
unit. The left ink sump is on the left side of the machine.
D262 1-24 SM
Overview
Paper exit and cutter. Each sheet of roll paper is cut as it exits the front of
Information
[D]
Product
the machine.
 A small cutter set on a track and driven by a small motor cuts each sheet
of paper from right to left.
 The paper exits the machine from the front into the stacker.
[E] Exit Stacker. A cloth frame stacker that holds prints as they are output from
the machine.
 The stacker can hold many different sizes of paper. Capacity: 10 sheets.
 The printed sheets are stored in the well of the stacker as each exits the
machine. Or, the stacker frame can be extended to hold each printed
sheet straight after it exits.
1.3.5 MAIN COMPONENTS
SM 1-25 D262
Overview
No. Item
1 Operation panel
2 Scanner unit
3 Carriage unit
4 Air release solenoid
5 Maintenance unit
6 Ink supply unit
7 Roll Unit 1 (Std.)
8 Roll Unit 2 (Option)
9 Exit stacker
10 Main unit stand
11 Scanner stand
D262 1-26 SM
Overview
1.3.6 DRIVE LAYOUT
Information
Product
No. Item
1 Scanner motor
2 Horizontal motor
3 Bypass clutch
4 Vertical motor
5 Maintenance motor
6 Maintenance lift motor
7 Roll paper feed clutch (Roll Unit 1)
SM 1-27 D262
Overview
No. Item
8 Roll paper feed motor (Roll Unit 1)
9 Roll paper feed clutch (Roll Unit 2)
10 Roll paper feed motor (Roll Unit 2)
11 Pre-skew correction clutch 2 (Not-functional)
12 Pre-skew correction clutch 1 (Not-functional)
13 Ink pump motors (seven)
14 Cutter motor
15 Air release solenoid
16 Head lift motor
D262 1-28 SM
Overview
1.3.7 ORIGINAL PATH, PAPER PATHS
Information
Product
No. Item
[A] Original path
1 Original width sensors
2 Original set sensor
3 Original registration sensor
4 Original exit sensor
5 Original exit (top)
6 Original exit (rear)
SM 1-29 D262
Overview
No. Item
[B] Roll paper paths
7 Roll end sensor (Roll Unit 2)
8 Paper entrance sensor (Right, Roll Unit 2)
9 Paper entrance sensor (Center, Roll Unit 2)
10 Exit sensor (Roll Unit 2)
11 Roll end sensor (Roll Unit 1)
12 Paper entrance sensor (Right, Roll Unit 1)
13 Paper entrance sensor (Center, Roll Unit 1)
14 Exit sensor (Roll Unit 1)
15 Pre-registration sensor
16 DRESS sensor
17 Exit sensor
[C] Bypass paper path
18 Bypass sensor
19 Registration standby position
20 Paper standby position (Roll 1)
21 Paper standby position (Roll 2)
D262 1-30 SM
INSTALLATION
None
Preparation
2. INSTALLATION
2.1 PREPARATION
2.1.1 ENVIRONMENT
Installation
The shaded square in the illustration above is the environment recommended for an office.
21. Temperature Range: 10 °C to 27°C (50 °F to 81°F)
22. Humidity Range: 15% to 80% Rh
23. Ambient Illumination: Less than 1,500 Lux.
 Never expose the machine to direct sunlight.

 If the scanning unit on top of the machine is exposed to direct sunlight, this could
cause vertical black and white lines in scanned images.
 If the machine is near a window, turn it around so the back of the machine is not
facing the window and install blinds to block sunlight.
24. Ventilation: More than 30 m3/hr/person in the work area, more than three times per hour.
25. Ambient Dust: Less than 0.075 mg/m3
26. If the installation area has air-conditioners or heaters, put the machine in a location where:
 There are no sudden temperature changes from low to high, or high to low.
 The machine will not be directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner in the
summer.
 The machine will not be directly exposed to reflected heat from a space heater in the
winter.
SM 2-1 D262
Preparation
27. Do not install the machine in an area filled with gases that can cause corrosion.
 Never set up the machine where it will be exposed to ammonia fumes.

 Ammonia in the surrounding area can cause poor reproduction of filled areas in
images.
28. Do not install the machine in areas higher than 2,000 m (6,600 ft) above sea level.
29. Put the machine on a strong and level surface.
 The floor of a residence must be able to support 1800 N/m2 or more.

 The floor of an office must be able to support 2900 N/m2 or more..
30. Do not install the machine in an area where there are frequent strong vibrations.
2.1.2 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS
Side mm m in. ft.
A Front 2,000 2.0 78.8 6.5
B Left 600 0.6 23.6 2.0
C Back 600 0.6 23.6 2,0
D Right 600 0.6 23.6 5
D262 2-2 SM
Preparation
2.1.3 CONFIGURATION
Installation
2.1.4 MACHINE LEVEL
1. Front to back: Not more than 5 mm from level
2. Right to left: Not more than 0.15/1000 mm from level.
2.1.5 POWER SOURCE

1. Input Voltage Level:
 North America: 110-120V 3.6 A or more 60 Hz
 Europe, Asia, China: 220-240V 1.5A or more 50/60 Hz
2. Permissible Voltage Fluctuation: ±10%
3. Do not set objects on the power cord.
 Make sure the plug is firmly inserted in the outlet.

 Do not connect the machine to a power source that is shared with other equipment.
 To prevent damage to the breaker switch, installation of a voltage stabilizer (constant
voltage transformer) is recommended for work sites where there is fluctuation in the AC
power source.
 To protect the HDD, always switch the machine off with the operation switch on the
operation panel, wait for the power switch LED to stop flashing, then switch off the main
switch on the side of the machine.
SM 2-3 D262
Preparation
2.1.6 INSTALLATION OVERVIEW
Installation Flow
Here is a summary of the sequence recommended for installation of all options.
Step Procedure
1 Main Unit Stand
2 Mounting the Main Unit
3 Assembling the Scanner Stand
4 Mounting Scanner Unit
5 Roll Unit 1 (Standard)
6 Roll Unit 2 (Option)
7 Controller Options
8 Connecting Scanner and Main Unit
 Connecting the Harnesses
 Wiring the Scanner Cable
 Clamping the Power Cord
9 Removing Tapes and Shipping Materials
10 Original Stacker, Guides
11 Installing the Original Stacker, Guides
12 Ink Collector Tank Storage Shelf
13 Exit Stacker
14 Ink Filling
15 Set Roll Paper
16 Check Printing
17 Final Adjustments
18 Final Settings
D262 2-4 SM
Preparation
Step Procedure
19 After Installation
Installation
SM 2-5 D262
Main Machine Installation
2.2 MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION
2.2.1 BEFORE YOU BEGIN
 To avoid serious injury or damage to the machine, do not plug the machine into a power
source until you are instructed to do so in these installation procedures.
Accessory Boxes
Box Content
[1]  Scanner Unit
[2]  Main Unit
[3]  Accessories
 Exit Stacker
[4]  Roll Unit 1
[5]  Scanner Stand

 Main Unit Stand
 Hex-bolts for Stands
 Allen Key
D262 2-6 SM
What You Need

Here is a list of tools required for this installation.
 Allen key (2.5 mm)
One is provided but you may need extra keys if two or more people are working on the
installation.
Installation
 Driver 300 cm (12 in.) or longer
 Stubby driver
 Flashlight
 Small scale or ruler
 Adjustable wrench
Accessory List in Box [3]
No. Item Q'ty
- Joint Bracket 2
- Paper Transport Guide Plate (Semi-Transparent) 1
- Stacker Assembly 1
- Lower Rod Guide 2
- Side Pipe 2
- Front Rod 1
- Roll Spool with Stoppers 1
- Optical Cloth 1
- Starter Ink Cartridge K 1
- Starter Ink Cartridge C 1
- Starter Ink Cartridge M 1
- Starter Ink Cartridge Y 1
- Drain Cartridge K 1
- Drain Cartridge C 1
- Drain Cartridge M 1
SM 2-7 D262
No. Item Q'ty
- Drain Cartridge Y 1
- Rear Output Guide 4
- Original Guide 2
- Original Stacker 1
- Ferrite Core for LAN Cable 1
- Power Cord 1
- Optical Cloth Pocket 1
- Manual Pocket 1
- Rivet (Manual Pocket) 2
- Harness Clamp for Roll Unit 1 2
- Harness Clamp for Power Cord 3
- Screws M3x8 for Side Pipe 2
- Screws M4x8 for Stacker 6
- Screws M4x8 for Connecting the Scanner Unit and Main Unit 8
- Screws M3x8 with Spring Washer for Roll Unit 4
- Screws M3x6 for Paper Transport Guide 2
- Screws M3x6 for Scanner Ground harnesses 3
- Ink Collector Tank Storage Shelf 1
- Screw M4x8 for Storage Shelf 2
- Leveling Mount 4
- Brand Plate for Main Unit (NA/EU Only) 1
- Model No. Plate (NA/EU Only) 1
- Brand Plate for Operation Panel (NA/EU Only) 1
- NFC Tag 1
D262 2-8 SM
Accessory List in Box [5]
No. Item Q'ty
- Stay for Main Unit Stand 2
- Left Support for Main Unit Stand 1
Installation
- Right Support for Main Unit Stand 1
- Left Support for Scanner Stand 1
- Right Support for Scanner Stand 1
- Center Stay for Scanner Stand 2
- Hex Socket Bolt M4x8 32
- Lock washer 32
- Allen key 1
SM 2-9 D262
2.2.2 MAIN UNIT STAND
Accessories: Main Unit Stand
No. Item Q'ty
1. Stay 2
2. Left Support 1
3. Right Support 1
4. Hex Socket Bolt*1 8
4. lock washers 8
4. Allen key 1
*1
An Allen key is provided for the hex bolts. One lock washer is provided for each socket bolt.
D262 2-10 SM
Installing the Main Unit Stand
 Be sure to attach one lock washer to each hex socket bolt before you fasten the bolt.
Installation
1. While holding the right support, latch a stay to the rear of the base of the support.
2. Attach the other end of the stay to the rear of the base of the left support so the
supports can stand upright by themselves.
SM 2-11 D262
3. Latch the other stay to the front of the bases of the left and right supports.
4. Push down the front and rear stays to lock them in place.
5. Fasten the front stay [A] and rear stay [B] to the supports ( x4 each). You will need
the Allen key to attach the hex socket bolts.
D262 2-12 SM
2.2.3 MOUNTING THE MAIN UNIT
 Mount the main unit immediately after you have removed the box from the pallet and
opened the box.
 To avoid damage to the bottom of the main unit, do not set the main unit on the floor.
Installation
Parts to be Used
No. Item Q'ty
- Hex Socket Bolt*1 3
- lock washers 3
- Allen key 1
*1
1. Locate the vertical positioning pins at the top of both sides of the main unit stand.
SM 2-13 D262
2. Locate the handles on the right side of the main unit.
3. Locate the handles on the left side of the main unit.
4. With two people holding the left end [A] and right end [B] (their hands positioned as
shown below) lift the main unit and hold it over the top the main unit stand.
D262 2-14 SM
5. Position the main unit over the top of the stand so that the triangle marks at the rear
are aligned ( ).
Installation
6. With the marks aligned ( ), lower the main unit so that the positioning pins on either
end of the stand fit into the holes at the bottom of the main unit frame.
7. Fit each screw with a lock washer.
8. Use an Allen key to fasten the left and right sides of the stand to the bottom of the main
unit with the hex-head screws and lock washers ( x3 hex socket bolt)
SM 2-15 D262
 Make sure that each screw is tightly fastened.
2.2.4 ASSEMBLING THE SCANNER STAND
Accessories: Scanner Stand
No. Item Q'ty
1. Left Support 1
2. Right Support 1
3. Center Stay 2
4. Hex Socket Bolt M4x8*1 16
4. Lock washer 16
4. Allen key 1
*1 For the scanner stand assembly and connection of scanner stand to main unit with these bolts,
you will need an Allen key. One lock washer is provided for each socket bolt.
D262 2-16 SM
Installing the Scanner Stand
Installation
1. Position the left and right supports of the scanner stand as shown below.
2. Set the two center stays between the left and right supports.
3. Make sure that the pattern of clustered cutouts [A] are down.
4. Engage the ends of the stays on the ends of both stays.
5. Insert the ends of each stay to the left and right supports and tighten by hand ( x16
hex socket bolt). (Do not tighten the hex-head bolts until all have been inserted.)
6. After all the bolts have been inserted and slightly tightened, use the Allen key to
SM 2-17 D262
tighten all the bolts. ( x16)
7. Set the assembled stand upright.
D262 2-18 SM
2.2.5 MOUNTING THE SCANNER UNIT
 Mount the main unit immediately after you have removed the box from the pallet and
opened the box.
 Do not grip the scanner unit by the front end. The front end is made of plastic only and
Installation
break easily.
Parts to be Used
No. Item Q'ty
- Hex Socket Bolt*1 4
- Lock washers 4
- Allen key 1
*1
SM 2-19 D262
1. Locate the vertical positioning pins at the top of both sides of the assembled scanner
stand.
2. Remove the orange tape [A], [B] from both ends of the scanner unit.
3. Arrange the harness [C] in front as shown below.
4. With two people holding both ends of the scanner unit (with their hands positioned as
shown below [A] to [D]), set the scanner unit [E] on top of the scanner stand.
5. Align the cut-outs in the frame of the scanner unit with the positioning pins on either
D262 2-20 SM
end of the scanner stand.
Installation
6. Set the scanner unit on the positioning pins, then fasten the unit to the stand ( x4
hex socket bolt).
SM 2-21 D262
2.2.6 ROLL UNIT 1 (STANDARD)
Accessories: Roll Unit 1
No. Item Q'ty
1. Roll Spool with Stoppers 1
2. Paper Transport Guide Plate (Semi-Transparent) 1
3. Roll Unit 1 1
- Screw M3x8 with Spring Washer (for Roll Unit) 4
- Screw M3x6 (for Paper Transport Guide) 2
- Clamp 2
D262 2-22 SM
Installing Roll Unit 1

1. Raise the paper exit guide [A].
Installation
2. Locate the positioning pins on the left [A] and right [B] ends of the roll unit.
3. Locate the cut-outs in the left and right supports of the main unit stand.
4. To install the roll unit 1, place the harness backward.
SM 2-23 D262
 If the roll unit 1 is installed with the harness placing the front side, the harness cannot
be arranged to the backward.
5. While holding the unit with both hands:

 Set the positioning pins on the left and right ends of the roll unit into the cut-outs in the
supports
 Push the roll unit in.
 Slide it slightly to the right to lock the unit in place.
6. Behind the stand on both sides, make sure that the holes of the roll unit and the stand
frame are aligned.
D262 2-24 SM
7. Insert the tip of a long screwdriver (30 cm: 12 in.) through each pair of holes to make
sure that they are aligned.
Installation
8. Pull the harness over the top of the roll unit to the rear.
9. Fasten the roll unit to the stand ( x4 M3x8 with washer). (Be sure to use the screws
with the washers attached.)
 There are two pegs on each end of the paper transport guide.
10. While holding the paper transport guide with both hands as shown below, insert the
pegs on either end of the guide into the cut-outs in the stand on the left [A] and right
[B]. The guide should slide into position and fit tightly after correct alignment.
SM 2-25 D262
 Make sure that the pegs are tight in the cut-outs: [A] (black) on the left, and [B]
(white) on the right.
11. Fasten the guide to the frame on the right [C] and left [D] ( x2 M3x6).
12. Use a thin edge (like the end of a metal scale) to push the tongues of the guide film
sheet up and behind the plate. There are six film sheet tongues.
D262 2-26 SM
 Paper will not feed from the roll correctly if these film sheets are not pushed behind
the plate.
Installation
13. Attach the clamps, route the harness, and then close the clamps ( x2).
Wiring Roll Unit 1

Connect Roll Unit 1 to the machine. The figure below shows the wiring example.
[A] IOB CN254
[B] Harness bracket of Roll Unit 1
SM 2-27 D262
1. Remove screws on the left cover of the rear of the machine ( x3).
2. Remove the screws circled in red ( x3).

3. Loosen (do not remove) the screws indicated by the red arrows ( x10).
4. Slide the cover to the right and remove it.
D262 2-28 SM
5. Attach the harness bracket [A] ( x2 M3x6).
Installation
6. Connect the connector of the harness of Roll Unit 1 to IOB [A], and then clamp it ( x2,
x1).
7. Check that the clamps beneath the machine are closed and the harness is connected
securely.
 The harnesses must be flat against the bottom of the PCB box to prevent them from
interfering with paper in the bypass feed path.
 During bypass feed, the trailing edge of the paper will come out from the back of the
machine, and then reverse feed back into the machine.
SM 2-29 D262
2.2.7 ROLL UNIT 2 (OPTION)

One additional roll unit can be installed: Roll Unit RU6520
Attach Roll Unit 2 after attaching Roll Unit 1.
Accessories
No. Item Q'ty
1 Roll Unit 2 1
2 Roll Spool with Stoppers 1
3 Paper Transport Guide Plate 1
4 Harness 1
5 Screw M3x10 with Spring Washer 4
6 Screw M3x6 4
7 RFDB 1
8 Clamp 3
 Remove the protection sheet [A] from the paper transport guide plate.
D262 2-30 SM
Installing Roll Unit 2

1. Unpack the roll unit. Locate the positioning pins on the left [A] and right [B] ends.
Installation
2. Locate the cut-outs in the left and right supports of the main unit stand.
SM 2-31 D262
3. To install the roll unit 2, place the harness backward.
 If the roll unit 2 is installed with the harness placing the front side, the harness cannot
be arranged to the backward.
4. While holding the unit with both hands:

 Set the positioning pins on the left and right end of the roll unit into the cut-outs in the
supports
 Push the roll unit in.
 Slide it slightly to the right to lock the unit in place.
5. Insert a long screwdriver (30 cm: 12 in.) into each pair of holes to make sure that they
are aligned.
D262 2-32 SM
6. Fasten the roll unit to the stand ( x4 M3x8 with washer). Be sure to use the screws
with the washers attached.
Installation
7. Attach the harness clamps and then close the clamps around the harness ( x2).
8. Fasten the harness with the same clamps as for Roll Unit 1.
SM 2-33 D262
Wiring Roll Unit 2

Connect Roll Unit 2 to the machine. The figure below shows the wiring example.
[A] IOB CN254
[B] Harness bracket of Roll Unit 1
[C] Harness bracket of Roll Unit 2
[D] RFDB CN301
[E] RFDB CN300
[F] IOB CN255
1. Remove the screws on the left cover of the rear of the machine ( x3).
D262 2-34 SM
3. Loosen (do not remove) the screws indicated by the arrows ( x10).
Installation
5. Attach the RFBD ( x2, x2).
6. Remove the harness bracket [A] ( x2).
SM 2-35 D262
 Keep the removed screws. They are to be used in the next step.
 The removed harness will not be used anymore.
7. Attach the harness bracket of Roll Unit 2 [A] with the screws removed in the previous
step ( x2).
D262 2-36 SM
8. Connect the connector of the harness of Roll Unit 2 to RFDB [A] ( x1).
Installation
9. Connect the connectors of the harness to RFDB [A] and IOB [B].
SM 2-37 D262
10. Clamp the harness connected in Step 8 and Step 9.

Wiring of Roll Unit 2 is completed.
11. Behind the machine, hold the guide plate as shown below, and then set the cut-outs on
the left and right over the pegs.
12. Lift the guide slightly, and then insert the bottom pegs into the cut-outs at the lower left
and lower right corners.
13. Check the top of the plate and make sure that it is parallel with the edge of the
machine.
D262 2-38 SM
14. Check each corner of the plate to be sure that each peg is tight in its cut-out.
Installation
15. Fasten the plate (tapping x2 - M3x6).
16. Make sure that the clamps are closed and that there is absolutely no slack in the
harnesses.
 The harnesses must be flat against the bottom of the PCB box to prevent them from
interfering with paper in the bypass feed path.
 During bypass feed, the trailing edge of the paper will come out from the back of the
machine, and then reverse feed back into the machine.
SM 2-39 D262
2.2.8 CONTROLLER OPTIONS

If you intend to install one or more of the following options which require the installation of boards,
do so before you re-attach the rear cover.
 File Format Converter (MLB)
 IEEE 802.11 a/g/n Interface Unit
2.2.9 CONNECTING THE SCANNER AND MAIN UNIT

Connect the scanner unit and main unit with the scanner cable and fix them with the joint
brackets.
Parts to be Used
No. Item Q'ty
- Joint Bracket 2
- Harness Clamp 3
- Power Cord 1
- Tapping Screw M4x8 8
Connecting the Harnesses

1. At the rear, attach a joint bracket to each side [A] [B] of the stand ( x4 M4x8).
2. Bring the scanner unit and main unit close together.
 Dock the left side of the scanner unit to the back of the main unit.
D262 2-40 SM
 Lower the four bolts on the main-unit stand so that the stand does not touch the
scanner unit.
Installation
3. Fasten the scanner stand to the main-unit bracket on the left [A] and right [B] ( x4
M4x8).
Connected Machine
Rear:
Front:
SM 2-41 D262
Wiring the Scanner Cable

Connect the scanner cable of the scanner unit to the machine. The figure below shows the wiring
example.
[A] IOB CN258
[B] IOB CN259
[C] IOB CN256
[D] IOB CN257
[E] BICU CN216
[F] BICU CN215
[G] Ground Clamp
D262 2-42 SM
1. Place the scanner unit [A] and main unit [B] as shown below.
 The scanner unit is top heavy and unstable. It can fall over easily. Grip the supports
below the scanner unit and push it slowly when you move it.
Installation
2. Clamp the scanner cable to the machine.
SM 2-43 D262
3. Remove the ground plate ( x1 - M3x8).
4. Connect the connectors of the scanner cable [A], [B], [C], and [D] to the IOB.
5. Connect the USB cable [F] and connector [E] to BiCU.
D262 2-44 SM
6. Attach the ground clamp to the shielded cable [A] and fasten it to the machine with the
screw ( x1 - M3x8).
Installation
7. When wiring ends, clamp the scanner cable ( x5).
8. Slide the cover onto the back to re-attach the cover. Make sure all the attached screws
are tight in their cut-outs.
9. Re-attach the removed screws circled in red ( x3).
SM 2-45 D262
10. Tighten the screws indicated by the arrows ( x10).
11. Fasten the removed screws on the left of the machine ( x3).
Clamping the Power Cord

1. Make sure that the power cord is not connected to the power source.
D262 2-46 SM
2. Attach the medium-size clamp, connect the power cord [A], and then close the clamp
( x3).
 Do not connect the power cable to the power source at this time.
Installation
3. Remove the filament tape.
SM 2-47 D262
4. Connect the ground harnesses of the scanner unit to the back of the machine ( x3
M3x6).
 Be sure to connect the ground harnesses securely. Otherwise the normal image may
not be obtained on copying or scanning.
2.2.10 REMOVING TAPES AND SHIPPING MATERIALS

1. Open the scanner unit and remove the vinyl and filament tape.
2. Remove all the external tape and other materials attached to the machine.
3. Lift the front cover, and remove the filament tape.
D262 2-48 SM
4. Fold the bottom of the cover into the machine so that it locks and remains open.
Installation
5. Remove the tape and other materials attached to the inside of the machine. Remove
the tape [A], tape [B], film sheet [C], tape [D], and GAP protective material [E] in this
order.
 When removing the tapes, never touch the horizontal encoder sheet.
 Never pull out the red tag. If it is pulled out forcibly, the carriage left cover is removed
that causes the damage to the carriage unit.
Remove the tape [A] with protective material [B] for ink tubes.
SM 2-49 D262
6. Close the front cover. Push it in and make sure that it locks.
2.2.11 ORIGINAL STACKER, GUIDES
Installing the Original Stacker, Guides

1. Insert the hooks on the bottom of the original stacker [A] into the holes.
2. Push down the four tabs [B] to attach.
3. Attach the original guides [A] to the back of the stacker.
4. Attach the four rear guides [A].
 There are six connection slots for the guides. However, attach the guides to the inner
four points (leave both outer slots empty).
5. Use the rivets to attach the manual pocket [A] to the right side of the main unit stand
( x2).
D262 2-50 SM
 To set a rivet, align the rivet with its hole, and then push it in.
Installation
6. Attach the optical cloth pocket at the location shown below.
 First, dampen a clean cloth with a small amount of water or alcohol, and then wipe the
surface where the optical cloth pocket will be attached.
 Remove the tape from the back of the pocket, and then attach it as shown below.
7. Place the optical cloth in the pocket.
SM 2-51 D262
2.2.12 INK COLLECTOR TANK STORAGE SHELF
Installing the Ink Collector Tank Storage Shelf

The ink collector tank storage shelf [A] is attached to the bottom stay [B] of the scanner stand [B].
1. Fasten the shelf [A] to the stay ( x2 M4x8).

2. Set the extra ink collector tank [B] on the shelf.
 When the ink collector tank becomes full, the machine will stop.
 The operator can remove the full tank and replace it with the empty tank.
 At the next PM visit, the service technician can swap the full tank with another empty tank
(a service part, not a consumable).
D262 2-52 SM
2.2.13 EXIT STACKER
Accessories: Exit Stacker
Installation
No. Item Q'ty
1 Stacker Assembly 1
2 Guide: Rod: Lower (Guide Rod) 2
3 Pipe: Stacker: Side: Front 2
4 Rod: Stacker: Middle: Assembly 1
- Tapping Hexagonal Screws: 3x8 2
- Tapping Hexagonal Screws: 4x8 6
SM 2-53 D262
Installing the Exit Stacker
 To fasten the screws of the exit stacker, a stubby is necessary.

2. If the bolt is protruding from the main unit stand, turn it clockwise until flush.
3. Attach the guide rod to the right foot of the main unit stand. ( x1 M4x8)
D262 2-54 SM
4. Attach the guide rod to the left foot of the main unit stand. ( x1 M4x8)
Installation
5. Attach the paper exit stacker [A] to the feet of the main unit stand. ( x4 M4x8)
SM 2-55 D262
6. Pass the side pipes through the sliders on both sides of the stacker then attach them
to the connector block. ( x2 M3x8)
 Be sure to insert the pipe fully into the connector block. Otherwise other parts cannot
be attached.
D262 2-56 SM
7. Attach the rods [A] and [B] to the slots of the guide rods, as shown below.
Installation
8. Pass the middle rod [A] rear of the sheet and insert it into the left and right holes.
SM 2-57 D262
Attached Paper Exit Stacker
Changing the mode of the Paper Exit Stacker

The mode of the paper exit stacker can changed according to the purpose.
 Standard Mode
For normal printing
 A1T/A2Y Stack Mode
Used for exiting of A1T/A2Y plain paper.
 A0T/A1Y Stack Mode
Used for exiting of A0T/A2Y plain paper.
For making settings for each mode, refer to user guide.
2.2.14 INK FILLING

Before a machine leaves the factory, the ink supply tubes, sub tanks, and print heads are filled
with priming fluid. This fluid prevents the seams of the joints and connections of the ink supply
system from drying out during shipping and storage.
 The priming fluid must be drained completely from the ink supply tubes, ink tanks, and print
heads at installation before they are filled with ink.
 Special cartridges, the same shape as ink cartridges, are loaded into the ink supply unit. The
ink pumps rotate in reverse to draw the priming fluid out of the print head units and ink supply
tubes.
 Never turn the power OFF or try to use the operation panel during the following
procedure.
 Do not touch the machine while it is draining.
D262 2-58 SM
Draining and Filling Procedure

1. Remove the drain cartridges [1] and starter ink cartridges [2] from their packing
material.
Installation
2. Insert the power cord into a power source.
3. Open the ink cartridge cover.
4. Load the primer fluid drain cartridges into the ink supply unit, and then close the
cover.
 Load the cartridge securely until the lever clicks. Otherwise the fluid may spill inside
the machine.
5. Turn the power ON.

6. Wait for the machine to beep twice.
7. Enter the SP mode and select SP2-012-001 (Initial Operation Setting). Make sure that it
is set to "9".
SM 2-59 D262
 SP2-012-001
 This SP code is used to modify the initial ink filling sequence at installation and after
one
 or more print heads have been replaced. Every time the machine is turned on, the
machine checks the ink level in each sub tank. If ink is low, then the machine
switches on
 the ink pump motor(s) to fill the tank(s).
8. Next, set SP2-100-004 (Special Maintenance: Extract Filling Liquid) to "31" and then
touch [#] and [EXECUTE].
 SP2-100-004
 Press [EXECUTE] to drain the primer fluid from the print heads, print head sub tanks,
and
 ink supply tubing. This is done at installation before the ink cartridges are installed.
 Special cartridges are provided to hold the drained fluid.
 This SP is used only at installation before the print heads are filled with ink.
 The ink pumps start operating in reverse to draw the fluid out of the print head units and
the tubes.
 Draining the fluid requires about 7 min. and 48 sec.
The procedure is finished when a message tells you the procedure has completed. The
machine disables the cartridges so that they can no longer be used.
 To check for completion of an operation with SP, specify SP2-030-001 (Extract Filling
Liq Prog Mng: Completed State Flag). If the operation is completed, "00011111" will
be displayed for that SP.
 If the draining operation does not start, go to the next section below for more about
an alternative procedure.
9. Turn the power OFF.
10. Remove the primer fluid drain cartridges and replace them with the starter ink
cartridges.
D262 2-60 SM
 Load the cartridge securely until the lever clicks. Otherwise the fluid may spill inside
the machine.
Installation
11. Close the cartridge cover.
 The ink filling sequence will start automatically.
 The ink filling requires about 13 min and 42 sec.
 After filling, the machine may display the pre-near end alert for one or more of the color
ink cartridges. This is normal.
 If you do not see a message that tells you filling has started, cycle the power OFF/ON
and try again.
13. After the procedure is completed, open SP2-012-001 (Initial Operation Setting) and
confirm that it displays "0".
 SP2-012-001
one or more print heads have been replaced. Every time the machine is turned on,
the machine checks the ink level in each sub tank. If ink is low, then the machine
switches on the ink pump motor(s) to fill the tank(s).
 This SP should always be set to "0" unless there are specific instructions that it
should be reset temporarily.
14. Discard the filled primer fluid drain cartridges.
 Obey the local laws and regulations regarding the disposal of items such as the
primer fluid drain cartridges.
SM 2-61 D262
If Draining Fails to Start

If one or more of the ID chips on the drain cartridges is damaged, the operation may not start.
Even if you set SP2-100-004 (Special Maintenance: Extract Filling Liquid) to "31", the fluid will not
drain from the tubes, ink sub tanks, and print heads.
 SP2-100-004
 Press [EXECUTE] to drain the primer fluid from the print heads, print head sub tanks, and
ink supply tubing. This is done at installation before the ink cartridges are installed.
 Special cartridges are provided to hold the drained fluid.
 This SP is used only at installation before the print heads are filled with ink.
1. Open SP2-012-001 (Initial Operation Setting) and set it to "3".
 SP2-012-001
one or more print heads have been replaced. Every time the machine is turned on,
the machine checks the ink level in each sub tank. If ink is low, then the machine
switches on the ink pump motor(s) to fill the tank(s).
 This SP should always be set to "0" unless there are specific instructions that it
should be reset temporarily.
3. Remove the drain cartridges, and then replace them with the ink starter cartridges.
4. Close the ink cartridge cover.
 Ink filling starts.
 The ink and primer fluid drain from the tubes, ink sub tanks and the print heads into the
ink collector tank.
6. After the operation is completed, flush all the print heads three times. ([User Tools>
Maintenance> Flush Print Heads> Select all]).
 At the end of filling and draining of ink and fluid into the ink collector tank,
SP2-012-001 resets automatically to "0"
D262 2-62 SM
2.2.15 SETTING ROLL PAPER
 Roll paper can be set to Roll Unit 1 and Roll Unit 2. Setting method is the same for both
units. This section describes the method to set the paper to Roll Unit 1.
 Roll paper cannot be set to Roll Unit 1 and Roll Unit 2 simultaneously.
Installation
 To set the paper spool to the roll paper, put the roll paper on the flat surface and set the
paper spool.
 To set the paper spool to the roll paper, avoid to apply strong power to the roll paper by
falling down the roll paper or inserting the paper spool forcibly.
Setting the Paper Spool to Roll Paper

1. Raise the lock lever [B] of the left flange [A] to release the lock and remove the flange
from the spool [C].
2. Remove both the right flange and spool from the paper roll.
3. Insert a spooling flange to touch the paper roll from the right of it.
SM 2-63 D262
 When loading the paper roll to the paper spool and machine, make sure that the
edge of the paper feeds from top of the roll toward the front.
4. Insert the spool into the left flange.

5. Lower the lock lever of the left flange to lock the flange.
D262 2-64 SM
Setting the Paper Roll to the Machine
 Be sure to turn the power ON.

 Make sure that the output basket is set to standard mode before setting.
1. Lift up the paper input location cover [A] until it clicks.
Installation
2. Remove bar [A], and then hook it in front of the output basket.
3. If the roll unit 2 is attached, pull down the exit stacker rod [A] attached to the front of
the roll unit 2 toward you.
SM 2-65 D262
4. Hold both flanges and place the paper roll on the paper input location.
 Be sure to place the spool so that its right edge is covered by the black shutter.
5. Hold the paper roll beneath and feed the paper edge into the guides behind the paper
roll.
When set correctly, the paper is pulled into the machine and the beeper sounds.
6. Return the bar [B] of the output basket.
Push bar [A] into the machine, and then lift bar up and hook it.
7. Lower the paper input location cover [A].
D262 2-66 SM
8. Select whether or not to cut off the edge of the paper roll on the screen.
 Select [Cut] when the edge of the paper is cut manually, such as with scissors, or the
paper is danp.
9. Follow the on-screen instructions to specify the paper type and thickness of the paper
roll.
Installation
Touch [Matches] if the paper type and thickness of paper roll you loaded are the same as
those displayed on the screen.
If the paper type and thickness are different from those displayed, touch [Does not Match].
Select the proper items according to the paper type and thickness you want to use, and then
touch [OK].
10. Make sure that the size of paper roll you loaded is displayed correctly on the screen.
 When [Film (Matte)] is specified for Paper Type or when Prevent Paper Abrasion is
specified, touch [Exit] on the screen after lowering the paper input location cover. You can
change the Prevent Paper Abrasion setting in System Settings if necessary. However, if
you specify [Film (Matte)] for Paper Type, the Prevent Paper Abrasion setting is
automatically selected, and you cannot change it. For details about Prevent Paper
Abrasion, refer to the user guide.
 When the settings in step 9 are finished, the machine pulls the paper inside, and paper is
output about one meter (40 inches) from the paper output location. Then the machine
rewinds the paper to the prescribed position. Do not touch the output paper until the
machine stops moving. If you select [Cut] in step 8, the edge of the paper is cut off.
 If you insert a roll of paper into the machine at an angle or if there is space between the
paper and the flanges, the paper may not be pulled into the inside of the machine. If that
happens, return to step 1 and start again.
 When you load two paper rolls into Paper Input Locations 1 and 2 in succession, make
sure that the paper size you loaded first is displayed on the screen correctly, and then
load the other paper roll into the other paper input location.
 When the [Notification Sound] is set to [No Sound], it will not sound if you insert paper
into the paper input location. For details about [Notification Sound], refer to the user
guide.
 You can specify the types of paper you load in the paper input location in advance. For
details, refer to the user guide.
 For details about the settings for the paper thickness and types, refer to the user guide.
 For details about how to store the paper roll, refer to the user guide.
SM 2-67 D262
2.2.16 CONNECTING TO THE GIGABIT ETHERNET INTERFACE

This section describes how to connect an Ethernet interface cable to the Gigabit Ethernet port.
If you use an Ethernet interface cable that supports 1000BASE-T, set [Ethernet Speed] to [Auto
Select: Enable 1Gbps] in [Interface Settings] in [System Settings].
 Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used for connections to
a host computer (and/or peripheral) in order to meet emission limits.
 If the main power switch is on, turn it off.

 Use the following Ethernet cables.
 When using 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T:
Unshielded Twisted Pair Cable (UTP) or Shielded Twisted Pair Cable (STP) and
Category type 5 or more
 When using 1000BASE-T:
Unshielded Twisted Pair Cable (UTP) or Shielded Twisted Pair Cable (STP) and
Category type 5e or more
1. Make loops 3 cm (1.2 inch) [A] from the end of each Ethernet cable and attach included
ferrite cores to each loop as shown.
2. Make sure the main power switch is turned off.

3. Connect the Ethernet interface cable to the Gigabit Ethernet port.
D262 2-68 SM
4. Connect the other end of the Ethernet interface cable to a network connection device
such as a hub.
5. Turn on the main power switch of the machine.
Installation
1. Indicator (green)
When 10BASE-T is operating, the LED is lit green.
2. Indicator (orange)
When 100BASE-TX is operating, the LED is lit orange.
3. Indicators (both orange and green)
When 1000BASE-T is operating, both LEDs are lit.
 The Gigabit Ethernet interface LED is not lit during power saving.
SM 2-69 D262
2.2.17 CHECK PRINTING
Nozzle Check Pattern

1. Touch [Home] at the bottom of the screen in the center.
2. Flick the screen to the left, and then touch the User Tools icon.
3. Touch [Machine Features].
4. Touch [Maintenance].
5. Touch [Print Nozzle Check Pattern].
6. Select the paper feed location and touch [OK].
7. Follow the prompts to start printing the pattern.

8. Use a loupe or magnifying glass to check the condition of the pattern.
 If the pattern shows no broken lines, the machine is ready for operation.
 If any of the lines are broken, identify the patterns where the broken lines exist, and then
clean the print heads. (See below.)
9. Touch [Clean Print-heads]

10. Select the print head(s) to clean then touch [Start], and then follow the prompts to
complete the cleaning.
D262 2-70 SM
11. Print another Nozzle Check Pattern, and then check the results.
 If the patterns have no broken lines, the procedure is completed.
 If there are still broken lines in one or more of the patterns, clean the print heads again,
and then print another Nozzle Check Pattern.
 If lines still exist after the third cleaning and Nozzle Check Pattern printing, touch [Exit],
and then flush the print heads.
Installation
 Flushing the print heads consumes a large amount of ink.
 Never execute print head flushing until you have executed print head cleaning at
least 3 times.
12. Touch [Flush Print-heads].
13. Follow the prompts to complete print head flushing.
14. Print another Nozzle Check Pattern.
 If the patterns have no broken lines, you have finished.
 If there are still broken lines in the patterns, go to the next section.
When an Unbroken Nozzle Check Pattern Cannot be Produced

Do this procedure if three cleanings and one flushing have failed to produce an unbroken Nozzle
Check Pattern.
1. Make sure that the ambient temperature and humidity are within the acceptable range:
 Temperature Range: 10°C to 27°C (50 °F to 81°F)
 Humidity Range: 15% to 80% Rh
2. Clean the print heads again, and then print another Nozzle Check Pattern.
3. If the Nozzle Check Pattern is still abnormal, let the machine remain idle for 10
minutes.
4. Execute two more cleanings and one flushing.
 Be sure to print a Nozzle Check Pattern after each cleaning and flushing.
 If you have produced an unbroken Nozzle Check Pattern, you can stop.
5. After the flushing, if the Nozzle Check Pattern is still not perfect, let the machine
remain idle for 8 hours.
6. Execute three more cleanings and one flushing.
 Be sure to print a Nozzle Check Pattern after each cleaning and the flushing.
 When you have produced an unbroken Nozzle Check Pattern, you can stop.
SM 2-71 D262
Halftone Check
Leftover priming fluid can cause streaking in halftone areas. Do this check to confirm that all of the
primer fluid has been drained from the ink sub tanks and ink supply tubes.
4. Touch [Maintenance] > [Printer Features].
5. On the Printer Features screen, under the List/Test Prints tab, touch [Color Sample].
The color sample prints about 240 palette samples. This is a very large sample and may
require a minute or so to finish printing.
6. Check several of the sample blocks.
 The left side [A] shows a normal, half-tone pattern with no streaks.
 If the primer fluid did not drain completely, this can cause light streaks to appear in
half-tone areas [B].
7. If you detect any streaking, flush the print head of the color where you see the
problem.
 Touch User Tools icon on the operation panel.
 Touch [Maintenance] > [Flush Print-heads]
 When the message tells you flushing is completed, repeat the procedure.
 Flush the print heads three times.
D262 2-72 SM
2.2.18 FINAL ADJUSTMENTS
Caster Lock
Lower the caster locks on the left and right front casters to keep the machine from moving.
Installation
Level Adjustment
Adjust the level of the machine if it is on an uneven surface.
1. Place a leveling mount under the bolt at each corner of the machine.
2. Turn each bolt to lower it onto the leveling mount until it is tight.
3. Open the front cover.
SM 2-73 D262
4. Place a leveling instrument on the cross-piece in front of the platen.
5. Use a wrench to adjust the height of each bolt to level the machine.
 Make sure that the machine angle is not more than 0.15/1000 mm from level.
D262 2-74 SM
Manual Adjust Head Position

Installation
5. Touch [Manual Adjust Print Head Position].
6. Select the target location and resolution, and then touch [Start Printing].
Target Location (Paper Source)
Paper Bypass Location Bypass paper feed
Paper Input Location 1 Roll Unit 1
Print Quality
Speed Priority Draft (pattern A - G)
Stan. / Speed Priority (Drawg.) Standard quality (pattern A - J)
Quality Priority High quality (pattern A - J)
SM 2-75 D262
7. Check the test pattern.
To determine the adjustment value:

 Identify the number of the column where the square is faintest, or select the square
where the internal lines overlap to form a solid color.
 The number above the square is the adjustment value.
 If you cannot determine the adjustment value, select the square that is between the
straightest vertical lines.
 Write down these values (A4, B2, etc.) for use later in the procedure.
8. When printing is completed, touch [Adjustment].
9. Enter the values for each row. (touch the plus or minus button; the numbers will
appear automatically.)
10. Print another test pattern.
11. Make sure that the numbers you entered correspond to the results in the new test
pattern.
D262 2-76 SM
Adjust Paper Feed

Adjust paper feed if you see these problems in the prints:
 Broken horizontal lines
 Patchy images (uneven filled areas)
 White lines at regular intervals
Installation
5. Touch [Adjust Paper Feed].
6. Select [Print Test Pattern] for the paper feed source.
7. When you are prompted, touch [Start Printing].

8. The adjustment value appears to the left of the lightest gray square with straight
horizontal lines on both sides.
9. Touch [Adjustment].
SM 2-77 D262
10. Enter the adjustment values, and then touch [OK].

 Touch [ ] and [ ] to enter the adjustment value of "Top Margin".
 Touch [ ] and [ ] to enter the adjustment value of "Left Margin".
Adjust Print Position

This procedure checks and allows you to adjust the print start position at the upper left corner of
each sheet.
5. Touch [Adjust Print Position].
6. Select [Print Test Sheet] for the paper feed source.
7. When you are prompted, touch [Start Printing].

8. The black arrow indicates the direction of paper feed.
9. Rotate the test sheet 180 degrees. [A] is the top margin and [B] is the left margin.
D262 2-78 SM
Installation
10. Touch the arrow keys to adjust the margins.
 Increasing the value for the top and left margin moves the print position down and to
the right. You will see the blue square move as you change the settings, so you can
confirm the effect of the changes.
2.2.19 FINAL SETTINGS

Check and adjust the date and time settings: User Tool > System Settings > Timer Settings > Set
Date, Set Time.
2.2.20 AFTER INSTALLATION

Do these tasks after installation is completed.
1. Perform the SMC List Card Save (SP Text Mode) function to save the SMC list as CSV files to
the SD-card inserted into the operation panel SD-card slot. (p.5-46)
2. Upload the NVRAM contents to an SD card.
 Insert an SD card into SD card Slot 2 of the machine.
 Do SP5-824 (NVRAM Data Upload) to upload the contents of the NVRAM to the SD card.
 Keep the SD card is a safe place.
 SP5-824
 Touch [EXECUTE] to upload the UP and SP mode data (except for counters and the
serial number) from NVRAM on the control board to an SD card.
 Note: While using this SP mode, always keep the front cover open. This prevents a
software module accessing the NVRAM during the upload.
SM 2-79 D262
2.2.21 MOVING THE MACHINE
 The scanner stand and scanner unit assembly is extremely top heavy and can tip over
easily. Never attempt to move the machine with the scanner stand detached from the
main unit.
Observe the following precautions when moving the machine to another location in the same
room or in the same building:
 Two people are required to push and move the machine to a new location.
 To prevent ink spillage, never tilt the machine. A new machine with no ink in it can be tilted 70°
from the horizontal to load it onto a truck or into an elevator. However, a used machine with
ink in it should never be tilted more than 45° from the horizontal.
 Make sure that the four screws that connect the scanner stand to the main unit stand are
attached and securely fastened.
 Make sure that the four casters of the main unit stand and scanner stand are unlocked before
you try to move the machine.
 It is not necessary to remove the ink cartridges.
 Position your hands at the base of the main unit and then push it slowly to the new location.
 Before shipping the main unit, pack and tape some shipping material against the carriage to
prevent the carriage from slipping out of position.
 Make sure that the main unit is packed level and strapped securely.
D262 2-80 SM
Controller Options
2.3 CONTROLLER OPTIONS
2.3.1 OVERVIEW
Slots
Installation
There are three slots for boards (A, B) and two SD card slots (1, 2) for SD cards on the faceplate
of the controller box. Each board or SD card must be inserted into its assigned slot. The slot
assignments of boards and SD cards are written on a decal on the controller box cover as shown
below.
 Always touch a grounded surface to discharge static electricity from your hands before
you handle SD cards, printed circuit boards, or memory boards.
No. Slots Options
SD card slot  Slot 1 (upper): Option slot

[1]
1, 2  Slot 2 (lower): Service slot
[2] Slot A Slot A : IEEE 802.11 a/g/n Interface Unit Type M19
[3] Slot B Slot B File Format Converter Type M23
SM 2-81 D262
Controller Options
Standard Controller Features

 Option SD cards must go into slot 1. If more than one card is used, the modules must be
merged onto one SD card.
 The Network function, USB Host Function are built in and enabled before the machine leaves
the factory.
 Data Overwrite Security, HDD Encryption
 These features are built into the machine for all models.
There is no Security SD Card in the DOS version that is not for CC certification.
 These features must be activated by customer or technician after installation.
2.3.2 SD CARD APPLI MOVE
Overview
The service program "SD Card Appli Move" (SP5-873) allows you to move application programs
from one SD card to another SD card.
If more than one application is required, the applications must be moved to one SD card with
SP5873-1.
Be very careful when you do the SD Card Appli Move procedure:
 The data necessary for authentication is transferred with the application program from an SD
card to another SD card. Authentication fails if you try to use the SD card after you move the
application program from one card to another card.
 Do not use the SD card if it has been used before for other purposes. Normal operation is not
guaranteed when such an SD card is used.
 The original application SD card should be stored using the following procedure.
Move Exec
The menu "Move Exec" (SP5-873-001) lets you move application programs from the original SD
card to another SD card.
 Do not turn ON the write protect switch of the system SD card or application SD card on
the machine. If the write protect switch is turned ON, a download error (e.g. Error Code
44) occurs during a firmware update or application merge.
1. Turn OFF the main power.
D262 2-82 SM
Controller Options
2. Remove the SD card slot cover [A] ( x2).
Installation
3. Make sure that a target SD card is in SD Card Slot 1 (upper). The application program is
moved to this SD card.
4. Insert the source SD card with the application program in SD Card Slot 2 (lower). The
application program is copied from this source SD card.
5. Turn ON the main power.
6. Enter the SP mode.
7. Select SP5-873-001 "Move Exec".
8. Follow the messages shown on the operation panel.
10. Remove the source SD card from SD Card Slot 2 (right).
11. Attach the slot cover.
13. Check that the application programs run properly.
Undo Exec
"Undo Exec" (SP5-873-002) lets you move back application programs from an SD card in SD
Card Slot 1 (upper) to the original SD card in SD Card Slot 2 (lower). You can use this program
when, for example, you have mistakenly copied some programs by using Move Exec
(SP5-873-001).
 Do not turn ON the write protect switch of the system SD card or application SD card on
the machine. If the write protect switch is ON, a download error (e.g. Error Code 44)
occurs during a firmware upgrade or application merge.
SM 2-83 D262
Controller Options
2. Insert the original SD card in SD Card Slot 2 (lower). The application program is copied
back into this card.
3. Insert the SD card with the application program in SD Card Slot 1 (upper).The
application program is copied back from this SD card.
5. Start the SP mode.
6. Select SP5-873-002 "Undo Exec."
7. Follow the messages shown on the operation panel.
9. Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 2 (right).
11. Check that the application programs run normally.
12. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option.
D262 2-84 SM
Controller Options
2.3.3 IEEE 802.11 A/G/N INTERFACE UNIT TYPE M19

Installation Procedure
1. Install the board.
2. Attach the antenna.
Installation
Included Parts
No. Item Q'ty
1 IEEE 802.11 a/g/n Interface Unit Type M19 1
2 Hook and loop fastener Patch 2
3 Cable Sticker 8
- Caution Sheet 1
- Caution Sheet 1
Installation
 Set the main power switch to OFF and disconnect the power plug from the power outlet
before performing the procedure below. Working with power supplied may cause
electrical shock or defects.
 Do not put your hands in the controller box. It may cause trouble or injury.
 Before installing, touch the metal to eliminate static electricity. Otherwise the wireless
LAN board may be defected with static electricity
1. Remove the cover for Slot A [A] ( x2).
SM 2-85 D262
Controller Options
2. Insert the wireless LAN board [B] into Slot A ( x2).
 Insert the board fully to the back to connect it firmly.

 The removed cover will not be used. The customer should keep it.
Attaching Antennas
 Before installing, touch the metal to eliminate static electricity. Otherwise Wireless LAN
Board may be defected with static electricity.
1. Check the antennas of the wireless LAN board [A] and place it to the right of the main
unit.
2. Use a damp cloth to clean the area [B] on the rear cover.
 Hook and loop fastener patches and clamps are to be attached to area [B] to clamp
the antenna cables. To avoid Hook and loop fastener patches and clamps being
removed, clean the area.
D262 2-86 SM
Controller Options
Installation
3. Peel the tape from the back of a Hook and loop fastener patch [1].
4. Attach the Hook and loop fastener patch at the upper part of the PCB box [2].
5. Peel the tape from the back of the other Hook and loop fastener patch [1].
SM 2-87 D262
Controller Options
6. Attach the Hook and loop fastener patch at the lower part of the PCB box [2].
7. Attach the antenna 1 to the upper patch.
8. Attach the antenna 2 to the lower patch.
D262 2-88 SM
Controller Options
9. Attach a clamp between Antennas 1 and 2 and clamp the antenna cables ( x1).
Installation
10. Attach a clamp below Antenna 2 and clamp the antenna cable ( x1).
11. Open the clamp attached in Step 9 and clamp Antenna cable ( x1).
SM 2-89 D262
Controller Options
12. Attach a clamp as shown and clamp the antenna cable ( x1).
13. Output the system setup list and check that the system configuration recognizes the
option correctly.
Checking the Wireless LAN Interface Connection

1. Check the settings of the IPv4 address and subnet mask or IPv6 address.
2. Select Machine Features/Counter.
3. Touch [System Settings].
4. Select Wireless LAN for Interface Settings.
5. Touch [Exit].
Flow of the Setup
D262 2-90 SM
Controller Options
 For details, refer to the user guide.

 If the wireless LAN board does not function correctly, refer to the slip included in the
option box.
2.3.4 OCR UNIT TYPE M13
Installation
2. Remove the SD card slot cover [A]. ( × 1)
3. Insert the SD card into SD slot 1 or 2 with its label facing [A] the rear of the machine.

5. Touch [EXECUTE] in SP5-878-004 (Option Setup: OCR Dictionary).
The SD card ID is saved in the NVRAM, and the ID of the MFP is saved on the SD card. The
MFP and SD card are thereby linked.
6. When “operation complete” is displayed, touch [CLOSE].
SM 2-91 D262
Controller Options
 If installation fails, "Failed" is displayed.

 If installation fails, perform the following steps.
1. Check whether it is a used SD card.
2. Turn the main power OFF, and repeat steps 1-5.
7. Turn the main power OFF/ON.
8. Press [EXECUTE] in SP5-878-004 (Option Setup: OCR Dictionary).
Dictionary data is copied to the HDD.
 On the first run, SP5-878-004 links the SD card, and on the second run, copies
dictionary data.
9. Turn the main power OFF, and remove the SD card from the SD card slot.
 Keep the SD card in the SD card storage location of the MFP. The original SD card is
needed in the event of a HDD malfunction.
10. Return the SD card slot cover to the original position.
11. Turn the main power ON.
12. Press [Send File Type / Name] on the [Scanner] screen.
13. Check if [OCR Settings] is displayed on the [Send File Type / Name] screen.
D262 2-92 SM
Controller Options
 After installation, the OCR setting can be changed on the "OCR setting" screen.
 When setting OCR, set [OCR setting] to [Yes]. (Default setting: [No])
Recovery Procedure
When this option is installed, a function is saved on the HDD, and ID information on the SD card is
Installation
saved in the NVRAM. Therefore, when replacing the HDD and/or NVRAM, this option must be
reinstalled.
When storing the original SD card and;
 When only the HDD is replaced;
Reinstall using the original SD card.
 When only the NVRAM is replaced;
When performing upload/download of NVRAM data, reinstall using the original SD card.
When not performing upload/download of NVRAM data, order and reinstall a new SD
card (service part).
 When the HDD and NVRAM are replaced simultaneously;
Reinstall using the original SD card.
If the original SD card is lost;
Order and reinstall a new SD card (service part).
 Perform reinstallation in the same way as installation.
SM 2-93 D262
Controller Options
2.3.5 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER TYPE M23 (MLB)
Included Parts
No. Item Q'ty
1 PCB 1
2 Screws 2
Installation of MLB
 Before installing, touch the metal to eliminate static electricity. Otherwise the data
converter board may be defected with static electricity.
D262 2-94 SM
Controller Options
1. Remove the cover for Slot B [A] ( x2).
Installation
2. Attach the cover [B] to the MLB [A] ( x2).
3. Insert the MLB with the cover attached to Slot A.

4. Tighten the screws ( x2).
5. Connect the power plug to a wall outlet and set the main power switch to ON.
6. Output the system setup list and check that the system configuration recognizes the
option correctly.
SM 2-95 D262
Controller Options
2.3.6 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT TYPE M19
Overview
This option should be installed only for the customer who requires the CC certified Data
Overwrite Security function.
The function of this option is completely the same as the Data Overwrite Security in Security
Functions, which is standard on this machine.
Before You Begin the Procedure

1. Confirm that the Data Overwrite Security unit SD card is the correct type for the machine. The
correct type for this machine is "Type M19".
 If you install any version other than "Type M19", you have to replace the NVRAM
and do this installation procedure again.
2. Make sure that the following settings are not at their factory default values:
 Supervisor login password
 Administrator login name
 Administrator login password
If any of these settings is at a factory default value, tell the customer these settings must be
changed before you do the installation procedure.
3. Make sure that “Admin. Authentication” is ON.
[System Settings] – [Administrator Tools] – [Administrator Authentication Management] -
[Admin. Authentication]
If this setting is OFF, tell the customer this setting must be ON before you do the installation
procedure.
4. Make sure that “Administrator Tools” is enabled (selected).
[System Settings] – [Administrator Tools] – [Administrator Authentication Management] -
[Available Settings]
If this setting is disabled (not selected), tell the customer this setting must be enabled
(selected) before you do the installation procedure.
D262 2-96 SM
Controller Options
Seal Check and Removal
 You must check the box seals to make sure that they are not removed after the items
have been sealed in the box at the factory before you do the installation.
1. Check the box seals [A] on each corner of the box.
Installation
 Make sure that a tape is attached to each corner.
 The surfaces of the tapes must be blank. If you see “VOID” on the tapes, do not install the
components in the box.
2. If the surfaces of the tapes do not show “VOID”, remove them from the corners of the
box.
3. You can see the “VOID” marks [B] when you remove each seal. In this condition, they
cannot be attached to the box again.
SM 2-97 D262
Controller Options
Installation Procedure
1. Turn the main power OFF.
2. Remove the SD card slot cover [A]. ( × 1)
3. Insert the SD card (Data Overwrite Security Unit) in SD slot 1 (upper) [A] with its label
face towards the front of the machine. Then push it slowly into SD slot 1 (upper) until
you hear a click.
4. Install the application using SP5-878-001.
 If this option is installed afterward, execute SP 1 to 3 listed below then SP of Step 4.

 If the HDD is changed to a new one, execute SP 1 only. If you opt to use the existing
HDD, data stored in the old HDD will not be guaranteed. It is recommended that you use
a new HDD.
1. SP5-801-014 (Clear DCS Setting)
2. SP5-832-001 (HDD Formatting (All)
3. SP5-832-002 (HDD Formatting (IMH))
D262 2-98 SM
Controller Options
 SP5-878-001
 Enables the Data Overwrite Security unit. Touch [EXECUTE] on the operation panel.
Then cycle the machine off/on.
 SP5-801-014
 Initializes the DCS (Delivery Control Service) settings.
Installation
 SP5-832-001
 HDD Formatting (All)
 SP5-832-002
 HDD Formatting (IMH)
SM 2-99 D262
Controller Options
2.3.7 R/W NFC PERSONAL AUTHENTICATION IC CARD
Included Parts
No. Item Q7ty
1 IC card: R/W: Assembly 1
2 USB cable 1
3 Plastic plate 1
4 Cable clamp 8
5 Screw M3x8 1
6 Plastic screw 4
7 Ferrite core 2
8 Decal: Card reader 1
- Fastener: R/W 2
Installation Guide
D262 2-100 SM
Controller Options
Removing the operation cover

1. Remove the screws on the operation cover ( x2).
2. Release the hooks ( x3).
Installation
3. Push the operation cover in the direction indicated by the arrows and remove it.
 Move the hooks on the rear of the operation cover [A] to the wide end of the
mounting holes, and pull up the cover to remove.
SM 2-101 D262
Controller Options
Fixing the IC card

1. Thread the two mounting holes with the metal screw [A].
2. Fix the IC card [A] to the plastic plate [B] using the fastener [C].
3. Fix the plastic plate to the cover ( x2).
4. Screws on the right bracket of the operation panel ( x2).
D262 2-102 SM
Controller Options
5. Right cover [A] of the operation panel.
Installation
6. Center part of the removed cover.
7. Attach the ferrite core [A] to the USB cable.

Loop the cable around the core once.
8. Connect the USB connector [A] to the IC card.
SM 2-103 D262
Controller Options
9. Secure the cable with the clamp [A] and dress it as shown.
10. Align the hooks on the rear of the operation cover with the wide end of the
mounting holes and pull the cover toward you ( x2).
11. Hook the rear of the operation cover. ( x3)

12. Tighten the screws ( x2).
13. Pass the cable through the center hole of the right cover [A], and connect the USB
connector to the operation panel.
D262 2-104 SM
Controller Options
Installation
14. Attach the right cover [A].
15. Attach the right bracket to the operation panel and secure it with screws ( x2).
SM 2-105 D262
Controller Options
2.3.8 CHECK ALL CONNECTIONS

1. Plug in the power cord. Then turn ON the main power.
2. Enter the printer user mode. Then print the configuration page.
User Tools Machine Features Printer Features List Test Print Configuration
Page
All installed options are shown in the "System Reference" column.
D262 2-106 SM
Security Setting
2.4 SECURITY SETTING
2.4.1 SECURITY FUNCTION INSTALLATION

The machine contains the Security functions (Data Overwrite Security and HDD Encryption unit)
in the controller board.
Installation
If you are installing a new machine, it is recommended to activate the Data Overwrite Security and
HDD Encryption by selecting "Format All Data" from “System Settings” on the operation panel.
 This method is recommended because there is no user data on the hard drive yet
(Address Book data, image data, etc.).
If the customer wishes to activate the Data Overwrite Security and HDD Encryption unit on a
machine that is already running, it is recommended to activate the unit by selecting "All Data" from
“System Settings” on the operation panel.
 Selecting "All Data" will preserve the data that has already been saved to the HDD. (If
"Format All Data" is selected, all user data saved to the HDD up to that point will be
erased).
Immediately after encryption is enabled, the encryption setting process will take several minutes
to complete before you can begin using the machine.
 If encryption is enabled after data has been stored on the HDD, or of the encryption key is
changed, this process can take up to three and a half hours or more.
The machine cannot be operated while data is being encrypted.
Once the encryption process begins, it cannot be stopped.
Make sure that the machine's main power is not turned OFF while the encryption process is in
progress.
If the machine's main power is turned off while the encryption process is in progress, the HDD will
be damaged and all data on it will be unusable.
Print the encryption key and keep the encryption key (which is printed as a paper sheet).
Keep the encryption key in a safe place. If the encryption key is lost and is needed, the controller
board, HDD and NVRAM must all be replaced at the same time.
 "NVRAM" mentioned in here means the NVRAM on the Controller Board.

 "NVRAM" or EEPROM on the BCU has nothing to do with this.
Please use the following procedures when the Data Overwrite Security and HDD Encryption must
be reinstalled.
SM 2-107 D262
Security Setting
2.4.2 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY
Before You Begin the Procedure

1. Make sure that the following settings (1) to (3) are not at their factory default values.
(1) Supervisor login password
(2) Administrator login name
(3) Administrator login password
2. Make sure that “Admin. Authentication” is on.
[User Tools] -> [Machine Features] -> [System Settings] -> [Administrator Tools] ->
[Administrator Authentication Management] -> [Admin. Authentication]
If this setting is off, tell the customer this setting must be on before you do the installation
procedure.
3. Make sure that “Administrator Tools” is enabled (selected).
[User Tools] -> [Machine Features] -> [System Settings] -> [Administrator Tools] ->
[Administrator Authentication Management] -> [Available Settings]
If this setting is disabled (not selected), tell the customer this setting must be enabled
(selected) before you do the installation procedure.
Using Auto Erase Memory

The Auto Erase Memory function can be enabled by the following procedure.
1. Log in as the machine administrator from the control panel.
2. Press [User Tools].
3. Press [Machine Features].
4. Press [System Settings].
5. Press [Administrator Tools].
6. Press [Next] three times.
7. Press [Auto Erase Memory Setting].
8. Press [On].
D262 2-108 SM
Security Setting
9. Select the method of overwriting.

If you select [NSA] or [DoD], proceed to step 10.
If you select [Random Numbers], proceed to step 12.
10. Press [Change].
11. Enter the number of times that you want to overwrite using the number keys, and then
press [#].
Installation
12. Press [OK]. Auto Erase Memory is set.
13. Log out.
14. Check the display and make sure that the overwrite erase icon appears.
15. Check the overwrite erase icon.
The icon [1] is lit when there is temporary data to be overwritten, and blinks during
overwriting.
The icon [2] is lit when there is no temporary data to be overwritten.
Icon [1] This icon is lit when there is temporary data to be

overwritten, and blinks during overwriting.
Icon [2] This icon is lit when there is no temporary data to be

overwritten.
SM 2-109 D262
Security Setting
2.4.3 HDD ENCRYPTION
Before You Begin the Procedure:

1. Make sure that the following settings (1) to (3) are not at the factory default settings.
(1) Supervisor login password
(2) Administrator login name
(3) Administrator login password
2. Confirm that "Admin. Authentication" is on: [User Tools] -> [Machine Features] -
[System Settings] - [Administrator Tools] - [Administrator Authentication Management]
- [Admin. Authentication] - [On]
If this setting is off, tell the customer that this setting must be on before you can do the
installation procedure.
3. Confirm that "Administrator Tools" is selected and enabled.
[User Tools] -> [Machine Features] - [System Settings] - [Administrator Tools] - [Administrator
Authentication Management] - [Available Settings]
"Available Settings" is not displayed until step 2 is done.
If this setting is not selected, tell the customer that this setting must be selected before you
can do the installation procedure.
D262 2-110 SM
Security Setting
Enable Encryption Setting

Machine Data Encryption Settings can be enabled by the following procedure.
Setting Up Encryption
 When setting up encryption, specify whether to start encryption after deleting data
Installation
(initialize) or encrypt and retain existing data. If data is retained, it may take some time to
encrypt it.
8. Press [Machine Data Encryption Settings].
9. Press [Encrypt].
SM 2-111 D262
Security Setting
10. Select the data to be carried over to the HDD and not be reset.
To carry all of the data over to the HDD, select [All Data].
To carry over only the machine settings data, select [File System Data Only].
To reset all of the data, select [Format All Data].
11. Select the backup method.
If you have selected [Save to SD Card], load an SD card into the media slot on the side of the
control panel and press [OK] to back up the machine's data encryption key.
If you have selected [Print on Paper], press the [Start] key. Print out the machine's data
encryption key.
12. Press [OK].
13. Press [Exit].
14. Press [Exit].
15. Log out.
16. Turn OFF the main power, and then turn the main power back ON.
The machine will start to convert the data on the memory after you turn on the machine. Wait
until the message "Memory conversion complete. Turn the main power switch off." appears,
and then turn the main power OFF again.
Check the Encryption Settings
6. Confirm whether the encryption has been completed or not on this display.
D262 2-112 SM
Security Setting
Backing Up the Encryption Key

The encryption key can be backed up. Select whether to save it to an SD card or to print it.
 The encryption key is required for data recovery if the machine malfunctions. Be sure to
store the encryption key safely for retrieving backup data.
Installation
8. Press [Print Encryption Key].
9. Select the backup method.

If you have selected [Save to SD Card], load an SD card into the media slot on the side of the
control panel and press [OK]. After the machine's data encryption key is backed up, press
[Exit].
If you have selected [Print on Paper], press the [Start] key. Print out the machine's data
encryption key.
10. Press [Exit].
11. Log out.
SM 2-113 D262
Security Setting
Encryption Key Restoration

How to restore the old encryption key to the machine
The following message appears after the controller board is replaced. In such a case, it is
necessary to restore the encryption key to the new controller board.
To do this, follow the procedure below.

1. Prepare an SD card that has been initialized in FAT16 format.
2. Using a PC, create a folder in the SD card and name it "restore_key".
3. Create a folder in the “restore_key” folder and name it the same as machine’s serial
number, “xxxxxxxxxxx” (11 digits).
4. Create a text file called "key_xxxxxxxxxxx.txt" and save it in the "xxxxxxxxxxx“ folder.
Write the encryption key in the text file.
/restore_key/xxxxxxxxxxx/key_xxxxxxxxxxx.txt
 Ask an Administrator to enter the encryption key. The key has already been printed
out by the user and may have been saved in the "key_xxxxxxxxxxx.txt" file.
5. Turn ON the machine’s main power.
6. Confirm that a message is displayed on the LCD telling to insert the SD card that
contains the encryption key.
8. Insert the SD card that contains the encryption key into SD card slot 2 (the lower slot).
 The machine will automatically restore the encryption key to the flash memory on the
controller board.
10. Turn OFF the main power when the machine has returned to normal status.
11. Remove the SD card from SD card slot 2.
How to do a forced start up with no encryption key
If the encryption key back-up has been lost, follow the procedure below to do a forced start-up.
D262 2-114 SM
Security Setting
 The HDD will be formatted after the forced start-up.

 Encrypted data will be deleted.
 User settings will be cleared.
1. Prepare an SD card.
2. Create a directory named “restore_key” inside the root directory of the SD card. Then,
Installation
save the “nvram_key.txt” file using the following name:
/restore_key/nvram_key.txt
3. Create a text file and write "nvclear".
 Write this string at the head of the file.

 Use all lower-case letters.
 Do not use quotation marks or blank spaces.
 It is judged that a forced start has been selected when the content of "nvclear" is
executed and the machine shifts to the alternate system (forced start).
4. Confirm that a message is displayed on the LCD telling to insert the SD card that
contains the encryption key.
6. Insert the SD card that contains the encryption key into SD card slot 2 (the lower slot).
7. Turn ON the main power and the machine automatically clears the HDD encryption.
8. Turn OFF the main power when the machine has returned to normal status.
9. Remove the SD card from SD card Slot 2.
11. Memory clear SP5-801-xx (Exclude SP-5-801-001: All Clear and SP-5-801-002: Engine),
and clear SP5-846-046: address book.
 SP5-801-XXX
 Resets NVRAM data to the default settings. Before executing any of these SP codes,
print an SMC Report.
 SP5-801-001
 Initializes items.
 SP5-801-002
 Initializes all registration settings for the engine and copy process settings.
 SP5-846-046
 Displays the slot number where an address book data is in.
12. Set necessary user settings with the User Tools screen.
SM 2-115 D262
@Remote Setting
2.5 @REMOTE SETTING
2.5.1 SETTINGS RELEVANT TO THE SERVICE CONTRACT

Change the necessary settings for the following SP modes if the customer has entered a service
contract.
 You must select one of the counter methods (developments/prints) in accordance with
the contract (SP5-045-001).
Counting method
SP No. Function Default
SP5-045-001 Specifies if the counting method used in "1": Prints

meter charge mode is based on
developments or prints.
Service Tel. No. Setting
SP No. Function Default
SP5-812-001 SP5-812-002 programs the service station

through 004 fax number. The number is printed on the
counter list when the meter charge mode is
selected. This lets the user fax the counter
data to the service station.
D262 2-116 SM
@Remote Setting
2.5.2 SETTINGS FOR @REMOTE SERVICE
 Prepare and check the following check points before visiting the customer site. For
details, ask the @Remote key person.
Check points before making @Remote settings
Installation
1. The setting of SP5-816-201 (Remote Service: Regist: Status) in the mainframe must be
"0".
2. Print the SMC with SP5-990-002 (SP Print Mode: SP (Mode Data List)) and then check if
a device ID2 (SP5-811-003) must be correctly programmed.
 6 spaces must be put between the 3-digit prefix and the following 8-digit number (e.g.
xxx______xxxxxxxx).
 ID2 (SP5-811-003) and the serial number on the machine serial decal pasted at the rear
must be the same (e.g. ID2: A01______23456789 = serial No. A0123456789)
3. The following settings must be correctly programmed.
 Proxy server IP address (SP5-816-063)
 Proxy server Port number (SP5-816-064)
 Proxy User ID (SP5-816-065)
 Proxy Password (SP5-816-066)
4. Get a Request Number.
Execute the @Remote Settings
2. Input the Request number which you have obtained from @Remote Center GUI, and
then enter [OK] with SP5-816-202 (Remote Service: Letter Number).
3. Confirm the Request number, and then click [EXECUTE] with SP5-816-203 (Remote
Service: Confirm Execute).
4. Check the confirmation result with SP5-816-204 (Remote Service: Confirm Result).
Value Meaning Solution/ Workaround
0 Succeeded -
1 Request number error Check the request number again.
Communication error (proxy

3 Check the network condition.
enabled)

disabled)
SM 2-117 D262
@Remote Setting
Proxy error (Illegal user name or

5 Check Proxy user name and password.
password)
6 Communication error Check the network condition.
See "SP5-816-208 Error Codes" below

8 Other error
this.
Request number confirmation

9 Processing… Please wait.
executing
5. Make sure that the screen displays the Location Information with SP5-816-205 (Remote
Service: Confirm Place) only when it has been input at the Center GUI.
6. Click [EXECUTE] to execute the registration with SP5-816-206 (Remote Service:
Register Execute).
7. Check the registration result with SP5-816-207 (Remote Service: Register Result).
0 Succeeded -
1 Request number error Check the request number again.
2 Already registered Check the registration status.

enabled)

disabled)
Proxy error (Illegal user name or

5 Check Proxy user name and password.
password)
See "SP5-816-208 Error Codes" below

8 Other error
this.
Request number confirmation

9 Processing… Please wait.
executing
D262 2-118 SM
@Remote Setting
8. Exit the SP mode.

SP5-816-208 Error Codes
Cause Code Meaning Solution/ Workaround
Obtain a Request Number

Inquiry, registration attempted
-12002 before attempting the
Installation
without acquiring Request No.
Inquiry or Registration.
-12003 Attempted registration without Perform Confirmation

execution of a confirmation and before attempting the
no previous registration. Registration.
-12004 Attempted setting with illegal Check ID2 of the

entries for certification and ID2. mainframe.
-12005 @Remote communication is

Make sure that "Remote
prohibited. The device has an
Service" in User Tools is
Embedded RC gate-related
set to "Do not prohibit".
problem.
Operation Error, -12006 A confirmation request was

Incorrect Setting made after the confirmation Execute registration.
had been already completed.
-12007 The request number used at

registration was different from Check Request No.
the one used at confirmation.
-12008 Update certification failed Check the mainframe

because mainframe was in condition. If the mainframe
use. is in use, try again later.
-12009 The ID2 in the NVRAM does

Check ID2 of the
not match the ID2 in the
mainframe.
individual certification.
-12010 The certification area is not Initialize the certification

initialized. area.
Error Caused by -2385 Other error
Response from -2387 Not supported at the Service

GW URL Center
SM 2-119 D262
@Remote Setting
Cause Code Meaning Solution/ Workaround
-2389 Database out of service
-2390 Program out of service
Two registrations for the same Check the registration

-2391
mainframe condition of the mainframe
-2392 Parameter error
-2393 External RCG not managed
-2394 Mainframe not managed
Box ID for external RCG is

-2395
illegal.
Mainframe ID for external RCG

-2396
is illegal.
Check the ID2 of the

-2397 Incorrect ID2 format
mainframe.
Incorrect request number

-2398 Check the Request No.
format
D262 2-120 SM
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
None
Preventive Maintenance Tables
3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
3.1 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE TABLES
See “Appendices” for the following information:

 Preventive Maintenance Tables
Maintenance
Preventive
SM 3-1 D262
PM Cleaning Points
3.2 PM CLEANING POINTS
3.2.1 PM TABLE
The following points are referenced by number in the PM table.
Scanner Unit
Exposure Glass
 Optical glass cleaner cloth, water damp cloth.
1. Raise the scanner unit.
2. Clean the surface of the glass.
Original Width Sensors, Original Set Sensor

 Blower brush
2. Clean with a blower brush.
3. Remove the original width sensor cover plate ( x2) (p.4-69 ) .

4. Clean each sensor with the blower brush.
D262 3-2 SM
PM Cleaning Points
Maintenance
Preventive
Original Feed Roller
 Alcohol, damp cloth, dry cloth
1. Remove the registration sensor cover plate ( x2) (p.4-72).
2. Wipe the original feed roller [B] while turning the gear [A].
Original Exit Roller

 Alcohol, damp cloth, dry cloth.
1. Remove the top of the scanner unit (p.4-40).
2. On the left side of the machine, turn the drive gear [A] as you wipe the surface of the
roller [B] with the cloth.
SM 3-3 D262
PM Cleaning Points
White Plate
 Alcohol, damp cloth, dry cloth.
2. Clean the 5 plates.
CIS Lens
 Lens paper, or clean cloth dampened with alcohol.
2. Clean the surfaces of the 5 lenses.
D262 3-4 SM
PM Cleaning Points
Horizontal Unit
Black Print Head Unit
The black print head units can be replaced separately or together (p.4-189).
Color Print Head Unit
The black print head units can be replaced separately or together (p.4-189).
Horizontal Encoder
 Clean cloth dampened with alcohol, dry cloth.
 Never touch or handle the surface of the encoder strip with bare hands. Smudges
Maintenance
and fingerprints can interfere with the sensor readings of the encoder strip.
Preventive
1. Move the carriage unit to the center (p.4-52).
2. Remove the top cover (p.4-31).
3. Push the carriage to the right.
4. Loosen the screws on both sides of the ink tube rail. Do not remove the screws. ( x2)
SM 3-5 D262
PM Cleaning Points
5. Remove the plate.
6. Prepare a piece of clean linen cloth dampened with alcohol.

7. Wipe both sides of the encoder strip with the cloth.
8. Clean the strip as far as the carriage on the right, move the carriage to the left, and then
clean the other end of the strip.
D262 3-6 SM
PM Cleaning Points
DRESS Sensor
 Cleaning cloth
The recommended cleaning interval is 10Km. However, if the operator is frequently printing
with tracing paper or print Quality mode, cleaning every 5Km is recommended.
1. Remove the DRESS Sensor (p.4-175).
2. Clean the DRESS sensor with a cleaning cloth.
 Always use the cleaning cloth, never use a cotton swab or tissue paper.
 Cleaning the DRESS sensor prevents errors when it reads the reflectivity of the
surfaces of glossy paper and tracing paper.
Maintenance
Preventive
Maintenance Unit
 Dry linen cloth.
 After replacing the ink collector unit, always remove ink that has hardened around
the wiper blade, suction cap, and three print head caps.
3. Use a tightly wrapped linen cloth dampened with water to clean:
[A] Wiper and blade
[B] Suction cap
[C] Print head caps
SM 3-7 D262
PM Cleaning Points
Waste Ink Collection

Ink Collector Tank
1. Open the ink collector cover on the right side of the machine.
2. Depress the release [A], and then pull the tank straight out of the machine.
3. Lay the tank on a flat surface with the port [B] facing up.
 The port at [B] is open and will leak ink if the tank is turned on its side or turned
upside down. Tape the port to prevent leakage.
Right Ink Sump
Replace the right ink sump when a message alerts you that the tank is full.
1. Remove the ink collector unit on the right side of the machine.
2. Remove the ink collector cover and right cover (p.4-24).
3. Disconnect the sump and pull it out slowly ( x1).
 To avoid spilling ink, do not tilt the sump as you remove it.
4. Cover the top of the tank with some paper and tape, and then discard it.
 Follow the local laws and regulations regarding the disposal of this item.
 Never attempt to empty the right ink sump and re-use it.
D262 3-8 SM
PM Cleaning Points
Maintenance
5. After installing the new right ink sump, open SP2-505-002 (Reset Waste Ink Counter:
Preventive
Waste Ink: Right C/R) and touch [EXECUTE] to clear the counter for the new sump.
 A software count triggers a prompt to tell the operator when the right ink sump is
near-full, and then finally full and in need of replacement.
Left Ink Sump
 Dry linen cloth
After replacing the collector unit, always remove ink that has hardened around the gate.
Use a dry linen cloth to clean the gate of the sump. You may need to use the tip of a small
screwdriver to remove hardened ink.
1. Remove the left cover (p.4-20).
2. Use a dry cloth wrapped around the tip of a small screwdriver to clean around the
openings of the gate.
3. Use the bare tip of a small screwdriver to remove hardened ink that cannot be removed
by wiping with the cloth.
 Replace the left sump when a message alerts you that the tank is full (p.4-277).
SM 3-9 D262
PM Cleaning Points
Ink Tube Guide

 Damp cloth.
2. Use the damp cloth to clean the back of the guide where it rubs against the frame during
normal operation [A].
Platen
 Linen cloth dampened with alcohol, blower brush.
2. Dampen a clean linen cloth with water.
3. Wipe the platen [A] with the damp cloth, and then wipe with a dry cloth.
 To avoid damage or discoloration of the platen, never use an organic solvent like
alcohol, benzene, acetone, etc. to clean it.
4. Use a blower brush [B] to remove paper dust from the holes in the platen plates.
D262 3-10 SM
PM Cleaning Points
Vertical Encoder
 Linen cloth dampened with alcohol
 Never touch or handle the surface of the encoder wheel with bare hands. Smudges
and fingerprints can interfere with the sensor readings of the encoder edge.
 Handle the wheel carefully to avoid bending it.
2. Prepare a piece of clean linen cloth dampened with alcohol.
3. While turning gear and the wheel, clean the edge of the wheel with the cloth.
Maintenance
Never use a cotton swab or cotton ball, tissue paper, or any other material that
Preventive

could shed and leave fibers on the edge of the encoder wheel.
SM 3-11 D262
PM Cleaning Points
3.2.2 OTHER ITEMS FOR CLEANING

These items are not included in the PM table but they should be cleaned during the course of
replacement and adjustment procedures.
External Covers
 Linen cloth, dampened with water
1. Clean the covers with a clean cloth dampened with water.
 To avoid damage or discoloration, never use an organic solvent like benzene,

acetone, etc. to clean the surfaces of the covers.
D262 3-12 SM
PM Cleaning Points
Scanner Unit
Original Set Sensor
 Blower brush
2. Clean with a blower brush with the original sensor cover attached.
Maintenance
Preventive
4. Remove the original width sensor cover plate ( x2) (p.4-69).
5. Use a blower brush to clean the sensor.
Original Registration Sensor

 Blower brush
2. Clean with a blower brush [A].
-or-
3. Remove the original registration sensor cover plate, and then clean with the blower brush
[B]. ( x2) (p.4-72).
SM 3-13 D262
PM Cleaning Points
Original Exit Sensor

 Blower brush
1. Remove the scanner unit (p.4-40).
2. Clean with a blower brush [A]
-or-
3. Remove the scanner unit, remove the original exit sensor cover plate and then clean the
sensor with the blower brush [B]. ( x2).
D262 3-14 SM
PM Cleaning Points
Horizontal Unit
Ink Level Sensors
 Blower brush
2. Remove right cover (p.4-24).
3. Remove right upper cover (p.4-27).
4. Clean FS1 (Feeler Sensor 1 [A]) with a blower brush.
5. Clean FS2 (Feeler Sensor 2 [B]) with a blower brush.
Maintenance
Preventive
SM 3-15 D262
PM Cleaning Points
Paper Feed
Bypass Sensor, Pre-registration Sensor
1. Remove the right cover (p.4-24).
2. Remove the right upper cover (p.4-27).
3. Remove the right rear metal plate ( x4).
4. Use a blower brush to clean the upper bypass sensor [A].

5. Clean the lower pre-registration sensor [B].
D262 3-16 SM
PM Cleaning Points
Paper Exit Sensor

 Blower brush
1. Raise the paper exit guide.
2. Use the blower brush to clean the exit sensor [A].
-or-
3. Remove the feed roller cover and clean the exit sensor [B] (p.4-137).
Maintenance
Preventive
Roll Units
Roll End Sensor
 Blower brush
This procedure is the same for both roll end sensors [A] [B].
1. The roll end sensors are located on the back of Roll Unit 1 and Roll Unit 2.
SM 3-17 D262
PM Cleaning Points
2. Remove the sensor cover plate [A] ( x2).
3. Clean the exposed sensor with a blower brush.
Roll Unit Paper Release Sensor

This procedure is the same for both roll units.
1. Remove the sensor plate ( x1).
D262 3-18 SM
PM Cleaning Points
2. Remove the sensor ( x4).
Maintenance
Preventive
3. Clean the sensor with a blower brush.
4. Set the wide hooks first, then the smaller hooks to re-install.
SM 3-19 D262
PM Cleaning Points
Roll Feed Roller

1. Remove the roll unit (p.4-93, p.4-99).
2. Feed roller housing (p.4-118, p.4-121).
3. Clean the roller with a dry, clean cloth to remove paper dust.
D262 3-20 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
P a ge Date A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew
156 02/17/2017 Corrected Horizontal Encoder Sheet Precaution
Notes on the Main Power Switch
4. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
4.1 NOTES ON THE MAIN POWER SWITCH
4.1.1 PUSH SWITCH

The main power button of this machine has been changed to a push-button switch from the
conventional rocker switch. The push switch has characteristics and specifications different from
the rocker switch. Care must be taken when replacing and adjusting parts.
and Adjustment
Replacement
Characteristics of the Push Switch (DC Switch)
Power is supplied to the machine even when the main power switch is turned OFF.
The push switch in this machine uses DC (direct current). Therefore, if the AC power cord is
connected to an electrical outlet, power is supplied to the controller board, the operation unit
and other modules even when the main power is turned OFF. When replacing the controller
board and the operation unit in this state, not only these boards, it will damage other electrical
components.
In 100V models, only one of the AC lines for the fusing unit is shut off when you turn off the
main power; the other line carries current even when you turn off the main power switch.
So, when performing maintenance work such as replacing parts, in addition to turning off the
main power with the push switch, always unplug the AC power cord.
When you disconnect the power cord from the AC outlet, inside the machine there is still
residual charge.
When you disconnect the power cord from the AC wall outlet, inside the machine for a while
there is still residual charge. Therefore, if you remove boards in this state, it can cause a
blown fuse or memory failure.
 How to remove the residual charge inside the machine
After you unplug the power cord from the AC wall outlet, in order to remove the residual
charge from inside the machine, be sure to press the main power switch. Thus, the
charge remaining in the machine is released, and it is possible to remove boards.
SM 4-1 D262
When you reconnect the AC power cord into an AC wall outlet, the machine will start
automatically.
In order to remove the residual charge, push the main power switch while you disconnect the
AC power cord. At that time, the power ON flag inside the machine is set. Therefore, after you
finish work on the machine and reconnect the power cord to the AC, even if you do not press
the main power switch, the machine will start automatically and the moving parts will begin to
move. When working on moving parts, be careful that fingers or clothes do not get
caught.
 Automatic restart deals with cases when you accidentally unplugged the AC power
cord or unexpected power outages. By keeping the power flag ON, after the
resumption of power, the machine will start up automatically.
In rare cases, when you reconnect the AC power cord to a power outlet, the machine does
not start automatically. In this case, the machine has not failed. The cause is due to the timing
of releasing the residual charge. If you press the main power switch while the residual charge
was already released, the power ON flag will not be set. At this time, start the machine
manually by pressing the main power switch.
D262 4-2 SM
Shutdown Method
1. Press the main power switch on the front of the machine.
 Before you disconnect any of the cables, make sure that the LEDs on the BICU have
and Adjustment
Replacement
turned off completely.
 In this model, note that the LEDs are not as close to the USB cable as usual.
2. Disconnect the power cord

3. Wait 3 minutes. This is the time required if you intend to remove the rear cover and service
parts in the machine, like removal of the controller board, for example).
 If some LEDs on any of the boards are blinking or lit, current is still flowing.
 After the shutdown process, the main power is turned off automatically.
SM 4-3 D262
When the shutdown is complete

Main power LED: Off
Operation panel LED: Off
 How to start from shutdown

 To start the machine, press the main power switch. However, if you press the main power
switch between the beginning and the end of a shutdown, the machine will not start.
Forced Shutdown
In case normal shutdown does not complete for some reason, the machine has a forced shutdown
function.
To make a forced shutdown, press and hold the main power switch for 6 seconds.
In general, do not use the forced shutdown.
 Forced shutdown may damage the hard disk and memory, and can cause damage to the
machine. Use a forced shutdown only if it is unavoidable.
D262 4-4 SM
General Precautions
4.2 GENERAL PRECAUTIONS
4.2.1 EXTERNAL COVERS

1. To avoid personal injury or damage to the machine during operation, operators and service
technicians must always obey the instructions in the manuals and decals attached to the
machine.
2. The moving parts and drive mechanisms inside the machine are dangerous. Never a wedge a
piece of paper or the tip of a tool into an interlock safety switch so that the machine can
continue to operate with covers open.
3. Do not lay anything on top of the machine, and never block air ventilation louvers on the
covers. Blocked louvers could interfere with the airflow and cause the machine to overheat
and cause a fire.
and Adjustment
4. Open the scanner cover only after the original has exited the original path. If you open the
Replacement
scanner cover while an original is being scanned, the interlock safety switches will stop the
machine and this will cause a jam. In an emergency if you must stop a scan in progress,
press the Original Stop button ( ) on the right side of the scanner cover.
5. Open the front cover only after all scanning and print jobs have finished and the last print or
original has exited. Open the front cover while the machine is operating will activate the
interlock safety switches and cause the machine to jam.
6. To prevent personal injury or damage to the machine, never lean on the machine, and never
place heavy objects on the original tray or paper exit stacker.
4.2.2 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT

1. Never attempt to feed originals that are not within the specifications. Doing so could cause
the machine to jam, result in poor print quality, damage a valuable original, or damage the
machine. Obey the following guidelines before you scan an original, and inspect each original
for:
 (1) Dirty surfaces, the originals must be clean
 (2) Stacking, originals must be fed one by one
 (3) Folding, originals must be flat
 (4) Glue, adhesive tape that could foul the feed path
 (5) Holes, no paper with punched edges
 (6) Folded corners
 (7) Wrinkles and tears
 (8) Rippled surfaces (caused by high humidity)
 (9) Sheets taped together
 (10) Crooked leading edge
 (11) Thick paper pasted at the leading edge
SM 4-5 D262
General Precautions
 (12) Clips, staples

 (13) Wet ink, wet correction fluid originals
 (14) Carbon paper
 (15) An film original not within specification
 (16) Excessive curling
 (17) Sticky surfaces that could stick to the exposure glass
 You may be able to feed originals with some of the defects listed above if you use a
document carrier.
2. Insert an original only after the machine prompts you to do so after the machine is ready for
copying.
3. To set the original, lay it face down and align the right side guide with the right edge of the
original. Aligning the right guide with the right edge of the original prevents skewing during
scanning.
4. Push the leading edge into the scanner. Release it as soon as the machine grabs the leading
edge and feeds it partially. To avoid skewing or damaging the original, never attempt to push
or pull on the original during this initial feeding.
5. If you see a problem at the beginning of scanning, press the original stop button ( ) to stop
original feed, and then open the scanner unit and remove the original.
6. Periodically clean the original table and the surface of the feed roller with a water dampened
cloth. Clean the exposure glass with the optical cloth provided with the machine. Cleaning
prevents poor feeding, dirt or dust transfer to the original, and poor copy image quality. To
prevent damage to the machine, the cleaning cloth should be only slightly damp; make sure
no liquid drips into the machine.
7. To ensure good print quality and to prevent jams, always remove a thick or long original from
the original stacker as soon as it exits.
8. Thick or especially long originals may not feed correctly. While feeding a thick or long original,
you can gently push the sides with both hands during scanning of the first half. You can guide
the sides with both hands as the second half scans.
9. When you open the scanner cover, always use both hands, placed on either side of it, as
shown on the decal and described in the operating instructions. To avoid personal injury or
damage to the machine, never open or close the scanner cover with one hand.
10. The weight limit of the original table is 5 kg (11 lb.). To avoid damaging the original table,
never lean on the original table and never place anything on the original table when you are
working around the machine.
11. To avoid damage to the exposure glass below the cover or the white plates attached to the
underside of the cover, always check the original path before you close the scanner cover.
12. If anything falls into the machine that the operators cannot recover, they must call for service.
Foreign objects in the machine could cause a short (which can lead to a fire), or could cause
D262 4-6 SM
General Precautions
feed problems.
13. During feeding of a thick original (90 g/m2), the side guides could skew the image and cause
parts of the image to disappear at the points where the CIS elements join. In such a case, use
the white lines on the original table to guide the original during feeding.
14. When feeding a thick original (180 g/m2), do not push the original after it strikes the original
feed roller and starts to feed. The original feed roller has a one-way feed clutch. If the original
is pushed in the direction of the leading edge, this could buckle the original and cause it to
jam at the original registration sensor.
15. Originals up to 135 g/m2 can exit to the original stacker on top of the machine. Thicker
originals must feed straight through and exit the back of the machine. Removal of the original
exit guide on top of the machine allows the originals to exit straight out the back.
16. Also, use straight-through original feed for thin or flimsy originals. For example, tracing paper
(80 g/m2 or less), or normal paper (52.3 g/m2 or less). Buckling of thin or flimsy paper can lead
to accordion jams and damage the original.
and Adjustment
Replacement
4.2.3 PAPER
1. Always set the roll (or start paper feed) from the bottom of the roll, not the top. Feeding paper
from the top of the roll places an excessive load on the paper feed rollers and could cause
problems with paper feed and cutting. Also, feeding the paper from the top sets the paper
against the direction of paper curl, which causes the paper to lift and rub against the print
heads leading to poor copy quality and damage to the print heads.
2. If the machine is to remain idle for a long period where the temperature and humidity are high
or low, remove the paper rolls from the machine and store them (in their original packing if
possible). If the rolls cannot be removed and stored, then before the machine is used again,
feed the leading edge of the roll about 1,000 mm (39 in.), and then cut it off.
SM 4-7 D262
General Precautions
4.2.4 COPY QUALITY

1. Photo images that have areas filled with dithering or fine lines frequently exhibit moiré.
2. Even for images where moiré does not stand out with 1:1 copying, changing the rate of
magnification could cause moiré to appear.
3. In cases where 0.5 mm bands occur in halftone areas of uneven density, switch to Photo/Text
mode (or Text mode) so banding does not stand out. Inconsistencies in the optical properties
across the CIS can cause slight unevenness in image density.
4. The thickness of fine lines (0.1 mm or less), or the lines in enlarged copies of originals
previously reduced, may look different in the copies compared with the originals. This is
because of a phenomenon unique to digital copiers: the position of the elements in the CIS
unit and position of the fine lines in the original may not be consistent.
5. If a dirty background still appears in a copy using the Auto Density setting, adjust the notch to
a lighter setting.
4.2.5 CIS
1. Always handle the CIS unit carefully during its removal to prevent it from shock and vibration.
2. Never touch the CIS lenses with bare hands or fingers.
3. Use only lens paper to clean the lenses.
4. Never attempt to disconnect the signal or power connectors from the CIS unit. This could
damage the CIS unit or throw it out of adjustment. When connecting the CIS unit, connect the
FFCs at the SIB.
4.2.6 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

1. Make sure that all terminal connections are grounded. The ground wire on the terminal of the
electrical power cord must be properly grounded.
2. All of the ground harnesses that are connected to the back of the scanner unit and the PCB
box should remain connected while the machine is operating.
4.2.7 ADJUSTMENTS AT MACHINE INSTALLATION

1. Avoid placing the machine near a window to prevent sunlight from entering the machine and
causing problems in images like uneven density.
2. The back of the scanner unit should never be exposed to strong light.
3. If the windows near the machine are provided with blinds or curtains, close them.
D262 4-8 SM
General Precautions
4.2.8 OTHER PRECAUTIONS

1. The CIS unit has five separate elements, and sometimes image density may appear uneven
at the joints where these elements connect. When this problem occurs, try scanning in the
Photo Mode. The scanning level may be affected by the original floating away from the
exposure glass during scanning. This can also cause inconsistencies in the wavelengths of
the CIS unit with color originals and lead to slightly uneven density in the copied image. If you
see white areas in dithered images, switch the machine to the Photo Mode. If you see fine
lines that appear as scratches, change the setting of the density notch adjustment.
2. Because the CIS unit has 5 separate elements, pixels may become misaligned at the joints of
these elements.
 Normal paper original: 2 pixels
 Normal paper with curl: 3 to 4 pixels
 Thick original (1 mm): 3 to 6 pixels
and Adjustment
Replacement
 In order to compensate for the differences in Generation Copy Mode, try reversing
the direction of the original when you insert it, or swap the orientation between LEF
and SEF.
3. Problems can occur with a pasted up original. When using a pasted up original, try Text Mode
or Photo Mode. Shadows can appear in copies because the CIS light source comes from one
direction where there are edges (steps) on the pasted up document.
4. After printing, if the machine is to remain idle for a long period, remove the paper rolls from
the machine and store them in their protective bags. Paper exposed to a high or low
temperature or high humidity can absorb or lose moisture causing it to curl and ripple, wrinkle,
or fold.
SM 4-9 D262
General Precautions
4.2.9 SERVICE PRECAUTIONS
Scanner Unit Rollers

The surfaces of the main rollers (original feed roller, original exit roller, registration roller, and exit
roller) are covered with a soft urethane coating. This coating is soft and can be damaged quite
easily (even with a fingernail).
 Never touch the surface of these rollers with bare hands.
 Always hold the rollers by the bare ends where they are not coated.
 Never use any type of strong organic solvent to clean the surface of these rollers. Use only an
alcohol or water dampened cloth to clean the rollers.
Main Frame Screws

There are paint-locked screws across the top of the machine (under the top cover). These screws
are positioned and adjusted at the factory. Never loosen or attempt to adjust these screws.
D262 4-10 SM
General Precautions
Right Plate Screws

You can see the heads of four paint-locked screws around the top of the maintenance unit. These
screws hold a re-enforcement plate. Never loosen or remove any of these screws.
and Adjustment
Replacement
Maintenance Unit Base Screws
The maintenance unit base plate supports the maintenance unit. These screws hold the base
plate under the maintenance unit, which must always remain in the same position below the
carriage print heads.
The two base plate screws at the back on the right rear panel should never be loosened or
removed.
There are also two paint-locked screws at the front. One screw is at the front below the switch
bracket [A] on the right. The other screw [B] is to the right of the temperature/humidity sensor
above the ink supply unit.
SM 4-11 D262
General Precautions
Solenoid Bracket Screw

The position of the air solenoid bracket is adjusted at the factory. This screw is also paint-locked to
remind you that it should not be removed.
D262 4-12 SM
General Precautions
Main Carriage Screws

The illustration above shows the left cover of the carriage unit removed. It is extremely important
you never loosen or remove these screws. Tampering with these screws could cause the carriage
unit to fall out of alignment or onto the platen plates.
and Adjustment
Replacement
Temperature/Humidity Sensor Bracket
This screw is paint locked. However, this bracket must be removed in order to remove the
carriage unit. The bracket must be reinstalled at exactly the same position so the sensors are
positioned correctly (p.4-224).
SM 4-13 D262
General Precautions
Notes on Operation of the Paper Holding Lever

To operate the paper holding lever [A], do not pull up the paper holding lever too much. If the lever
is pulled up too much, it may be removed from the black gear (the figure below is with the upper
right cover removed).
If the lever is removed from the gear, set the gear so that the gear and the first gear teeth of the
paper holding lever are aligned.
 If necessary, the paper holding lever can be removed (remove the E-ring of the paper
holding lever). However, do not remove the gear.
 When the paper holding lever is removed and re-attached, check the followings:
[1] The paper holding lever is horizontal.
[2] The gear and the first gear teeth of the paper holding lever are aligned.
D262 4-14 SM
Common Procedures
4.3 COMMON PROCEDURES

This section describes procedures commonly used to service the machine.
 The service technician must be familiar with all procedures in this section before
servicing the machine, as described in other sections of this service manual.
What You Need
Tool Needed For:
Alcohol, clean linen cloths Cleaning surfaces and rollers
and Adjustment
Replacement
Allen key (2.5 mm) Removing and attaching hex bolts.
Blower brush Cleaning sensors
Clean rags Wiping up ink, covering disconnected ink tubes
Clean waste paper To place under the maintenance unit and other parts
that can leak ink, in order to protect tables and other
surfaces
Flashlight (small) Checking the position of the suction cap and print
head caps of the maintenance unit.
Gloves Handling encoder strips and wheels, and

urethane-coated rollers
Lens paper Cleaning the CIS elements
Metal scale Inserting sheets into narrow gaps.
Phillips driver – long At least 300 mm (12") to reach screws inside the
machine.
Phillips driver – small Removing small screws
Radio pliers Attaching, reattaching e-rings
SM 4-15 D262
Common Procedures
4.3.2 BEFORE SERVICING THE MACHINE
 Before doing any procedure, always turn off the power switch and unplug the machine
from its power source.
To prevent damage to these parts, and to prevent interference with raising and lowering the top of
the scanner unit, always remove them before servicing the machine:
[A] Original guides (x2)
[B] Original stacker (x2)
[C] Rear output guides (x4)
Rear Output Guides

1. At the back of the machine, for each guide press down on the top of the guide [1].
2. Lower it away from the plate [2].
3. Unhook it at the bottom [3].
D262 4-16 SM
Common Procedures
Original Guides
1. Rotate each guide away from the machine and remove it.
Original Stacker
and Adjustment
1. First, separate the tabs at the base ( x4).
Replacement
2. Rotate the original stacker away from the machine to remove it.
Reinstallation
1. To reinstall the original stacker, first connect it at the base, and then rotate the tray
up.
2. Pull out the light shield and confirm that the gap at the top of the scanner unit is
completely covered.
SM 4-17 D262
Common Procedures
 This light shield prevents light from entering the scanner unit.
 If this gap is not covered, strong light could enter the back of the scanner unit
and cause image distortion during scanning.
Ink Collector Tank

1. Open the ink collector cover.
2. Depress the lever on the top of the ink collector to unlock it, and then remove it.
D262 4-18 SM
Common Procedures
Paper Rolls
1. Make sure that the machine is switched on.
3. Press button [B] and hold it for at least 2 seconds to rewind the paper.
and Adjustment
Replacement
4. Avoid touching the paper with your hands. Grip the roll at the plastic holders on both
ends, and then lift the paper roll out of the machine.
5. Lay the roll horizontally on a flat clean surface.
SM 4-19 D262
Common Procedures
4.3.3 MAIN COVERS

In order to service some parts inside the machine, covers must be removed on the right side in
this order:
 Right Cover (p.4-24) > Right Upper Cover (p.4-27) > Ink Cartridge Cover (p.4-29)
To remove the top cover, the covers must be removed in this order:
 Right Cover (p.4-24) > Right Upper Cover (p.4-27) > Ink Cartridge Cover (p.4-29) > Left
Cover (p.4-20) > Top Cover (p.4-31)
 Use only a water dampened cloth to clean the covers. To protect the finish of the
covers, never use an organic solvent to clean them.
Left Cover
2. Below the open guide, remove the screw ( x1).
3. Lower the paper exit guide.
D262 4-20 SM
Common Procedures
4. Push in the bottom of the front cover, and then raise it until it locks.
and Adjustment
Replacement
5. Below the cover, remove the screw ( x1).
SM 4-21 D262
Common Procedures
6. Lower the front cover.
7. At the back, disconnect the left cover ( x2).
8. Lift the cover straight up and remove it.
D262 4-22 SM
Common Procedures
Reinstallation
1. Set the bottom hooks [A] into the holes in the frame.
2. Raise the cover so that the middle hook [B] fits into its hole.
3. Insert the tabs [C] on the top edge of the cover into their holes.
4. Lower the cover so that the hooks and tabs engage the machine frame.
and Adjustment
Replacement
SM 4-23 D262
Common Procedures
Right Cover
1. Open the ink collector cover.
2. Disconnect the hinges on both ends of the cover and remove it.
3. Disconnect the bottom of the cover ( x1).
D262 4-24 SM
Common Procedures
4. At the back of the machine, disconnect the right cover ( x2).
5. Lift the cover straight up and remove it.
 Raise the right cover [A] and pull it toward you to remove.
and Adjustment
Replacement
 To raise the paper holding lever [B] for removing the right cover, do not raise the lever
too much, which might disengage it from the gear.
SM 4-25 D262
Common Procedures
Reinstallation
 Align the tabs inside the right cover with the cutouts of the main unit and attach the cover.
 To raise the paper holding lever for attaching the right cover, do not raise the lever too
much, which might disengage it from the gear.
D262 4-26 SM
Common Procedures
Right Upper Cover

Remove
1. Right cover (p.4-24).
2. Disconnect the cover at the top [A] ( x1).
3. Raise the paper holding lever [B].
4. Disconnect the cover at [C] ( x1).
and Adjustment
Replacement
5. Disconnect the cover at the rear [A] ( x1).
6. Pull the lever [B] slightly away from the machine.
7. Lift the cover [C] to remove it.
SM 4-27 D262
Common Procedures
Reinstallation
1. Insert the three tabs on the top edge of the cover [A] into the holes [B].
2. Insert and slide the hooks [C] into the holes on the top edge of the ink cartridge
cover [D].
D262 4-28 SM
Common Procedures
Ink Cartridge Cover

Remove
2. Right upper cover (p.4-27).
3. Open the ink cartridge cover.
and Adjustment
Replacement
4. Depress the tab of each ink cartridge and remove it.
5. Disconnect the top of the cover ( x1).
SM 4-29 D262
Common Procedures
7. Disconnect the side of the cover [A] ( x1).

8. Rotate the cover [B] forward slightly and then remove it.
D262 4-30 SM
Common Procedures
Top Cover
Remove
3. Left cover (p.4-20).
4. Disconnect the top cover ( x7).
and Adjustment
Replacement
5. Lift the cover and remove it.
 Do not attempt to print with the top cover removed. Light striking the exit sensor
with the cover removed will cause paper to jam.
SM 4-31 D262
Common Procedures
Reinstallation
1. Before fastening the screws, make sure that the bosses fit into the holes in the rear
edge of the top cover.
D262 4-32 SM
Common Procedures
Right Rear Cover.

Remove
2. Remove the right rear cover. ( x4)
and Adjustment
Replacement
 Never loosen nor remove the two screws in the slots at the lower part of the right
rear cover.
Precaution
 Hook the right rear cover to the cutout of the frame. [A]
 Insert the bottom of the right rear cover inside the plastic plate of the frame (handle of the
main unit). [B]
SM 4-33 D262
Common Procedures
D262 4-34 SM
Common Procedures
Left Rear Cover

Remove
2. Remove the left rear cover. ( x5)
and Adjustment
Replacement
Precaution
 Hook the left rear cover to the cutout of the frame. [A]
 Insert the bottom of the left rear cover inside the plastic plate of the frame (handle of the
main unit). [B]
SM 4-35 D262
Common Procedures
Front Cover
Remove:
2. Raise the top cover to the angle shown above.
3. Disconnect the peg on the left [A] and the peg on the right [B].
4. Remove the front cover.
D262 4-36 SM
Common Procedures
Reinstallation
1. Make sure that the left and right pegs are inserted into the left and right guides.
2. Raise and lower the front cover to confirm that it operates smoothly.
and Adjustment
Replacement
Paper Exit Guide
1. Raise the paper exit guide until it stops.
2. On the right, disconnect the torque limiter plate ( x2).
SM 4-37 D262
Common Procedures
3. Remove the plate.
4. Remove the gear.
5. Raise the guide to the angle shown above , shift it slightly to the left, and then lift it
straight up , and then remove it.
D262 4-38 SM
Common Procedures
Reinstallation
1. When you set the gear, turn it until you feel the coupling on the back of the gear
engage with the shaft pin.
2. Push in on the gear slightly so that it snaps into place.
3. The tip of the shaft should be visible as shown above. If the gear is not inserted far
enough, you will not be able to re-attach the cover.
and Adjustment
Replacement
SM 4-39 D262
Common Procedures
4.3.4 SCANNER UNIT
Raise the Scanner Unit Fully

1. Open the top of scanner unit.
2. Remove the screws on the left and right bases of the scanner unit arms. ( x2)
3. Disconnect the hinges from the post screws. Do not remove the screws.
4. Raise the scanner to the full upright position.
D262 4-40 SM
Common Procedures
Scanner Upper Cover

1. Remove the scanner rear cover (p.4-45).
2. Remove the scanner left cover and scanner right cover (p.4-46).
3. Raise the scanner unit to the full upright position (p.4-40).
4. Remove the USB cable [A] and USB power supply harness [B]. ( x1)
and Adjustment
Replacement
 Release the clamp and pass the cable beneath the bracket.
5. Remove the ferrite core.
6. Remove the clamps and connector, and pull away the harnesses. ( x1, x3)
SM 4-41 D262
Common Procedures
7. Pull out the harness from the cutout of the right bracket of the main unit.
8. Remove the ground wire from the right hinge of the top of scanner unit. ( x2, x2)
9. Remove the ground wire from the right hinge of the top of scanner unit, release the
clamp, and pull away the harness. ( x1)
D262 4-42 SM
Common Procedures
10. Remove the ground wire [A] and bracket [B] from the left hinge of the top of scanner
unit. ( x2)
11. Release the boss of the right latch of the top of scanner unit on the rear of the main
unit and pull the latch up.
and Adjustment
Replacement
12. Release the boss of the left latch of the top of scanner unit on the rear of the main unit
and pull the latch up.
SM 4-43 D262
Common Procedures
13. While holding the left and right latches pushed, slightly tilt the top of scanner unit and
pull it up to remove.
 The left and right latches easily come off the top of scanner unit. Check that the
latches are attached on the top of scanner unit soon after removing it.
D262 4-44 SM
Common Procedures
Scanner Rear Cover

Remove
1. Remove the screws of the three ground wires connected to the PCB box and
remove the scanner rear cover. ( x3)
Precaution
Set the three guides of the scanner rear cover to the cutout on the rear of the scanner unit.
and Adjustment
Replacement
SM 4-45 D262
Common Procedures
Scanner Left Cover, Scanner Right Cover

1. Remove the scanner rear cover. (Scanner Rear Cover)
2. Open the top of scanner unit [A].
3. Remove the scanner left cover [B]. ( x1)
4. Remove the scanner right cover [A]. ( x1)
D262 4-46 SM
Common Procedures
Original Table
1. Raise the scanner unit to the full upright position (p.4-40).
3. Remove the screw [B] on the left of the original table [A]. ( x1: M4x10)
 To attach the original table, be sure to mount this screw on the left side.
4. Remove the tapping screw [D] on the right of the original table [C]. ( x1)
 To attach the original table, be sure to mount this screw on the right side.
and Adjustment
Replacement
5. Remove the original table.
Raise the Left Side of the Scanner Unit.

To remove the screw behind the edge of the scanner rack without removing the rack from the
scanner unit, place the scanner unit above the edge of the scanner rack.
SM 4-47 D262
Common Procedures
1. Separate the scanner unit and the main unit (p.4-59).

4. Loosen the bolt with a hexagonal wrench from the lower right of the scanner rack.
( x2)
 Never remove this bolt.
5. Remove the bolt with a hexagonal wrench from the lower left of the scanner rack.
( x2)
6. Slowly move the scanner unit so that the main unit is placed under the scanner unit.
D262 4-48 SM
Common Procedures
 Placing of the main unit under the scanner unit prevents the scanner unit from falling
to the floor.
and Adjustment
Replacement
7. Slowly raise the left side of the scanner unit to put it on the left rear edge of the
scanner rack [A].
8. Insert the cardboard between the left front of the bottom of the scanner unit and the
scanner rack [B].
 The size of the sheet of cardboard inserted between the scanner unit and scanner
rack is 10 cm long and 2 cm thick.
SM 4-49 D262
Common Procedures
Raise the Right Side of the Scanner Unit.

To remove the screw behind the edge of the scanner rack without removing the rack from the
scanner unit, place the scanner unit above the edge of the scanner rack.

4. Loosen the bolt with a hexagonal wrench from the lower left of the scanner rack. ( x2)
 Never remove this bolt.
D262 4-50 SM
Common Procedures
5. Remove the bolt with a hexagonal wrench from the lower right of the scanner rack.
( x2)
6. Slowly move the scanner unit so that the main unit is placed under the scanner unit.
and Adjustment
Replacement
 Placing of the main unit under the scanner unit prevents the scanner unit from falling
to the floor.
7. Slowly raise the right side of the scanner unit to put it on the right rear edge of the
scanner rack [A].
8. Insert the cardboard between the right front of the bottom of the scanner unit and the
scanner rack [B].
SM 4-51 D262
Common Procedures
 The size of the sheet of cardboard inserted between the scanner unit and scanner
rack is 10 cm long and 2 cm thick.
4.3.5 MOVING THE CARRIAGE UNIT
Before You Begin

While the machine is idle, the carriage unit always resides on the right side of the machine where
the maintenance unit caps cover the print heads to prevent them from drying out. However, some
maintenance procedures require uncapping the print heads and then moving the carriage unit to
the center of the platen, or to the far left side of the platen.
Using SP2-102-004 (Maintenance Unit Exchange: Decapping) is the best way to move the
carriage unit, but you can also uncap the print heads and move the carriage unit manually. For
example, you may need to move the carriage out of the home position manually when you already
have the machine partially disassembled and realize that you must move the carriage unit.
There may be occasions when you need to return the maintenance unit to the home position
manually to prevent the print heads from drying out.
 If the machine is partially disassembled at the end of the work day, the print heads should be
capped manually before leaving the machine to sit for more than an hour.
 If the machine was operating when a power outage occurred, leaving the carriage unit out of
the home position, you will need to cap the print heads if power cannot be restored within a
short time.
Move the Carriage Unit with SP2-102-4

Before you turn the machine off for a service procedure that requires that the carriage be out of
the home position.
1. Go into the System SP mode.
2. Open SP2-102-4 (Maintenance Unit Exchange: Decapping).
3. Select the setting for the procedure you need.
2-102-4 Maintenance Unit Exchange Reset – Decapping
1 Lowers the maintenance unit ink caps and uncaps the print heads. The
carriage does not move.
2 Uncaps the print heads and moves the carriage to the left of the platen.
3 Uncaps the print heads and moves the carriage to the center of the
platen. This is the most often used procedure during servicing.
D262 4-52 SM
Common Procedures
4. Turn the machine off.

5. Always slide a sheet of paper under the carriage unit after it has been moved to the
center. This protects the platen from ink that could drip from the uncapped print heads.
and Adjustment
Replacement
6. Before you turn on the power switch to return the carriage unit to its home position on
the right, check the position of the horizontal encoder strip on the left.
 If the encoder strip is up on the bracket as shown at [A], pull it forward and down so that it
is in front of the bracket as shown at [B].
 If the machine is turned on with the strip positioned as shown at [A], the movement of the
carriage unit may scratch the surface of the encoder strip.
7. After you reassemble the machine, turn the machine on. The carriage will return to the
right side (home position), where the maintenance unit will cap the print heads
automatically.
SM 4-53 D262
Common Procedures
Uncapping the Print Heads and Moving the Carriage Unit Manually
1st Point: Suction Cap (K1)
 Rotating the hex socket at [A] raises and lowers suction cap [B] which covers the K1 print
head.
 Normally the suction cap is up and engaged with the black print head of the carriage unit
to keep it from drying out.
 The suction cap must be lowered before the carriage can be moved away from the right
side of the machine.
2nd Point: Print Caps (K2, M1Y1, C, M2Y2)

 Rotating the hex socket at [A] raises and lowers print head caps [B] which cover the K2,
M1Y1, C, and M2Y2 print heads.
 Normally, these print head caps are up and engaged with the K2, M1Y1, C, and M2Y2
print heads of the carriage unit to keep them from drying out.
 The print head caps must be lowered before the carriage can be moved away from the
right side of the machine.
D262 4-54 SM
Common Procedures
and Adjustment
Replacement
Procedure
1. Raise the front cover (p.4-36).
2. Raise the paper holding lever [A].
3. Side a sheet of paper [B] into the machine as far as the gap between the raised
rollers and the platen.
4. Lower the paper holding lever [C] to hold the paper in place.
 This paper protects the platen from ink that may leak from the carriage unit after
it is moved away from the right side of the machine.
SM 4-55 D262
Common Procedures
5. Check the gap on the right side of the maintenance unit.

 There will be no gap if the cleaning unit is forward and the suction cap is up. Go to
the next step to lower the suction cap. Normally, the suction cap will be up.
 There will be a gap if the suction cap is already down. Go to Step 7.
6. Set a screwdriver in hole [A] and rotate it counter-clockwise to lower the suction
cap. Use a flashlight to confirm that the suction cap is down.
7. Set a screwdriver in hole [B] and rotate it clockwise to lower the K2 and color print
head caps. Use a flashlight to confirm that the print head caps are down.
8. Once again check the gaps.

 Both the suction cap and K2/color print head caps should be down.
 Your view should not be blocked by either the suction cap or K2/color print head
caps.
 To prevent damaging the caps, you must confirm that both the suction cap and
K2/color print caps are down before you push the carriage unit away from the
home position.
D262 4-56 SM
Common Procedures
9. Push the carriage unit away from the right side of the machine so that it is over the
paper.
Capping the Print Heads Manually
and Adjustment
Replacement
 Do this procedure only when it is absolutely necessary and the print heads cannot be
capped automatically by switching the machine on.
1. Slowly, push the carriage unit to the right side of the machine until it stops. The
carriage should be over the maintenance unit.
 In order to prevent damage to the wipers and edges of the print head caps, the print
heads must be positioned directly above the print head caps within ±0.8 mm.
2. Use a flashlight to look through the hole and check the position of the hex socket.
 If the hex socket is visible [A], the cleaning unit is forward and no adjustment is necessary.
Go to the next Step.
 If the hex socket is only partially visible or not visible at all [B] and [C], then set a
screwdriver at [D] and rotate it counter-clockwise to move the cleaning mechanism until
you see the hex socket [A]. This moves the cleaning unit forward so that you can raise
the suction cap.
 The cleaning unit may be out of position (to the rear) only if the machine was
interrupted during the print head cleaning cycle as a result of a power outage.
SM 4-57 D262
Common Procedures
3. Set a screwdriver in hole [A] and rotate it counter-clockwise to raise the suction cap.
Use a flashlight to confirm that the suction cap is up.
4. Set a screwdriver in hole [B] and rotate it clockwise to raise the K2 and color print head
caps. Use a flashlight to confirm that the print head caps are up.
5. Once again check the gaps. Both the suction cap and K2/color print head caps should
be up.
D262 4-58 SM
Common Procedures
6. At the resumption of servicing, be sure to uncap the print heads before you move the
carriage unit manually.
4.3.6 DISCONNECTING THE MAIN UNIT FROM THE SCANNER UNIT
 Before doing any procedure, always turn off the power switch and unplug the machine
and Adjustment
Replacement
from its power source. Or electric shock or defect may be caused.
 Before you disconnect any of the cables, make sure that the LEDs on the BICU have
turned off completely.
 In this model, note that the LEDs are not as close to the USB cable as usual.
SM 4-59 D262
Common Procedures
Disconnecting the Scanner Cable

Disconnect the scanner cable from the main unit.
The figure below shows the wiring pattern in the main unit.
[A] IOB CN258
[B] IOB CN259
[C] IOB CN256
[D] IOB CN257
[E] BICU CN216
[F] BICU CN215
[G] Ground clamp
D262 4-60 SM
Common Procedures
1. Release the clamps in the main unit. Separate the power cord and disconnect the
connector [A] of the power cord.
and Adjustment
Replacement
2. Disconnect the ground wires from the main unit ( x3: 3x6).
3. Remove the rear cover (p.4-290).
SM 4-61 D262
Common Procedures
4. Remove the ground plate [A] ( x1 - M3x8)..
5. Remove all clamps in the figure below.
D262 4-62 SM
Common Procedures
6. Disconnect all the connectors from CN258 [A], CN259 [B], CN256 [C], and CN257 [D] on
IOB and CN216 [E] and cn215 [F] on BiCU
and Adjustment
Replacement
Separating the Main Unit from the Scanner Unit
Separate the main unit from the scanner unit completely.
1. Disconnect the scanner unit from the bracket [A] [B] ( x4: 4x6).
SM 4-63 D262
Common Procedures
2. Slowly, pull the scanner stand away from the back of the main unit.
 To avoid scratching or breaking the original table, never lay anything on the original
table while you are working.
 Move the scanner unit and stand assembly carefully. It is top heavy and can tip over
easily.
D262 4-64 SM
Common Procedures
4.3.7 OPERATION PANEL

The work other than removing of the operation panel, refer to the service manual for Smart
Operation Panel.
Remove
1. Remove the screws on the operation cover. ( x2)
2. Release the hooks. ( x3)
and Adjustment
Replacement
3. Push the operation cover in the direction indicated by the arrows and remove it.
 Two hooks are on the back of the cover [A].
4. Remove the clamp and screws. ( x1, x5)
SM 4-65 D262
Common Procedures
5. Remove the operation panel.

6. Remove the screws on the rear cover of the operation panel and remove the cover.
( x3)
7. Remove the connectors and clamp. ( x2, x1)
D262 4-66 SM
Common Procedures
Precaution
Place the left and right supports of the operation panel at the L-shaped corners, move them in the
direction indicated by the arrows, and seat them in the cutouts.
and Adjustment
Replacement
Mounting the Operation Cover
1. Align the hooks on the rear of the operation cover with the wide end of the
mounting holes and pull the cover toward you. ( x2)
2. Hook the cover onto the rear of the operation cover. ( x3)
3. Tighten the screws. ( x2)
SM 4-67 D262
Scanner
4.4 SCANNER
Safety Switch Diagram

To ensure the safety of everyone working around the machine, two switches inside the scanner
section prevent the LED radiation from switching on accidentally.
 When the original feed unit is opened and the switches open, a +24V line connecting each
LED driver on the SIF board is disconnected.
 When the original feed unit is closed and the switches close, the +24V line is re-connected.
[1]: Scanner Switches
D262 4-68 SM
Scanner
4.4.2 ORIGINAL WIDTH SENSORS, ORIGINAL SET SENSOR

3. Raise the top of scanner unit to the full upright position (p.4-40).
4. Remove the original table (p.4-47).
5. Remove the sensor cover. ( x2)
and Adjustment
Replacement
6. Remove the screws of the sensor bracket and turn the bracket over. ( x3)
SM 4-69 D262
Scanner
7. In the center of the bracket, disconnect and remove the original set sensor. ( x1,
x4, x1)
8. Remove the other nine original width sensors. ( x1, x4, x1)
D262 4-70 SM
Scanner
4.4.3 SAFETY SWITCH

4. Remove the original table (p.4-47).
5. Remove the sensor cover. ( x2)
and Adjustment
Replacement
6. Remove the safety switch with the bracket [A]. ( x1)
7. Separate the bracket and the safety switch [A]. ( x2, x2)
SM 4-71 D262
Scanner
4.4.4 ORIGINAL REGISTRATION SENSOR

2. Remove the guide plate [A]. ( x2)
3. Remove the original registration sensor with the bracket [A]. ( x1, x1, x1)
4. Separate the bracket and the original registration sensor [A]. ( x1)
D262 4-72 SM
Scanner
4.4.5 SCANNER MOTOR
and Adjustment
Replacement
3. Raise the left side of the scanner unit (p.4-47).
4. Loosen the screw of the tension bracket [A], and then remove the spring [B] to loosen
the tension of the timing belt. ( x1)
5. Remove the timing belt [B] from the scanner motor [A].
6. Remove the scanner motor [C]. ( x2, x1)
SM 4-73 D262
Scanner
Scanner Motor
4.4.6 SIB (SCANNER I/F BOARD)
Remove
2. Disconnect all the connectors connected to the SIB. ( x8, x1)
3. Release the FFCs from the guide. ( x5)
 Each FFC is numbered with the number of the CIS unit it is connected to.
D262 4-74 SM
Scanner
4. Remove the SIB. ( x3, x3)
 Use a pair of radio pliers to disconnect the front edge of the board.
Precaution
Each FFC connector slot is marked with the number of CIS element that it connects to. The
example below shows "CIS 5".
and Adjustment
Replacement
Connect the FFC with the same number as the number of the SIB connector to the SIB.
 If the tip of the FFC curls, flatten it and make the connection.
 If the FFC is connected with its tip curled, SC may be displayed or the picture cannot be
copied or scanned properly.
SM 4-75 D262
Scanner
4.4.7 ORIGINAL FEED ROLLER
Remove

7. Remove the timing belt from the original feed roller drive gear
D262 4-76 SM
Scanner
8. Remove the gear and shaft. ( x1)
and Adjustment
Replacement
 Attach the gear with the face of the gear [A] inserted against the frame so that it can
fit over the flat side of the shaft [B].
9. Lower the left side of the scanner unit.

10. Raise the right side of the scanner unit (p.4-50).
11. On the right, remove the ground plate [A] from the shaft. ( x1)
SM 4-77 D262
Scanner
 Conductive grease is applied to the shaft and ground plate. Avoid to attach it around.
12. Remove the shaft. ( x1, wave washer x1, washer x1)
13. Slide the original feed roller [A] to the left until you see the coated surface close to the
hole in the frame [B] and remove the right end of the roller from the hole of the right
frame.
D262 4-78 SM
Scanner
14. Slide the original feed roller to the right, and remove the left end of the roller from the
hole of the left frame to remove the roller from the main unit.
and Adjustment
Replacement
Adjustment
After changing the original feed roller, perform the CIS adjustment (p.4-327).
SM 4-79 D262
Scanner
4.4.8 EXPOSURE GLASS
Remove
 The exposure glass is very long and thin. It is very easy to break. Handle it carefully.
5. Remove the screw on the right side [A] and the leaf spring [B] on the right of the
exposure glass. ( x1 with washer)
6. Remove the screw on the left side [A] and the leaf spring [B] on the left of the exposure
glass. ( x1 with washer)
7. Remove the exposure glass.
D262 4-80 SM
Scanner
Precaution
and Adjustment
Replacement
When you reinstall the exposure glass, set the glass so that the blue dot on the side of the glass is
placed at the front side of the main unit.
SM 4-81 D262
Scanner
4.4.9 CIS UNIT
Remove
 For changing or adjusting, be sure to turn the main power off. Otherwise the LED
emission may damage your eyes.
 Follow these cautions when changing the CIS unit. Otherwise the CIS may be damaged
or print quality may be deteriorated.
 Handle the CIS unit carefully to protect it from sudden shock and vibration.
 Never touch the CIS lenses.
 Clean the CIS lens cover with lens paper only. Never use tissues paper or cloth that
could leave lint or other particles on the lenses.
 Never disconnect the signal or power supply harnesses from the CIS unit.
4. Remove the exposure glass (p.4-80).
5. Release the FFCs, and push them in the opening [A]. ( x5)
6. Remove the screws from the left [A] and right [B] sides of the CIS frame. ( x4)
D262 4-82 SM
Scanner
7. Remove the CIS unit [A].
 Lift the right side of the CIS unit and move it to the right to remove.
 Never touch the CIS lenses.
 Handle the CIS unit carefully to protect it from sudden shock and vibration.
and Adjustment
Replacement
Precaution
1. Never touch the CIS lenses.
2. Clean away smudges or dirt with lens paper.

3. At the rear, locate the slot rimmed with white plastic [A]. This is where the FFCs will be
re-inserted.
4. Insert the CIS units to the slits on the left [A] and right [B].
SM 4-83 D262
Scanner
 To attach the CIS unit, fully insert the frames on the both sides to the slits of the main
unit and fasten it with screws.
 Check that there is no dust or dirt on the CIS lenses or exposure glass.
5. At the rear, pull each FFC through the slot using the Allen key.
6. Connect the FFCs to the SIB. ( x5)
 Each FFC connector slot of the SIB is marked with the number of CIS element that it
connects to. The example below shows "CIS 5".
 Connect the FFC with the same number as the number of the SIB connector to the
SIB.
D262 4-84 SM
Scanner
 If the tip of the FFC curls, flatten it and make the connection.
 If the FFC is connected with its tip curled, SC may be displayed or the picture cannot
be copied or scanned properly.
Adjustment
After changing the CIS Unit, perform the CIS adjustment (p.4-327).
4.4.10 ORIGINAL EXIT SENSOR

1. Remove the top of scanner unit (p.4-41).
2. Remove the CIS unit (p.4-82).
3. Remove the brackets on both sides of the original exit roller. ( x4)
and Adjustment
Replacement
4. Remove the original exit sensor. ( x1, x1, x1)
SM 4-85 D262
Scanner
4.4.11 ORIGINAL EXIT ROLLER
Remove
1. Remove the top of scanner unit (p.4-41).
2. Remove the CIS unit (p.4-82).
3. Remove the brackets on both sides of the original exit roller. ( x4)

6. Remove the timing belt from the original feed roller drive gear.
7. Remove the gear and shaft. ( x1)
D262 4-86 SM
Scanner
and Adjustment
Replacement
 Attach the gear with the face of the gear [A] inserted against the frame so that it can
fit over the flat side of the shaft [B].
8. Lower the left side of the scanner unit.

9. Raise the right side of the scanner unit (p.4-50).
10. On the right, remove the ground plate [A] from the shaft. ( x1)
SM 4-87 D262
Scanner
 Conductive grease is applied to the shaft and ground plate. Avoid to attach it around.
11. Remove the right shaft of the original exit roller. ( x1 [A], wave washer x1 [B], washer
x1 [C])
D262 4-88 SM
Scanner
12. Slide the original exit roller to the left until you see the coated surface [A] close to the
hole in the frame and remove the right end of the roller from the hole of the right frame
[B].
and Adjustment
Replacement
Adjustment
After changing the original exit roller, perform the CIS adjustment (p.4-327).
SM 4-89 D262
Scanner
4.4.12 WHITE PLATE BRACKET

2. Remove the ground wire connected to the white plate bracket. ( x2)
3. While holding the right and left white objects pressed, pull the white plate bracket [A]
toward you to remove it.
D262 4-90 SM
Scanner
4.4.13 ORIGINAL STOP SWITCH

2. The switch cover is fastened by four hooks under the top of scanner unit on the right
side.
Use the tip of a small screwdriver to release the hooks [A] of the switch cover and remove the
switch cover on top of the scanner cover [B]. ( x4)
and Adjustment
Replacement
3. Remove the switch cover plate of the original stop switch. ( x1)
SM 4-91 D262
Scanner
4. Use the tip of a small screwdriver to release both sides of the original stop switch [A]
and remove the connector [B]. ( x1)
Original Stop Switch
D262 4-92 SM
Roll Units
4.5 ROLL UNITS
before the procedure below. Operation with the power being supplied may cause
 For roll unit 1 and 2, the replacement procedure is a little different, but the parts can be
replaced with the same procedure.
4.5.1 ROLL UNIT 1
Remove
and Adjustment
Replacement
1. Remove the roll unit 1.
3. Release the lower clamps of IOB ( x4).
4. Remove the clamps and connector from CN254 of the IOB [A] ( x1).
5. Remove the harness bracket of the roll unit 1 ( x2).
6. Release the clamps and pull away the harness of the roll unit 1 ( x4).
SM 4-93 D262
Roll Units
If only the roll unit 1 is mounted, go to step 8.

7. If the roll unit 2 is attached, remove the guide plate ( x2).
 Release the cutouts of the guide plate from the pins on both ends of the main unit.
D262 4-94 SM
Roll Units
8. Remove the guide plate ( x2).
and Adjustment
Replacement
 Pull the guide plate toward you slightly, and then remove it.
9. The roll unit 1 is fastened with four screws, two on the left and two on the right.
SM 4-95 D262
Roll Units
 To remove the screws, use a long screwdriver of 25 cm or longer.

10. From the left of the roll unit 1, remove the upper [A] and lower screws [B] ( x2).
11. From the right of the roll unit 1, remove the upper [A] and lower screws [B] ( x2).
12. On the front of the main unit, raise the paper exit guide [A] and push the harness of the
roll unit 1 [B] to the front over the top of the roll unit 1.
D262 4-96 SM
Roll Units
13. From the front of the machine, push the roll unit 1 slightly to the left [1], and then
remove it [2].
Roll Unit 1
and Adjustment
Replacement
Precaution
1. To install the roll unit 1 at the front, push it to the right so that it locks into place.
2. At the rear, push the roll unit [A] to the left to make sure that it is locked in place.
3. Use a flashlight to check hole [B] on the right and left to make sure that the holes are aligned
correctly.
SM 4-97 D262
Roll Units
4. To install the guide plate of roll unit 1, make sure that the two pins on the left [A] and right [B]
are seated correctly on the cutouts.
5. Use the end of a scale or ruler to push the film sheets behind the guide plate of the roll unit 1.
D262 4-98 SM
Roll Units
6. Make sure that the roll unit harness are tight against the bottom of the PCB box.
 During bypass paper feed, the trailing edge of the paper comes out of the machine
briefly and then feeds back into the machine. If the harnesses of the roll unit are
hanging down, they could interfere with paper in the bypass paper feed path.
and Adjustment
Replacement
4.5.2 ROLL UNIT 2 (OPTION)
Remove
1. Remove the roll unit 2.
 The roll unit 2 can be removed with the same procedure as the roll unit 1.
3. Release the clamps at the lower part of the PCB box. ( x4).
SM 4-99 D262
Roll Units
4. Remove the connector [A] from CN300 of the RFDB and CN255 [B] from IOB.
5. Remove the connector [C] from CN301 of the RFDB and harness bracket [D] ( x1,
x2).
D262 4-100 SM
Roll Units
6. Pull away the harness of the roll unit 2.
and Adjustment
Replacement
7. Remove the guide plate ( x2).
SM 4-101 D262
Roll Units
 Release the cutouts of the guide plate from the pins on the both ends of the main
unit.
8. The roll unit 2 is fastened with four screws, two on the left and two on the right.
 To remove the screws, use a long screwdriver of 25 cm or longer.

9. From the left of the roll unit 2, remove the upper [A] and lower screws [B] ( x2).
D262 4-102 SM
Roll Units
10. From the right of the roll unit 2, remove the upper [A] and lower screws [B] ( x2).
11. Push the roll unit 2 [A] slightly to the left [1], and then remove it [2].
and Adjustment
Replacement
Roll Unit 2
SM 4-103 D262
Roll Units
Precaution
1. To install the roll unit 2 at the front, push it to the right so that it locks into place.
2. At the rear, push the roll unit 2 [A] to the left to make sure that it is locked in place.
3. Use a flashlight to check hole [B] on the right and left to make sure that the holes are aligned
correctly.
4. To install the guide plate of the roll unit 2, make sure that the hooks of the guide plate are
placed correctly on the left and right pins.
5. Make sure that the roll unit harness are tight against the bottom of the PCB box.
 During bypass paper feed, the trailing edge of the paper comes out of the machine
briefly and then feeds back into the machine. If the harnesses of the roll unit are
hanging down, they could interfere with paper in the bypass paper feed path.
D262 4-104 SM
Roll Units
4.5.3 REWIND SWITCH
Remove
2. Remove the right outer cover [A] ( x3).
3. Remove the right outer cover [A] and switch cover [B] ( x3).
and Adjustment
Replacement
4. Remove the rewind switch [A] ( x1)
SM 4-105 D262
Roll Units
Precaution
 To install the right outer cover, pull the latch forward slightly.
 After attaching the cover, pull the latch forward and then release it so that it flips back to the
rear.
4.5.4 LEFT OUTER COVER, LEFT INNER COVER
Remove
2. Remove the left outer cover ( x3).
3. Remove the left inner cover x3).
D262 4-106 SM
Roll Units
Precaution
To install the left inner cover, make sure the leaf spring is not pinched between the covers.
and Adjustment
Replacement
4.5.5 ENCODER SENSORS
Remove
2. Remove the right outer cover, right inner cover, and switch cover (p.4-116).
3. Disconnect the sensor bracket and pull away the harness ( x1, x1).
4. Slide the latch and pull out the sensor bracket.
5. Release the clamp of the sensor bracket and pull away the harness ( x2).
SM 4-107 D262
Roll Units
6. Remove the encoder sensor [A] ( (white) x1, x3).

7. Remove the encoder sensor [B] ( (black) x1, x3).
Cleaning
Clean the sensors with a blower brush.
D262 4-108 SM
Roll Units
4.5.6 ROLL PAPER FEED MOTOR

The roll paper feed motor [A] is placed at the lower right of the roll unit.
and Adjustment
Replacement
3. Remove the roll paper feed motor from the frame ( x2).
4. Release the clamps, pull away the harness, and remove the motor ( x4, x1).
SM 4-109 D262
Roll Units
4.5.7 ROLL PAPER FEED CLUTCH
Remove
4. Remove the right back bracket ( x2).
5. Remove the screws ( x4).
D262 4-110 SM
Roll Units
6. Remove the screw [A] and snap ring of the gear [B] ( x1, snap ring x1).
and Adjustment
Replacement
7. Turn the gear until the alignment mark [A] is horizontal.
8. Remove the gear [B] and alignment pin [C].
SM 4-111 D262
Roll Units
9. Remove the screw at the right back of the roll unit ( x1).
10. Disconnect the motor ( x5, x1).
D262 4-112 SM
Roll Units
11. Remove the screw [A] ( x2).

12. Remove the bracket [B].
and Adjustment
Replacement
13. Remove the clamps and connector, and pull away the harnesses [A] ( x3).
14. Remove the roll paper feed clutch [B] and gear [C].
SM 4-113 D262
Roll Units
Precaution
1. Rotate the roll paper feed clutch so that the clutch arms [A] and [B] are placed as
shown below.
 Because the shaft of the roll paper feed clutch is D-shaped, insert the shaft into the
hole in the gear carefully.
2. Rotate the clutch so that the clutch arm [A] is vertical. Attach the bracket [B] ( x1).
3. If the tip of the pawl is not within the gap of the clutch arm, remove the clutch pawl
plate ( x1).
D262 4-114 SM
Roll Units
4. Using the tip of a small screwdriver, set the clutch arm so that it is perfectly vertical..
5. Set the clutch pawl plate so that the tip of the pawl is between the gap of the clutch
arm.
6. Attach the clutch pawl plate ( x1).
7. If the tip of the pawl is not between the gap of the clutch arm, remove the clutch pawl
plate ( x1).
and Adjustment
Replacement
8. Insert the alignment pin [A] into the shaft so that it is horizontal.
9. Set the gear on the end of the shaft, and then rotate it so that the alignment mark [B] is
horizontal.
10. Push the gear [C] onto the shaft so that the pin locks into the groove on the back of the
gear.
SM 4-115 D262
Roll Units
4.5.8 PAPER RELEASE SENSOR
Remove
1. Remove the sensor cover ( x1).
2. Remove the roll end sensor ( x4, x1).
D262 4-116 SM
Roll Units
Cleaning
Clean the roll end sensor with a blower brush.
and Adjustment
Replacement
Precaution
To install the roll end sensor, attach the claw first.
SM 4-117 D262
Roll Units
4.5.9 FEED ROLLER HOUSING

The feed roller housing must be separated from the roll feed unit when removing the paper
entrance sensors, exit sensor, and roll feed roller.
The procedure to separate the roller housing is slightly different between roll unit 1 and roll unit 2.
Roll unit 1 [A] has no top cover while roll unit 2 [B] has a top cover.
Separate the Feed Roller Housing (Roller Unit 1)

1. Remove the roll unit 1 (p.4-93).
2. Disconnect the roll end sensor ( x1).
D262 4-118 SM
Roll Units
3. Remove the gear train cover ( x2).
4. Remove the clip and gear (clip x1, gear x1).
and Adjustment
Replacement
5. Raise the tip of the latch [1] out of its hole, rotate it to vertical [2], and then remove it
[3].
6. Remove the screw [A] on the left of the feed roller housing ( x1).
7. Remove the screw [B] on the right of the feed roller housing ( x1).
SM 4-119 D262
Roll Units
8. Remove the feed roller housing ( x4).
D262 4-120 SM
Roll Units
Separate the Feed Roller Housing (Roller Unit 2)

1. Remove the roll unit 2 (p.4-99).
2. Remove the upper part of the top cover and remove the screws on the back ( x8).
3. Remove the top cover.
and Adjustment
Replacement
4. Disconnect the roll end sensor ( x1).
SM 4-121 D262
Roll Units
5. Disconnect the plate to which the idle rollers are attached ( x6).
6. Remove the gear train cover ( x2).
D262 4-122 SM
Roll Units
7. Remove the clip and gear (clip x1, gear x1).
8. Raise the tip of the latch [1] out of its hole, rotate it to the vertical [2], and then remove
it [3].
and Adjustment
Replacement
9. Remove the screw [A] on the left of the feed roller housing ( x1).
10. Remove the screw [B] on the right of the feed roller housing ( x1).
SM 4-123 D262
Roll Units
11. Remove the feed roller housing.
4.5.10 PAPER ENTRANCE SENSORS, EXIT SENSOR
Remove
1. Separate the feed roller housing (p.4-118, p.4-121).
2. Remove the sensor bracket [A] ( x1).
3. Pull out the sensor bracket [A] release the clamp [B], and pull away the harness.
( x1).
4. Disconnect the paper entrance sensor (Right) [A] ( x1, x4).
D262 4-124 SM
Roll Units
5. Remove the exit sensor [B] ( x1, x4).
6. Remove the screws of the sensor bracket [A].
and Adjustment
Replacement
7. Pull out the sensor bracket [A].
SM 4-125 D262
Roll Units
8. Disconnect the paper entrance sensor (Center) ( x1).
Cleaning
Clean the sensors with a blower brush.
D262 4-126 SM
Roll Units
4.5.11 FEED ROLLER
Remove
1. Separate the feed roller housing (p.4-118, p.4-121).
2. Remove the cover the feed roller housing ( x3).
and Adjustment
Slide the feed roller housing and cover plate in the opposite direction to free the
Replacement

bosses from their notches, and then separate them.
You can see the feed roller [A].
SM 4-127 D262
Roll Units
3. Push the feed roller with the shaft to the right (clip x2).
4. Remove the feed roller from the shaft (clip x2).
5. Remove the idle rollers by opening a support on either side.
D262 4-128 SM
Roll Units
Precaution
 To re-assemble the feed roller housing and cover plate, match the hooks [A] and bosses [B]
with their contact points, and then press the halves in the opposite direction [C].
and Adjustment
Replacement
 The holes align when the halves are locked correctly.
4.5.12 ROLL END SENSOR

1. The roll end sensors are located on the roll unit 1 [A] and roll unit 2 [B].
To remove the roll end sensor on the roll unit 1, raise the paper exit guide.
2. Remove the two roll guides [A] ( x4).
SM 4-129 D262
Roll Units
3. Remove the sensor bracket ( x1, x1).
4. Remove the sensor [A] from the bracket ( x3).
D262 4-130 SM
Paper Transport
4.6 PAPER TRANSPORT
4.6.1 BYPASS SENSOR

1. Remove the right rear cover (p.4-33).
2. Remove the auto-nozzle check unit (p.4-287).
3. Disconnect the harness of the bypass sensor and push it into the hole in the bracket
[A] ( x1).
and Adjustment
Replacement
 Do not release the clamp [B]. This is to prevent the harness from falling inside the
bracket.
4. Pull away the feeler from the slit using a thin screwdriver, and disconnect the bypass
sensor from the bracket [A] ( x1).
SM 4-131 D262
Paper Transport
5. Remove the bypass sensor ( x1, x1, x4)
4.6.2 PRE-REGISTRATION SENSOR

2. Remove the auto-nozzle check unit (p.4-287).
3. Disconnect the pre-registration sensor with the bracket [A] and push it into the hole in
the bracket [B] ( x1, x1).
4. Pull out the pre-registration sensor bracket [A] from under the PCB box.
D262 4-132 SM
Paper Transport
5. Remove the pre-registration sensor ( x1, x1, x4)
4.6.3 REGISTRATION END SENSOR
and Adjustment
Replacement
2. Remove the registration end sensor [A] ( x1).
SM 4-133 D262
Paper Transport
4.6.4 PAPER TRANSPORT FAN MOTOR

1. Remove the cutter unit (p.4-139).
2. Disconnect the paper transport fan assembly [A] ( x2, x2).
 The bracket is sealed with the sponge squashed, so pull it out forcibly.
3. Remove the paper transport fan motor from the bracket ( x2, x3).
D262 4-134 SM
Paper Transport
 To reinstall the paper transport fan motor, align the bosses with the cutout of the main unit
and push it in.
and Adjustment
Replacement
SM 4-135 D262
Paper Exit
4.7 PAPER EXIT
4.7.1 CUTTER
1. Open the front cover (p.4-36).
3. Raise the cutter on the right [A] of the main unit and push it to the left until it stops at
[B].
4. Cutter ( x1).
D262 4-136 SM
Paper Exit
Cutter
4.7.2 EXIT GUIDE
Remove
and Adjustment
Replacement
1. Top cover (p.4-31).
2. Ink-cartridge cover (p.4-29).
3. Front cover (p.4-36).
4. Paper Exit Guide plate (p.4-37).
5. Guide rails [A] and [B] on both sides ( x2 for each).
6. Exit guide ( x9).
SM 4-137 D262
Paper Exit
Precaution
To install the left guide rail, make sure that the shaft of the guide rail is in the bracket hole of the
front cover switch.
D262 4-138 SM
Paper Exit
4.7.3 CUTTER UNIT

1. Raise the cutter on the right [A] of the main unit and push it to the left until it stops at
[B].
and Adjustment
2. Exit guide (p.4-137).
Replacement
4. Lower guide plate [A] ( x4).
5. Connector and clamp of the cutter motor ( x1, x1).
SM 4-139 D262
Paper Exit
6. Disconnect the left cutter switch ( x1, x1).
7. Sensor bracket on the left of the main unit ( x1, x2).
8. Remove the bracket of the right front cover safety switch on the right of the main unit
( x2).
D262 4-140 SM
Paper Exit
9. Remove the three connectors, release the clamps, and pull away the harness ( x3,
x7).
10. Remove the screws on the left [A] and right [B] of the main unit and take out the cutter
and Adjustment
Replacement
unit [C] ( x2).
SM 4-141 D262
Paper Exit
4.7.4 CUTTER SWITCH (RIGHT)

3. Cutter switch (right) ( x1, x1, x2).
D262 4-142 SM
Paper Exit
4.7.5 CUTTER SWITCH (LEFT)

2. Cutter switch (left) ( x1, x1, x2).
and Adjustment
Replacement
4.7.6 CUTTER MOTOR
1. Cutter unit (p.4-139).
2. Loosen the two screws of the cutter unit to release the tension of the timing belt [A].
3. Spring [B] ( x1).
4. Cutter motor assembly [A] ( x2).
5. Cutter motor ( x1, gear x1, x2)
SM 4-143 D262
Paper Exit
4.7.7 MOTOR TIMING BELT, CUTTER BELT
Remove
1. Cutter unit (p.4-139).
2. Cutter motor (p.4-143).
3. Disengage the timing belt from the flapper of the cutter unit.
4. Disconnect the race from the cutter unit bracket ( x5).
D262 4-144 SM
Paper Exit
5. Push the cutter [A] all the way to the right, pull the rail [B] up slightly, and then remove
the cutter.
6. Disconnect each end of the timing belt [A] and [B] from the cutter.
and Adjustment
Replacement
7. Cutter from the cutter belt drive gear ( x1, spacer x1).
SM 4-145 D262
Paper Exit
Precaution
 On the right end, place the timing belt on the top rail [A], the lower rail [B], and then behind the
flapper [C].
 Position the belt below the cutter as shown below.
D262 4-146 SM
Paper Exit
 Before reattaching the motor, make sure that the belt is positioned in the upper rail [A] and on
the lower rail [B].
 Tighten the screws so that there is tension on the belt.
and Adjustment
Replacement
4.7.8 PAPER EXIT SENSOR
SM 4-147 D262
Paper Exit
3. Exit sensor [A] ( x1, x4).
4.7.9 GUIDE PLATE SAFETY SENSOR

D262 4-148 SM
Paper Exit
3. Guide plate safety sensor [A] x1, x4).
and Adjustment
Replacement
SM 4-149 D262
Main Scan
4.8 MAIN SCAN
4.8.1 HORIZONTAL ENCODER SENSOR
Remove
1. Decap the print head and move the carriage unit to the center of the main unit. (p.4-52)
 When the carriage unit is moved, ink may spill out from the print head on to the
platen. To move the carriage unit, place a sheet of regular paper under the carriage
unit to protect the platen.
 The sheet under the carriage unit should be flat, with no paper wrinkling, which could
scratch the nozzle face or cause clogging of the nozzle.
 Do not place any film under the carriage unit.
 To place the regular paper, do not pull up the paper holding lever too much (p.4-14).
D262 4-150 SM
Main Scan
4. Slide the rail off the screws, [A] on the right of the rail and [B] on the left.
and Adjustment
Replacement
5. Remove the carriage top covers that secure the ink tube at both left and right of the
carriage unit ( x2).
SM 4-151 D262
Main Scan
6. Remove the carriage front cover [A]. ( x2)
 To remove the carriage front cover, remove the ink tube from the groove.
7. Remove the horizontal encoder sensor from the right rear of the carriage unit. ( x1,
x1)
D262 4-152 SM
Main Scan
Precaution
Check that the upper end of the horizontal encoder sheet is caught by the cutout at the lower part
of the horizontal encoder sensor.
and Adjustment
Replacement
4.8.2 HORIZONTAL ENCODER SHEET
Remove
 Do not touch the horizontal encoder sheet with bare hands.

SM 4-153 D262
Main Scan
3. Remove the rail from the screws [A] on the right of the rail and [B] on the left.
4. The horizontal encoder sheet [A] covers the main unit from left to right. The upper end
of the horizontal encoder sheet [B] is caught by the cutout of the horizontal encoder
sensor.
D262 4-154 SM
Main Scan
5. Pull the right end of the horizontal encoder sheet [1] to the right and unhook the sheet
[2].
6. Remove the left end of the horizontal encoder sheet from the spring [A] and remove
and Adjustment
Replacement
the spring [B]. ( x1)
7. Take out the horizontal encoder sheet.
SM 4-155 D262
Main Scan Rev. 02/17/2017
Cleaning
If the horizontal encoder sheet is dirty, wipe it with a cloth dampened with alcohol then with a dry
cloth before attaching.
Do not use a cotton swab or tissues whose fibers may adhere on the horizontal encoder
sheet.
Precaution
⇒ To attach the left end of the horizontal encoder sheet, place it so that the cutout [A] is placed
at the lower left.
Slide the horizontal encoder sheet to the cutout [B] of the horizontal encoder sensor.
A transparent sheet is attached to the service part of the horizontal encoder sheet for
protecting the part. Peel off the protective sheet before attaching the part.
D262 4-156 SM
Main Scan
 Before you turn the machine on, check the position of the horizontal encoder strip on the left.
 If the encoder strip is up on the bracket as shown at [A], pull it forward and down so it is in
front of the bracket as shown at [B].
and Adjustment
Replacement
SM 4-157 D262
Main Scan
4.8.3 HORIZONTAL MOTOR

2. Remove the left rear cover (p.4-35).
3. On the right of the main unit, loosen the tension screw [A] hidden behind the paper
holding lever until the horizontal timing belt is loosened with the timing belt pressure
bracket [B] moving to the left.
4. On the right of the main unit, remove the screw [A] and loosen the other three screws.
( x1)
5. On the left of the main unit, remove the screws of the horizontal motor [A]. ( x3)
D262 4-158 SM
Main Scan
6. On the left of the main unit, remove the horizontal timing belt from the motor drive gear
[A].
7. Remove the horizontal motor. ( x1)
and Adjustment
Replacement
Horizontal Motor
SM 4-159 D262
Main Scan
4.8.4 HORIZONTAL TIMING BELT

The horizontal timing belt is located behind the carriage unit. Before changing the horizontal
timing belt, remove the carriage unit (frame).
1. Remove the carriage unit (p.4-224).
2. Remove the plate from the carriage unit [A] [B]. ( x1)
3. Remove both ends of the horizontal timing belt from the grip.
D262 4-160 SM
Sub Scan
4.9 SUB SCAN
4.9.1 VERTICAL ENCODER SENSOR

Preparation
Remove:
 Left cover (p.4-20)
1. Disconnect the sensor bracket [A] ( x1, x1).
and Adjustment
Replacement
2. Separate the sensor and bracket ( x2).
SM 4-161 D262
Sub Scan
Reinstallation
Precaution
To attach the sub-scan encoder sensor, catch the sub-scan encoder sheet by the sensor cutout
[A].
D262 4-162 SM
Sub Scan
4.9.2 VERTICAL ENCODER WHEEL, TIMING BELT

The edge of the encoder wheel [A] is marked with coded patterns that are read by the encoder
sensor [B].
and Adjustment
Replacement
 Handle the encoder wheel by its hub. Never touch the edges of the vertical encoder
wheel with bare hands.
 To clean the edges of the encoder wheel, wipe it with a clean linen cloth dampened with
alcohol to remove dust, ink, or fingerprints.
 Never use a cotton swab, tissue, or any other kind of material that could shred and leave
fibers on the surface of the encoder.
Preparation
Remove:
 Vertical encoder sensor (p.4-161)
1. Disconnect the roller gear [A] and remove it, with the timing belt [B] ( x1, x1,
x1).
SM 4-163 D262
Sub Scan
2. Remove the tension spring [A] ( x1).

3. Remove the screws on the vertical motor bracket [B] and loosen the timing belt [C]
( x3).
4. Push the bracket [A] to the right, and then separate the timing belt [B] from the motor
drive gear.
5. Use the head of a small screwdriver to apply slight pressure to the back of the wheel
[A], and then remove the wheel with the timing belt.
D262 4-164 SM
Sub Scan
Vertical Encoder Wheel
and Adjustment
Replacement
4.9.3 VERTICAL ENCODER HP SENSOR
Preparation
Remove:
 Vertical encoder wheel (p.4-163)
1. Remove the sensor with the sensor bracket [A] ( x2, x1).
SM 4-165 D262
Sub Scan
2. Separate the bracket and sensor [A] ( x4).
Reinstallation
D262 4-166 SM
Sub Scan
4.9.4 VERTICAL MOTOR

Preparation
Remove:
 Left rear cover (p.4-35)
 Vertical encoder wheel (p.4-163)
1. Disconnect the connector of the motor bracket.( x1)
and Adjustment
Replacement
2. Slide and remove the motor bracket [A].
SM 4-167 D262
Sub Scan
3. Separate the motor and bracket [A] ( x4).
4.9.5 BYPASS STOPPER CLUTCH SENSOR

Preparations
Remove:
 Left rear cover (p.4-35)
1. Turn the gear [A] counterclockwise and separate the sensor filler [B] from the bypass
stopper clutch sensor [C].
D262 4-168 SM
Sub Scan
2. Bypass stopper clutch sensor bracket [A] ( x2, x1).
3. Remove the bypass stopper clutch sensor from the bracket ( x2).
and Adjustment
Replacement
SM 4-169 D262
Sub Scan
4.9.6 BYPASS STOPPER CLUTCH

Preparations
Remove:
 Bypass stopper clutch sensor (p.4-168)
1. Sensor filler [A] ( x1).
2. Gear [A] ( x1).
D262 4-170 SM
Sub Scan
 If the clutch plate is detached from the gear, place the gear with the clutch side [A] up
and attach it to the gear.
 Take care that the clutch plate is attached correctly with the clutch side.
3. Slide the gear [A] to the outside of the main unit.( x1, x3, x1)
and Adjustment
Replacement
SM 4-171 D262
Sub Scan
4. Bypass stopper clutch [A]. ( x1)
D262 4-172 SM
Carriage Unit
4.10 CARRIAGE UNIT
and Adjustment
Replacement
 Always follow instructions and work carefully to avoid spilling ink from the ink tubes and
the tops of the ink sub tanks.
 If ink spills onto a printed circuit board at the base of the FFC, the print head unit will
become unusable and require replacement.
1. Horizontal line on both the left and right margins.
 The width of the left and right margins must be the same.
 The width of the left and right margins must be in the range: 2.5 to 3.0 mm.
2. If the left and right margins are the same size and within the range 2.5 to 3.0 mm, no
adjustment is necessary.
-or-
If the margins need adjustment, do the following steps.
3. Use SP2-104-001 (Paper Edge Detection Delay Adj: Normal Paper Right Edge) and
SP2-104-002 (Paper Edge Detection Delay Adj: Normal Paper Left Edge) to adjust the left
and right margins. Here are some sample measurements and correction entries.
SM 4-173 D262
Carriage Unit
Margin Measured (mm) SP Enter +/- Target
Right 1 2104-001 +2 3
Right 4.5 2104-001 -1.5 3
Left 1.0 2104-002 -2.0 3
Left 4.5 2104-002 +1.5 3
4. Print another test pattern with SP4-417 (IPU Test Pattern Setting - Pattern Selection) Pattern
3 Grid Pattern A and check the results.
 SP4-417
 Enter the number for the desired test pattern, switch the display to the "Copy
Window" then press the [Start] button.
5. Repeat the adjustment procedure until both measurements are equal and within range.
6. After completing the adjustment, open SP2-104-031 (Paper Edge Detection Delay Adj:
Automatic Conversion) and touch [EXECUTE].
 This saves the adjusted settings.
 These adjusted settings are applied not only to Normal Paper but all other types of paper
included under this SP code.
7. Open SP4-012 (Scanner Edge Margin).
 Touch SP4-012-007 (DF: Left Edge), and then restore the original setting noted in Step 8.
 Touch SP4-012-008 (DF: Right Edge), and then restore the original setting noted in Step
8.
 SP4-012
 These SP's define borders around the image area output by the scanner. Each edge
can be set independent of the others.
D262 4-174 SM
Carriage Unit
4.10.2 DRESS SENSOR
 To remove the DRESS sensor, never loosen nor remove the two screws shown below
(the figure below shows the main unit with the carriage left cover removed).
and Adjustment
Replacement
Remove
1. Uncap the print head and move the carriage unit to the left of the main unit (p.4-52) .
 When the carriage unit is moved, ink may spill out from the print head onto the platen.
To move the carriage unit, place a sheet of plain paper under the carriage unit to
protect the platen.
 To place the plain paper, do not pull up the paper holding lever too much (p.4-14).
4. Place a sheet of paper at the left end of the platen and move the carriage unit above the
paper manually.
SM 4-175 D262
Carriage Unit
5. Remove the carriage left cover. ( x1)
6. Remove the DRESS sensor. ( x1, x1, x1)
DRESS Sensor
D262 4-176 SM
Carriage Unit
Cleaning
Remove the paper dust on the sensor with a blower brush. If the ink-mist is attached, remove it
with non-woven fabric or a cotton swab.
and Adjustment
Replacement
Adjustment
After replacing the DRESS sensor, adjust the paper edge detection delay, following the procedure
below.
Paper Edge Detection Delay Adjustment
1. In system settings, make settings for the roll unit 1 as follows:
Paper size: 914 mm (36 inches)
Paper type: Not displayed (plain paper)
2. Set the roll unit (plain paper) whose size is different from the setting, with this
setting retained.
3. Enter SP mode and make the settings described below.
SP Settings
SP4-417-001 (IPU Test Pattern Setting: test

3: Grid Pattern A
pattern select)
0 (Retrieves the original

SP4-012-007 (Scanner Edge Margin: DF: left)
value after adjustment)
0 (Retrieves the original

SP4-012-008 (Scanner Edge Margin: DF: right)
value after adjustment)
SP2-103-003 (Printing Erase Margin: left edge) 3.0 mm
SP2-103-004 (Printing Erase Margin: right edge)) 3.0 mm
SM 4-177 D262
Carriage Unit
SP Settings
SP2-104-001 (Paper Edge Detection Delay

+3.0 mm
Adjustment: plain paper: right edge)
SP2-104-002 (Paper Edge Detection Delay

-3.0 mm
Adjustment: plain paper: left edge)
4. Move to Copy mode of SP mode and make settings and preparations as described
below.
Item Settings/Preparations
Original size Width: 594 mm or more, Length: approx. 210 mm
Paper size Synchro-cut
Print mode Monochrome High-Speed mode
5. Place the right original side guide as follows.

 914 mm
6. Place the original in alignment with the right original side guide and copy it.
 A pattern may be printed on the platen, depending on the sensitivity of the

DRESS sensor. In such a case, clean the platen after adjustment. (Paper Feed
System)
[A]:Direction for paper feeding

[B]:Original
[C]:Side guide
7. Check the left and right margins of the printed grid pattern.
D262 4-178 SM
Carriage Unit
Left and right margins of the grid

Solutions
pattern
Retrieve the settings for

SP4-012-007/008 (Scanner Edge Margin:
Within 2.5 to 3.0 mm
DF: left/right) to the values before
adjustment. This completes adjustment.
Outside 2.5 to 3.0 mm Adjust the margin as described below.
Margin Adjustments
1. Set SP2-104 (paper edge detection delay adjustment) as described below in SP
mode.
Right edge adjustment: Set SP2-104-001 (right edge of plain paper) as described in the
and Adjustment
table below.
Replacement
Add the value so that the margin becomes 3.0
mm.
To increase the margin
Example: If the current margin is 1.0 mm, enter
+2.0 mm as the current value.
Subtract the value so that the margin becomes 3.0

mm
To decrease the margin
-1.5 mm as the current value.
Left edge adjustment: Set SP2-104-002 (left edge of plain paper) as described in the
table below.
Subtract the value so that the margin becomes 3.0

mm.
To increase the margin
-2.0 mm as the current value.
Add the value so that the margin becomes 3.0

mm.
To decrease the margin
+1.5 mm as the current value.
SM 4-179 D262
Carriage Unit
2. Print the grid pattern again and check the right and left margins.
If the margin is between 2.5 and 3.0 mm, go to the next step.
3. Do SP2-104-031 (Paper Edge Detection Delay Adj: Automatic Conversion).
When the SP is done, the expected value based on the adjustment of the plain paper will
be reflected on the other type of paper.
4. Return the settings for the following SPs to the default.
 SP4-012-007 (Scanner Edge Margin: DF: left)
 SP4-012-008 (Scanner Edge Margin: DF: right)
4.10.3 LED
 To remove the LED, never loosen nor remove the two screws shown below (the figure
below shows the main unit with the carriage left cover removed).
Remove
1. Uncap the print head and move the carriage unit to the left of the main unit (p.4-52).
protect the platen.
D262 4-180 SM
Carriage Unit
4. Place a sheet of paper at the left end of the platen and move the carriage unit above the
paper manually.
and Adjustment
Replacement
6. Remove the LED.
SM 4-181 D262
Carriage Unit
4.10.4 HRB (HEAD RELAY BOARD)
Remove
1. Uncap the print head and move the carriage unit to the center of the main unit (p.4-52).
protect the platen.
3. Remove the front cover (p.4-36).
5. Remove the carriage upper cover that hold the ink tubes on both sides of the carriage
unit. ( x2)
D262 4-182 SM
Carriage Unit
 To remove the carriage front cover, remove the ink tubes from the groove.
and Adjustment
Replacement
7. Release the FFCs from the left of the HRB. ( x2)
 To release the FFCs, push the plate [A] to the HRB.
SM 4-183 D262
Carriage Unit
8. Release the FFCs from the right of the HRB. ( x2)
9. Release the FFC from the center of the HRB. ( x1)
 Pack the FFCs on the FFC guide as shown below.
D262 4-184 SM
Carriage Unit
10. Remove the connector from the HRB. ( x7)
11. Release the FFCs (front side) from the bottom of the HRB. ( x5)
and Adjustment
Replacement
 To release the FFCs, be sure you understand of the directions of the locks.
 To release the FFCs [A], pull the lock toward you.
 To release the FFCs [B], push up the lock.
SM 4-185 D262
Carriage Unit
12. Release the FFCs (backward) from the bottom of the HRB. ( x5)
13. Remove the HRB. ( x1)
Precaution
The sheets are attached to the eight FFCs at the lower part of the HRB. To attach the FFCs to the
HRB, connect the FFCs by holding the sheets.
D262 4-186 SM
Carriage Unit
4.10.5 HEAD LIFT MOTOR
 To remove the head lift motor, never loosen nor remove the four screws shown below (the
figure below shows the main unit with the right cover removed).
and Adjustment
Replacement
protect the platen.
SM 4-187 D262
Carriage Unit
3. Remove the head lift motor [A]. ( x1, x3)
Head Lift Motor
D262 4-188 SM
Carriage Unit
4.10.6 PRINT HEAD UNIT
 Before starting the task of changing the print head unit, set the main power switch to OFF
and back ON to terminate the maintenance operation of the print head unit to be changed.
Then the maintenance operation for the old print head unit will be prevented from being
performed for the new print head unit.
The unit on the left is the black print head unit ([A] in the figure below). It includes print heads and
head tanks for K1 and K2.
The unit on the right is the color print head unit ([B] in the figure below). It includes print heads and
head tanks for Y1, M1, C, M2, and Y2.
The print head and head tank cannot be replaced separately. To change the print head and head
tank, change the print head unit.
The black and color print head units [A] and [B] can be replaced separately or simultaneously.
and Adjustment
Replacement
SM 4-189 D262
Carriage Unit
Black Print Head Unit Accessories
No. Item Q'ty
1 Black Print Head Unit 1
2 Ink Collector Tank 1
3 Ink Cartridge (Black: K) 1
4 Protective Sheet 1
5 Plug (Uncapped) 2
6 Plug (Capped) 2
D262 4-190 SM
Carriage Unit
Color Print Head Unit Accessories
and Adjustment
Replacement
No. Item Q'ty
1 Color Print Head Unit 1
2 Ink Collector Tank 1
3 Ink Cartridge (Color: C, Y, M) 3
4 Protective Sheet 1
5 Plug (Uncapped) 5
6 Plug (Capped) 5
SM 4-191 D262
Carriage Unit
Carriage Unit Cover Removal

1. Set the main power switch to OFF and back ON to terminate the maintenance operation
of the print head unit to be changed.
protect the platen.
5. Open the ink collector tank cover and remove the customer's ink collector tank [A].
6. Attach the new ink collector tank [B] and close the cover.
7. Remove the carriage left cover.
D262 4-192 SM
Carriage Unit
8. Remove the carriage unit upper cover that hold the ink tubes on both sides of the
carriage unit. ( x2)
and Adjustment
Replacement
SM 4-193 D262
Carriage Unit
Black Print Head Unit Removal
 When replacing a print head, never touch the main ink level sensor feeler. Doing so
applies compression to the head tank that will cause ink to spill.
 The black print heads have two main ink level sensor feelers [A], and the color print
heads have five [B].
1. Remove the carriage unit covers (p.4-192).

2. Remove the thermistor from the head tank (K2) of the print head unit.
 Unbend the tip of the harness then remove.
3. Release the FFCs from the left of the HRB ( x2)
D262 4-194 SM
Carriage Unit
and Adjustment
Replacement
SM 4-195 D262
Carriage Unit
6. Release the FFCs (backward) from the bottom of the HRB. ( x2)
7. Take two caps of the accessories of the new print head.
D262 4-196 SM
Carriage Unit
8. Push the two white projections of the black print head to release the air from the head
tanks (K1) and (K2).
9. Attach the protective sheet enclosed in the new print head unit to the print head to be
removed.
and Adjustment
Replacement
 The protective sheet shields the main unit and its surroundings from ink spills.
10. Remove the ink tube (K1) from the ink supply port of the print head [A] and attach the
plug to the joint of the ink tube (K1) [B].
SM 4-197 D262
Carriage Unit
11. Take two plugs (capped) of the accessories of the new print head unit.
12. Attach the plug (capped) [A] to the ink supply port of the print head to be removed.
 The cap prevents the ink leakage from the ink supply port.
13. Remove the ink tube (K2) from the ink supply port of the print head and attach the plug
to the joint and the plug (capped) to the ink supply port of the removed ink tube (K2).
14. Slightly pull up the black print head to be removed to release it from the guide rod
backward. Then place it on several sheets of paper.
D262 4-198 SM
Carriage Unit
15. Check that the ink does not spill on the paper beneath the removed print head. If it
spills, change the paper.
16. Release the FFCs from the removed print head.
and Adjustment
Replacement
 Attach the released FFCs to the new print head.
New Black Print Head Unit Installation

1. Remove the orange tape [A] and bracket [B] from the new print head.
SM 4-199 D262
Carriage Unit
2. Attach the released FFCs to the new print head.
3. Remove the cradle [A] from the new print head.
 Put the old print head on the cradle, wrap them in paper to avoid ink leakage, and put
them in a plastic bag to bring them back.
4. Attach the print head to the guide rod.
 Do not apply excessive force when attaching the print head to the guide rod. Or the
deviation may occur upon print head installation.
D262 4-200 SM
Carriage Unit
5. Push the two white projections on the print head to release the air.
 Releasing of the air removes the negative pressure and avoid bubbles.
6. Remove the two plugs (capped) from the ink supply ports of the print head.
and Adjustment
Replacement
7. Remove the plugs [A] from two ink tubes and attach them to the ink supply ports [B].
8. Remove the protective sheet from the print head and discard it.
 When removing the protective sheet, do not pull up the ink tube too much. Or you
might accidentally remove the ink tube.
SM 4-201 D262
Carriage Unit
9. Connect the FFCs (back side) to the lower connectors at the lower part of the HRB.
( x2)
 To connect the FFCs, be sure you understand the directions of the locks of the
connectors.
 To connect the FFCs [A], push in the lock.
 To connect the FFCs [B], push down the lock.
D262 4-202 SM
Carriage Unit
10. Connect the FFCs (front side) to the upper connectors at the lower part of the HRB.
( x2)
and Adjustment
Replacement
 If the FFC is pulled after connecting to the HRB, it may be hooked into the OCFS
actuator. Then the FFC becomes longer than the required length to the connector
and the deflected part may push the OCFS actuator. In this case, release the FFC
and release the hooked part. Then connect it to the HRB again.
Not hooked Hooked
1: Filler
2: FFC
3: HRB
SM 4-203 D262
Carriage Unit
11. Connect the connector to the HRB. ( x1)
12. Connect the FFCs to the HRB. ( x2)
13. Attach the thermistor to the head tank (K2) of the print head unit.
 Insert the thermistor into the hole of the head tank from left to right, fold back the tip
of the harness, then feed the thermistor back into the hole.
 Insert the sensor head [A] so that it placed above the harness [B] in the hole of the
head tank.
D262 4-204 SM
Carriage Unit
14. Place the ink tubes on the path of the print head, from right to left in order of K2 and
K1.
 Place the ink tube (K2) [A] on the path of the print head first.
 Then place the ink tube (K1) [B] upon the ink tube (K1) on the path of the print head.
and Adjustment
Replacement
15. Attach the carriage unit cover.
For attaching the carriage unit cover, perform the procedure for removing in reverse order.
(Print Head Unit)
SM 4-205 D262
Carriage Unit
 To attach the carriage upper cover, move the harness to the HRB so that no pressure
is applied to the ink tube.
 1: HRB
 2: Electrode pin harness
 3: Thermistor
 4: Head tank
 Keep extra length of the thermistor harness above the carriage front cover line as
shown in the illustration below.
D262 4-206 SM
Carriage Unit
 Fold the electrode pin harness to the left above the carriage front cover line as shown
in the illustration below.
and Adjustment
Replacement
16. When the black print head replacement ends, reset the counter and perform the initial
filling sequence. (Print Head Unit)
Color Print Head Unit Removal
 When replacing a print head, never touch the main ink level sensor feeler. Doing so
applies compression to the head tank that will cause ink to spill.
 The black print heads have two main ink level sensor feelers [A], and the color print
heads have five [B].
1. Remove the carriage unit covers (p.4-192).

2. Remove the thermistor from the head tank (Y1/M1) of the print head unit.
 Unbend the tip of the harness [A] then remove.
SM 4-207 D262
Carriage Unit
D262 4-208 SM
Carriage Unit
and Adjustment
Replacement
5. Remove the connectors from the HRB. ( x2)
SM 4-209 D262
Carriage Unit
7. Release the FFCs (backward) from the lower part of the HRB. ( x3)
8. Take five plugs of the accessories of the new print head.
D262 4-210 SM
Carriage Unit
9. Push the three white projections of the color print head to release the air from the head
tanks (Y1, M1), (C), and (M2, Y2).
10. Attach the protective sheet enclosed in the new print head unit to the print head to be
removed.
and Adjustment
Replacement
 The protective sheet shields the main unit and its surroundings from ink spills.
11. Remove the ink tube (M2) [A] from the ink supply port of the print head, and attach the
plug to the ink tube joint (M2) [B].
SM 4-211 D262
Carriage Unit
12. Take five plugs (capped) of the accessories of the new print head unit.
13. Attach the plug (capped) [A] to the ink supply port of the print head to be removed.
 The cap prevents the ink leakage from the ink supply port.
14. Remove the ink tubes (Y2, C, M1, Y1) from the ink supply ports of the print heads and
attach the plugs to the joints and the plugs (capped) to the ink supply ports of the
removed ink tubes.
15. Slightly pull up the color print head to be removed to release it from the guide lock
backward. Then place it on several sheets of paper.
D262 4-212 SM
Carriage Unit
16. Check that the ink does not spill on the paper beneath the removed print head. If it
spills, change the paper.
New Color Print Head Unit Installation
and Adjustment
Replacement
1. Remove the orange tape and bracket from the new print head unit.
2. Remove the cradle [A] from the new print head.
SM 4-213 D262
Carriage Unit
 Put the old print head on the cradle, wrap them in paper to avoid ink leakage, and put
them in a plastic bag to bring them back.
3. Attach the print head to the guide rod.
 Do not apply excessive force when attaching the print head to the guide rod. Or the
deviation may occur upon print head installation.
4. Push the three white projections on the print head to release the air.
 Releasing of the air removes the negative pressure and avoid bubbles.
5. Remove the five plugs (capped) from the ink supply ports of the print heads.
6. Remove the plugs [A] from five ink tubes and attach them to the ink supply ports [B].
D262 4-214 SM
Carriage Unit
7. Remove the protective sheet from the print head and discard it.
 When removing the protective sheet, do not pull up the ink tube too much. Or you
might accidentally remove the ink tube.
and Adjustment
Replacement
8. Connect the FFCs (back side) to the lower connectors at the lower part of the HRB.
( x3)
SM 4-215 D262
Carriage Unit
 To connect the FFCs, be sure you understand the directions of the locks of the
connectors.
 To connect the FFCs [A], push in the lock.
 To connect the FFCs [B], push down the lock
9. Connect the FFCs (front side) to the upper connectors at the lower part of the HRB.
( x3)
D262 4-216 SM
Carriage Unit
 If the FFC is pulled after connecting to the HRB, it may be hooked into the OCFS
actuator. Then the FFC becomes longer than the required length to the connector
and the deflected part may push the OCFS actuator. In this case, release the FFC
and release the hooked part. Then connect it to the HRB again.
Not hooked Hooked
and Adjustment
Replacement
1: Filler
2: FFC
3: HRB
10. Connect the connector to the HRB. ( x2)
SM 4-217 D262
Carriage Unit
11. Connect the FFC to the center connector of the HRB. ( x1)
12. Connect the FFCs to the right connectors of the HRB. ( x2)
13. Attach the thermistor to the head tanks (Y1/M1) of the print head units.
D262 4-218 SM
Carriage Unit
 Insert the thermistor into the hole of the head tank from right to left, fold back the tip
of the harness [A], then feed the thermistor back into the hole.
 Insert the sensor head so that it placed above the harness in the hole of the head
tank.
and Adjustment
Replacement
14. Place the ink tubes on the path of the print head, from right to left in order of Y1, M1, C,
Y2, and M2.
 Place the ink tube (Y1) on the path of the print head first. [A]
 Then place the ink tube (M1) upon the ink tube (Y1) on the path of the print head. [B]
 Then place the ink tube (C) upon the ink tube (M1) [C] and the ink tube (Y2) upon the ink
tube (C) on the path of the print head. [D]
 Last of all, place the ink tube (M2) upon the ink tube (Y2) on the path of the print head. [E]
SM 4-219 D262
Carriage Unit
15. Attach the carriage unit cover.

For attaching the carriage unit cover, perform the procedure for removing in reverse order.
(Print Head Unit)
 To attach the carriage upper cover, move the harness to the HRB so that no pressure
is applied to the ink tube.
 1: HRB
 2: Electrode pin harness
 3: Thermistor
 4: Head tank
 Keep extra length of the thermistor harness above the carriage front cover line as
shown in the illustration below.
D262 4-220 SM
Carriage Unit
 Fold the electrode pin harness to the left above the carriage front cover line as shown
in the illustration below.
and Adjustment
Replacement
16. When the color print head replacement terminates, reset the counter and perform the
initial filling sequence. (Print Head Unit)
After the Print Head Unit Replacement

When the print head unit replacement terminates, reset the counter with SP and fill the ink. When
the black print head is replaced, adjust the density.
Then adjust the head position.
Counter Reset/Ink Filling
1. Check that the new ink collector tank is attached.
2. Open the ink cartridge cover, remove the customer's ink cartridge, and attach the
new ink cartridge.
 Keep the ink-cartridge cover open.

3. Set the main power switch to ON. If an error is displayed on the operation panel,
ignore it.
 If SC282-XX (air detection frequency error) is displayed, ignore it.

4. Enter SP mode
5. Select SP2-400-001 (Carriage Unit Replacement NV Clear), set the values shown
below depending on the replaced print head unit, and execute the SP.
SM 4-221 D262
Carriage Unit
For Enter
Black and color print heads 0
Black print head only 1
Color print head only 2
6. Exit SP mode and set the main power switch to OFF.

7. Close the ink-cartridge cover.
8. Set the main power switch to ON (the initial filling sequence will begin
automatically).
 The initial filling sequence requires about 15 minutes.

 When the initial filling sequence ends, the machine beeps.
 Do not use the operation panel nor open the cover during the initial filling
sequence.
9. When the initial filling sequence completes, print the nozzle check pattern and
check that every nozzle is firing. (Nozzle Check Pattern Print)
 If the print head unit is uncapped during replacing, some nozzle may not be firing.
In such a case, recover it by cleaning or flushing the print heads. (Clean Print
Heads, Flush Print Heads)
Density Check (Black Print Head Only)
1. Enter SP mode
2. Select SP2-902-001 (internal test pattern selection: R120 (MtoP) internal pattern),
and use "10", "11", or "12", as required.
The thickness of the pattern decreases in the order of 10, 11, and 12.
3. Check the density of head 1 and of head 2 referring the printed pattern.
Printing from the tip to between about 96 and 128 mm is for print head 1.
Printing from the tip to between about 128 and 160 mm is for print head 2.
4. If a difference is detected, adjust with SP3-132-001/002 (circuit corrected value).
SP3-132-001: For print head 1
SP3-132-002: For print head 2
 Increasing the value makes printing darker.

 Adjust it to between 94% and 97%.
5. Exit SP mode.
D262 4-222 SM
Carriage Unit
Head Position Adjustment

1. Check that there is no error on the nozzle check pattern print, and adjust the head
position for the roll unit 1 with the four methods described below. (Head Position
Adjustment)
(1) "Normal (Plain)", "Prevent Paper Abrasion: Strong (Head Height High)", "Standard"
(2) "Coated Paper", "Prevent Paper Abrasion: Off (Head Height Standard), "Quality
Priority"
(3) "Coated Paper", "Prevent Paper Abrasion: Off (Head Height Standard), "Speed
Priority"
(4) "Normal (Plain)", "Prevent Paper Abrasion: Strong (Head Height Standard)",
"Standard"
 For the coated paper mode, plain paper can be used but the setting should be
"Coated Paper".
and Adjustment
Replacement
 Head position can be adjusted automatically or manually.
2. Enter SP mode and do SP5-884-003 (Factory setting: Head Gap Backup).
 Then the adjusted results will be applied to another paper type and mode.
However, adjust the head position for each paper type and mode if necessary.
3. Exit SP mode.
Ink Cartridge and Ink Collector Tank Replacement
1. Open the ink-cartridge cover, and remove the ink cartridge.
2. Attach the customer's ink cartridge and close the ink-cartridge cover.
3. Open the ink collector tank cover and remove the ink collector tank.
4. Attach the customer's ink collector tank and close the cover.
SM 4-223 D262
Carriage Unit
4.10.7 CARRIAGE UNIT
 The screws shown below are adjusted their position at the factory. Never loosen nor
remove them for changing or adjusting.
Forty screws on the backward frame of the main unit (the figure is with the upper cover
removed)
Four screws beneath the paper holding lever (the figure below is with the right cover
removed)
D262 4-224 SM
Carriage Unit
Remove Ink Supply Unit

1. Remove the maintenance unit (p.4-282).
3. Remove the ink collector tank (p.4-278).
4. Remove the ink cartridge cover (p.4-29).
6. Remove the paper exit guide (p.4-37).
7. Remove the screws around the ink supply unit. ( x3)
and Adjustment
Replacement
SM 4-225 D262
Carriage Unit
8. Release the clamps, free the ink tubes, and remove the connectors [A] and [B] of the
ink supply unit.
( x2, x2)
9. Release the clamps inside the frame on the right front of the main unit and free the ink
tubes. ( x3)
10. Release the clamps inside the frame at the center of the main unit and free the ink
tubes. ( x2)
D262 4-226 SM
Carriage Unit
11. Remove the ink supply unit.
Free the Harness on the Right Side of the Main Unit

1. Release the clamps on the right top of the main unit and free the harness. ( x3)
and Adjustment
Replacement
SM 4-227 D262
Carriage Unit
2. Remove the connector [A] of the ink collector tank cover sensor inside the right panel,
release the clamps, and free the sensor harness. ( x1, x4)
3. Remove the connector of the ink cartridge cover sensor [A] inside the front of the main
unit. ( x1)
D262 4-228 SM
Carriage Unit
4. Remove the connector [A] of the ink supply unit. ( x2)
5. Take out the harnesses from the main unit and move them to the back of the main unit.
and Adjustment
Replacement
6. Release the clamps [A] and remove the connectors [B] on the right back of the main
unit, and free the harness. ( x4, x2)
SM 4-229 D262
Carriage Unit
7. Free the auto-nozzle check unit (p.4-287).

8. Release the clamps inside the right of the main unit. ( x4)
9. Remove the connectors, and free the harnesses. ( x4)
10. Take out the harnesses from the main unit.

11. Move the harnesses to the back of the main unit.
D262 4-230 SM
Carriage Unit
Main Ink Level Sensor Bracket Removal
 The screws shown below are adjusted their position at the factory. Never loosen nor
remove them for changing or adjusting.
 A screw at the upper part of the air release solenoid bracket.
and Adjustment
Replacement
 Two screws at the lower part of the air release solenoid and main ink level sensor bracket.
SM 4-231 D262
Carriage Unit
1. Mark the point of the boss of the main ink level sensor bracket (a red line in the
illustration below).
 When the main ink level sensor bracket is to be attached, be sure to place the OCFS
actuator at the center of the OCFS actuator sensor. For details, see "Attach the main
ink level sensor bracket in the procedure below" in "Precautions" for attaching the
carriage unit.
2. Remove the main ink level sensor bracket on the right front of the main unit. ( x2,
x1)
D262 4-232 SM
Carriage Unit
Ink Tube Rail Removal

1. Loosen the right and left screws on the ink tube rail. ( x2)
and Adjustment
Replacement
2. Remove the rail from the loosened screws [A] and [B].
SM 4-233 D262
Carriage Unit
3. Move the rail to the left and pull it out from the rear of the carriage unit to take it out
from the main unit.
Horizontal Encoder Sheet Removal
 Do not touch the horizontal encoder sheet with bare hands.

1. Release and remove the spring on the left of the main unit. ( x1)
2. On the right of the main unit, remove the right end of the horizontal encoder sheet from
the screw.
D262 4-234 SM
Carriage Unit
3. Pull out the horizontal encoder sheet from the back of the carriage unit [A] to take it out
from the main unit [B].
Tension Bracket Removal

1. Remove the screws of the tension bracket [A] inside the right of the main unit. ( x3)
and Adjustment
Replacement
2. On the right of the main unit, remove the tension screw hidden behind the paper
holding lever and the tension bracket is removed. ( x1)
 When removing the outside screw, hold the bracket to prevent the spring, that is not
fixed to the bracket, from falling.
SM 4-235 D262
Carriage Unit
3. Remove the plate of the tension bracket together with the horizontal timing belt. ( x3)
D262 4-236 SM
Carriage Unit
Right Plate Removal

1. Remove the actuator [A] beneath the paper holding lever. ( x1)
and Adjustment
Replacement
2. Remove the paper holding lever. ( x1)
SM 4-237 D262
Carriage Unit
3. Remove the blue screws on the right front plate. ( x7)
4. Remove the right front plate.
5. Release the clamps on the right back of the main unit, free the harnesses, and move
them to the back of the main unit. ( x2)
D262 4-238 SM
Carriage Unit
6. Remove the right panel.

1. Remove the screws on the right back of the main unit. ( x6)
and Adjustment
Replacement
2. Remove the screws on the front. ( x3)
SM 4-239 D262
Carriage Unit
3. Remove the plate [A] inside the right panel. ( x1)
4. Remove the right panel.
D262 4-240 SM
Carriage Unit
Carriage Unit Removal

2. Remove the carriage upper cover that hold the ink tubes on both sides of the carriage
and Adjustment
Replacement
unit. ( x2)
SM 4-241 D262
Carriage Unit
4. Release the FFCs from the left of the HRB. ( x2)
D262 4-242 SM
Carriage Unit
and Adjustment
Replacement
SM 4-243 D262
Carriage Unit
8. Release the FFCs (front side) from the lower part of the HRB. ( x5)
D262 4-244 SM
Carriage Unit
9. Release the FFCs (backward) from the lower part of the HRB. ( x5)
10. Slide the wire retainer on the right top of the FFC guide plate to the left while holding it
pushed and remove it from the cutout.
and Adjustment
Replacement
11. Remove the sheet from the FFC guide plate.
SM 4-245 D262
Carriage Unit
12. Release the FFCs from the guide
13. Take the plugs for attaching to the ink tubes and plugs (capped) for attaching to the ink
supply ports of the print head unit as they are disconnected, to prevent ink leakage.
Two plugs for black print head and five plugs for color print head are necessary.
14. Place a large sheet of paper under the carriage unit. (This prevents the platen from
being dirty caused by ink leakage as the ink tube is removed.)
D262 4-246 SM
Carriage Unit
15. Push the right and left white projections of the black and color print heads to release
the air from the head tanks.
16. Attach the protective sheet [A] to the new print head.
and Adjustment
Replacement
17. Remove the ink tube (M2) [A] from the ink supply port of the print head, and attach the
plug [B] to the ink tube port.
SM 4-247 D262
Carriage Unit
18. Attach the plug (capped) [A] to the ink supply port from which the ink tube (M2) was
removed.
19. Repeat steps 16 and 17 for ink tubes (Y2), (C), (M1), (Y1), (K2), and (K1) in this order.
20. Remove the HRB. ( x1)
D262 4-248 SM
Carriage Unit
21. Attach the plugs of all seven ink tubes and seven ink supply ports, then remove the
bracket that secures the ink tubes. ( x1)
22. Remove the ink tubes from the carriage unit.
and Adjustment
Replacement
23. On the left of the main unit, remove the horizontal timing belt [A] from the motor drive
gear.
24. Move the carriage unit to the right end of the main unit [C] while pulling up the
horizontal timing belt [B] (to prevent the belt from fouling at the back of the carriage
unit).
SM 4-249 D262
Carriage Unit
25. Hold the carriage unit with both hands and remove it from the guide rod.
 Place the removed carriage unit on the flat place.

 Place the carriage unit with the nozzles facing down on a flat paper.
Carriage Unit
D262 4-250 SM
Carriage Unit
Precaution
Check the position of the carriage unit after attaching it to the guide rod.
1. The shaft [A] at the lower part of the carriage unit is inserted in the guide rod.
2. The slider [B] at the upper part of the carriage unit contacts with the rail as shown below.
Before attaching the bracket to secure the ink tubes, check that the ink tubes are lined
correctly as shown below.
and Adjustment
Replacement
1. Pass the ink tubes, K2, K1, Y1, M1, C, Y2, and M2 in this order one by one through the
upper part of the carriage unit.
2. Pass the ink tubes from left side to the right side of the carriage unit in the order
described above.
 Then the tubes are prevented from crossing inside the carriage unit.
 If the ink tubes are crossed, the bracket to secure the ink tubes may not be
attached correctly.
3. If the plugged ink tube is hard to pass the upper part of the carriage unit, pull it out using
the longnose pliers.
SM 4-251 D262
Carriage Unit
Place the ink tubes on the print head in the procedure below.
1. Remove the plugs of the ink tubes (K1) and (K2) and the ink supply ports of the print
head.
2. Attach the ink tubes (K1) and (K2) to the ink supply ports and place them on the path of
the print head in the order of K2 and K1.
Place the ink tube (K2) [A] on the path of the print head first.
Then place the ink tube (K1) [B] upon the ink tube (K2) on the path of the print head.
3. Remove the plugs from the ports of the ink tubes (Y1), (M1), (C), (M2), and (Y2) and the
ink supply ports of the print heads.
Y2, and M2.
 Then place the ink tube (C) upon the ink tube (M1) [C] and the ink tube (Y2) upon the
D262 4-252 SM
Carriage Unit
ink tube (C) on the path of the print head. [D]

 Last of all, place the ink tube (M2) upon the ink tube (Y2) on the path of the print
head. [E]
Before attaching the bracket to secure the ink tubes, check the followings:
 Place the ink tube so that the cutout of the ink tube guide is placed 1 to 4 mm apart from
the side of the carriage unit.
 Check that there is the space between the ink tube guide and the carriage unit.
and Adjustment
Replacement
To attach the bracket to secure the ink tubes, insert the two projections under the bracket
to the holes of the carriage unit.
SM 4-253 D262
Carriage Unit
When the carriage unit installation completes, move the unit right and left to check that it
does not fall down from the rail.
 If the ink tube falls down, the ink tube is loosely attached on the left of the carriage
unit. Remove the bracket to secure the ink tubes and pull the ink tube from the left of
the carriage unit as possible to remove the looseness.
When the paper holding lever is attached, check the followings:
[1] The paper holding lever is horizontal.
[2] The gear and the first gear teeth of the paper holding lever are aligned.
[3] The actuator for the gear is in the gap of the registration release sensor.
Attach the main ink level sensor bracket in the procedure below.
1. Loosen the screw of the bracket to move the bracket back and forth.
D262 4-254 SM
Carriage Unit
2. Check that the feeler is placed at the center of the feeler sensor [1] [2]. If it is not placed
at the center, adjust the position by moving the bracket back and forth.
and Adjustment
Replacement
3. Tighten the screw of the bracket.
SM 4-255 D262
Ink Supply
4.11 INK SUPPLY
4.11.1 INK SUPPLY UNIT

This section describes how to replace the ink supply unit.
Ink Supply Unit Accessories
No. Item Q'ty
1. Ink Supply Unit (ink tubes attached) 1
2. Ink Cartridges (K, C, Y, M) 4
3. Ink Sump 1
4. Ink Sump Cap 1
5. Rubber Caps 7
6. Plugs 21
D262 4-256 SM
Ink Supply
Before You Begin
 Always follow instructions and work carefully to avoid spilling ink from the ink tubes and
the tops of the ink sub tanks. If ink spills onto a printed circuit board at the base of the
FFC, the print head unit will become unusable and require replacement.
and Adjustment
Replacement
Ink Supply Unit Replacement
1. Do SP2090-1 to clear the NVRAM setting for the ink supply unit.
2. Move the Carriage Unit with SP2102-4 (p.4-52).
3. Turn the machine off and disconnect the power cord from the power source.
4. Separate the Main Unit from the Scanner Unit (p.4-59).
SM 4-257 D262
Ink Supply
Carriage Disconnection
1. Remove the left cover of the carriage unit ( x1).
2. Remove the carriage top covers that secure the ink tube at both left and right of the
carriage unit ( x2).
D262 4-258 SM
Ink Supply
3. Remove the carriage front cover [A] ( x2).
 When the carriage front cover is to be removed, pull the ink tube out from the groove.
and Adjustment
Replacement
4. Release the FFCs on the left of the HRB ( x2).
 To remove the FFCs, push the bracket [A] to the HRB.
SM 4-259 D262
Ink Supply
5. Release the FFCs on the right of the HRB ( x2).
6. Release the FFC at the center of the HRB ( x1).
7. Press and pull the wire retainer to the left on the upper right of the flat cable guide plate
to remove it from the cutout.
D262 4-260 SM
Ink Supply
8. Remove the film sheet on the FFC guide plate.
9. Take off the flat cable from the guide.
and Adjustment
Replacement
10. You will need the uncapped/capped plugs to plug each ink supply tube and ink supply
port as they are disconnected, to prevent ink leakage. For the head carriage (black),
two pairs of uncapped/capped plugs and for the head carriage (color), five pairs are
required.
SM 4-261 D262
Ink Supply
11. Place a large sheet of paper under the carriage unit.

12. Before disconnecting the tubes, press the white plungers to purge air from the ink sub
tanks.
13. Attach the protective sheet [A] to the new head carriage.
14. Remove the ink tube (M2) [A] from the ink supply port of the head carriage, and plug
the uncapped plug [B] into the port of the tube.
D262 4-262 SM
Ink Supply
15. Plug the capped plug [A] into the ink supply port from which the ink tube (M2) was
removed.
16. Now, following the same steps to disconnect the ink tube (M2), disconnect and cap the
other ink supply tubes and ink ports in this order: Y2 > C > M1> Y1> K2 > K1
and Adjustment
Replacement
17. Seven ink supply tubes and seven ink ports must be disconnected and plugged.
18. The ports of the ink supply tanks and ink supply tubes should now be plugged.
19. Remove the tube pressure plate ( x1).
SM 4-263 D262
Ink Supply
Rev. 09/13/2019
20. Push the tubes up and then pull them out of the carriage unit.
Ink Supply Unit Removal
 Perform “Remove Ink Supply Unit” in “Carriage Unit (Frame)” (p.4-225).

New Ink Supply Unit Installation
1. Cap the tip of each new tube with a rubber nozzle.
 2. Follow in reverse order the removal procedure for the ink supply unit described above
until Step 5: Remove the front cover.
3. The ink cartridge cover on the front and the ink collector tank cover on the right side
must be reinstalled to prevent their sensors from returning an error when the machine
is turned on.
4. Reconnect the FFCs ( x4) to the carriage unit.
5. Close the front cover if it is up.
6. Make sure that the paper exit guide is down.
7. Set the service ink cartridges in the new ink supply unit.
D262 4-264 SM
Ink Supply
Rev. 09/13/2019
8. The dummy tank [A] is provided with a nozzle plate [B].
9. Snap the nozzle plate onto the top of the dummy tank.
10. Set the dummy tank on the platen.
and Adjustment
Replacement
11. Connect each tube to the top of the box. The order of connection is not important.
12. Before going to the next step, check:
 FFCs on the carriage unit must be connected to prevent an error.
 Front Cover must be down so that the cover sensor detects the front cover closed.
 Paper Exit Guide must be down so that the guide sensor detects that the guide down.
 Right covers must be attached so that the ink collector sensor detects that the cover is
closed.
 Ink Cartridge Cover must be attached.
13. Open the ink cartridge cover and leave it open.
 The ink cartridge cover must be open so that you can complete this procedure.
 If the machine is powered on with the cover closed, the machine will start the initial
filling sequence and try to move the carriage unit to the home position for capping.
14. Turn on the machine.
15. Ignore the error.
16. Go into the SP mode and do SP2012-1. If the value of this SP code does not read "9",
then enter "9".
17. Confirm that all seven ink supply tubes are connected securely to the dummy tank.
SM 4-265 D262
Ink Supply
Rev. 09/13/2019
18. Open SP2100-5, and then enter "127".

 The ink starts pumping from the ink cartridges, through the tubes and into the ink sump.
 When you see "Completed" the pumping operation is finished.
20. Disconnect the ink supply tubes from the dummy tank.
21. Insert a metal plug into the end of each tube to prevent ink leakage.
Ink Tube Attachment to the Print Head Unit

Before attaching the bracket to secure the ink tubes, check that the ink tubes are lined
correctly as shown below.
1. Pass the ink tubes, K2, K1, Y1, M1, C, Y2, and M2 in this order one by one through the
upper part of the carriage unit.
2. Pass the ink tubes from left side to the right side of the carriage unit in the order
described above.
 Then the tubes are prevented from crossing inside the carriage unit.
 If the ink tubes are crossed, the bracket to secure the ink tubes may not be
attached correctly.
3. If the plugged ink tube is hard to pass the upper part of the carriage unit, pull it out using
the longnose pliers.
D262 4-266 SM
Ink Supply
Place the ink tubes on the print head in the procedure below.
1. Remove the plugs of the ink tubes (K1) and (K2) and the ink supply ports of the print
head.
2. Attach the ink tubes (K1) and (K2) to the ink supply ports and place them on the path of
the print head in the order of K2 and K1.
Place the ink tube (K2) [A] on the path of the print head first.
Then place the ink tube (K1) [B] upon the ink tube (K2) on the path of the print head.
and Adjustment
Replacement
3. Remove the plugs from the ports of the ink tubes (Y1), (M1), (C), (M2), and (Y2) and the
ink supply ports of the print heads.
Y2, and M2.
 Then place the ink tube (C) upon the ink tube (M1) [C] and the ink tube (Y2) upon the
ink tube (C) on the path of the print head. [D]
 Last of all, place the ink tube (M2) upon the ink tube (Y2) on the path of the print
head. [E]
SM 4-267 D262
Ink Supply
Before attaching the bracket to secure the ink tubes, check the followings:
 Place the ink tube so that the cutout of the ink tube guide is placed 1 to 4 mm apart from
the side of the carriage unit.
 Check that there is the space between the ink tube guide and the carriage unit.
To attach the bracket to secure the ink tubes, insert the two projections under the bracket
to the holes of the carriage unit.
When the carriage unit installation completes, move the unit right and left to check that it
does not fall down from the rail.
 If the ink tube falls down, the ink tube is loosely attached on the left of the carriage
unit. Remove the bracket to secure the ink tubes and pull the ink tube from the left of
the carriage unit as possible to remove the looseness.
D262 4-268 SM
Ink Supply
Before you turn the machine on, check the position of the horizontal encoder strip on the
left.
 If the encoder strip is up on the bracket as shown at [A], pull it forward and down so it is in
front of the bracket as shown at [B].
and Adjustment
Replacement
After attaching the ink supply unit, perform the operations described below.
1. Attach the carriage front cover, upper cover, and left cover to the carriage unit.
2. Open the ink-cartridge cover, and remove the customer's ink cartridge.
3. Attach the service ink cartridge to the ink supply unit and close the ink-cartridge cover.
4. Turn the machine on.
5. Flush the print heads (p.7-110).
6. Set SP2-012-001 to “0”.
7. Open the ink cartridge cover and remove the service ink cartridges in the ink supply unit.
8. Attach the customer’s cartridges and close the ink cartridge cover.
9. Turn the main power switch OFF and back ON.
10. Print a Nozzle Check Pattern and check the condition of the print heads. (Nozzle Check
Pattern Print)
11. Obey the local laws when you dispose of the ink sump holding the drained ink.
 Before disposal, cover the slots on top of the sump with the covers provided.
 If the covers are not available, cover the slots with some strong tape to prevent the
ink from spilling out of the sump.
SM 4-269 D262
Ink Supply
4.11.2 AIR RELEASE SOLENOID

Preparation
 Move the Carriage Unit with SP2102-4 (p.4-52)
 Separate the Main Unit from the Scanner Unit (p.4-59)
Remove:
 Top cover (p.4-31)
 Ink cartridge cover (p.4-29)
 Front cover (p.4-36)
 Paper exit guide (p.4-37)
1. The air release solenoid is encased by a bracket.
2. Release the clamp and disconnect the solenoid ( x1, x1).
D262 4-270 SM
Ink Supply
3. Disconnect the ink supply unit frame ( x3).
and Adjustment
Replacement
4. Free the ink supply tubes and disconnect the ink supply unit at [A] and [B] ( x2,
x2).
SM 4-271 D262
Ink Supply
5. On the right side of the back of the front support of the machine, free the ink supply
tubes ( x3).
6. Near the center of the front support, free the ink supply tubes ( x2).
7. Remove the ink supply unit and set it on the stool or box.
D262 4-272 SM
Ink Supply
8. Remove the side of the bracket and take out the air release solenoid ( x2).
and Adjustment
Replacement
Air Release Solenoid
SM 4-273 D262
Ink Supply
4.11.3 INK LEVEL SENSOR AND TEMPERATURE/HUMIDITY

SENSOR
 Positions of the screws shown below are adjusted at the factory. Do not loosen or remove
them when replacing and adjusting the sensors.
 The screw on the ink level sensor bracket
 The screw at the upper part of the air release solenoid bracket
 The two screws at the lower part of the air release solenoid bracket
D262 4-274 SM
Ink Supply
Preparation
 When the carriage unit is moved, ink may spill out from the print head onto the platen. To
move the carriage unit, place a sheet of regular paper under the carriage unit to protect
the platen.
 The sheet under the carriage unit should be flat, with no paper crinkling, which could
scratch the nozzle face or cause clogging the nozzle.
 To place the regular paper, do not pull up the paper holding lever too much (p.4-14).
Remove:
 Top cover (p.4-31)
 Right cover (p.4-24)
and Adjustment
Replacement
 Right upper cover (p.4-27)
To remove the temperature/humidity sensor, go to step 1.
To remove the ink level sensor, go to step 2.
1. Remove the temperature/humidity sensor [A] ( x1, x1).
SM 4-275 D262
Ink Supply
2. Remove the ink level sensor (M1, Y1, C, M2, Y2, K2) [A] ( x3, x1).
3. Remove the ink level sensor (K1) [A] ( x3, x1).
 The color of the connector of ink level sensor, Y1, M1, C, M2, Y2, is blue and that of
K1 is white.
D262 4-276 SM
Maintenance Unit, Waste Ink Collection
4.12 MAINTENANCE UNIT, WASTE INK COLLECTION
4.12.1 LEFT INK SUMP

The service life of the left ink sump is about 5 years, or until it becomes full. Capacity: 500 cc.
Preparation
Remove:
1. Disconnect the left side ( x1).
and Adjustment
Replacement
2. Unhook the right side and remove the sump.
3. Set the sump on a flat surface.

4. If the left sump is being replaced:
 After installing the new left ink sump, turn on the machine and go into the SP mode.
 Open SP2505-001 and touch [EXECUTE] to clear the counter for the left ink sump.
 Cover the slits on top of the left ink sump with the covers provided with the new unit.
SM 4-277 D262
 Obey the local laws and regulations regarding disposal of items such as waste ink
tanks that contain waste ink.
4.12.2 INK COLLECTOR UNIT

Open the ink collector cover on the right side of the machine [A]. Push the lever [B] and pull out
the ink collector tank [C] from the main unit.
1. Depress the release [A], and then pull the tank straight out of the machine.
2. Lay the tank on a flat surface with the port [B] facing up.
 The port at [B] is open and will leak ink if the tank is turned on its side or turned
upside down.
D262 4-278 SM
4.12.3 INK COLLECTOR UNIT CONTACT SWITCH

Preparation
 Open the ink collector cover (p.4-29) and remove the ink collector tank (p.4-278)
 Remove the maintenance unit (p.4-282)
1. The sensor is located at [A].
2. Use the tip of a small screwdriver to release both sides of the sensor [B].
and Adjustment
Replacement
3. Pull the harness and sensor through hole [A].
4. Free the harness [B] ( x6).
5. Disconnect and remove the sensor [C] ( x1).
SM 4-279 D262
Reinstallation
1. When you position the sensor for reinstallation, make sure that the sensor is
positioned so the bend in the tines is down.
4.12.4 RIGHT INK SUMP

The service life of the right ink sump is about 5 years, or until it becomes full. Capacity: 147 cc.
1. On the right side of the machine, remove the ink collector unit (p.4-278).
3. Remove the right upper cover (p.4-27).
4. Disconnect the sump and pull it out slowly ( x1).
 To avoid spilling ink, do not tilt the sump while you remove it.
D262 4-280 SM
5. Cover the top of the tank with some paper and tape, and then discard it.
 Follow the local laws and regulations regarding the disposal of this item.
 Never attempt to empty the right ink sump and re-use it.
and Adjustment
Replacement
6. After installing the new right ink sump, open SP2505-002 (Clear Counter) and touch
[EXECUTE] to clear the counter for the new sump.
SM 4-281 D262
4.12.5 MAINTENANCE UNIT

You can check the status of the maintenance unit with two counters:
 SP2-231-003 (PM Counter Indication - Maintenance Unit). Displays the status of the
maintenance unit as the amount of usage remaining (a percent).
 SP2-231-008 (PM Counter Indication - PM Counter Maintenance Unit). Displays the status of
the maintenance unit as the distance (mm) of paper fed
Preparation
Remove:
 Ink collector tank (p.4-278)
 Right cover (p.4-24)
 Right upper cover (p.4-27)
To move the carriage unit, place a sheet of regular paper under the carriage unit to
protect the platen.
 The sheet under the carriage unit should be flat, with no paper crinkling, which could
 To place the regular paper, do not pull up the paper holding lever too much. (p.4-14)
2. Set several sheets of clean paper on a flat surface to hold the maintenance unit after it
is removed.
 The bottom edges of the maintenance unit are covered with ink and will stain any
surface where it is placed.
 Always set the maintenance unit on a surface covered with paper that will absorb ink
and can be discarded later.
D262 4-282 SM

3. Turn down the maintenance lock lever [A].
4. Slowly, pull the maintenance unit [A] out of the machine ( x6, x2, x2).
5. Lay it down in the location prepared at Step 1.
and Adjustment
Replacement
 Do not clear the PM counter.
Reinstallation
The maintenance unit should be cleaned after the ink collector unit,
1. Use a linen cloth, dampened very slightly with water and tightly wrapped around the
end of a small screwdriver, to remove any ink that has hardened at the following
locations:
SM 4-283 D262
 Make sure the cloth is only slightly damp. Do not allow any water near the protective
caps [C]. Water on the caps could seep onto the print head nozzles and dilute the
ink.
[A] Wiper and blade
[B] Suction cap
[C] Print head caps (x4)
2. Check the other print head caps and clean if necessary.
 Never use cotton, tissue, or any other material that could shred and leave fibers
around the suction cap or the print head caps.
3. Check that the maintenance lock lever is pressed down [A]. Then insert the unit slowly,
to avoid damaging the print-head caps and suction-cap wipers [B], and turn the
maintenance lock lever [A] upward as you set the unit in the machine.
4. After replacing the maintenance unit with a new one, open SP2102-001 and then touch
[EXECUTE] to reset the maintenance unit counter.
D262 4-284 SM
Auto-Nozzle Check
4.13 AUTO-NOZZLE CHECK
4.13.1 AUTO-NOZZLE CHECK UPPER UNIT

The procedure below is supposed that SP shown in the table below can be performed correctly.
SP Contents
SP2-024-001 Move the carriage.
SP2-024-002 Move the cutter.
SP2-024-003 Move the wiper of the electrode plate.
and Adjustment
If SP shown above cannot be performed, perform the procedure in Auto-Nozzle Check Unit.
Replacement
1. Move the head carriage, cutter, and wiper of the electrode plate to the specified
position with the SP2-024-001, SP2-024-002, and SP2-024-003.
2. Turn off the power.
 Before doing any procedure, always turn off the power switch and unplug the
machine from its power source. Or electric shock or defect may be caused.
3. Separate the scanner unit and main unit (p.4-59).
5. Remove the right cover (p.4-24)
8. Remove the harness [A] from the auto-nozzle check board ( x1, x1).
SM 4-285 D262
Auto-Nozzle Check
9. Move the auto-nozzle check board block [A] to the right ( x1).
10. Remove the harness cover [A] and three screws ( x3).
11. Move the harness [A] to the left and remove the timing belt [C] from the wiper slider
[B].
D262 4-286 SM
Auto-Nozzle Check
12. Move the hook [A] of the auto-nozzle check upper unit.
13. Push up the auto-nozzle check upper unit and remove it from the opening of the front
cover.
and Adjustment
Replacement
4.13.2 AUTO-NOZZLE CHECK UNIT
If the auto-nozzle check SP cannot be performed and the head carriage, cutter, and electrode
plate cannot be moved to the specified position, change the Auto-Nozzle Check Unit including the
auto-nozzle module bracket.
1. Separate the scanner unit and main unit (p.4-59).
3. Remove the right cover (p.4-24)
6. Remove the harness [A] from the auto-nozzle check board ( x1, x1).
7. Move the auto-nozzle check board block [A] to the right ( x1).
SM 4-287 D262
Auto-Nozzle Check
8. Remove the two auto-nozzle check position sensor harnesses [A] ( x1, x1).
9. Remove the two screws fixing the auto-nozzle check bracket ( x2).
10. Turn the auto-nozzle check unit [B] forward while releasing the hook [A] of the
auto-nozzle check bracket, and pull it out from the opening of the right back of the
main unit.
D262 4-288 SM
Auto-Nozzle Check
4.13.3 AFTER REPLACEMENT

After changing the auto-nozzle check upper unit or auto-nozzle check unit, perform the
procedures below.
1. Perform SP2-024-004 to reset the counters.
The counters shown below will be reset.
SP Contents
SP7-761-011 to 019 Auto-nozzle checking time
SP7-767-011 to 020 Accumulated value of no-purging
SP7-768-011 to 020 Accumulated value of no-purging lines
and Adjustment
SP7-761-020 Electrode-plate wiping time
Replacement
Flag for operating life of the auto-nozzle
SP2-021-011
check
2. Perform SP2-024-005 to wipe the electrode plate.
 When the SP is performed, the check operation after changing the auto-nozzle check
unit will be done.
3. Perform SP2-020-001 with the argument 31 to check purging.
 When the SP is performed, the auto-nozzle check operation will be done in the unit of
the specified number of rows of the nozzles.
SM 4-289 D262
Electrical Components
4.14 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
4.14.1 REAR COVER

Preparation
 The rear cover is held in place by many screws but only six screws need to be removed
(the others can just be loosened).
2. Loosen (do not remove) the screws marked by the red arrows ( x10).
D262 4-290 SM
4.14.2 PCB BOX
and Adjustment
Replacement
 To remove the PCB box, never loosen nor remove the two screws shown below. (The
figure shown below is the left side viewing from the rear.)
1. Scanner cable (p.4-59).

2. Top cover (p.4-31).
3. Rear cover (p.4-24).
4. Left rear cover (p.4-35).
5. Right rear cover (p.4-33).
6. Release the clamps ( x7).
SM 4-291 D262
7. Disconnect the connector from CN254 of the IOB and pull away the harness of the roll
unit 1 ( x1).
8. Remove the harness bracket of the roll unit 1 ( x2).
If the roll unit 2 is mounted, go to step 9.

If only the roll unit 1 is mounted, go to step 10.
D262 4-292 SM
9. Release the connector [A] from CN301 of the RFDB and harness bracket [B] of the roll
unit 2 ( x1, x2).
10. Release the FFCs [A] on the BiCU, release the clamp [B] at the upper part of the PCB
and Adjustment
Replacement
box, and pull away the FFC ( x5, x1)
 Remove the clamp [A] of the FFC by pushing it towards the BiCU.
SM 4-293 D262
11. Remove the connector and clamps shown in the figure below ( x1, x6).
12. Disconnect the connectors of the IOB ( x7).
13. Disconnect the connectors of the BiCU ( x4).
D262 4-294 SM
14. Disconnect the relay connectors shown in the figure below ( x3).
and Adjustment
Replacement
15. Release the clamps at the center back of the upper part of the PCB box.
SM 4-295 D262
16. Release the three clamps at the upper part of the PCB box and pull away the three
cables and FFC to the back.
17. PCB box ( x5).
D262 4-296 SM
4.14.3 CONTROLLER BOARD
and Adjustment
Replacement
The blue frame shows the location of the controller board.
SM 4-297 D262
Remove
1. Rear cover (p.4-290) .
2. Left cover of the PCB box ( x7).
3. Controller board ( x7).
D262 4-298 SM
Replacing the NVRAM and Memory

If you are going to replace the controller board, remove the NV-RAM [A] from the old controller
board and mount it on the new controller board.
Also mount the memory [B] on the new controller board.
and Adjustment
Replacement
4.14.4 RFDB (ROLL FEEDER DRIVE BOARD)
The RFDB is mounted only when the roll unit 2 (option) is attached, and it is placed in the POB
box as shown below.
SM 4-299 D262
Remove
2. Disconnect the connectors shown in the figure below ( x2).
3. RFDB ( x2).
D262 4-300 SM
4.14.5 IOB (INPUT/OUTPUT BOARD)

The blue frame shows the location of the IOB.
and Adjustment
Replacement
Remove
2. Disconnect the connectors shown in the figure below ( x8, x2).
 To disconnect the FFCs, unlock the connectors and release the FFCs as shown
below.
SM 4-301 D262
3. Remove the IOB ( x6).
4.14.6 HDD
 For replacing the HDD, the information of the customer is treated. Confirm the HDD
replacement procedure with the customer.
The blue frame shows the location of the HDD.
D262 4-302 SM
Remove
2. Disconnect the connector of the HDD from the controller board.
and Adjustment
Replacement
3. HDD with the bracket ( x3).
4. Turn the bracket over and remove the HDD ( x4).
SM 4-303 D262
Settings
 After replacement, hand over the removed HDD to the customer or damage the HDD and
bring it back (non-free).
 Notice to the customer that the document box data and address data will be deleted when an
HDD is replaced so that the re-registration is required if the data are necessary.
 If the IC-card personal authentication has been set, the settings will be cleared and resetting
is necessary when the HDD is replaced.
 Format the new HDD with SP shown below and download the fixed stamp data to the HDD.
1. Set the main power switch to ON and enter the SP mode using the operation panel.
2. Do SP5-832-001 to format the HDD.
3. Do SP5-853-001 to download the fixed stamp data.
4. Finish the SP mode and set the main power switch off and on again.
4.14.7 BICU (BASE IMAGE CONTROL UNIT)
 To attach the BiCU, loosen the screws on the controller board, attach the BiCU, and then
tighten the screws on the controller board and BiCU.
D262 4-304 SM
The blue frame shows the location of the BiCU in the POB box (back of the IOB [A] and HDD
bracket [B]).
and Adjustment
Replacement
Remove
2. Remove the IOB (p.4-301).
3. Remove the HDD (p.4-302).
4. Disconnect the connectors shown in the figure below ( x7, x5).
 Remove the clamp [A] of the FFC by pushing it towards the BiCU.
SM 4-305 D262
5. BiCU ( x8, x2).
EEPROM Replacement
When the BiCU is replaced, remove the film cables [A] ( x2), connector [B] ( x1), and
EEPROM [C] and connect them to the new BiCU.
D262 4-306 SM
 The pins of the EEPROM are soft and easy to bend. Work carefully when you remove it.
1. Use the tip of a small screwdriver to alternately raise the top [1] and bottom [2] of the
EEPROM slightly.
2. When the EEPROM is loose, remove it [3].
and Adjustment
Replacement
3. Position the EEPROM on the new BiCU socket so that the semi-circular indentation is
pointing up.
4. Make sure each pin is matched with a hole, and then press down to insert the
EEPROM.
SM 4-307 D262
4.14.8 NVRAM
NVRAM on the controller board
 SC195 (Machine serial number error) will be displayed if you forget to attach the NVRAM.
 If you mounted the NVRAM in the wrong direction, each component needs to be replaced
because a short circuit was caused in the controller board and the NVRAM.
 Installing a new NVRAM initializes SPs and issues an SC. Reset the SC with the
procedure below.
1. Make sure that you have the SMC report (factory settings). This report comes with the
machine.
2. Output the SMC log using one of the following methods:
To save SMC log data to an SD card, execute SP5-992-001 (p.5-46).
3. Turn off the main power switch.
4. Insert a blank SD card in the SD slot 2, and then turn on the main power switch.
5. Use SP5-824-001 to upload the NVRAM data from the controller board.
6. Make sure the customer has a backup of their address book data. If not, obtain the
backup by referring to SP5-846-051.
 The address data stored in the machine will be discarded later during this procedure.
So be sure to obtain a backup of the customer’s address book data.
 Note that the counters for the user will be reset when doing the backup/restore of the
address book data.
 If they have a backup of the address book data, use their own backup data for
restoring. This is because there is a risk that the data cannot be backed up properly
depending on the NVRAM condition.
7. Turn the main power OFF and unplug the power supply cord.
8. Push the main power switch ON again to discharge the residual charge.
9. Replace the NV-RAM with a new one.
 Appears at start-up, but this is normal behavior.

1. Change the SP settings for the operation panel.
 SP5-748-201: (OpePanel Setting: Cheetah Panel Connect Setting): Change the value
from “0” to “1”.
11. Cycle the main power OFF/ON with the SD card where the NV-RAM data has been
uploaded in SD slot 2.
D262 4-308 SM
 SC992 appears at start-up, but this is normal behavior. This is because information
written to the NV-RAM and on the hard disk do not match due to replacement of the
NV-RAM. Go to Step 12.
12. Download the NV-RAM data stored in the SD card to the brand-new NV-RAM using
SP5-825-001 (NV-RAM Data Download).
 The download will take a couple of minutes.

13. Turn the main power OFF and remove the SD card from SD slot 2.
14. Turn the main power ON.
15. Restore the original settings of the following SPs, referring to the SMC data obtained in
step 2.
 SP5-825-001 does not download the following SP data to the new NV-RAM. So you
and Adjustment
Replacement
must set them manually.
a. SP5-985-001(Device Setting: On Board NIC)
b. SP5-985-002(Device Setting: On Board USB)
16. If the security functions (HDD Encryption and HDD Data Overwrite Security) were
applied, set the functions again.
17. Ask the customer to restore their address book. Or restore the address book data
using SP5-846-052 (UCS Setting: Restore All Addr Book), and ask the customer to
ensure the address book data has been restored properly.
 If you have obtained the backup of the customer’s address book data, delete the
backup immediately after the NV-RAM replacement to avoid accidentally taking out
the customer’s data.
To print SMC log data, execute SP5-990-001.
To save SMC log data to an SD card, execute SP5-992-001 (p.5-46).
 Check that the counters are reset.

19. Make sure that the list output in step 7-1 through step 7-3 matches the destination
information in step 7-4. If not, set it to the setting before replacement.
SM 4-309 D262
 Try all the items below if NVRAM upload (SP5-824-001) or download (SP5-825-001)
cannot be done.
 Check the SP values that changed on the SMC you printed out in step 2. Adjust
the values manually. Make sure that the values of SP5-045-001 and
SP5-302-002 are the same as before replacing.
 Replace all PM parts because all PM counters will be reset.
 If a message tells you need an SD card to restore displays after the NVRAM
replacement, create a “SD card for restoration” and restore with the SD card.
NVRAM (EEPROM) on the BiCU
 Keep NVRAMs away from any objects that can cause static electricity. Static electricity
can damage data in the NVRAM.
1. Make sure that you have the SMC report (factory settings). This report comes with the
machine.
To print SMC log data, execute SP5-990-001 ([SP Print Mode]-[All (Data List)]).
To save SMC log data to an SD card, execute SP5-992-001 ([SP Text Mode]-[All (Data List)]).
4. Insert a blank SD card in SD slot #2, and then turn ON the main power.
5. Upload the NVRAM data from the BiCU using SP5-824-001.
6. Turn OFF the main power and disconnect the power plug.
7. Replace the NVRAM on the BiCU with a new one.
D262 4-310 SM
 Make sure the NVRAM [A] is installed at the correct mounting location and
orientation. Install the NVRAM so that the indentation on the NVRAM corresponds
with the mark [B] on the BiCU.
 Incorrect installation of the NVRAM will damage both the BiCU and the NVRAM
and Adjustment
Replacement
8. Connect the power plug and turn ON the main power.
9. Set SP5-811-001 ([Machine Serial Number]-[Set]), SP5-807-001 ([Area/Model Selection
DFU - JPN: 1, NA: 2, EU/AA: 3, CHN: 6]) and SP5-907-001 ([Plug & Play Maker/Model
Name]).
 For information on how to configure the machine serial number and area selection,
contact the supervisor in your branch.
 SC995 will appear until the machine serial number and area selection are programed
correctly.
10. Turn OFF then ON the main power.
11. Do SP5-801-002 to clear the all SP settings for the engine data in NVRAM.
12. Turn OFF then ON the main power.
13. From the SD card where you saved the NVRAM data in step 5, download the NVRAM
data with SP5-825-001.
15. Remove the SD card from slot #2.
SM 4-311 D262

17. Check the factory setting sheet and the SMC data printout from step2, and set the user
tool and SP settings so that they are the same as before replacement.
4.14.9 PSU (POWER SUPPLY UNIT)
 When replacing the PSU, do not touch the shaded area shwon below.
The blue frame shows the location of the PSU
D262 4-312 SM
Remove
2. Cables ( x5).
and Adjustment
Replacement
3. PSU ( x5).
SM 4-313 D262
Precaution
To attach the PSU, connect the white connector of the relay connector [A] to the left and the black
connector to the right.
D262 4-314 SM
Sensors, Switches
4.15 SENSORS, SWITCHES
4.15.1 INK COLLECTOR TANK COVER SWITCH

2. Ink collector tank cover switch [A] ( x1).
and Adjustment
Replacement
4.15.2 INK-CARTRIDGE COVER SWITCH
3. Ink-cartridge cover (p.4-29).
4. Ink-cartridge cover switch [A] ( x1).
SM 4-315 D262
Sensors, Switches
4.15.3 FRONT COVER SAFETY SWITCHES

1. Paper Exit guide (p.4-37).
3. Front cover safety switch assembly (right) [A] ( x2).
4. Front cover safety switch (right) [A] ( x2, snap ring x1).
D262 4-316 SM
Sensors, Switches
4.15.4 FRONT COVER SWITCH
Remove
3. The front cover switch is placed on the left of the main unit and outside of the support.
4. Switch bracket ( x1, x1).
and Adjustment
Replacement
5. Lever from the switch bracket.
6. Front cover switch from the switch bracket ( x2).
SM 4-317 D262
Sensors, Switches
Precaution
Support the bracket with the front cover switch attached as shown below, and insert the top of the
lever into the hole on the back of the rubber.
D262 4-318 SM
Special Adjustments
4.16 SPECIAL ADJUSTMENTS
4.16.1 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT WITH SP MODES

Do these adjustments if output is unsatisfactory. Before you start measurements and adjustments,
let the test print cool for five minutes.
 Do each adjustment in the order described below. Be sure to turn the machine off/on after
each SP adjustment to enable the new setting.
Step 1: Magnification for Paper Type: Plain

1. Go into the SP mode.
2. Do SP4-417, select Pattern 3, and then touch [OK].
and Adjustment
3. Touch [COPY Window] at the top of the screen.
Replacement
4. Select the paper size.
5. Set a blank sheet of A1 SEF paper on the original tray.
6. Touch [Start] to print the test pattern.
7. Print two more test patterns (you need three grid pattern prints).
8. Refer to the diagram and instruction table below to do the SP magnification corrections if they
are needed. The example below illustrates the adjustments for "Normal/Recycled" paper.
Resolution = 600 dpi

1inch = 25.4 mm
SM 4-319 D262
Special Adjustments
SP Comments
4-101-1 On each grid test pattern, measure the width from block 1 to block 300
(300 blocks) then average the three measurements. The width must be
812.8 mm. If the average measured width is not 812.8 mm, adjust this SP
until the width is 812.8 mm.
4-008-1 On each grid test pattern, measure the length from block 21 to block 320
(300 blocks) then average the three measurements. The length must be
812.8 mm. If the measured length is not 812.8 mm, adjust this SP until the
length is 812.8 mm.
Step 2: Copy/Main Scan Magnification

1. Make a 1:1 copy of the A0 SEF Magnification Chart with plain roll paper.
 You can use a different test chart but only if it has lines 1000 mm long in the sub-scan
direction and 700 mm long in the main-scan direction.
2. Measure the length and width of the image on the original and the copy.
3. If the measurements are not within "Standard", adjust these SPs in the order shown in the
table below.
SP Paper Type Standard
SP2-117-001 Normal Recycled Less than ±0.5
SP2-117-002 IJ Normal
SP2-117-003 Translucent
SP2-117-004 Coated (CAD)
SP2-117-005 Coated
SP2-117-006 Matte Film
SP2-117-007 Special
D262 4-320 SM
Special Adjustments
Step 3: Copy/Print Sub Scan Magnification

1. Make a 1:1 copy of the A0 SEF Magnification Chart.
 You can use a different test chart but only if it has lines 1000 mm long in the sub-scan
direction and 700 mm long in the main-scan direction.
2. Measure the length and width of the images on the original and the copy.
3. Do the same measurements that you did for “Step 1: Magnification for Paper Type: Plain”.
4. If the measurements are not within "Standard", adjust these SPs in the order shown in the
table below.
Copy
and Adjustment
Replacement
SP2-116-001 Normal/Recycled Paper Less than ±0.5
SP2-116-002 IJ Normal Paper
SP2-116-004 Coated Paper (CAD)
SP2-116-005 Coated Paper
SP2-116-007 Special Paper
Print
SP2-116-011 Normal/Recycled Paper Less than ±0.5
SP2-116-012 IJ Normal Paper
SP2-116-014 Coated Paper (CAD)
SP2-116-015 Coated Paper
SP2-116-017 Special Paper
SM 4-321 D262
Special Adjustments
Step 4: Scanner Mask Setting
SP Set To: Comments
4-012-005 0 Scanner Erase Margin - DF: Leading Edge
4-012-006 0 Scanner Erase Margin - DF: Trailing Edge
4-012-007 0 Scanner Erase Margin - DF: Left Edge
4-012-008 0 Scanner Erase Margin - DF: Right Edge
Step 5: Erase Margins

Set these SPs to “5” to make measurement easier:
SP Set To: Comments
2-103-001 5 Print Erase Margin – Leading Edge
2-103-002 5 Print Erase Margin – Trailing Edge
2-103-003 5 Print Erase Margin – Left Edge
2-103-004 5 Print Erase Margin – Right Edge
D262 4-322 SM
Special Adjustments
Step 6: Printer: Leading Edge, Side-to-Side Registration

1. Use a sheet of blank plain paper to print the IPU Printing test pattern (SP4-417 Pattern 3) for
each paper feed station installed on the machine:
 Paper Input 1
 Paper Input 2
 Bypass
2. Measure the gaps for the leading edge and side-to-side registration.
and Adjustment
Replacement
[A]: Direction of Paper Feed
[B]: Sub Scan: 5 ±0.5 mm
[C]: Main Scan: 5 ±0.5 mm
3. Touch "SP Mode" at the top of the screen, and then adjust these SPs if a measurement is not
within "Standard".
SP Standard: Comments
1-001-001 5 ±0.5 mm Print Position Adj (Top Edge) - Bypass Feed
1-001-002 Print Position Adj (Top Edge) - Paper Input 1
1-001-003 Print Position Adj (Top Edge) - Paper Input 2
1-002-001 Print Position Adj (Left Edge) - Bypass Feed
1-002-002 Print Position Adj (Left Edge) - Paper Input 1
1-002-003 Print Position Adj (Left Edge) - Paper Input 2
SM 4-323 D262
Special Adjustments
Step 7: Scanner Mask Setting

Do these SPs to replace the “0” settings done in Step 5.
SP Set To: Comments
4-012-005 1.5 Scanner Edge Margin - DF: Leading Edge
4-012-006 Scanner Edge Margin - DF: Trailing Edge
4-012-700 Scanner Edge Margin - DF: Left Edge
4-012-008 0.5 Scanner Edge Margin - DF: Right Edge
Step 8: Erase Margins

Do these SPs to replace the settings done in Step 6.
SP Set To: Comments
2-103-001 2 Printing Erase Margin – Leading Edge
2-103-002 Printing Erase Margin – Trailing Edge
2-103-003 Printing Erase Margin – Left Edge
2-103-004 0.5 Printing Erase Margin – Right Edge
Step 9: Scanner Registration

1. Use the A1 LEF Test Chart to make a 1:1 copy on plain A1 LEF paper.
2. On the copy, measure the gap between the chart image at the leading edge and at the left
edge.
3. Adjust these SPs if necessary.
SP Standard Comments
4-010-001 ±3 mm Scanner Sub Scan - Leading Edge Reg Adjustment
4-010-002 ±2.8 mm Scanner Main Scan - Trailing Edge Reg Adjustment
4-011 ±2.8 mm Scanner Main Scan - Registration
D262 4-324 SM
Special Adjustments
Step 10: Printer: Cut Length
1-921 Cut Length Adjustment - Cutting Position Adjustment
This SP adjusts the distance between the DRESS sensor (image

registration sensor) and the first cut position. This setting is no longer used
after the 2nd cut during continuous printing. Cuts once to test the new
setting, then once to do the actual cut.
[-10 to 10/0/0.1 mm]

Example
 To set a length of 297 mm, with the machine cutting at 300 mm, you
need to move the cutting position 3 mm upstream with a value of -3
mm.
and Adjustment
Replacement
 To set a length of 295 mm, with the machine cutting at 297 mm, you
need to move the cutting position downstream with a value of +2 mm
 The cut length adjustment is done for all paper sizes after these settings are done.
 After these settings are done you may still need to do fine adjustments for each paper
size.
1. Use the Preset Cut feature to make standard cuts of plain paper for these sizes:
Size Orientation
A3 Sideways
A1 Lengthways
A0 Lengthways
A Sideways (Eng. 11”)
B Sideways (Eng. 17”)
D Lengthways (Eng. 34”)
E Lengthways (Eng. 44”)
SM 4-325 D262
Special Adjustments
2. Measure the cuts and check them against the standards of this table.
Cut Length (mm) Cut Tolerance (mm)
Less than 297 ±3
420 to 1219 ±5
to 2000 ±6
to 3000 ±11
to 3600 ±14
to 15,000 ±150
Step 11: Synchro Cut (Trailing Edge Registration)

The following SPs are used in this step:
 SP4-961-001 (Document Length Adjustment – Input Tolerance 210 mm)
 SP4-961-002 (Document Length Adjustment – Input Tolerance 1000 mm)
 SP4-961-003 (Document Length Adjustment – Check Document Length)
1. Prepare two originals
 1 original 210 mm long (A4 LEF)
 1 original 1000 mm long (measure and cut)
2. Go into the SP mode and do SP4-961-001.
3. Touch [COPY Window] and copy the 210 mm sheet that you prepared in Step 1.
4. Touch [SP Mode] to go back to the SP mode.
5. Do SP4-961-003 to check the original scan length.
6. If the display is different, adjust with SP4-961-001.
7. Do SP4-961-002.
8. Touch [COPY Window] and scan the 1000 mm sheet that you prepared in Step 1.
9. Touch [SP Mode] to go back to the SP mode.
10. Do SP4-961-003 to check the scan length.
11. If the display is different, adjust with SP4-961-002.
D262 4-326 SM
Special Adjustments
Cut Length (mm) Cut Tolerance (mm)
Less than 297 ±4.50
to 594 ±5.00
to 841 ±6.00
to 1219 ±8.50
to 2000 ±18.0
to 3000 ±27.0
to 3600 ±33.0
and Adjustment
to 15,000 ±150
Replacement
4.16.2 CIS ADJUSTMENT WITH SP MODES
To Print the CIS Adjustment Pattern

2. Open SP4-417 Pattern 3, and touch [OK].
3. Touch [COPY Window] to go to the main screen.
4. On the operation panel, select one of the rolls for paper feed.
5. Put the blank sheet of paper on the original feed tray and feed it into the original feed unit.
Pattern 6 (a grid pattern) prints.
6. Touch [SP Mode] to return to the SP mode.
7. Open SP4-973, push [0] on the operation panel to change the setting from "2" to "0", then
push [#].
8. Touch [Exit] twice to leave the SP mode.
9. Select the paper input size, and then copy the grid pattern that you printed in Step 7 above.
SM 4-327 D262
Special Adjustments
 When you look at the printed pattern, the number sequence of the CIS joints is reversed,
with CIS-5 on the left through CIS-1 on the right as shown in the diagram above.
 After completing the CIS adjustments, be sure to reset SP4-973 to "2".
To Adjust the Image at the CIS Joints

1. Check the printed pattern to determine if the dots are aligned at CIS 1-2.
2. If they are aligned correctly, no adjustment is necessary.
-or-
If they are not aligned correctly, do the next step. Here are two samples where the outputs are
not aligned correctly.
 [A]: Distance between the lines at CIS 1-2 is wider than usual (as shown above). If the
distance between these lines is wider or narrower than the other lines, adjust the main
scan offset at CIS 1-2 with SP4-972-001 (CIS Joint Adjustment –CIS 1-2 Main Scan) as
described below.
 [B]: The lines at CIS 1-2 are broken. If the output from CIS 1 is lower (as shown above) or
higher, adjust the sub scan offset at CIS 1-2 with SP4-972-006 (CIS Joint Adjustment –
CIS 1-2 Sub Scan) as described below.
To adjust the main scan offset for Example [A]
Problem: Output from CIS 1 is too far to the right.
1. Do SP4-972-001 and adjust the setting.
 Adjust the position of CIS 1. The position of CIS 2 does not move.
 If the area at the joint is too wide, set a smaller value.
 If the area at the joint is too narrow, set a larger value.
 In the example [A], you must set a smaller value.
To adjust the sub scan offset for Example [B]
D262 4-328 SM
Special Adjustments
Problem: Output from CIS 1 is lower than the output from CIS 2.
1. Do SP4-972-006 and adjust the setting.
 Adjust the position of CIS 1. The position of CIS 2 does not move.
 If the CIS 1 area is higher than the CIS 2 area, set a larger value.
 If the CIS 1 area is lower than the CIS 2 area, set a smaller value.
 In the example shown [B], you must decrease the value for CIS 1.
After adjusting
1. Print one more pattern and check CIS 1-2.
2. Repeat these procedures until the image at CIS 1-2 is correct.
3. Do these procedures for the other joints (CIS 2-3, CIS 3-4, CIS 4-5)
 The “Effect” column in the table below tells you which area moves with the
adjustment, and which area does not move.
and Adjustment
Replacement
SP4-972 CIS Main/Sub Scan Offset Adjustment [0 to 2047/638/1]
Problem Joint Effect
001 Main Scan Interval 1-2 CIS 1-2 CIS 1 moves. CIS 2 does not move.
006 Sub Scan Interval 1-2 CIS 1-2 CIS 1 moves. CIS 2 does not move.
 After completing the CIS adjustments, be sure to reset SP4-973 to "2.
SM 4-329 D262
Special Adjustments
To Adjust the Scan Speed Switching

If some problem is found with the distance between the original feed roller (rear) and the original
feed roller (front) in the CIS adjustment pattern, do the adjustment described below.
1. Enter SP mode and select the appropriate SP number in the table below.
SP4-965 Problem Effect
1 Leading edge The original feeding is interrupted at the

position where the original is fed by the
distance of the original exit roller (112.2 mm)
from where the original registration sensor
detects the leading edge of the original. Then
the scan speed is lowered by the set value.
2 Position To adjust the starting position of SP4-965-001

(Scan Speed Adjustment: Leading Edge).
3 Trailing edge The scan speed is changed to the value set for
SP4-965 14.5 mm after the original set sensor
detects the original trailing edge.
2. Enter the value and touch [Set].

3. Touch [Exit] once.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3.
D262 4-330 SM
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE REFERENCE
None
Service Program Mode
5. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE REFERENCE
5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
See "Appendices" for Service Program Mode.
5.2 FIRMWARE UPDATE
5.2.1 OVERVIEW
In order to update the firmware of this machine, it is necessary to download the latest version of
firmware on a SD card.
Insert the SD card in SD card slot 2 beside the left rear of the controller box.
5.2.2 FIRMWARE TYPE
Maintenance
Main unit
Reference
System
Firmware type Firmware position Message display
System/Copy Controller Board System/Copy
Engine BICU Engine
NetworkSupport Controller Board NetworkSupport
Data Erase Onb Controller Board HDD Format Option
RPCS Controller Board RPCS
PDF Controller Board PS

PDF
Option MSIS Controller Board RPGL

MISIS
Option RTIFF Controller Board RTIFF
PDF Controller Board PDF
SM 5-1 D262
Firmware Update
Firmware type Firmware position Message display
Printer Controller Board Printer

MediaPrint:JPEG
MediaPrint:TIFF
Font EXP Controller Board FONT
PS3 Controller Board MOC2e_prt_PS3
PS3 Font Controller Board FONT2
RPGL Font Controller Board FONT5
NetworkDocBox Controller Board NetworkDocBox
Scanner Controller Board Scanner
Websupport Controller Board Websupport
WebUapl Controller Board WebUapl
animation Controller Board MOC2a_animat
PowerSaving Sys Controller Board MOCC2a_subcpu
Smart Operational Panel
Firmware type Partation Message display
CheetahSystem Smart Operation M2a_System

Panel-CPU board
BluetoothService Smart Operation M2a_BluetoothSe

Panel-CPU board
CSPF Smart Operation M2a_cspf

Panel-CPU board
LegacyUI Smart Operation M2a_LegacyUI

Panel-CPU board
MediaPrtScn Smart Operation M2a_MeidaPrtScn

Panel-CPU board
D262 5-2 SM
Firmware Update
Firmware type Partation Message display
PrinterInfo Smart Operation M2a_PrinterInfo

Panel-CPU board
PrinterSJob Smart Operation M2a_PrinterSJob

Panel-CPU board
ProgramInfoService Smart Operation M2a_ProgramInfo

Panel-CPU board
ScanToME Smart Operation M2a_ScanToME

Panel-CPU board
SimpleScan Smart Operation M2a_SimpleScan

Panel-CPU board
SmartCopy Smart Operation M2a_SmartCopy

Panel-CPU board
SmartScan Smart Operation M2a_SmartScan
Maintenance
Panel-CPU board
Reference
System
LanguageWidget Smart Operation M2a_WLanguage
Panel-CPU board
 Even when not using a RPCS driver, the XPS driver requires RPCS firmware.
SM 5-3 D262
Firmware Update
5.2.3 PROCEDURE
 A SD card is a precision device, so when you handle an SD card, respect the following.
 When the power is switched ON, do not insert or remove a card.
 During installation, do not switch the power OFF.
 Since the card is manufactured to high precision, do not store it in a hot or humid location,
or in direct sunlight.
 Do not bend the card, scratch it, or give it a strong shock.
 Before downloading firmware on an SD card, check whether write-protection of the SD
card is canceled. If write-protection is enabled, an error code (error code 44, etc.) will be
displayed during download, and the download will fail.
 Before updating firmware, remove the network cable from this machine.
 If SC818 is generated during software update, switch the power OFF -> ON, and
complete the update which was interrupted.
 During software update, network cables, remove interface cables, wireless boards, etc.,
(so that they are not accessed during update).
D262 5-4 SM
Firmware Update
Update procedure
1. First download the software to be updated to the SD card.
2. Switch the power OFF.
3. Remove the SD card slot cover [A]. ( ×1)
Maintenance
4. Insert the SD card [A] straight in slot 2.
Reference
System
 Check whether the card is properly in the SD card slot. When a SD card is inserted, a
click is heard, and it is locked.
 To remove the card, release by pressing once in the set state.
5. Switch the power ON.
6. Wait until the update screen starts (about 45 seconds).
When it appears, "Please Wait" is displayed.
SM 5-5 D262
Firmware Update
7. Check whether a program installation screen is displayed. (English display) When two or
more software modules are contained in the SD card, they are displayed as follows.
When two or more software names are displayed

1. Press the module selection button or 10 keypad [1] - [5].
2. Choose the appropriate module. (If already selected, cancel the selection)
Operation of keys or buttons
Keys or buttons to press Contents
[Exit] or 10 key [0] Returns to normal screen.
[Start] Key Select all modules.
[Clear/Stop] key Cancel all selection states.
Display contents
On the above screen, two programs, i.e., engine firmware and printer application are
displayed. (The screen may change depending on the firmware or application).
The display contents are as follows:
Display Contents
ROM: Display installed module number / version information.
NEW: Display module number / version information in the card.
* The upper row corresponds to the module number, the lower row corresponds to the
version name.
8. Select the module with the module selection button or 10 key operation. The selected module
is highlighted, and [Verify] and [Update] are displayed.
D262 5-6 SM
Firmware Update
 Depending on the combination of update software, it may not be possible to select

simultaneously.
Key or button operations
Keys or buttons to press Contents
[Update] or [#] key Update the ROM of the selected module.
[Verify] button or [./*] key Perform verification of the selected module.
9. Press the [Update] or [#] key, and perform software update.
Maintenance
Reference
System
10. During firmware update, a “firmware update/ verification progress screen" is displayed. When
firmware update is complete, a “firmware update end screen" is displayed.
 In the middle row, the name of the module currently being updated is displayed. (in this
case, the printer is being updated)
 In the lower row, a progress bar is displayed in ten steps. (The more *, the more the
progress.)
 When updating the control unit program, since progress cannot be displayed on the
screen, the ROM update process is determined when the LED of the [Start] key changes
from red to green.
SM 5-7 D262
Firmware Update
Firmware update end screen
 This screen is displayed when all selected firmware modules are to be updated.
"printer" in the second row shows that the module updated last is the printer. (When
more than one are updated simultaneously, only what was updated last is displayed.)
 When Verify has completed normally, the Update done display of the above screen is
"Verify done." If "Verify Error" is displayed, reinstall the software of the application
displayed in the lower row.
11. After switching power OFF, remove the SD card.
12. Again, switch the power ON, and check whether the machine is operating normally.
13. Return the SD card slot cover to the original position.
 When the power supply is switched OFF during firmware update, update is interrupted,
and the power is switched ON again, normal operation cannot be guaranteed.
 To guarantee operation, an update error continues to be displayed until update is
successful.
 In this case, insert the SD card again, switch the power ON, and continue download of
firmware from the SD card automatically.
 Web access card software: EXJS (EXtended Java Script) is a Type-C ESA application,
and like a conventional Web access card, update using an sdk folder is required.
 The PS3 firmware program is included in the preinstalled PDF firmware.
 In the default state, although the PS3 firmware program is hidden in the disabled state,
the function is enabled by installing the PS3 card.
 (The program installed in the PS3 card is a dongle (key) for enabling PS3 function).
 Due to the above specification, the self-diagnosis result report shows the ROM module
number / software version of the PDF firmware at the PS location.
D262 5-8 SM
Firmware Update
5.2.4 ERROR SCREENS DURING UPDATING
EXX shows an error code.

(This error is generated if update was performed when a printer application startup card is
removed after system startup. An error indicating failure of card access is displayed on the
screen.)
For error codes, refer to the following table:
Error Code List
Code Contents Solutions
20 Physical address mapping  Switch the main power supply off and
Maintenance
cannot be performed. on to try again.
Reference
System
 Re-insert the SD card to reboot it.
 Replace the controller board if the
above solutions do not solve the
problem.
21 Insufficient memory for the  Switch the main power supply off and
download on to try again.
updating cannot be done by switching
the power off and on.
22 Decompression of  Switch the main power supply off and

compressed data failed. on to try again.
 Replace the SD card used for the
update.
problem.
SM 5-9 D262
Firmware Update
24 SD card access error  Re-insert the SD card.

 Switch the main power supply off and
on to try again.
 Replace the SD card used for the
update.
problem.
32 The SD card used after  Insert the SD card containing the same
download suspension is program as when the firmware update
incorrect. was suspended, and then switch the
SD cards are different main power supply off and on to try
between the one which was again.
inserted before power  There is a possibility that the SD card
interruption and the one which is damaged if the update cannot be
was inserted after power done after the correct SD card has
interruption. been inserted. In this case, try again
with a different SD card.
problem.
Replace all relevant boards if the
update is done for the BCU and FCU.
Replace the operation panel unit if the
update is done for the operation panel.
33 Card version error.  Install the correct ROM update data for
The wrong card version is each version in the SD card.
downloaded.
34 Destination error.  Install the correct ROM update data for

A card for the wrong each destination (JPN/ EXP/ OEM) in
destination is inserted. the SD card.
35 Model error.  Install the correct ROM update data for

A card for the wrong model is each model in the SD card.
inserted.
D262 5-10 SM
Firmware Update
36 Module error.  Install the program to be updated in

The program to be advance.
downloaded does not exist on  There is a possibility that the SD card
the main unit. containing the program to be updated
The download destination has not been mounted. Check to
specified by the card does not confirm that the SD card has been
match up to the destination for correctly mounted.
the main unit’s program.  The SD card is incorrect if the program
to be updated has been correctly
installed. In this case, insert the correct
SC card.
38 The version of the  Make sure that the program to be

downloaded program has not overwritten is the specified version.
been authorized for the
update.
Maintenance
40 Engine download fails.  Switch the main power supply off and
Reference
System
on to try again.
 If the download fails again, replace the
controller board and the BCU.
41 Fax download fails.  Switch the main power supply off and
on to try again.
controller board and the FCU board.
42 Control panel / language  Switch the main power supply off and
download fails. on to try again.
controller board and the operation
panel unit.
43 Printing download fails.  Switch the main power supply off and
on to try again.
 The SD card media is damaged if the
update fails again. Replace the SD
card media.
SM 5-11 D262
Firmware Update
44 The data to be overwritten  Switch the main power supply off and
cannot be accessed when on to try again.
controller-related programs  Install the correct ROM update data in
are downloaded. the SD card.
 Replace the controller board if the data
to be overwritten is contained on the
controller board.
49 Firmware updates are  The setting of Update Firmware in the

currently prohibited. Administrator Tools has been set to
[Prohibit] by an administrator. Amend
the setting to [Do not Prohibit] and try
again.
50 The results of the electronic  Install the correct ROM update data in
authorization check have the SD card.
rejected the update data.
57 @Remote is not connected at  Check the @Remote connection.

the date/time reserved for
receiving the package
firmware update from the
network.
58 Update cannot be done due to  Check the @Remote connection.

a reception route problem.
59 HDD is not mounted.  Check the HDD connection.
60 HDD could not be used during  Try again.

the package firmware update.  Replace the HDD if the download fails
again.
61 The module ID for the  Prepare the correct package files.

package firmware update is
incorrect.
62 The configuration of the  Prepare the correct package files.

package firmware update files
is incorrect.
D262 5-12 SM
Firmware Update
63 Reception fails due to the  Update is to be done automatically

power off at the reserved when the next reception time has
date/time of the remote elapsed.
network.
64 Reception fails due to the  Reset the reservation date/time for the
power off at the reserved remote update.
date/time of the package
network.

status error of the machine at when the next reception time has
the reserved date/time of the elapsed.
remote firmware update from
the network.
Maintenance
Reference
66 Reception failed due to the Reset the reservation date/time for the
System

status error of the machine at remote update.
the reserved date/time of the
package firmware update
from the network.
67 Acquisition of the latest  Check that the network is connected

version information from the correctly.
Gateway fails at the reserved
date/time of the remote
network.

Gateway fails.
69 Download fails at the reserved  Check that the network is connected

date/time of the remote correctly.
network.
SM 5-13 D262
Firmware Update
70 Package firmware download  Check that the network is connected

from the network fails. correctly.
71 Network communication error  Check that the network is connected

occurs at the reserved correctly.
network.
72 The setting of @Remote is  Set the setting of @Remote Service in

invalid at the reserved the Administrator Tools to [Do not
date/time of the package Prohibit].
network.
57 @Remote is not connected at  Check the @Remote connection.

the date/time reserved for
receiving the package
network.
58 Update cannot be done due to  Check the @Remote connection.

a reception route problem.
59 HDD is not mounted.  Check the HDD connection.
60 HDD could not be used during  Try again.

the package firmware update.  Replace the HDD if the download fails
again.
61 The module ID for the  Prepare the correct package files.

package firmware update is
incorrect.
62 The configuration of the  Prepare the correct package files.

package firmware update files
is incorrect.
D262 5-14 SM
Firmware Update

power off at the reserved when the next reception time has
date/time of the remote elapsed.
network.
64 Reception fails due to the  Reset the reservation date/time for the
power off at the reserved remote update.
network.

status error of the machine at when the next reception time has
the reserved date/time of the elapsed.
remote firmware update from
the network.
Maintenance
Reference
66 Reception failed due to the Reset the reservation date/time for the
System

status error of the machine at remote update.
the reserved date/time of the
package firmware update
from the network.

Gateway fails at the reserved
date/time of the remote
network.

Gateway fails.
69 Download fails at the reserved  Check that the network is connected

date/time of the remote correctly.
network.
SM 5-15 D262
Firmware Update
70 Package firmware download  Check that the network is connected

from the network fails. correctly.
71 Network communication error  Check that the network is connected

occurs at the reserved correctly.
network.
72 The setting of @Remote is  Set the setting of @Remote Service in

invalid at the reserved the Administrator Tools to [Do not
date/time of the package Prohibit].
network.
 The PDF firmware installed as standard contains a program required to print PS3 data as
default. However, this PS3 program is normally disabled.
 The PS3 firmware is a dongle (key) which enables PS3 data printing functions. When the
PS3 firmware is installed, the PS3 program in the PDF firmware is enabled. Due to this
specification, the self-diagnosis result report shows the ROM part number/software
version of the PDF firmware contained in the PS3 program.
D262 5-16 SM
RFU Updating the Firmware
5.3 RFU UPDATING THE FIRMWARE
In this machine, software can be updated by remote control using @Remote.
Maintenance
Reference
System
5.3.1 RFU PERFORMABLE CONDITION
RFU is performable for a device which meets the following conditions.
1. The customer consents to the use of RFU.
2. The devise is connected to a network via TCP/IP for @Remote.
SM 5-17 D262
Package Firmware Update
5.4 PACKAGE FIRMWARE UPDATE
 The HDD unit must be installed on the machine to enable the SFU or the package
firmware update via SD card.
5.4.1 OVERVIEW
Each firmware module (such as System/Copy, Engine, etc) used to be updated individually.
However, an all-inclusive firmware package (package_ALL) is now available.
There are two ways to update using the firmware package.
 Package Firmware Update via a network: SFU (Smart Firmware Update)
 Package Firmware Update with an SD card
Package Firmware Update via a network: SFU (Smart Firmware Update)

 There are two methods for SFU.
 Immediate Update: To update the firmware when visiting
 Update at the next visit: To set the date and time for downloading. The firmware will
be automatically downloaded beforehand and updated at the following visit.
 “Update at the next visit” is recommended since firmware download may take some
minutes due to the network condition.
 SFU requires the connection to @Remote via a device which has the embedded
@Remote communicating function. When a machine is connected to @Remote via
an intermediate device (RC Gate), the SFU function is disabled.
Package Firmware Update via an SD Card
Package firmware update can also be performed using the conventional SD card method by
writing the package firmware directly to the SD card.
D262 5-18 SM
Types of firmware update files, supported update methods:
SFU SD RFU
Individual firmware N/A Available Available
Package firmware Available Available N/A
5.4.2 IMMEDIATE UPDATE

Enter the [Firmware Update] menu in the SP mode and update the package firmware.
 The [Firmware Update] button will appear even when a machine is connected to
@Remote with a device which does not have an embedded @Remote communicating
function.
 If an error code is displayed, refer to Error Screens During Updating (p.5-9).
2. Touch [Firmware Update].
Maintenance
Reference
System
3. Touch [Update].
SM 5-19 D262
4. Touch [Execute Update].
5. Touch [YES].
6. The following display will be displayed.
 If the error code E66, which indicates that the download of the firmware has failed, is
displayed, implement this procedure from step 1.
 Update will be started automatically after the download is finished.
 When the machine is in the update mode, the automatic update is suspended if a
print job is implemented. After the print job is finished, touch [YES] on the display
shown with the following picture to restart updating.
D262 5-20 SM
7. [Update done] is displayed.

 The machine will automatically reboot itself.
Maintenance
Reference
System
 The figures at the lower right of the display indicate “Number of updated items/ All
items to be updated”.
SM 5-21 D262
5.4.3 UPDATE AT THE NEXT VISIT (RESERVE)

It is possible to set the machine to download the package firmware which is necessary for SFU in
advance, and then perform the actual installation at the next service visit. This saves waiting time
for the firmware to download at the service visit.
How to Set the Machine to Download Firmware Later (RESERVE)

Enter the [Firmware Update] menu in the SP mode and update the package firmware.
 The [Firmware Update] button will appear even when a machine is connected to
@Remote with a device which does not have an embedded @Remote communicating
function. If an error code is displayed, refer to Error Screens During Updating (p.5-9).
3. Touch [Reserve].
D262 5-22 SM
4. Touch [Reservation setting].
5. Enter the dates and times of next visit and start of receiving data.
 ”Next time to visit this customer”: The package firmware will be automatically downloaded
by this time/date.
 ”When to receive? (1-7)”: The download of the package firmware will begin this number
of days before the next visit.
Maintenance
Reference
System
SM 5-23 D262
Successful Download
In the two diagrams below, the firmware is set to be downloaded by the day before the next
scheduled visit. In the first diagram, the download is successful on the first try. In the second
diagram, the download fails three times and is successful on the fourth try.
 If the firmware download fails or cannot be completed due to the network settings/condition,
no power to the machine, or other reason, the machine will continue retrying every six hours
until the scheduled deadline (up to a maximum of four tries). For example, if the download is
set for the day before the next visit, the machine will attempt the download at 24 hours before
the visit, and then continue trying every six hours (max. four tries total).
 The retry is only performed in cases when the firmware download has failed.
 If the machine is in Energy Saver mode when the download is scheduled to begin, the
download will be performed in the background and the machine/panel will stay in Energy
Saver mode.
 The download will continue uninterrupted even if the customer initiates a print job, copy job,
fax receiving or other operation while the download is in progress.
 The download will be terminated if the customer turns the power off while the download is in
progress.
 If the download cannot be completed successfully by the time of the next scheduled visit, the
machine will stop trying to download the firmware.
D262 5-24 SM
How to Check if the Firmware Downloaded with RESERVE

3. Touch [Reserve].
Maintenance
Reference
System
4. Touch [Reserve and received package information].
SM 5-25 D262
5. Check the information displayed.

When the package firmware is downloaded successfully, the details of the download result
are displayed as the following picture shows.
 This information will only be displayed if the reserved firmware has already been
downloaded. If not, all the data items are indicated with “-”.
How to Install Firmware Downloaded with RESERVE

3. Touch [Update].
D262 5-26 SM
4. Touch [Execute Update].
5. Check the version of the received package firmware, and then touch [YES].
 Update is started.
Maintenance
Reference
System
 If the version of the reserved package in the HDD is older than the latest version, the
messages shown in the following picture are displayed.
 If you wish to download the latest version, touch [Execute] beside the message
“Download and update the latest package.” Then update of the package firmware will
be started.
 If you wish to update using the firmware in the HDD (old version), touch [Execute]
beside the message “Update to the received package.”
SM 5-27 D262
6. [Update done] message is displayed.

 The machine will automatically reboot itself.
D262 5-28 SM
5.4.4 UPDATE VIA SD CARD

Update with an SD card, which is the conventional method, is available if you write the
package firmware to the SD card.
 If an error code is displayed, refer to Error Screens During Updating (p.5-9).

1. Create a new folder in the SD card, and then name it “package”.
2. Copy the package firmware (xxxxxxxx.pkg) to this folder.
 If you copy the package firmware into the conventional “romdata” folder, the update
Maintenance
Reference
will not work.
System
 Only one version of the package firmware should be copied into the folder. If you
copy multiple versions of package firmware to the SD card, the machine will select
only one version of the firmware randomly.
4. Insert the SD card which contains the package into SD card slot 2 (for service).
5. Turn the power ON and touch [Update].
SM 5-29 D262
 When the SD card contains both a firmware package and one or more modules, the
following display may show up. Select [Package] and touch [OK] to move to step 4
above.
6. Update is started automatically after the package firmware download to the HDD has
been completed.
7. When update is completed, “Update done” is displayed.
8. Turn the main power switch OFF, and then pull out the SD card from SD card slot 2.
D262 5-30 SM
Updating JavaVM
5.5 UPDATING JAVAVM
5.5.1 CREATING AN SD CARD FOR UPDATING

1. Download the update modules from Firmware Download Center. As one of the model
modules, "Java VM v11 UpdateTool" is available for download. (The version differs
depending on the model.)
2. Unzip the downloaded file. Copy the whole "sdk" folder to the root of the SD card
directly below.
 When unzipping the downloaded file, two subfolders ("update" and "sdk") exist in the
"sdk" folder. Rather than just copying the subfolder "sdk", copy the whole folder
"sdk".
Updating Procedure
 SD card can be inserted with the machine power off.

 During the updating process, do not turn off the power.
Maintenance
Reference
System
 If you turn off the power during the updating, the machine performance is not guaranteed.
(There is a possibility that an SC and boot failure occurs.)
 If you accidentally turn off the power during the updating, retry the updating procedure
from the beginning. (If the update fails again, you will need to replace the controller
board.)
1. If the boot priority application is set to the ESA application, switch to the copy
application. ([System Settings]-[General Features]-[Function Priority])
2. Insert the SD card you created into the service slot, and then turn ON the main power
switch.
3. Take a note of the current Heap size. ([Extended Feature Settings] – [Administrator
Tools] – [Heap/Stack Size Settings])
The Heap size setting is changed to the initial setting when updating.
5. Insert the SD card for update into the service slot.
7. After booting Java VM, update of the application is started. "Updating SDK/J" appears
in the banner message of the touch panel display. (Estimated time: about 2 minutes)
SM 5-31 D262
Updating JavaVM
8. After completing the update and starting the Java VM, "Update SDK / J done
SUCCESS" appear in the banner message of the touch panel display. After turning off
the power, remove the SD card from the slot.
When you fail to update, "Update SDK/J done FAIL" is displayed. You can confirm the cause
of the error message below.
10. Reconfigure the Heap size. ([Extended Feature Settings]-[Administrator
Tools]-[Heap/Stack Size Settings]).
See the manual for the ESA application to know what value to set for the heap size.
11. Return to the previous setting for the boot priority application.
List of Error Messages

Update results are output as a text file on the SD card called "sdkjversionup.log" in the "¥sdk
¥update" folder.
Result File contents Description of the output
script file = Boot script path

/mnt/sd0/sdk/update/bootscript Boot scripts processing start time
Success
2012/08/22 17:57:47 start End time boot script processing, the
2012/08/22 17:59:47 end SUCCESS results
script file = Boot script path

/mnt/sd0/sdk/update/bootscript Boot scripts processing start time
Failure 2012/08/22 17:57:47 start Error message (Possibly multiple)
XXXX Error End time boot script processing, the
2012/08/22 17:57:57 end FAIL results
D262 5-32 SM
Updating JavaVM
Error Message Cause Remedy
PIECEMARK Applied the wrong updating Use the correct updating

Error,machine=XXXXX tool (Using the updating tool tool for this model.
of a different model)
pasePut() - error : The file of Inadequacy with the SD Re-create the SD card for
the card for updating updating.
copy origin is not found (Files are missing in the
Put Error! updating tool)
paseCopy() - error : The file Inadequacy SD card for Inadequacy SD card for
of the copy origin is not updating updating
found. (Files in the updating tool (Files in the updating tool
Copy Error! are missing) are missing)
[file name: XX] error,No Writing destination is full. Uninstall the unnecessary
space (The NAND flash memory SDK applications.
left on device on the controller board is If you can not uninstall it,
Maintenance
Reference
pasePut() - error : The full.) implement escalation,
System
destination directory cannot stating the "model name,
be application configuration,
made. SMC sheet
pasePut() - error : fileCopy (SP5-990-006/024/025),
Error. and error file."
Put Error!
[file name: XX] error,No Writing destination is full. Uninstall the unnecessary
space (The NAND flash memory SDK applications.
left on device on the controller board is If you can not uninstall it,
paseCopy() - error : The full.) implement escalation
destination directory cannot stating the "model name,
be application configuration,
made. SMC sheet
paseCopy() - error : fileCopy (SP5-990-006/024/025),
Error. and error file."
Copy Error!
Put Error! *1 Error, not normally expected If you cannot uninstall it,
to occur implement escalation
Copy Error! *1
SM 5-33 D262
Updating JavaVM
Error Message Cause Remedy
Delete Error! stating the "model name,

application configuration,
[XXXXX] is an unsupported
SMC sheet
command.
(SP5-990-006/024/025),
Version Error and error file."
*1
Without the foregoing error
message, only "Put Error /
Copy Error" will be
displayed
D262 5-34 SM
Capturing the Debug Logs
5.6 CAPTURING THE DEBUG LOGS
5.6.1 OVERVIEW
With this feature, you can save debug logs that are stored in the machine (HDD or operation
panel) on an SD card. It allows the Customer Engineer to save and retrieve error information for
analysis.
The Capturing Log feature saves debug logs for the following four.
 Controller debug log including operation log
 Engine debug log
 FCU debug log
 Operation panel log
 In older models, a technician enabled the logging tool after a problem occurred. After that,
when the problem had been reproduced, the technician was able to retrieve the debug
log.
 However, this new feature saves the debug logs at the time that problems occur. Then
you can copy the logs to an SD card.
Maintenance
Reference
System
 You can retrieve the debug logs using a SD card without a network.
 Analysis of the debug log is effective for problems caused by the software. Analysis of the
debug log is not valid for the selection of defective parts or problems caused by
hardware.
Types of debug logs that can be saved
Type Storage Timing Destination (maximum storage

capacity)
Controller debug  Saved at all times HDD (4 GB) or SD card connected

log including to the service slot.
operation log When the data gets over 4.0 GB,
the older data is deleted.
SM 5-35 D262
Type Storage Timing Destination (maximum storage

capacity)
Engine debug log  When an engine SC HDD or SD card connected to the

occurs service slot (Up to 300 times)
 When paper
feeding/output stop by
jams
 When the machine doors
are opened during normal
operation
FCU debug log  When a specified amount HDD or SD card connected to the
of FCU debug log is stored service slot
in the FCU. If fax
application is unavailable
(e.g. not installed), the
machine does not transfer
the log.
Operation panel  When an error related to Memory in the operation panel.

log the operation panel occurs.
 Debug logs are not saved in the following conditions:

 While erasing all memory
 While data encryption equipment is installed
 While changing the firmware configuration
 Forced power OFF (accidentally disconnecting the outlet)
 Engine debug log in shutdown
 When the power supply to the HDD is off because of energy saving (engine OFF mode
/STR mode)
 When one of the following SC occurs: SC672, SC816, SC819, SC878, SC899, SC859,
SC860, SC861, SC863, or SC864
D262 5-36 SM
 Following logs are not saved:

 Log related to the energy saver mode (Engine-off, suspend-mode, or other cases)
Network communication log
Logs related to NRS
IP-FAX log
Access log for unauthorized user (guest)
 HTTP session timeout log
 Auto log-out log
 IC card related log
 Authorization for Fax
Security of the Operation Log

The following operation logs related to security are not saved.
 User ID
 Password
 IP address
 Telephone number
Maintenance
Encryption key
Reference

System
 Transition to SP mode
5.6.2 RETRIEVING THE DEBUG LOGS
 Retrieve debug logs to identify the date of occurrence of the problems and to find details
of the problems
 e.g.: At around 8:00 am on March 10, an engine stall occurred. The operation panel does
not respond. Turn the main power supply off / on.
 Analysis of the debug log is effective for problems caused by the software. Analysis of the
debug log is not valid for the selection of defective parts or problems caused by
hardware.
SM 5-37 D262
Procedure for Retrieving the Debug Log with SD Card

1. Insert the SD card into the slot on the side of the operation panel or the service slot.
 It is recommended to use the SD card provided as a service part. This is because the
log data can be acquired much faster than when using commercially available SD
cards.
2. Enter SP mode.
3. Execute SP5-858-141 (Acquire All Debug Logs) to write the debug log to the SD card.
If the transfer is finished successfully, ‘completed’ is displayed on the touch panel display.
 The approximate time it takes to transfer the debug log is as follows. Transfer time
may be affected by the type or format of the SD card. (It is recommended that you
format the SD card using the Panasonic SD Formatter (freeware)).
 Controller debug log (GW debug log): 2 - 20 minutes
 Engine debug log: 2 minutes
 Operation panel debug log: 2 - 20 minutes
4. Make sure that the SD card access LED is off, then remove the SD card.
 If ‘failed’ appears on the touch panel display, turn the power off, and then recover
from step 1 again.
The debug logs are saved with the following file names.
Controller debug log (GW debug /LogTrace/[Machine

log) Serial]/watching/[yyyymmdd_hhmmss]_[UniqueID].gz
/LogTrace/[Machine
Engine debug log
Serial]/engine/[yyyymmdd_hhmmss].gz
/LogTrace/[Machine
FCU debug log
Serial]/fculog/[yyyymmdd_hhmmss].gz
D262 5-38 SM
Reboot/System Setting Reset
5.7 REBOOT/SYSTEM SETTING RESET
5.7.1 SYSTEM SETTINGS AND COPY SETTING RESET
System Setting Reset

The system settings in the UP mode can be reset to their defaults. Use the following procedure.
4. Hold down and then press [System Settings].
 Press first.
Maintenance
Reference
System
5. Touch "Yes" when the message prompts you to confirm that you want to reset the
system settings.
6. Touch [exit] when the message tells you that the settings have been reset.
SM 5-39 D262
Reboot/System Setting Reset
Copier Setting Reset

Use the following procedure to reset the copy settings in the UP mode to their defaults.
4. Hold down and then press [Copier/Document Server Features].
 Press first.
5. Touch [Yes] when the message prompts you to confirm that you want to reset the
Copier Document Server settings.
6. Touch [exit] when the message tells you that the settings have been reset.
D262 5-40 SM
NVRAM Data Upload/Download
5.8 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD
5.8.1 UPLOADING CONTENT OF NVRAM TO AN SD CARD

Do the following procedure to upload SP code settings from NVRAM to an SD card.
 This data should always be uploaded to an SD card before the NVRAM is replaced.
 Make sure that the write protection of an SD card is unlocked.
1. Do SP5-990-001 (SP Print Mode: All (Data List)) before you switch the machine off. You
will need a record of the NVRAM settings if the upload fails.
2. Switch the copier main power switch off.
3. Remove the SD slot cover [A]. ( × 1)
Maintenance
Reference
4. Insert the SD card into SD card slot 2 (lower) [A]. System
SM 5-41 D262
NVRAM Data Upload/Download
5. Switch the copier on.

6. Execute SP5-824-001 (NVRAM Data Upload) and then touch [EXECUTE].
7. The following files are coped to an NVRAM folder on the SD card when the upload
procedure is finished. The file is saved to the path and the following filename:
NVRAM¥<serial number>.NV
Here is an example with Serial Number "K5000017114":
NVRAM¥K5000017114.NV
8. In order to prevent an error during the download, be sure to mark the SD card that
holds the uploaded data with the number of the machine from which the data was
uploaded.
 You can upload NVRAM data from more than one machine to the same SD card.
5.8.2 DOWNLOADING AN SD CARD TO NVRAM

Do the following procedure to download SP data from an SD card to the NVRAM in the machine.
 The NVRAM data download may fail if the SD card with the NVRAM data is damaged, or if
the connection between the controller and BCU is defective.
 Do the download procedure again if the download fails.
 Do the following procedure if the second attempt fails:
 Enter the NVRAM data manually using the SMC print you created before uploading the
NVRAM data.
1. Switch the copier main power switch off.
2. Remove the SD slot cover. ( × 1)
3. Insert the SD card with the NVRAM data into SD Card Slot 2 (lower).
4. Switch the copier main power switch on.
5. Do SP5-825-001 (NVRAM Data Download) and touch [EXECUTE].
 The serial number of the file on the SD card must match the serial number of the
machine for the NVRAM data to download successfully. The download fails if the
serial numbers do not match.
This procedure does not download the following data to the NVRAM:
 Total Count
 C/O, P/O Count
D262 5-42 SM
Address Book Upload/Download
5.9 ADDRESS BOOK UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD
5.9.1 INFORMATION LIST

The following information is possible to be uploaded and downloaded.
Information
 Registration No.  Select Title

 User Code  Folder
 E-mail  Local Authentication
 Protection Code  Folder Authentication
 Fax Destination  Account ACL
 Fax Option  New Document Initial ACL
 Group Name  LDAP Authentication
 Key Display
Maintenance
Reference
5.9.2 DOWNLOAD
System
1. Prepare a formatted SD card.
2. Make sure that the write-protection on the SD card is off.
3. Turn off the main power switch of the main machine.
4. Remove the SD slot cover [A] at the left rear side of the machine ( × 1).
SM 5-43 D262
5. Install the SD card into the SD card slot 2 (lower) [A] (for service use).
6. Turn on the main power switch.

8. Do SP5-846-051 (Backup All Addr Book).
9. Exit the SP mode, and then turn off the main power switch.
10. Remove the SD card form the SD card slot 2 (lower).
11. Install the SD slot cover.
 If the capacity of SD card is not enough to store the local user information, an error
message is displayed.
 Carefully handle the SD card, which contains user information. Do not take it back to
your location.
D262 5-44 SM
5.9.3 UPLOAD
1. Turn off the main power switch of the main machine.
2. Remove the SD slot cover at the left rear side of the machine ( × 1).
3. Install the SD card, which has already been uploaded, into the SD card slot 2 (lower).
4. Turn on the main power switch.
6. Do SP5-846-052 (Restore All Addr Book).
7. Exit the SP mode, and then turn off the main power switch.
8. Remove the SD card form the SD card slot 2 (lower).
9. Install the SD slot cover.
 The counter in the user code information is initialized after uploading.

 The information of an administrator and supervisor cannot be downloaded nor uploaded.
 If there is no data of address book information in the SD card, an error message is
displayed.
Maintenance
Reference
System
SM 5-45 D262
SMC List Card Save Function
5.10 SMC LIST CARD SAVE FUNCTION
5.10.1 OVERVIEW
SMC List Card Save

 The SMC List Card Save (SP Text Mode) function is used to save the SMC list as CSV files to
the SD-card inserted into the operation panel SD-card slot.
5.10.2 PROCEDURE
1. Turn the main power switch OFF.
2. Insert the SD card into the operation panel SD-card slot. Then turn the power ON.
3. Enter SP mode.
4. Select “Copy SP”.
5. Select SP-5992 "SP Text Mode”.

6. Select a detail SP number shown below to save data on the SD card.
SP-5992-xxx (SP Text Mode)
Detail No. SMC Categories to Save
001 All (Data List)
002 SP (Mode Data List)
003 User Program
004 Logging Data
005 Diagnostic Report
006 Non-Default
007 NIB Summary
D262 5-46 SM
Detail No. SMC Categories to Save
008 Capture Log
021 Copier User Program
022 Scanner SP
023 Scanner User Program
024 SDK/J Summary
025 SDK/J Application Info
026 Printer SP
7. Press [EXECUTE].
Maintenance
Reference
System
8. Press [EXECUTE] again to start. Press [CANCEL] to cancel the saving.
SM 5-47 D262
9. “It is executing it” is shown on the screen while executing.
10. Wait for 2 to 3 minutes until “Completed” is shown.
 The SMC list saving may take from 2 to 3 minutes to complete.

 Press [CANCEL] to abort executing.
11. Press [Exit] to exit from SP mode.
5.10.3 FILE NAMES OF THE SAVED SMC LISTS

The SMC list data saved on the SD-card will be named automatically. The file naming rules are as
follows.
Example:
A:
Machine serial number (fixed for each machine)
B:
SP number saved in this file.
First four digits (5992) in this part are fixed. The other one or two digits are the detail SP
number(s). In this case, it is one digit. Therefore, this file is of SP5-992-001 (All data list). See the
upper SP table for the correspondence between SP detail numbers and the contents.
C:
File creation date
Year/Month/Day (“Zero” will be omitted if each is one digit.)
D:
D262 5-48 SM
File creation time

Hour/Minute/Second (“Zero” will be omitted if each is one digit.)
E:
File Extension CSV (Comma Separated Value)
This part is fixed.
 A folder named by the machine serial number will be created on the SD card when this
function is executed.
 This function can save the SMC list data only to an SD card inserted into the operation
panel SD card slot.
5.10.4 ERROR MESSAGES

SMC List Card Save error message:
 Failed:
FACTOR: Read-only file system, No space left on device.
If an error occurs, pressing “Exit” will cause the device to discard the job and return to the ready
state.
Maintenance
Reference
System
SM 5-49 D262
UP/SP Data Import/Export
5.11 UP/SP DATA IMPORT/EXPORT
5.11.1 OVERVIEW
Import/export conditions
Import/export is possible between devices only if their model type, region of use, and the following
device configurations match.
 Input Tray
 Output Tray
 ARDF
 Whether or not equipped with a hard disk
 Whether or not equipped with a finisher and the type of finisher
5.11.2 UP DATA IMPORT/EXPORT
Data that can be imported and exported

 Copier / Document Server Features
 Printer Features
 Scanner Features
 Facsimile Features
 Browser Features
 Extended Feature Settings
 Program (Document Server)
 Program (Copier)
 Program (Scanner)
 Web Image Monitor Setting
 Web Service Settings
 System Settings
D262 5-50 SM
Data that cannot be imported or exported

 Some System Settings *1 *2
*1 The setting for the date, settings that require the device certificate, and settings that need
to be adjusted for each machine (for example, image adjustment settings) cannot be imported
or exported.
*2 Settings only for executing functions and settings only for viewing cannot be imported or
exported.
 Extended Feature Settings
 Address book
 Programs (fax function)
 Programs (printer function)
 User stamp in Copier / Document Server Features
 Settings that can be specified via telnet
 @Remote-related data
 Counters
 EFI printer unit settings
 Settings that can only be specified via Web Image Monitor or Web Service (for example,
Maintenance
Bonjour, SSDP setting)
Reference
System
SM 5-51 D262
Exporting Device Information

This can be exported / imported by an administrator with all privileges.
When exporting SP device information from the control panel, the data is saved on an SD card.
1. Insert an SD card into the media slot on the side of the control panel.
2. Log in from the control panel as an administrator with all privileges.
5. Press [Next] four times.
6. Press [Device Setting Information: Export (Memry Strge Devc)].
7. Set the export conditions.
 Specify whether to [Include] or [Exclude] the "Device Unique Information". "Device

Unique Information" includes the IP address, host name, fax number, etc.
 Specify an encryption key.
8. Press [Run Export].
9. Press [OK].
10. Press [Exit].
11. Log out.
D262 5-52 SM
 If data export fails, the details of the error can be viewed in the log.
 When device Information is periodically imported, it is necessary to create the device
setting information file with special software and store it on the web server.
Importing Device Information

This can be exported / imported by an administrator with all privileges.
Import device information saved on an SD card.
2. Log in from the control panel as an administrator with all privileges.
5. Press [Next] four times.
6. Press [Device Setting Information: Import (Memry Strge Devc)].
7. Configure the import conditions.
Maintenance
Reference
System
 Press [Select] of the "Device Setting Info. File" to select the file(s) to import.
 When inserting a file into a home screen, press [Select] for the Image for Home screen
and select the file. You cannot use this setting when using the Smart Operation Panel.
 Specify whether to [Include] or [Exclude] the "Device Unique Information". "Device
Unique Information" includes the IP address, host name, fax number, etc.
 Enter the encryption key that was specified when the file was exported.
8. Press [Run Import].
9. Press [OK].
10. Press [Exit].
The machine restarts.
SM 5-53 D262
5.11.3 SP DATA IMPORT/EXPORT
Data that can be imported and exported

 System SP
 Printer SP
 Fax SP
 Scanner SP
Exporting Device Information

When exporting SP device information from the control panel, the data is saved on an SD card.
2. Enter SP mode.
3. Press SP5-749-001 (Import/Export: Export)
4. Select “Target” SP settings (System/Printer/Fax/Scanner) to be exported.
5. Select “Option” settings (Unique/Secret).
Item Specification Note
Unique Unique Unique information that can be updated

information of #1. Items that are to be used to identify the machine.
the machine is Example: Network Information/ Host name / Information
included in the related to fax number /Mail address assigned to the
exported file if machine
you select #2. Items for specifying the options equipped on the
"Unique" machine.
setting. Example: Lot number for developer
Unique information that cannot be updated
#1. Items that may cause a problem if imported
Example: Serial number / Information related to
@Remote
#2. Items for managing the history of the machine
Example: Time and date / Counter information /
Installation date
#3. Setting values for the Engine
D262 5-54 SM
Item Specification Note
Secret Secret Secret information

information is #1. Data that cannot be exported without being
exported if you encrypted.
select "Secret" (Exported data is encrypted.)
setting. Example: Password / Encryption key / PIN code
#2. Confidential information for the customer
Example: User name / User ID / Department code / Mail
address / Phone number
#3. Personal information
Example: Document name / Image data
#4. Sensitive information for the customer
Example: MAC address / Network parameters
* The IP address is exported when both 'Unique' and 'Secret' are selected.
6. Select “Crpt config” setting (Encryption).
Maintenance
Reference
Encryption Select whether to If the encryption function is used, setting of an
System
encrypt or not when encryption key is required by direct input.
exporting.  Type the arbitrary password using the soft
If you push the keyboard
"Encryption" key,  Can enter up to 32 characters
you can export
secret information.
7. Press [Execute].
8. Press [OK].
SM 5-55 D262
Importing Device Information

Import device information saved on an SD card.
2. Enter SP mode.
3. Press SP5-749-101(Import/Export: Import)
4. Select a unique setting.
5. Press [Encryption Key], if the encryption key was created when the file was exported.
6. Select an encryption setting.
Unique If you want to apply the unique Refer to the above information.
information to the target machine,
select the "Unique" key.
Encryption If an encrypted file is selected as the

import file, this setting is required.
7. Press [Execute].
8. Press [OK].
D262 5-56 SM
5.11.4 POSSIBLE SOLUTIONS FOR IMPORT/EXPORT PROBLEMS

The access log file is created when export/import is executed. The file is stored in the same
location as the exported device setting information file.
If an error occurs, check the log's result code in the access log file first. Values other than 0
indicate that an error occurred.
The result code will appear in the circled area illustrated below.
- Example of a log file
Maintenance
Reference
System
If you cannot solve the problem or do not know how to solve it after checking the code, note down
the error log entry, then contact your supervisor.
SM 5-57 D262
Result Code Cause Solutions
2 (INVALID A file import was Import files exported from the same
REQUEST) attempted between model with the same device
different models or configurations.
machines with
different device
configurations.
4 (INVALID OUTPUT Failed to write the Check whether the destination device is
DIR) device information to operating normally.
the destination
device.
7( MODULE ERROR) An unexpected error Switch the power off and then back on,
occurred during and then try the operation again. If the
import or export. error persists, contact your supervisor.
8 (DISK FULL) The available storage Execute the operation again after
space on the external making sure there is enough storage
medium is insufficient. space.
9 (DEVICE ERROR) Failed to write or read Check whether the path to the folder for
the log file. storing the file or the folder in which the
file is stored is missing.
10 (LOG ERROR) The hard disk is Contact your supervisor.

faulty.
D262 5-58 SM
Result Code Cause Solutions
20 (PART FAILED) Failed to import some The reason for the failure is logged in
settings. "NgCode". Check the code.
Reason for the Error (Ng-Name)
2. INVALID VALUE
The specified value exceeds the
allowable range.
3. PERMISSION ERROR
The permission to edit the setting is
missing.
4. NOT EXIST
The setting does not exist in the system.
5. INTERLOCK ERROR
The setting cannot be changed because
of the system status or interlocking with
other specified settings.
6. OTHER ERROR
Maintenance
The setting cannot be changed for some
Reference
System
other reason.
21 (INVALID FILE) Failed to import the Check whether the file format is correct.
file because it is in the The import file should be a CSV file.
wrong format in the
external medium.
22 (INVALID KEY) The encryption key is Use the correct encryption key.
not valid.
 When exporting device information from the control panel, the data can be saved only on
an SD card.
 The file format for exports is CSV.
SM 5-59 D262
Test Pattern Printing
5.12 TEST PATTERN PRINTING
Printing Test pattern: SP4-417

Some of these test patterns are used for copy image adjustments but most are used primarily for
design testing.
 Do not operate the machine until the test pattern is printed out completely. Otherwise, an
SC occurs.
1. Enter the SP mode and select SP4-417.
2. Enter the number for the test pattern that you want to print and press [#].
No. Pattern
0 Scanned Image
1 Gradation Main Scan A
2 Color Patch 16
3 Grid Pattern A
4 Slant Grid Pattern B
5 Slant Grid Pattern C
6 Slant Grid Pattern D
7 Scanned + Grid Pattern C
8 Scanned + Grid Pattern D
3. Touch "Copy Window" to open the copy window, then select the settings for the test print
(paper size etc.).
4. Press the "Start" key to start the test print.
5. After checking the test pattern, touch "SP Mode" on the LCD to return to the SP mode display.
6. Reset all settings to the default values.
7. Touch "Exit" twice to exit SP mode.
D262 5-60 SM
Card Save Function
5.13 CARD SAVE FUNCTION
5.13.1 OVERVIEW
Card Save:
 The Card Save function is used to save print jobs received by the printer on an SD card with
no print output. Card Save mode is toggled using printer Bit Switch #1 bit number 4. Card
Save will remain enabled until the SD card becomes full, or until all file names have been
used.
 Captures are stored on the SD card in the folder /prt/cardsave. File names are assigned
sequentially from PRT00000.prn to PRT99999.prn. An additional file PRT.CTL will be created.
This file contains a list of all files created on the card by the card save function.
 Previously stored files on the SD card can be overwritten or left intact. Card Save SD has
"Add" and "New" menu items.
 Card Save (Add): Appends files to the SD Card. Does not overwrite existing files. If the
card becomes full or if all file names are used, an error will be displayed on the operation
panel. Subsequent jobs will not be stored.
Maintenance
Card Save (New): Overwrites files in the card's /prt/cardsave directory.
Reference

System
Limitation:
 Card Save cannot be used with PJL Status Readback commands. PJL Status Readbacks will
not work. In addition they will cause the Card Save to fail.
5.13.2 PROCEDURE
1. Turn the main power switch OFF.
2. Insert the SD card into slot 2 (lower). Then turn the power ON.
3. Enter SP mode.
4. Select the "Printer SP".
5. Select SP-1001 "Bit Switch".
6. Select "Bit Switch 1 Settings" and use the numeric keypad to turn bit 4 ON and then
press the "#" button to register the change. The result should look like: 00010000. By
doing this, Card Save option will appear in the "List/Test Print" menu.
SM 5-61 D262
Card Save Function
7. Press "Exit" to exit SP Mode.

8. Press the User Tools icon.
9. Press "Machine Features"
10. Select "Printer Features".
11. Card Save (Add) and Card Save (New) should be displayed on the screen. Select Card
Save (Add) or Card Save (New).
12. Press "OK" and then exit the "User Tools" menu.
D262 5-62 SM
Card Save Function
13. Press the "Printer" button.

14. Card Save should be displayed in the top left of the display panel.
15. Send a job to the printer. The Communicating light should start blinking.
16. As soon as the printer receives the data, it will be stored on the SD card automatically
with no print output. Nothing is displayed on the screen, indicating that a Card Save
operation was successful.
17. Press "Stop" button to exit Card Save mode.
18. Change the Bit Switch Settings back to the default 00000000. Press the "#" button in
the numeric keypad to register the changes.
19. Remove the SD card after the main power switch is turned off.
Maintenance
5.13.3 ERROR MESSAGES
Reference
System
Card Save error messages:
 Init error: A card save process (e.g. card detection, change to kernel mode) failed to initialize.
 Card not found: Card cannot be detected in the slot.
 No memory: Insufficient working memory to process the job.
 Write error: Failed to write to the card.
 Other error: An unknown error occurred.
If an error occurs, pressing "OK" will cause the device to discard the job and return to the ready
state.
SM 5-63 D262
Card Save Function
TROUBLESHOOTING
P a ge Da t e A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew
44 ~ 45 10/12/2017 Added SC670-02 and SC672-11
45 03/15/2019 Added SC672-00
Maintenance
Reference
System
SM 5-1 D262
Service Call Conditions
6. TROUBLESHOOTING
6.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
There are four levels of service call conditions.
Level Definition Reset Procedure
A Fusing unit SC codes shown on the operation The machine requires

panel. The machine is disabled. The operator immediate servicing by a
cannot reset the machine. service technician.
B These SC codes disable only the features that Cycle the machine off/on with
use the defective item. The user does not see the main power switch..
these SC codes in usual conditions. But, they
are shown on the operation panel when the
defective feature is used.
Troubleshooting
C SC codes that are not shown on the operation Recorded only.
panel. They are recorded internally.
D These SC codes are shown on the operation Set the operation switch or the
panel. To reset these SC codes, turn the main power switch to “off” then
operation switch or main power switch off and to “on”.
on. These SC codes are shown again if the
error occurs again.
Preliminary Instructions
 If the problem is in an electrical circuit board, disconnect then connect the board connectors
again before you replace the PCB.
 If the problem is a motor lock, check the mechanical load before you replace a motor or
sensor.
 When a Level A or Level B SC occurs while the machine is in the SP mode, the SC number
will not be shown. If this occurs, check the SC number after the machine goes out from the
SP mode. This does not include Level B codes.
 Many SC codes contain more than one level (SC303-1, SC303-2, SC303-3, and others).
Some SC codes can show a “-1”, even if there is only one level.
 The following abbreviations are used in these SC tables: (F) means "Front", (R) means "Rear",
"CTL" means "Controller".
SM 6-1 D262
SC100: Scanning
6.2 SC100: SCANNING
SC101 D Scanner Lamp Error
The peak value of the white reference image data on the automatic
adjustment is lower than the specified value.
 Standard white strips dirty or not platen white plate installed

improperly
 CIS-to-SIB harness loose, broken, defective
 SIB-to-IOB harness loose, broken, defective
 SIB defective
 IOB defective
 BiCU defective
 CIS defective
 Reattach/clean the white plate.

 Replace CIS.
 Replace SIB, IOB, or BiCU.
 Check harness connections between CIS and SIB or replace
harness.
 Check harness connections between SIB and IOB or replace
harness.
SC143 C Scanner Automatic Adjustment Error
The number of automatic white level adjustments exceeds a

specified limit.
 Standard white strips dirty or not platen white plate installed

improperly
 CIS-to-SIB harness loose, broken, defective
 SIB-to-IOB harness loose, broken, defective
 CIS defective
 SIB defective
 IOB defective
 BiCU defective
D262 6-2 SM
SC100: Scanning
 Reattach/clean the white plate.

 Replace CIS.
 Check harness connections between CIS and SIB or replace
harness.
harness.
SC144-01 D Scanner Communication Error (AFE Communication Error)
On automatic adjustment, check ERRBit of the SERI_STS1 register

by writing to LM98714.
 SIB-to-IOB harness connector loose, broken, defective

 SIB defective
 IOB defective
 BiCU defective
Troubleshooting
harness.
SC144-02 D Scanner Communication Error (Volans2 PLL Lock Error)
On automatic adjustment, an error is generated when the PLL lock

status at the LVDS input section of Volans2 is checked.
 SIB-to-IOB harness connector loose, broken, defective

 SIB defective
 IOB defective
 BiCU defective

harness.
SM 6-3 D262
SC100: Scanning
SC144-03 D Scanner Communication Error (Volans2 communication error)
On automatic adjustment, an error is generated when checking the

connection with Volans2.
 IOB-to-BiCU harness connector loose, broken, defective

 IOB defective
 BiCU defective
 Replace IOB or BiCU.

 Check harness connections between CIS and BIU or replace
harness.
SC161-01 D IPU Error 1: Volans2 Configuration Error
An IPU error is generated upon communication check if FPGA

configuration (Volans2) does not end with power on or recovery
from Power Save mode.
 Check all harness connections to the IPU for a loose, broken,

defective connection
 IPU defective
 IOB/BiCU boards defective (connection problem between
FPGA and the engine CPU)
 Chip fault (FPGA defective)
Replace the IOB/BiCU boards, or check the connection
SC161-02 D IPU Error 2: Ri Response Error
An IOB error (Ri response error) is generated if an error is detected

in Ri access.
 IPU defective
 IOB board error (Ri2005 and peripheral circuit defective).
 Chip fault (Ri2005 defective)
Power reset
D262 6-4 SM
SC100: Scanning
SC161-05 D BICU Error: Ri2005 M-to-P Response Error
A BICU error (RI2005_MtoP response error) is generated if an error

is detected in RI2005 (MtoP) access.
 BICU board defective (RI2005 operation error)
Replace BICU board
SC161-11 D IPU Error (Lsync Error)
Perform IPU self-diagnosis before reading, and if an error is

detected in the results, an IPU error (LSYNC error) is generated.
 Connection problem of the LVDS cable between IOB and BiCU

(IPU) boards
 IOB board defective
 BiCU (IPU) board defective (ASIC: Macaron defective)
Troubleshooting
 SC auto-reboot
 Main power OFF/ON
 Replace the Parts
 Reset the connector
 Replace the cable
 Replace the IOB board
 Replace the BiCU (IPU) board
SM 6-5 D262
SC100: Scanning
SC161-20 D IPU Error (DRAM Initialization Trouble)
An IPU error (DRAM initialization trouble) is issued if DDR-PHY

initialization and the Training status check result in an error with
power on or recovering from Power Save mode.
 IPU board defective (Connection problem of Macaron/DRAM

device)
 DRAM device defective
 SC reproducibility check
Reproducible
Do the items below.
 Connection
 Check that all connectors are connected correctly (no loose
connector/not fully connected).
 No SC is generated.
End
 An SC is generated.
 IPU/BICU trouble
 IPU/BICU trouble
 Replace IPU/BICU
 No SC is generated.
End
 An SC is generated.
Replace the machine/design analysis
D262 6-6 SM
SC200: Image Writing
6.3 SC200: IMAGE WRITING
SC200-00 D Suction Cap HP Sensor Error
The maintenance unit slide sensor did not detect the suction cap
and wiper blade assembly at home position.
 HP sensor connection loose, broken, defective

 Paper or other obstacle blocking movement of the mechanism
 HP sensor defective
SC201-01 D Print Head Caps Home Position Sensor Error
The cap sensor in the maintenance unit failed to detect the left
cradle at the up position or down position (home position).
Troubleshooting
 Paper or other obstacle blocking movement of the mechanism
SC201-02 D Cleaner Unit Slider Sensor Error
The slider sensor at the back of the maintenance unit failed to

detect the cleaner unit at the forward position or the rear position
(home position. The left cradle, suction cap, rubber wiper blade, and
wipers comprise the maintenance cleaning unit.

 Paper or other obstacle blocking operation of the motor
 Motor defective
SM 6-7 D262
SC202 D Ink Level Detection Feeler Position Error
One of the following conditions existed:

 When air was purged one or more of the feelers could not be
detected so the operation could not continue.
 When the maintenance pump attempted to apply negative
pressure on the print head ink tank, the feeler could not be
detected at its prescribed position after the pressure was
applied.
 OCFS could not detect the feeler(s) after the feeler sensor
performed the check after filling.
SC202-00 D Full Tank Detection Feeler Position Error
Interrupted during specifying the cause
SC202-01 D Head Tank 1: Ink Level Sensor Feeler Error at Air Release
Feeler cannot be detected during air release.
 Feeler cannot be detected because it is out of position (loose,

broken, defective, or blocked by an obstruction)
 Air release solenoid blocked
 Maintenance unit defective
 Print head ink tank defective
 Air release solenoid defective
SC202-11 D Head Tank 1: Air Leak at Negative Pressure
D262 6-8 SM
SC202-18 D Head Tanks 3 and 4: Air Leak at Negative Pressure
SC202-19 D Head Tanks 6 and 7: Air Leak at Negative Pressure
Air leak. Pressure applied but immediate leak and air detected.

Troubleshooting
SC202-23 D Head Tank 3: Nozzle or Filter Clogged (2HT System)
SC202-28 D Head Tanks 3 and 4: Nozzle or Filter Clogged (2HT System)
SC202-29 D Head Tanks 6 and 7: Nozzle or Filter Clogged (2HT System)
Nozzle or filter clogged (one side) (2HT System). A color nozzle or

filter is clogged. A color nozzle or filter is clogged
 Auto-Nozzle check
 Nozzle cleaning
 Nozzle flushing
SC202-31 D Head Tank 1: Insufficient suction
SM 6-9 D262
SC202-38 D Head Tanks 3 and 4: Insufficient suction
SC202-39 D Head Tanks 6 and 7: Insufficient suction
Nozzle or filter clogged or insufficient suction (both sides) (1HT

System/2HT System).
 Nozzle or filter for some color clogged
 Suction trouble
 Auto-Nozzle check
 Nozzle cleaning
 Nozzle flushing
SC202-41 D Head Tank 1: Ink Level Feeler Error 1
SC202-46 D Head Tank Tanks 4 and 5: Ink Level Feeler Error 1
SC202-48 D Head Tanks 3 and 4: Ink Level Feeler Error 1
No air release (ink entry, etc.) Feeler did not release, even when air
release valve was pressed manually. Even at negative pressure, the
feeler against the wall of the tank did not detect any change.
D262 6-10 SM

Troubleshooting
While ink tank was under negative pressure, ink level sensor feeler
was out of position and caused the error. Air is releasing now but not
previously.
 Dirty horizontal encoder strip
 Obstruction between feeler and side of the ink tank
SM 6-11 D262
The OCFS could not detect the position of the ink level feeler.

SC202-70 D Ink Level Feeler Error 4: All Feelers
All ink level sensor feelers were not detected.

SC203 D Supply Pump Suction Timeout Errors
The supply pump motor reversed to apply negative pressure, but the
sensor failed to detect one or more feelers at the prescribed
positions, so pressure could not be detected as normal. Problem
may be cause by
 An air leak
 Clogged tubing between the supply pump and print head
 Failure to purge air from the tank
 A broken or defective feeler
 Feeler broken, damaged, or blocked

 Ink supply pump or tube defective
SC203-00 D Air Leak Error
Interrupted during specifying the cause
SC203-11 D Head Tank 1: Air Leak Error
D262 6-12 SM
Air leak: Immediate air leak detected at application of negative

pressure

SC203-21 D Ink Pump 1 Timeout Error
Troubleshooting
Ink supply defective, pump faulty and could not form negative
pressure, but there was negative pressure at the maintenance unit.

SC203-31 D Head Tank 1: Purge Error
SM 6-13 D262
No air release (ink entry, etc.) Feeler does not release, even when
air purge valve is pressed, and the feeler that is not detecting the
negative pressure is depressed and out of position.

SC203-51 D Ink Supply Error: Head Tank 1

SC210 D Carriage Horizontal Initialization Error
The machine failed to detect the carriage unit at the start position.
 Horizontal encoder installed incorrectly (not inserted into the

gap of the horizontal encoder sensor)
 Horizontal encoder strip dirty
 Horizontal encoder strip loose, broken, defective
 Horizontal encoder sensor connector loose, broken, defective
 Horizontal encoder sensor defective
D262 6-14 SM
SC211-01 D Carriage Communication Error
No response from the motor control firmware
Communication error between the motor control firmware and

engine. The machine failed to stop within the specified time and
area because of the mechanical trouble.
Communication Error
 Cycle the machine off/on
 If the problem recurs, check around the HRB on the carriage
unit for a loose, broken, or defective connector
 Check around the MCU for a loose broken connector on a
harness from the carriage unit.
 Replace BICU.
Mechanical Trouble
 Check that there is no problem with the driving parts (guide, rod,
roller, gear, belt).
Troubleshooting
 If the belt is loose, tighten the belt.
 If it is not recovered by turning the power OFF/ON, replace the
parts.
SM 6-15 D262
SC211-02 D Carriage Hardware Error
Response of hardware error from motor control
 Horizontal motor connector loose, broken, defective

 Horizontal motor blocked by an obstacle
 Horizontal encoder strip dirty
 Horizontal encoder strip loose, broken, defective, or installed
incorrectly
 Horizontal encoder sensor connector loose, broken, defective
 Horizontal encoder installed incorrectly
 MCU connector loose, broken, defective
 Horizontal encoder sensor defective
 Horizontal motor defective
 MCU defective
Motor load error on motor (defective or broken), sensor (defective,
broken, or position error), encoder sheet (broken, position error, or
dirty), and others.
 Check for loose connectors of the sensor monitor, position error
of the sensor encoder sheet, and dirt or scratches on the
encoder sheet, and then turn the main power switch OFF and
back ON.
 If the carriage does not move first, replace the motor.
 If the carriage moves first but is not recovered, replace the
sensor.
 Replace BICU.
D262 6-16 SM
SC211-03 D Main Scan Direction Error
Response of moving direction error from motor control
Wrong connection of harnesses on the motor or encoder.

 If the machine works correctly, check for loose connector of the
sensor monitor, position error of the sensor encoder sheet, and
dirt or scratches on the encoder sheet, and then turn the main
power OFF and back ON.
 If the error has been recovered and the motor connection was
not correct, connect the harness +/- connection in reverse.
 If the error has been recovered and the encoder connection was
not correct, connect the harness A/B connection in reverse.
SC211-04 D Main scan motor driver error (overcurrent)
Response to a motor driver error (overcurrent) from motor control
Troubleshooting
This error is issued when the motor driver is in overcurrent status.
 Check that there is no problem with sliding.
 Replace the BICU.
SC211-05 D Main Scan Motor Driver Error (Overheating)
Response to a motor driver error (overheating) from motor control
This error is generated when the motor driver is in overheating

status.
 Check that there is no problem on sliding.
 Check that there is no abnormal odor, smoke, or fire.
 Replace the BICU.
SM 6-17 D262
SC211-06 D Main Scan Motor Driver Error (Low Voltage)
This error is generated when the motor driver is in overheating

status.
If it is not recovered by turning the power OFF and back ON, replace
the BICU.
SC212-01 D Head Lift Motor Error
The status of the head lift sensor 1 or 2 did not change when the
carriage was raised. Within 25 sec.:
 At initialization, head lift sensor 1 did not go OFF and head lift
sensor 2 did not go ON.
 When the carriage was raised 1 mm, head lift sensor 1 did not
go OFF and head lift sensor 2 did not go OFF.
 When the carriage was raised 2 mm, print head sensor 1 did not
go ON.
 One or more sensor connector loose, broken, defective

 Lift motor connector loose, broken, defective.
 One or more sensor defective
 Lift motor defective
SC250-01 B High-Voltage Detection Error
A high-voltage error (SC250-01) is generated when the machine

receives a high-voltage error detection signal 40 times in total with a
10 ms polling interval.
 Leak
 Loose connection
 Harness damaged
 Unit defective
 High-voltage power source trouble
D262 6-18 SM
 Recovery with main switch ON/OFF

 Set or replace the harness on the high-voltage power supply
route.
 Set or replace the unit.
 Replace the high-voltage power source
SC250-02 B Auto-Nozzle Check Prohibit (Electrode Wiping)
The auto-nozzle check prohibit flag is set to ON.

 Wiper position detection (at the far end) sensor defective
 Electrode wiping motor defective
 Remove any foreign matter.

 Replace the wiper position detection (at the far end) sensor
 Replace the electrode wiping motor
 Replace the auto-nozzle check unit
Troubleshooting
SC250-03 B Auto-Nozzle Check Life
The auto-nozzle check unit ends its service life.

 Do a auto-nozzle check
 After replacing the auto-nozzle check unit, do SP2-020-004.
SC252-01 D Electrode Wiping Return Position Error
If the wipe position detection (Home position) sensor is Low before

starting return
 Wipe position detection (Home position) sensor defective
 Remove the foreign matter.

 Replace the wipe position detection (Home position) sensor
 Replace the auto-nozzle check unit.
SM 6-19 D262
SC252-02 D Electrode Wiping End Position Error
When driving the wiper for return, the wipe position detection (Home
position) sensor is not set to Low until motor drive timeout.
 Foreign matter is in the auto-nozzle check route, and the wiper
cannot move to the end.
 Either the wipe position detection (Home position) sensor or
electrode wiping motor is defective.

 Replace the wipe position detection (Home position)
SC252-03 D Electrode Wiping Homing Error
When detecting the electrode wiping HP, the wipe position detection
(Home position) sensor is not set to Low and times out.
 Foreign matter is in the auto-nozzle check route, and the wiper
cannot finish homing.
 Wipe position detection (Home position) trouble

 Replace the wipe position detection (Home position)
SC252-04 D Electrode Wiping Start Position Error
When the wiper position detection (at the far end) sensor is Low
before starting the operation
 Foreign material is found on the wiper position detection (at the
far end) sensor.

 Replace the wiper position detection (at the far end) sensor
D262 6-20 SM
SC280 D Air detection sensor error
SC280-01 D Head 1: Air detection sensor error
A problem has occurred at the terminal pin sensor on top of one of

the sub tanks, or the maintenance unit is not functioning correctly.
 Terminal pin defective
 FFC broken
 Main power switch OFF to ON

 Replace the electrode pin.
 Replace the maintenance unit.
Troubleshooting
 Replace the FFC.
SC282 D Air Detection Frequency Error
Air Detection
Air leaks slowly from the air release section of the print head tank.
SC is generated when the time of air detections exceeds the
threshold within the specified period.
SC282-11 D Head 1
SC282-12 D Head 2
SC282-13 D Head 3
SC282-14 D Head 4
SC282-15 D Head 5
SC282-16 D Multiple Heads
 Replace the carriage unit and reset SP.
SM 6-21 D262
SC283 D Ink End Detection Error
The mechanical ink end sensor has failed, or one of the ink supply
pumps has failed.
SC283-01 D Ink end detection error tank 1
SC283-08 D Ink end detection error tank 3 & 4
SC283-09 D Ink end detection error tank 6 & 7

 Ink end sensor defective
 Replace ink supply unit
SC285-00 C DRESS Sensor Calibration Error
Detection conditions:
1. The reflected beams was measured less than 400 when the head
gap was adjusted automatically.
2. When the sensor output is lower than 4.0 V with the magnification
register ON and in Full Duty for calibration of the image
registration.
 DRESS sensor harness loose, broken, defective

 DRESS sensor defective
 Common to 1 and 2: Sensor trouble, such as sensor defective,
loose connection (CN11)
 Only 1: Not-recommended paper used (dark color or pattern
printed)
D262 6-22 SM
SC290 D OCFS Ink Pump Reverse Suction Error
The OCFS could not detect when the supply pump motor reversed
because a feeler was broken or out of position, or an ink supply
pump could not siphon ink.
SC290-01 D Head Tank 1

(K1)

(K2)

(Y1)

(M1)

(C)
Troubleshooting
(M2)

(Y2)

 Replace print head (with new OCFS)
 Replace ink supply unit
SC293 D OCFS Ink Timeout During Filling
The OCFS feeler is out of position and cannot be read, or one of the
ink supply pumps is not pumping ink

(K1)

(K2)

(Y1)
SM 6-23 D262
SC300: Not Used

(M1)
SC293-05 D Head Tank 5 (C)

(M2)

(Y2)
 Replace the ink supply unit

 Replace ink end sensor
6.4 SC300: NOT USED
There are no Group 300 service codes for this machine.
6.5 SC400: NOT USED
There are no Group 400 service codes for this machine.
D262 6-24 SM
SC500: Paper Feed, Transport
6.6 SC500: PAPER FEED, TRANSPORT
SC503-00 B Paper Feed Pressure Release Operation Error: Roll 1
Within 3 sec. after the release and application of pressure in Roll

Unit 1, there was no signal from the paper release sensor.
 Sensor harness loose, broken, defective

 Sensor defective
 BiCU/IOB defective
SC504-00 B Pressure Feed Pressure Release Operation Error: Roll 2
Within 3 sec. after the release and application of pressure in Roll

Unit 2, there was no signal from the paper release sensor.
 Sensor harness loose, broken, defective
Troubleshooting
 RFDB defective
SC508-01 D Cutter Sensor Error
One or both the cutter switches (the return switch on the left and HP
switch on the right) remained on during cutting, when the front cover
was opened and closed, or when the machine was switched on.
 Cutter left return switch harness loose, broken, defective

 Cutter left return switch defective
 Cutter right return switch harness loose, broken, defective
 Cutter right return switch defective
SM 6-25 D262
SC508-02 D Cutter Motor Error
The cutter HP sensor on the right did not go off within 300 ms after
the cutter motor was switched on. The cutter did not move from its
home position.
 Cutter motor harness loose, broken, defective

 Something is blocking the horizontal movement of the cutter in
its track
 Cutter motor defective
SC508-03 D Cutter Operation Error
The cutter return switch on the left end of the cutter unit did not
switch on within 3 sec. after the cutter motor switched on.
 Something is blocking the cutter in its track

 The cutter drive belt is jammed. (Stop driving the cutter and
move it to its home position on the right.)
SC508-04 D Cutter Home Position Switch Error
After normal cutting, the right cutter sensor is not set to ON within 3
sec. after the cutter returns to its home position.
 Something is blocking the cutter in its track

 The cutter drive belt is jammed
D262 6-26 SM
SC520-01 D Vertical Paper Feed Mechanism Communication Error

engine, or the machine failed to stop within the specified time and
Communication Error
 Check the harness connections between the roll unit and the
MCU, and RFDB if Roll Unit 2 is installed
 MCU defective
 If not recovered, replace the BICU.
Mechanical Trouble
 Check that there is no problem with the driving parts
(registration roller and its parts, gear, roller, belt, pressure
roller).
Troubleshooting
 If the belt is loose, reset the motor.
 If it is not recovered by setting the main power switch to OFF
and back ON, replace the parts.
SC520-02 D Vertical Paper Feed Hardware Error
 Motor (defective or broken), sensor (defective, broken, or

position error), encoder sheet (broken, position error, or dirty), or
other rotation load error.
 Roll paper feed motor harness loose, broken, defective
 Encoder sensor harness or encoder wheel loose, broken,
defective
 Motor defective
 BICU defective
SM 6-27 D262
SC520-03 D Vertical Paper Feed Operation Direction Error
Response of moving direction error from motor control
 Vertical wheel sensor connection loose, broken, defective

 Vertical motor connection loose, broken, defective
 Check motor to confirm that the polarity of the harness
connector is correct
 If the motor or an encoder error has been recovered and the
motor connection was not correct, reverse the harness +/-
connection.
 Check the sensor to confirm that the polarity of the harness
connection is correct
 If the motor or an encoder error has been recovered and the
encoder connection was not correct, revere the connections of
the phase A and phase B sensor harnesses.
SC520-04 D Sub Scan Motor Driver Error (Overcurrent)
Response to the motor driver error (overcurrent) from motor control
 Check that there is no problem on the driving parts (registration

roller and its parts, gear, roller, belt, and pressure roller).
 If no problem is found above but it is not recovered by setting
the main power switch to OFF and back ON, replace the BICU.
SC520-05 D Sub Scan Motor Driver Error (Overheating)
 Check that there is no problem on the driving parts (registration

roller and its parts, gear, roller, belt, and pressure roller).
 Check that there is no abnormal odor, smoke, or fire.
the main power switch to OFF and back ON, replace BICU.
D262 6-28 SM
SC520-06 D Sub Scan Motor Driver Error (Low Voltage)
Response to the motor driver error (low voltage) from motor control
This error is generated when the motor driver is in low-voltage

status.
and back ON, replace the BICU.
SC521-01 D Roll Unit 1 Communication Error

engine. The machine failed to stop within the specified time and
Communication Error
 Roll Unit 1 is not connected
Troubleshooting
 Check the harness connections between the roll unit and the
MCU
 MCU defective
 If not recovered, replace IOB and BICU.
Mechanical Trouble
 Check that there is no problem on the feed driving parts (gear,
roller).
SM 6-29 D262
SC521-02 D Roll Unit 1 Hardware Error
Motor (defective or broken), sensor (defective, broken or position

error), encoder sheet (broken, position error, or dirty), and other
rotation load error
defective
 Motor defective
 If not recovered, replace IOB and BICU.
SC521-03 D Roll unit 1 motor driver defective
Response to the motor driver error from motor control
This error is generated when the motor driver is in overcurrent,

heating, or low-voltage status.
 Check that there is no problem on the driving parts (roller and its
parts, gear, roller, motor).
the main power switch to OFF and back ON, replace IOB.
D262 6-30 SM
SC522-01 D Roll 2 Communication Error

engine The machine failed to stop within the specified time and area
due to the mechanical trouble.
Communication Error
 Check the harness connections between the roll unit, RFDB,
MCU
 MCU or RFDB defective
 If not repaired above, replace BICU and RFDB.
Mechanical Trouble
 Check that there is no problem on the feed driving parts (gear,
roller).
Troubleshooting
SC522-02 D Roll 2 Hardware Error
Motor (defective or broken), sensor (defective, broken or position

error), encoder sheet (broken, position error, or dirty), and other
rotation load error
defective
 Motor defective
 If not repaired above, replace BICU and RFDB.
SM 6-31 D262
SC522-03 D Roll unit 2 motor driver defective
Response to the motor driver error from motor control
This error is issued when the motor driver is in overcurrent, heating,

or low-voltage status.
 Check that there is no problem on the driving parts (roller and its
parts, gear, roller, motor).
the main power switch to OFF and back ON, replace IOB.
SC523-01 B Stripper Support Sensor Error (Not Set to ON)
When the stop position of the bypass paper stopper was being
moved, the bypass stopper clutch sensor was not set to ON.
Bypass stopper clutch sensor trouble, bypass stopper clutch

defective
 Main power switch OFF and back ON
SC523-02 B Bypass Stopper Clutch Sensor Error (Not Set to OFF)
When the refuge position of the bypass paper stopper was being
moved, the bypass stopper clutch sensor was not set to OFF.
Bypass stopper clutch trouble, bypass stopper clutch defect

SC530-01 D Intake Fan Error
The fan was detected rotating at less than 100 r/min three times
when checked at 0.3-sec. intervals (the fan stops for about 1 sec.).
 Fan harness loose, broken, defective

 Fan defective
 Replace the intake fan or board, and set the main power switch
OFF and back ON.
D262 6-32 SM
SC532-01 D PSU Fan Error
Check the lock sensor value every 100 msec. with the fan ON. If the
lock signal is locked (abnormal) 50 times (5 sec.) consecutively, it is
judged that the fan does not rotate correctly (locked).
Board trouble, harness damage, loose connector

 Check/replace the harness, check/replace the fan.
SC532-02 D BiCU Fan Error
Check the lock sensor value every 100 msec. with the fan ON. If the
lock signal is locked (abnormal) 100 times (10 sec.) consecutively, it
is judged that the fan does not rotate correctly (locked).
Board trouble, harness damage, loose connector

 Set the main power switch OFF and back ON, check/replace the
board, check/replace the harness, check/replace the fan.
Troubleshooting
SC540-00 C Vertical HP Sensor Error
Not signal from the vertical HP sensor.
 Edge of the wheel is dirty and requires cleaning

 Edge of the vertical wheel not positioned in sensor gap
 Sensor connection loose, broken, defective
SC571-01 D Head Temperature Sensor Error (Black)
The head temperature sensor error is detected for the specified

period of time.
 Connection loose, broken, defective at CN138

 After correcting the problem, cycle the machine off/on
 Loose connector, sensor error
 Resolve the problem with the sensor, such as by correcting a
loose connector of the sensor on HRB, or sensor disconnection
on the head, or resetting the power.
SM 6-33 D262
SC571-02 D Head Temperature Sensor Error (Color)
The head temperature sensor near the color sub tanks registered a
temperature that was out of range.
The head temperature sensor error is detected for the specified
period of time.

 Loose connector, sensor error
 Resolve the problem with the sensor, such as by correcting a
loose connector of the sensor on HRB, or sensor disconnection
on the head, or resetting the power.
SC573-01 D Temperature/Humidity Sensor – Temperature Error
The temperature/humidity sensor error is detected for the specified

period of time.

SC573-02 D Temperature/Humidity Sensor Error (Humidity)
The temperature/humidity sensor error is detected for the specified

period of time.

D262 6-34 SM
SC600: Communication
6.7 SC600: COMMUNICATION
SC632-00 B Counter device error 1 CTL
After 3 attempts to send a data frame to the optional counter device

via the serial communication line, no ACK signal was received within
100 ms.
 Serial line between the optional counter device, the relay board
and copier control board is disconnected or damaged.
 Make sure that SP5113 is set to enable the optional counter
device.
 Check if the setting of the SP5113 is correctly set.

 Check the connection between the main machine and optional
counter device.
Troubleshooting
After communication was established, the controller receivee the

brake signal from the accounting device.
 Serial line between the optional counter device, the relay board
and copier control board is disconnected or damaged.
 Make sure that SP5113 is set to enable the optional counter
device.
 Confirm that the setting of SP5113 is correct.

 Check the connection between the main machine and optional
counter device.
A backup RAM error was returned by the counter device.
 Counter device control board defective

 Backup battery of counter device defective
 Replace the counter device.
SM 6-35 D262
A backup battery error was returned by the counter device.
 Counter device control board defective

 Backup battery of counter device defective
 Replace the counter device.
SC636 D SD Card Error CTL
01 Expanded authentication module error
There is no expanded authentication module in the machine.

The SD card or the file of the expanded authentication module is
broken. There is no DESS module in the machine.
 No expanded authentication module

 Defective SD card
 Defective file in the authentication module
 No DESS module
1. Install the expanded authentication module.

2. Install the SD card.
3. Install the DESS module.
4. In the SSP mode set SP5-401-160 to 0.
5. In the SSP mode, set SP5-401-161 to 0.
6. Cycle the machine off/on.
7. Execute SP5-876-1 (security all clear).
8. If this is a mass-produced machine, replace the NV.
02 Version error
The version of the expanded authentication module is not correct.
 Incorrect module version
 Install the correct file of the expanded authentication module.
D262 6-36 SM
SC637 D Tracking information notification error CTL
01 Ttracking application error
Tracking information was lost. The machine failed to give notice of

the tracking information to the tracking SDK application.
02 Management server error
The machine failed to give notice of the tracking information to the

management server. Tracking information was lost, and the machine
could not count correctly.
SC641-00 D Engine serial communication error CTL
Troubleshooting
An error occurs in serial communication with engine.
 SC641-1: Timeout error

 SC641-2: Retry over
 SC641-3: Download error
 SC641-4: UART error
SM 6-37 D262
SC650 C @Remote communication error (Cumin-M) CTL
01 The authentication for the Cumin-M fails failed at a dial up connection

due to one or more of the following:
 Incorrect SP settings
 Disconnected telephone line
 Disconnected modem board
 Disconnected wireless LAN card
 Check and set the correct user name (SP5-816-156) and

password (SP5-816-157).
04 Communication line error
The supplied voltage is not sufficient due to the defective

communication line or defective connection.
The authentication for the Cumin-M fails failed at a dial up connection


05 No modem board
Modem board is not installed even though the setting at Cumin-M

(During the operation)
The authentication for the Cumin-M fails failed at a dial up connection


D262 6-38 SM
13 Modem board error 1
Modem board not installed or the board is defective.
 Install the modem board.

 Check correct setting value for modem driver (SP5-816-160,
SP5-816-165 to 171, SP5-816-188 and 189).
 Replace the modem board.
14 Modem board error 2
Modem board not installed or the board is defective.
 Uninstall the modem board if it is installed.

 Check that the wired/wireless LAN is working properly.
For more details about this SC code error, execute SP5990 to print an SMC report so you can
read the error code. The error code is not displayed on the operation panel. Here is a list of error
codes:
Troubleshooting
Error Problem Solution
1 Failure to certify dial-up In the User Tools, check the dial-up user
and dial-up password settings
4 Illegal modem setting Check the setting of SP5816 160 to

determine whether the setting for the AT
command is correct. If this SP setting is
correct, then the problem is a bug in the
software.
5 Poor connection due to low power The problem is on the external power
supply on the line. supply line, so there is no corrective action
on the machine.
11 Data in the NVRAM became Use SP5985 1 and set the NIC to "0"
corrupted when the network (Disable) to disable the network board.
enable switch and Cumin-M were
enabled at the same time.
12 The modem board could not Replace the modem board.

enable the NIB.
SM 6-39 D262
SC651 C Incorrect dial up connection CTL
01 - Chat program parameter error
02 - Chat program execution error
An unexpected error occurs when the modem (Cumin-M) tries to call

the center with a dial up connection.
 Caused by a software bug
 No action required
 This SC does not interfere with operation of the machine.
SC652-00 A Remote service ID2 mismatching
There was an authentication mismatch between ID2 for @Remote, the

controller board, and NVRAM.
 Used controller board installed

 Used NVRAM installed
 An unexpected error occurs when the modem (Embedded
RCG-M) tries to call the center with a dial up connection.
 Install the correct controller board or anew controller board.

 Install the correct NVRAM or new NVRAM.
SC653-00 A Incorrect remote service ID2 CTL
ID2 stored in the NVRAM is incorrect.
 Used NVRAM installed

 An unexpected error occured when the modem (Embedded
RCG-M) tries to call the center with a dial up connection
 Clear the ID2 in the NVRAM

 Input the correct ID2.
D262 6-40 SM
SC665-01 D FFC Connection Error (BiCU-HRB)
An FFC set error is detected with port read and AD value read.
 FFC harness set trouble or a break between the BiCU and

HRB boards
 Connect or replace the FFC harness.
SC665-02 D FFC Connection Error (BiCU-IOB)
FFC set error is detected with port read and AD value read.
 FFC harness set trouble or a break between the BiCU and

IOB boards
 Connect or replace the FFC harness.
Troubleshooting
SC666-01 D 37 V Overcurrent Error (Power ON/Recover from Sleep)
Power of 37 V is shut down by detecting overcurrent upon setting

the main power switch to ON or in recovery from Sleep mode.
 Print head defective, HRB defective, BiCU defective, harness

short-circuited, air release SOL defective
 Replace the print head, HRB, BiCU, harness, or air release

SOL.
SC666-02 D 37 V Overcurrent Error (Operation)
Power of 37 V is shut down by detecting overcurrent during

operation.
 Print head defective, HRB defective, BiCU defective, harness

short-circuited, air release SOL defective
 Replace the print head, HRB, BiCU, harness, or air release

SOL.
SM 6-41 D262
SC669 D EEPROM Communication Error
Five attempts to communicate between the EEPROM and NVRAM

failed.
 Device ID data corrupted

 Connection between controller board and MCU loose, broken,
defective
 NVRAM defective
 Controller board defective
 MCU defective
SC669-02 D EEPROM1 channel error
SC669-03 D EEPROM1 device error
An error report is received from the device in EEPROM (engine

NVRAM) communication and retried 3 times, but communication is
not retrieved.
 Noise, loose connection, EEPROM defective, BiCU defective

 Replace the EEPROM.
 Replace the BiCU.
 Check whether the EEPROM is fully connected or not. If it is
not fully connected, connect it properly.
 Check whether foreign matter is attached to the EEPROM
connection section or not. If so, remove it.
 If an error is generated, check for recovery by setting the main
power switch to OFF and back ON. If not recovered, replace
the EEPROM. If not recovered by replacing the EEPROM,
replace the BiCU.
SC669-36 D EEPROM1 Verify Error
D262 6-42 SM
SC669-37 D EEPROM1 Defect Detection Error

not retrieved.
 Noise, loose connection, EEPROM defective, BiCU defective

 Check whether the EEPROM is fully connected or not. If it is
not fully connected, connect it properly.
 Check whether foreign matter is attached to the EEPROM
connection section or not. If so, remove it.
the EEPROM. If not recovered by replacing the EEPROM,
Troubleshooting
replace the BiCU.
SC669-38 D EEPROM2: EEPROM for KAKA Data Error
The values for the y1_head and y2_head of each print head
(KAKA) for 3 bytes (both upper and lower) are checked, and all
values are different and recovery is not available after 2 retries.
 Noise, EEPROM defective, BiCU defective

 If an error is generated, check recovery by setting the main
the BiCU.
SM 6-43 D262
SC600: Communication Rev 10/12/2017
SC669-39 D EEPROM2 Defect Detection Error

not retrieved.

the BiCU.
SC669-52 D EEPROM2 Channel Error
SC669-53 D EEPROM2 Device Error

not retrieved.

the BiCU.
 SC 670-02 D Engine start-up error
Unexpected down status was detected after /ENGRDY assertion.
• The engine board resets unexpectedly.
1. Check the latest firmware is installed on the machine.

2. Check the connection between the BiCU and the
controller board, then check whether any SC codes
appear by disconnecting the harness.
3. Replace parts in the order below.
・BiCU
・PSU
・Controller board
D262 6-44 SM
Rev 03/15/2019 SC600: Communication
 SC 672-00 D Controller start-up error
SC 672-11  After the machine is powered on, communication between the

controller and the operation panel is not established, or
communication with the controller is interrupted after a normal
start-up.
 After startup reset of the operation panel, the attention code (FDH)
or the attention acknowledge code (FEH) is not sent from the
controller within 30 seconds.
 After the controller issues a command to check the communication
line with the controller at 30 second intervals, the controller fails to
respond twice.
 The controller stalled

 The controller board installed incorrectly
 The controller board is defective
 The operation panel connector is loose or defective
 The controller is not shut down completely when you turn the main
switch off.
1. Turn the main power switch OFF/ON.

2. Check the connection of the harness that connects to the operational
panel.
3. Check the connections of the controller board.
4. Replace the controller board.
Troubleshooting
SC673-10 D Flair Communication Disabled on the Operation Panel (Cheetah)
This is generated only when a Cheetah operation panel is installed.

Communication with the controller of the Cheetah operation panel is done with
USB Ethernet communication. The Cheetah operation panel has a
communication path (Flair communication) to transmit main unit information
besides the communication with the GW operation section.
The operation panel does not accept response from the main unit with this Flair
communication.
This error is generated because the CATS module does not start if SP setting
(SP-5748-201) is not activated with a Cheetah operation panel installed.
 This error is generated when the CATS module (GW controller)

cannot report a response to the report of the monitor service
module (operation panel).
SC674-01 D Transfer Error
SC674-02 -
 Video transfer error is generated in the controller.

-
SC680-01 D DSP Start Error
A DSP start error occurs 3 times consecutively.
 KISSIN defective, BiCU defective

 If not repaired, replace BICU.
SM 6-45 D262
SC680-02 D DSP Initialization Error
A WDT error or communication error is generated because of DSP

runaway after compleetion of DSP start.
Communication is not established after a specified period of time
after DSP start is completed.

 If not repaired, replace BICU.
SC680-03 D DSP Operation Error
A WDT error or communication error is generated because of DSP

runaway on DSP operation.

SC681-01 D KISSIN Initialize Error
KISSIN ID check fail

SC685 C Ink Collector Tank Communication Error
The error report is received from the device in communication with

the ink collector tank (ID Chip) and retried 3 times, but
communication is not retrieved.
SC685-02 C Channel Error (Path Disconnected)
 Replace the BiCU
D262 6-46 SM
SC685-03 C Device Error (No ACK)
 Insert and remove the ink collector tank

 Replace the ink collector tank.
 Check whether foreign matter is attached to the ID chip of the
ink collector tank or not. If so, remove it.
 Check whether foreign matter is pinched with or attached to the
ID chip terminal of the ink collector tank or not. If so, remove it.
 Check whether the ID chip terminal of the ink collector tank is
defective, such as being deformed, or not. If so, replace the ID
chip terminal.
 If an error is generated after removing the exterior for repairing
the machine, check that the connectors are correctly connected
upon repair. If some trouble is found, correct it.
SC686-12 C Ink Cartridge (C): Channel Error (Bus Disconnection, etc.)
Troubleshooting
There was an error in communication with the ID Chip on the Cyan
ink cartridge. Three retries were attempted and failed.
 Replace the BiCU
SC686-13 C Ink Cartridge (C): Device Error (No ACK Signal)
There was an error in communication with the ID Chip on the Cyan

SM 6-47 D262
 Ink cartridge ID data corrupted or chip damaged

 Spurious noise
 Remove the Cyan ink cartridge and set it again
 Switch the machine on
 If the problem persists, replace the Cyan ink cartridge
 Insert and remove the ink-cartridge.
 Replace the ink-cartridge.
ink cartridge or not. If so, remove it.
ID chip terminal of the ink cartridge holder (insertion section on
the main unit) or not. If so remove it.
 Check whether the ID chip terminal of the ink cartridge holder
(insertion section on the main unit) is defective, such as being
deformed, or not. If so, replace the service part module.
SC686-22 C Ink Cartridge (M): Channel Error (Bus Disconnection, etc.)
There was an error in communication with the ID Chip on the

Magenta ink cartridge. Three retries were attempted and failed.
D262 6-48 SM
SC686-23 C Ink Cartridge (M): Device Error (No ACK Signal)
There was an error in communication with the ID Chip on the

Magenta ink cartridge. Three retries were attempted and failed.

 Spurious noise
 Remove the Magenta ink cartridge and set it again
 If the problem persists, replace the Magenta ink cartridge
Troubleshooting
the main unit) or not. If so, remove it.
SM 6-49 D262
SC686-32 C Ink Cartridge (Y): Channel Error (Bus Disconnection, etc.)
There was an error in communication with the ID Chip on the Yellow

SC686-33 C Ink Cartridge (Y): Device Error (No ACK Signal)
There was an error in communication with the ID Chip on the Yellow


 Spurious noise
 Remove the Yellow ink cartridge and set it again
 If the problem persists, replace the Yellow ink cartridge
D262 6-50 SM
SC686-42 C Ink Cartridge (K): Channel Error (Bus Disconnection, etc.)
There was an error in communication with the ID Chip on the Black

SC686-43 C Ink Cartridge (K): Device Error (No ACK Signal)
There was an error in communication with the ID Chip on the Black


 Spurious noise
 Remove the Black ink cartridge and set it again
 If the problem persists, replace the Black ink cartridge
Troubleshooting
SC687-00 D PER command error
The main machine received no PER-command module from the GW

controller.
 Poor communication, cycle the machine power off/on
SM 6-51 D262
SC700: Not Used
6.8 SC700: NOT USED
There are no Group 700 service codes for this machine..
D262 6-52 SM
SC800: Firmware
6.9 SC800: FIRMWARE
SC816 D Energy save I/O subsystem error
The energy save I/O subsystem is defective or this system

detected a controller board error.
 Reboot the machine.

 Replace the controller board.
SC817 D Monitor error CTL
This is a file detection and electronic file signature check error

when the boot loader attempts to read the self-diagnostic module,
system kernel, or root system files from the OS Flash ROM, or the
items on the SD card in the controller slot are false or corrupted.
Troubleshooting
 OS Flash ROM data defective
 SD card data defective
 Change the controller firmware.

 Use another SD card.
Error Codes
Code Meaning
0x0000 0000 BIOS boot error
0x0000 0001 Primary boot start load error
0x0000 0002 Secondary boot load error (Boot3.Elf)
0x0000 0003 Self-diagnostic module error (Diag.Elf)
0x0000 0004 Kernel start error (Netbsd)
0x0000 0005 Root file system file read error (Rootfs)
0xffff ffff Other error
Example: Data in the self-diagnostic module, system kernel, or root system files are corrupted or
SM 6-53 D262
SC800: Firmware
do not exist in OS flash ROM or on the SD card

Files in the self-diagnostic module, kernel, or root file system on the SD card have been falsified
or altered
 Before discarding the SD card, try to update the data on the card. If the error occurs again,
the card may be defective.
 Be sure to use an SD card that contains the correct electronic signature.
SC818-00 D Watchdog Error CTL
A watchdog error is generated.
 During running of the system program, bus hold or interrupt

program endless loop is generated and other processes
cannot work.

 Replace the system program
 Replace the controller board
 Replace the peripherals
SC819 D Fatal kernel error
Due to a control error, a RAM overflow occurred during system

processing. One of the following messages was displayed on the
operation panel.
0x5032 HAIC-P2 error
0x5245 Link-up fail
0x5355 L2 Status Time Out
0x696e gwinit died
0x766d Vm_pageout: VM is full
554C USB loader defect
Other
 System program defective

 Optional board defective
 Replace controller firmware
D262 6-54 SM
SC800: Firmware
SC840 D EEPROM access error CTL
A read error occurred during I/O processing. The failure of the 3rd
attempt to read caused this error.
 Defective EEPROM
SC841 D EEPROM read error CTL
Mirrored data of the EEPROM is different from the original data in

EEPROM.
 Data in the EEPROM was overwritten for some reason.
Troubleshooting
SC842-00 C Nand-Flash updating verification error CTL
A write error for the module written in Nand-Flash occurred while the
remote ROM and ROM were being updated.
 Damaged Nand-Flash
SC842-01 C Nand-Flash Bad Blocks Exceed Threshold CTL
When Nand-Flash status is read and the number of bad blocks exceeds
the threshold upon starting or recovering from Power Save mode, SCS
generates this SC error.
 Nand-Flash bad blocks exceed the threshold.
SM 6-55 D262
SC800: Firmware
SC842-02 C Nand-Flash Block Erasing Time Exceed Threshold. CTL
When Nand-Flash status is read and the block erasing time exceeds
the threshold upon starting or recovering from Power Save mode, SCS
generates this SC error.
 The maximum number of Nand-Flash blocks being erased exceeds

the threshold.
SC850 D Network I/F error CTL
 Not functional
SC855 B Hardware Problem:wireless LAN board CTL
The wireless LAN board can be accessed, but an error was detected.
 Loose connection
 Defective wireless LAN card
 Check wireless LAN card connection

 Replace the wireless card if the problem still exists.
D262 6-56 SM
SC800: Firmware
SC858 A Data encryption conversion error CTL
These are errors of the HDD Data Encryption Option D377.
00 Key Acquisition
Key could be acquired.
 Replace the controller board
01 HDD Key Setting Error
The key was acquired but the HDD could not be set.
 Turn the machine power off/on several times.

02 NVRAM Read Error
NVRAM data conversion failed (mismatch with nvram.conf)
Troubleshooting
 Replace the NVRAM
30 NVRAM Before Replace Error DFU
May occur during development.
 Turn the machine power off/on several times.

31 Other Error
An unexpected error occurred while data was being converted. This

error is the same as SC991. See SC991 below.
SC859 B Data encryption conversion errors CTL
Data encryption on the HDD failed.
01 HDD encrypted data restoration error
Data could not be restored after encryption.
 HDD connection loose, broken, defective

 Format HDD
 HDD defective
SM 6-57 D262
SC800: Firmware
02 Power interrupt error
Power supply was interrupted during data encryption.
08 HDD Check Error
Data conversion was attempted with no HDD unit present.

 Confirm that HDD unit installed correctly
 Initialize HDD with SP5832-1
Note: After installation, a new HDD should be formatted with
SP5832-1
09 Power Loss During Data Conversion
Data conversion stopped before NVRAM/HDD data was converted.
 Format HDD with SP5832-1
10 Data Read Command Error
More than two illegal DMAC communications were returned.
 HDD defective
 Replace HDD
SC860 B HDD startup error at power on CTL
HDD is connected but a driver error is detected. The driver did not
respond with the status of the HDD within 30 sec.
 HDD is not initialized

 Level data is corrupted
 Initialize the HDD with SP5-832-001.
 HDD is defective
D262 6-58 SM
SC800: Firmware
SC862 D Bad sector overflow CTL
There more 100 bad sectors in image storage area of the HDD.

 HDD defective
SC863 D HDD data read failure CTL
The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally, due to bad
sectors generated during operation.
 HDD defective
 Controller defective
Note: If the bad sectors are generated at the image partition, the bad
sector information is written to NVRAM, and the next time the HDD is
accessed, these bad sectors will not be accessed for read/write
Troubleshooting
operation.
SC864 D HDD data CRC error CTL
During HDD operation, the HDD cannot respond to a CRC error query.
Data transfer did not execute normally while data was being written to
the HDD.
 Format HDD
 HDD defective
SC865 D HDD access error CTL
An error was detected during operation of the HDD.
 HDD defective.
SM 6-59 D262
SC800: Firmware
SC866 B SD card authentication error CTL
A correct license was not found in the SD card.
 Wrong type of SD card

 SD card data is corrupted.
 Used correct SD card

 Replace SD card
SC867 B SD card error 2: SD card removed CTL
The SD card in the boot slot when the machine was turned on was
removed while the machine was on.
 Insert the SD card

 Turn the machine’s power off/on
SC868 D SD card access error CTL
An error occurred while an SD card was used.
 SD card not inserted correctly

 SD card defective
SC872 D HDD mail RX data error CTL
An HDD error was detected immediately after power on.

 The HDD may be defective or the machine was accidentally
powered off while the HDD was being accessed.

 Reformat the HDD with SP5832-7 (Mail RX Data)
 Replace the HDD
D262 6-60 SM
SC800: Firmware
SC873 D HDD mail TX error CTL
An error was detected on the HDD immediately after the machine was
turned on, or power was turned of while the machine used the HDD.
 Do SP5832-007 to format the HDD.

 HDD defective.
SC874
-05 D Batch Erase Error (Data Area Erase) Read Error
-06 D Batch Erase Error (Data Area Erase) Write Error
-09 D Batch Erase Error (Data Area Erase) No Drive Response
-10 D Batch Erase Error (Data Area Erase) Kernel Error
-12 D Batch Erase Error (Data Area Erase) Specified Partition Not Found
Troubleshooting
-13 D Batch Erase Error (Data Area Erase) No Device File
-14 D Batch Erase Error (Data Area Erase) Start Option Error
-15 D Batch Erase Error (Data Area Erase) Specified Sector Number Not
Found
-16 D Batch Erase Error (Data Area Erase) hdderase Fail
-41 D Batch Erase Error (Data Area Erase) Other Fatal Error
-42 D Batch Erase Error (Data Area Erase) End with Stop Indication
-61 D Batch Erase Error (Data Area Erase) Recovery of Library Error
-66 D Batch Erase Error (Data Area Erase) Not Available
-67 D Batch Erase Error (Data Area Erase) Erase Not End
SM 6-61 D262
SC800: Firmware
-68 D Batch Erase Error (Data Area Erase) HDD Format Fail (Normal)
-69 D Batch Erase Error (Data Area Erase) HDD Format Fail (Error)
-70 D Batch Erase Error (Data Area Erase) Wrong Recovery of Library
-99 D Batch Erase Error (Data Area Erase) Other Errors
A data erase error of HDD/NVRAM is detected.

Recovered after performing the batch erase option (data erase of
HDD/NVRAM)
 The HDD erase program detects an error.

 An error is detected by erasing the data of NVRAM.
 The erase program (batch erase option) has not been set.
 Turn the main power OFF and back ON, and then perform batch
erase (HDD erase) from UP again.
 If any HDD sector has problem, an error is generated after
performing batch erase again.
 If the batch erase option has not been set, set it.
SC875 D Delete al error 2: Data area CTL
An error occurred while the machine deleted data from the HDD
Note: The source of this error is the Data Overwrite Security Unit
running from an SD card.
SC876 D Log Data Error CTL
An error was detected in the handling of the log data at power on or

during machine operation. This can be caused by switching the
machine off while it is operating.
01 D Log Data Error 1
 Damaged log data file in the HDD
D262 6-62 SM
SC800: Firmware
 An encryption module not installed
 Replace or set again the encryption module.

 Disable the log encryption setting with SP9-730-004 ("0" is off.).
 Invalid log encryption key due to defective NVRAM data

 Disable the log encryption setting with SP9-730-004 ("0" is off.)
 Unusual log encryption function due to defective NVRAM data
 Installed NVRAM or HDD which is used in another machine.
Troubleshooting
 Reinstall the previous NVRAM or HDD.
 Other than the above causes
 Ask your supervisor.
SC877 B Data Overwrite Security error CTL
An error occurred, preventing successful execution of the Data

Overwrite Security function, even though it has been enabled with
SP5898.

 Replace NVRAM
SM 6-63 D262
SC800: Firmware
SC878 D Chip errors CTL
00 D TPM electronic recognition error
01 D USB flash error
02 D TPM error
03 D TCSD error
 Incorrect updating for the system firmware

 Incorrect operating of the USB flash
 Defective flash ROM on the controller board
SC880 D File Format Converter Error (MLB) CTL
A request for access to the file format converter board (MLB) was not
answered within the specified time.
 Board defective
SC881 D Authentication area error CTL
Authentication application error is detected.
Error data in an authentication application reaches the management

limit.
 Turn the main power switch off and on.
D262 6-64 SM
SC800: Firmware
SC899 D Software performance error CTL
If the processing program shows abnormal performance and the

program is abnormally ended, this SC is issued.

 Software defective

 Turn the main switch off and on.
 Update the firmware on the controller.
Troubleshooting
SM 6-65 D262
SC900: Software
6.10 SC900: SOFTWARE
SC900 D Electric counter error CTL
The total count contains something that is not a number.
 NVRAM incorrect type

 NVRAM defective
 NVRAM data scrambled
 Unexpected error from external source
 Check the connection between the NVRAM and controller.

 Replace the NVRAM.
SC920 B Printer application error CTL
02 Working memory error
An error was detected in the printer application program and

operation cannot continue.
 Defective software
 Unexpected hardware resource (e.g., memory shortage)
1. Software err, cycle the machine off/on

2. Insufficient memory, add more memory
SC990 D Software performance error CTL
The software makes an unexpected operation.
 Defective software
 Defective controller
 Software error
 Cycle the machine off/on.

 Reinstall the controller firmware
 Reinstall the main firmware
D262 6-66 SM
SC900: Software
SC991 C Software continuity error CTL
The software has attempted to perform an unexpected operation.

However, unlike SC 990, the object of the error is continuity of the
software.
 Software program error

 Internal parameter incorrect
 Insufficient working memory
 This SC is not displayed on the LCD (logging only).
For more details about SC991:

1. Execute SP7403 or print an SMC Report (SP5990) to read the history of the 10 most recent
logged errors.
2. If you touch the zero key on the operation panel with the SP selection menu displayed, you
will see detailed information about the recently logged SC991, including the software file
name, line number, and so on. Of these two methods, 1) is the recommended method,
because another SC could write over the information for the previous SC.
Troubleshooting
SC992 C Undefined Error (No SC Code) CTL
An error not controlled by the system occurred (the error does not
come under any other SC code).
 Software defective
 Turn the machine power off and on. The machine cannot be used
until this error is corrected.
 Re-install firmware
SM 6-67 D262
SC900: Software
SC997 B Application function selection error CTL
The application selected by the operation panel key operated

abnormally (No response, abnormal ending).
 Software (including the software configuration) defective

 An option required by the application (RAM, DIMM, board) is not
installed.
 Nesting of the fax group addresses is too complicated.
 Check the devices necessary for the application program. If

necessary devices have not been installed, install them.
 Check that application programs are correctly configured.
 For a fax operation problem, simplify the nesting of the fax group
addresses.
 Take necessary countermeasures specific to the application
program. If the logs can be displayed on the operation panel, see
the logs.
SC998 D Application start error CTL
No applications start within a specified time after the power is turned

on.
 Loose connection of RAM-DIMM, ROM-DIMM

 Defective controller
 Software problem
 Check the setting of SP5-875-001. If the setting is set to "1 (OFF)",

change it to "0 (ON)".
 Check if the RAM-DIMM and ROM-DIMM are correctly connected.
 Reinstall the controller system firmware.
D262 6-68 SM
SC900: Software
Note 1
If a problem always occurs in a specific condition (for example. printer driver setting, image file),
the problem may be caused by a software error. In such a case, the following data and information
need to be sent back to your product specialist. Please understand that it may take some time to
get a reply on how to solve the problem, because in some cases the design staff in Japan must
analyze the data.
 Symptom / Possible Causes / Action taken
 Summary sheet (SP mode "Printer SP", SP1-004 [Print Summary])
 SMC - All (SP5-990-001)
 SMC - Logging (SP5-990-004)
 Printer driver settings used when the problem occurs
 All data displayed on the screen (SC code, error code, and program address where the
problem is logged.)
 Image file which causes the problem, if possible
Troubleshooting
SM 6-69 D262
Printing Problems
6.11 PRINTING PROBLEMS

Before you refer to this section, make sure that you are completely familiar with the procedures
described in Print Head Adjustment and Cleaning procedures (p.7-108).
 Clean Print-heads
 Flush Print-heads
 Auto Adjust Print Head Position
 Manual Adjust Head Position
 Print Nozzle Check Pattern
 Adjust Paper Feed
 Adjust Print Position
6.11.2 WHITE LINES, HORIZONTAL BANDING
White lines horizontal banding
Print heads clogged

Check Pattern.
minutes.
D262 6-70 SM
Printing Problems

Other Measures
 Clean or replace maintenance unit.
 Inspect vertical encoder wheel for dirt or damage. Clean or replace.
 Replace the print head(s) (p.4-189).
6.11.3 HORIZONTAL LINES IN MARGINS
Troubleshooting
Horizontal lines appear in the margins and .
Faulty Print Head or Carriage Unit
 Replace the print heads.
 Replace the carriage unit.
SM 6-71 D262
Printing Problems
6.11.4 WHITE, COLOR VERTICAL BANDING
Print Head Out of Position, Horizontal Encoder Strip Problem

 Do the Adjust Print Head procedure.
 Check the horizontal encoder strip and make sure that it has been installed correctly.
 Inspect the horizontal encoder strip for dirt or damage. Clean or replace it.
6.11.5 OVERALL POOR IMAGE QUALITY
 Image blurred
 Lines not straight
 Overall poor color quality
 Uneven density
 Double lines in graphics, text
D262 6-72 SM
Printing Problems
Gap Adjustment
 Make sure that the gap between the carriage and the platen has been adjusted correctly for
the type and thickness of the paper.
Print heads clogged

Check Pattern.
minutes.
Troubleshooting
Paper Feed Faulty

 Do the Adjust Paper Feed Procedure
Horizontal Encoder Strip

 Make sure the horizontal encoder strip has been installed correctly.
 Inspect the strip for dirt or damage. Clean or replace the strip.
SM 6-73 D262
Printing Problems
6.11.6 TEXT SHIFTED OUT OF POSITION
Text misaligned, shifted too far

 Left
 Right
 Down
 Up
Obstructed, Faulty Paper Feed

 Inspect the horizontal encoder strip for dirt or damage. Clean or replace horizontal encoder
strip.
 Inspect the vertical encoder wheel for dirt or damage. Clean or replace vertical encoder
wheel.
 Inspect the platen for shreds of paper or other obstacles.
 Inspect the platen plates for dirt or damage. Clean or replace the platen plates.
D262 6-74 SM
Printing Problems
6.11.7 INK SCATTER
Gap Adjustment
Troubleshooting
Print heads clogged
Check Pattern.
minutes.
SM 6-75 D262
Printing Problems
Faulty Maintenance Unit, Carriage Unit

 Clean the maintenance unit
 Replace maintenance unit.
6.11.8 MIXED COLORS
Mixed colors in printout , or Nozzle Check Pattern

Mixed colors means two ink colors and one color seeps into the track of another color. This can
occur only at the YM print head because the print head is shared.
Print heads clogged

Check Pattern.
minutes.
D262 6-76 SM
Printing Problems
Faulty Maintenance Unit

 Clean the maintenance unit
 Replace maintenance unit.
6.11.9 IMAGE ABRADED, PAPER TORN, INK RUNNING
Output not clean, paper corner bent

 Print head abrasion
 Dog-eared corner of paper
 Ink run
Troubleshooting
Gap Adjustment
Paper Feed Obstruction

 Inspect the platen for paper fragments or dirty plates. Clean the plates.
 Check around the carriage unit for paper fragments.
 Check around the maintenance unit for paper fragments.
Faulty Carriage Unit

SM 6-77 D262
Printing Problems
6.11.10 COLOR DENSITY TOO LIGHT
Printer Driver Settings

 Make sure the printer driver color settings are set correctly.
 Enhance the image with an image editor.
6.11.11 PART OF IMAGE MISSING, TEXT MISALIGNED
 Image not complete

 Part of image missing
 Text misaligned

 Make sure that the printer driver settings for paper type match the type of paper loaded.
 Make sure all the print cartridges have sufficient ink.
Faulty Controller
D262 6-78 SM
Printing Problems
6.11.12 IMAGE SKEWED ON PAPER
Obstructed Paper Feed

 Inspect the platen, carriage unit, and maintenance unit for paper fragments.
Troubleshooting
SM 6-79 D262
Printing Problems
6.11.13 BOLDED TEXT DOES NOT APPEAR BOLD IN PRINTOUT

 Check the Increase bold with font size checkbox.
 Make sure bold was selected in the application.
D262 6-80 SM
Scanning Problems
6.12 SCANNING PROBLEMS
6.12.1 FLOW CHART

Follow this flow chart to determine the cause of an image problem. Use SP4-417 (IPU Test
Pattern Setting - Pattern Selection) Pattern 3 to print the test pattern and User Tools >
Maintenance functions.
 Enter the number for the desired test pattern, switch the display to the "Copy Window"
then press the [Start] button.
Troubleshooting
SM 6-81 D262
Scanning Problems
6.12.2 SCANNING TROUBLESHOOTING

1. No image
Possible causes:
 Connection problem between CIS and IPU.
 CIS defective
2. No image (solid black copy/print, or no image with only vertical white lines on the
output)
Possible causes:
 Connection problem between CIS and IPU.
 CIS defective
3. Light image
Possible causes:
 Low CIS output
 IPU board defective
D262 6-82 SM
Scanning Problems
4. Vertical black lines
Possible causes:
 Dirty exposure glass
 CIS defective
5. Vertical white lines
Troubleshooting
Possible causes:
 Dirty exposure glass
 Dirt or scratches on the white plate above the CIS
 CIS defective
6. Black or white bands with no image-width 1/5 A0 (E) size
Possible causes:
 Connection problem between CIS and IPU
 CIS output error
 IPU board adjustment error
SM 6-83 D262
Scanning Problems
7. White lines every 1mm pitch in halftone areas
Possible causes:
 CIS defective
Case 8: Dark image density at CIS1, CIS3, and CIS5.
Possible cause:
 The machine is near a window and sunlight is hitting the CIS unit
 The light shield have been removed or is tucked inside the machine.
 This light shield prevents light from entering the scanner unit.
 If this gap is not covered by the shield, strong light could enter the back of the
scanner unit and cause image distortion during scanning.
 Make sure that the light shield has not been removed.
 Move the machine away from the window.
 Close the window blinds to block the sunlight.
 If closing the blinds or moving the machine is not possible (or if the light shield has been
removed or damaged), cover the top of the machine with one wide sheet of paper (at
least 840 mm wide) to block the sunlight.
D262 6-84 SM
Scanning Problems
Case 9: Dark image density at CIS2 and CIS4.
Possible causes:
 The white plate is not flat against the original.
 The original is wrinkled.
Troubleshooting
SM 6-85 D262
Jam Code Tables
6.13 JAM CODE TABLES
6.13.1 OVERVIEW
When a jam occurs:
 The jam indicator lights.
 Dynamic graphic messages on the display panel show the location of the jam and instructions
about how to correct the problem.
Code Location
0 to 8 Scanner Jams
A1 RF 1: Roll Unit 1 (Standard)
A2 RF 2: Roll Unit 2 (Option)
B Registration standby position
C Paper exit (main machine)
D Bypass paper feed path
D262 6-86 SM
Jam Code Tables
 If the operator opens and closes the paper exit cover during copying, this is not recorded in
the jam record.
 An original or paper feed jam that occurs just after the main power switch or operation switch
comes on is not recorded in the jam record.
 In the tables below "late" and "lag" have the following meanings.
 Late. The original or paper failed to arrive at the sensor location within the prescribed time
after original feed started.
 Lag. The original or paper failed to leave the sensor location with the prescribed time.
6.13.2 SCANNER ORIGINAL JAMS

Original Jam Names
Code/Area Jam Name & Description
1 Initial Jam
Troubleshooting
At power ON, or when the scanner cover was closed, one of the
following sensors was ON.
 Original set sensor
 Original registration sensor
 Original exit sensor
 Original width sensors
2 Original registration sensor late
Original registration sensor did not go ON within the prescribed time

(after the original should have fed 15 mm).
3 Original registration sensor off jam
The original set sensor or the original registration sensor went OFF
before the exit sensor went ON. This can occur if the original is less
than 132.5 mm long.
-or-
After the exit sensor went ON, the original registration sensor went OFF
before the original set sensor went OFF.
SM 6-87 D262
Jam Code Tables
Code/Area Jam Name & Description
4 Original registration sensor lag jam
After the original set sensor went OFF, the original registration sensor
did not go OFF within the prescribed time (after the original should have
fed 20 mm).
5 Original exit sensor lag jam
The original exit sensor did not go off within the prescribed time (after
the original should have fed 20 mm).
6 Original stop jam
The [Original Stop] button on top of the scanner unit was pushed to
remove the original so that it could be set again.
7 Original exit late jam
After the original set sensor went ON, the exit sensor did not go ON
within the prescribed time (within the time the original should have fed
20 mm).
8 Next original set jam
The next original was set on the original feed table too early.
 The original set sensor detected the trailing edge of the first original.
 The paper set sensor detected the leading edge of the next original
before the IPU received the scan end signal.
D262 6-88 SM
Jam Code Tables
6.13.3 PRINTER PAPER JAMS
Code Area Name
1 All Initial jam
2 B Main scan HP jam
8 A1 Pre-registration sensor lag jam (Roll Unit 1)
9 A2 Pre-registration sensor lag jam (Roll Unit 2)
13 B DRESS sensor late jam during image registration
16 C Exit sensor lag jam
34 B Bypass paper set jam
41 B Main scan printing jam
Paper out (Roll Unit 1)
Troubleshooting
53 A1
54 A2 Paper out (Roll Unit 2)
58 B Pre-registration sensor lag jam
63 B DRESS sensor lag jam during image registration
66 C Exit sensor lag jam
84 B Bypass sensor late jam
SM 6-89 D262
Jam Code Tables
Details
Code Details
1 One or more of the following sensors detected the presence or absence of

paper at a location other than the paper standby or registration standby
position when the machine was turned on, when a cover was opened and
then closed, or when the machine returned to normal operation from the
energy save mode:
 Roll Unit 1 or 2 exit sensor (paper absent)
 Pre-registration sensor (paper absent)
 Bypass sensor (paper present)
 Exit sensor (paper present)
The machine will also signal an initial jam in these cases:
 If a cover is opened during printing
 If an error occurs in edge detection (paper size detection) or skew
detection by the DRESS sensor during the first phase of bypass printing..
2 The carriage does not return to the home position on the right side of the
machine during edge detection or printing due to an obstruction (torn,
wrinkled paper).
8 During paper feed from Roll Unit 1, the pre-registration sensor did not detect
any paper:
 After paper was fed long enough to feed the paper the distance between
the pre-registration sensor and the registration roller plus 100 mm
the paper standby position and the pre-registration sensor plus 100 mm.
9 During paper feed from Roll Unit 2, the pre-registration sensor did not detect
any paper:
the pre-registration sensor and the registration roller plus 100 mm
the paper standby position and the pre-registration sensor plus 100 mm.
D262 6-90 SM
Jam Code Tables
Code Details
13 The DRESS sensor failed to detect the leading edge of the paper at the start
of the print job:
 During roll paper edge detection
 Within the prescribed time (enough time for the paper to feed from the
paper standby position to the DRESS sensor, plus 100 mm).
 Within the prescribed time (enough time for the paper to feed from the
paper registration position to the DRESS sensor, plus 100 mm).
 The right edge of the paper could not be detected before the start of
printing.
16 One of the following occurred:

 During printing, the exit sensor did not detect the leading edge of the
paper within the prescribed time (enough time for the paper to feed to the
exit sensor plus 100 mm).
 During skew correction, the exit sensor did not detect the leading edge of
the paper within the prescribed time (enough time for the paper to feed to
Troubleshooting
the exit sensor plus 100 mm).
 Paper was not detected by the roll exit sensor.
34 During paper edge detection during the preparation for bypass printing, the
DRESS sensor could not detect the right edge of the paper (returned a "0").
41 The machine detected an overload on the horizontal motor during printing,

caused by an obstruction in the paper path (torn or wrinkled paper).
53 Roll end at Roll Unit 1. The roll unit exit sensor did not detect paper for 7 sec.
54 Roll end at Roll Unit 2. The roll unit exit sensor did not detect paper for 7 sec.
58  After the rewind button on either roll unit was pressed, the pre-registration
sensor did not detect the absence of paper within the prescribed time
(after enough time had elapsed for the paper to reverse feed from the
registration standby position to the pre-registration sensor plus 200 mm).
 During skew correction forcing a paper rewind (due to excessive skew),
the pre-registration sensor did not detect the absence of paper within the
prescribed time (after enough time had elapsed for the paper to reverse
feed from the registration standby position to the pre-registration sensor
plus 200 mm).
SM 6-91 D262
Jam Code Tables
Code Details
63 During paper size detection, immediately after paper cutting, or after skew
correction, the DRESS sensor detected no paper within the prescribed time
(after enough time had elapsed for the paper to feed as far as the DRESS
sensor plus 200 mm).
66 During paper edge detection, the exit sensor detected paper but the paper
end sensor signaled paper end. (The paper stopped at the exit sensor.)
84 The bypass sensor signaled no paper present during edge detection in

preparation for bypass printing.
D262 6-92 SM
6.14.1 SCANNER UNIT
No. Component Function
Troubleshooting
1 Safety switch A push-switch that detects when the scanner cover
is open and disables machine operation. This
prevents the CIS from switching on while the cover
is open
2 CIS unit Five CIS elements that transfer scan image signals
from CIS LEDs to the SIF
3 Scanner motor Drives the original feed roller and original exit roller
that feed the original through the scanner unit
4 SIB Scanner Interface Board. This is the board that

controls the scanner, and serves as the signal I/F
board between the IPU and MCU.
5 Original Exit Sensor Detects the leading and trailing edges of the original
as it leaves the scanner unit. Signals a jam if the
edges are not detected within the prescribed time.
6 Original stop switch Halts original feed after the operator presses this on
the operation panel to stop feeding because the
original has skewed or wrinkled.
SM 6-93 D262
7 Original width sensors Detect the width of the original. Architecture sizes.
(JIS)
8 Original set sensor Detects the leading edge of the original. This starts
the scanner motor. Also functions as an original
width sensor (it detects A4 or 8.5” width paper.
9 Original registration 1) Detects the leading edge of the original. Feed

sensor pauses briefly at the original feed roller, so that the
operator can manually make the original straight. 2)
Detects the leading and trailing edges of the original
for jam detection.
10 Original width sensors Detect the width of the original. Engineering sizes.
(ISO)
6.14.2 MAIN UNIT SENSORS, MOTORS
D262 6-94 SM
1 Main Switch Switches the machine on/off.
2 Horizontal Motor Mounted at the left rear corner of the printer, the
horizontal motor alternately runs forward and reverse
to drive the timing belt that moves the carriage to the
left and right during printing. The operation of the
motor is controlled by the horizontal encoder strip
stretched across the width of the printer and threaded
through the horizontal encoder sensor on the right
rear corner of the carriage unit. The sensor reads this
strip as the carriage moves from side to side and uses
these readings to control the operation of the motor.
3 Front Cover Track A push switch mounted on the left post of the main
Switch machine that detects when the pin on the left end of
the front cover is mounted correctly in its track.
Troubleshooting
4 Operation panel The intuitive 10.1 inch operation panel eliminate all
hardware key from the panel.
5 Paper transport fan The large fan mounted below the perforated platen
plates. This fan creates the suction that holds the
paper on the paper path.
6 Front Cover Switch: One of two safety switches that disable the machine
Right when the front cover is opened.
7 Cutter HP Switch Detects when the cutter has arrived at the home
position on the right and switches the cutter motor off.
8 Exit Sensor Located at the paper exit of the main machine, detects
the leading and trailing edges of the paper. Signals an
error if the paper fails to arrive or leave the sensor
location within the prescribed time.
9 Paper Exit Guide Detects when the exit guide plate on the front of the
Switch machine is opened and closed.
SM 6-95 D262
10 Cutter Return Switch Detects when the cutter has arrived at the left side of
the machine after cutting. Reverses the cutter motor,
which moves the cutter back to the home position on
the right side of the machine.
11 Cutter Motor Drives the cutter to the left and right across the paper
path when cutting paper. The cutter cuts as it moves
from right to left. When the cutter reaches the left side,
the cutter return sensor reverses the motor. A guide
lever falls into a lower track that lowers the cutter so
that it passes under the paper on its return to the
home position on the right.
12 Vertical Encoder HP Mounted opposite and lower than the vertical encoder
Sensor sensor on the left side of the machine, this sensor
also reads the code on the rim of the vertical encoder
wheel, and detects when the wheel reaches the home
position and switches off the vertical motor. This sets
the encoder wheel at the start position for every job.
13 Vertical Motor The vertical motor drives the paper feed rollers and
exit rollers in the main machine. The operation of this
motor is controlled by the vertical encoder sensor and
vertical HP sensor which read the encoded rim of the
vertical encoder wheel.
14 Vertical Encoder The rim of the vertical encoder wheel on the left side
Sensor of the machine is centered in the gap of this sensor.
The sensor reads the code on the rim of the vertical
encoder wheel as it rotates, to control the operation of
the vertical motor during paper feed.
D262 6-96 SM
6.14.3 ROLL UNITS
Troubleshooting
1 Bypass Sensor Detects the trailing edge of the cut sheet manually
inserted into the main machine for bypass feed.
2 Pre-Registration Located at the top of the vertical paper feed path in the
Sensor main unit, detects the leading edge of paper roll paper.
3 Paper Release Controls the raising and lowering of the roll feed roller
Sensor idle rollers during paper feed.
4 Roll Unit Exit Sensor Detects the leading edge of the roll paper as it leaves
the roll unit.
5 Roll Paper Feed Engages and disengages the cam shaft that raises and
Clutch lowers the roll feed roller idle rollers in the roll unit. This
closes and opens the nip of the roll feed roller.
6 Roll Paper Feed Drives the roll paper feed roller that feeds the roll paper
Motor from the roll unit.
7 Pre-skew Correction Not functional.

Clutch
SM 6-97 D262
8 Roll Rewind Switch Located on the inside cover of the right end of Roll Unit
1. Depressing the switch rewinds the paper onto the
paper roll.
9 Encoder Sensor 2 Monitors the number of rotations of the drum core. The
rotation of the core accelerates as the amount of paper
on the roll diminishes. This count is used in a
calculation to determine the amount of paper remaining
on the roll.
10 Encoder Sensor 1 Monitors the rotations of the roll feed motor. This count
is used to calculate the remaining service life of the roll
feed motor.
11 Paper Entrance Detects the edge of the roll paper when it leaves the roll
Sensor (Right) unit and enters the main paper path.
12 Roll End Sensor Detects when the paper roll runs out of paper.
13 Paper Entrance Detects the edge of the roll paper when it leaves the roll
Sensor (Center) unit and enters the main paper path.
D262 6-98 SM
6.14.4 INK SUPPLY
Troubleshooting
1 Ink cartridge cover switch Detects when the ink cartridge cover is opened and
closed.
2 Ink cartridge ID chip These ID chips identify each cartridge as the correct
type for the machine.
3 CCB Cartridge Control Board. Relays the ink cartridge ID

chip signals that confirm whether the ink cartridges are
installed correctly in the ink cartridge holder.
4 Ink end sensor Located below the supply port of each cartridge.
Detects when the ink cartridge is out of ink.
5 Ink pump motor (K2) These motors pump ink from the ink cartridges, through
the supply tubes, and into the ink supply tanks of each
print head.
SM 6-99 D262
1 OCFS 1 (K1) On Carriage Filler Sensor K1. The on-carriage sensor

that monitors the position of the feeler arm on the side
of the K1 ink sub tank. This movement of this sensor is
used to signal low ink in the K1 sub tank.
2 DRESS Sensor Direct Realization Edge Scanning Sensor. The

DRESS sensor is mounted on the left lower edge of the
carriage unit. It performs both paper registration and
image registration.
3 COM Relays signals between the main machine and the K1

print head unit.
D262 6-100 SM
4 HRB Head Relay Board. Mounted behind the print heads in

the carriage.
The HRB relays signals to the BiCU from the horizontal
encoder sensor, DRESS sensor, color print heads and
thermistors.
5 Horizontal Encoder Detects the long encoder strip mounted behind the
Sensor horizontal drive belt. Controls the operation of the
horizontal motor, which drives the carriage unit during
printing.
6 Head Lift Sensor Detects the vertical print head position and controls the
head lift motor.
7 Head Thermistor Monitors the temperature of the color print head units.
(Color)
8 Air Sensor: C Detects excess air in the C ink sub tank of the C print
Troubleshooting
head unit.
9 Air Sensor: M2 Detects excess air in the M2 ink sub tank of the Y2M2
print head unit.
10 Air Sensor: Y2 Detects excess air in the Y2 ink sub tank of the Y2M2
print head unit.
11 Air Sensor: M1 Detects excess air in the M1 ink sub tank of the Y1M1
print head unit.
12 Air Sensor: Y1 Detects excess air in the Y1 ink sub tank of the Y1M1
print head unit.
13 Air Sensor: K2 Detects excess air in the K2 ink sub tank of the K2 print
head unit.
14 Head Thermistor (K) Monitors the temperature of the black print head unit
(K1).
15 Air Sensor: K1 Detects excess air in the K1 ink sub tank of the K1 print
head unit.
SM 6-101 D262
16 OCFS 7 (Y2) On Carriage Filler Sensor Y2. The on-carriage sensor

of the Y2 ink sub tank. The movement of this sensor is
used to signal low ink in the Y2 sub tank.
17 OCFS 6 (M2) On Carriage Filler Sensor M2. The on-carriage sensor

of the M2 ink sub tank. The movement of this sensor is
used to signal low ink in the M2 sub tank.
18 OCFS 5 (C) On Carriage Filler Sensor C. The on-carriage sensor

of the C ink sub tank. The movement of this sensor is
used to signal low ink in the C sub tank.
19 OCFS 4 (M1) On Carriage Filler Sensor M1. The on-carriage sensor

of the M1 ink sub tank. The movement of this sensor is
used to signal low ink in the M1 sub tank.
20 OCFS 7 (Y1) On Carriage Filler Sensor Y1. The on-carriage sensor

of the Y1 ink sub tank. The movement of this sensor is
used to signal low ink in the Y1 sub tank.
21 OCFS 2 (K2) On Carriage Filler Sensor K2 The on-carriage sensor

of the K2 ink sub tank. The movement of this sensor is
used to signal low ink in the K2 sub tank.
D262 6-102 SM
6.14.6 AROUND THE CARRIAGE UNIT
Troubleshooting
1 Registration Release Detects the raising and lowering of the paper

Sensor holding lever which raises and lowers the
registration roller when the operator loads a cut
sheet manually.
2 Head Lift Motor Raises and lowers the carriage to adjust the gap
between the print heads and the paper for different
thickness of paper. The motor is controlled by head
lift sensors 1 and 2.
3 Main Ink Level Sensor 2 Checks the position of the K2, C, Y, or M on-carriage
filler sensor after one of the OCFS detects a
problem in one of the ink sub tanks (low ink, ink end,
or excess air). If the reading of main ink level sensor
2 confirms the condition, it will signal the machine to
supply more ink or purge air from the tank. This
sensor (also known as "FS2") services the OCFS of
K2, C, Y, and M.
SM 6-103 D262
4 Temperature/Humidity Located on the right side of the machine above the

Sensor ink supply unit. The temperature/humidity thermistor
constantly measures temperature and humidity
inside the machine. The printer uses these readings
to adjust the operation of the machine.
5 Main Ink Level Sensor 1 Checks the position of the K1 on-carriage filler
sensor after the OCFS of the K1 print head detects a
problem in the ink sub tank (low ink, ink end, or
excess air). If the reading of main ink level sensor 1
confirms the condition, it will signal the machine to
supply more ink or purge air from the tank. This
sensor (also known as "FS1") services only the
OCFS of the K1 ink supply tank.
6 Air Release Solenoid Located on the right side of the machine. When the
air level sensors detect excess air in an ink sub tank,
the system activates the plunger of the air release
solenoid to purge air from the tank. The partial
vacuum created by the suction pulls in the sides of
the tank so that the tank can fill with more ink.
D262 6-104 SM
Maintenance Unit
Troubleshooting
1 Suction Cap Sensor This sensor switches the maintenance motor on and
off when the motor raises and lowers the K1 cradle
for capping during the printing cycle or during the
print head cleaning cycle.
2 Maintenance Motor The maintenance motor: 1) Raises and lowers the

print head suction cap, 2) Drives the pump that
sucks waste ink from the print heads through the
suction cap, and 3) Drives the wiper blade and wiper
in the cleaning unit.
3 Maintenance Lift Sensor Controls the operation of the maintenance lift motor
that raises and lowers the color cradle (K2, C, YM)
during capping.
4 Slide Sensor This sensor controls the operation of the

maintenance motor when it slides the K1 cradle to
the front (home position) or to the rear during the
print head cleaning cycle.
SM 6-105 D262
5 Maintenance Lift Motor Raises and lowers the color cradle (K2, C, YM caps)
during capping and the print head cleaning cycle.
The maintenance lift sensor controls operation of
this motor during raising and lowering.
6 BOW Board This is the ID chip holds the ID code that confirms
the tank is the correct one for the machine. The
machine software records a count in this chip every
time the maintenance unit suction cap operates to
suck waste ink from the print heads during cleaning.
Once the count Is exceeded this signals tank full,
and the machine disables the code so that the tank
can no longer be used.
7 Ink Collector Cover Detects when the ink collector tank door is opened
Switch and closed. The machine does not operate until the
cover is closed.
D262 6-106 SM
6.14.7 BOARDS
Troubleshooting
1 Controller board Controls memory and all peripheral devices.
2 HDD 320 GB Hard Disk Drive
3 BiCU Base image Control Unit. The control board controls

the system, base engine, and scanner, sends the load
signal of the base engine (high-voltage power supply,
motors, sensors, solenoids, and clutches) and scanner
(sensor and motor), and supplies power as IO.
This also performs image processing. After processing
image data sent from the CIS, this sends the processed
data to the head through IOB and HRB.
4 PSU Power Supply Unit. Connected to the external power

source, provides DC current that runs the machine and
all its components.
SM 6-107 D262
5 IOB Input/Output Board. This functions as the interface for

data transmission and power supply to the paper
supply module and scanner module.
This controls the driver for paper supply, head up/down,
maintenance motor, ink supply, and ink drop detection.
- RFDB Roll Feed Drive Board. Controls the operation of Roll

Unit 2. Provided with Roll Unit 2 (option).
- MLB Media Link Board (File Format Converter). An option.

Documents saved with the copy/printer function can be
received from your client computer via a network, using
Desk Top Binder, for example.
D262 6-108 SM
Fuses/LEDS/SWITCHES
6.15 FUSES/LEDS/SWITCHES
6.15.1 SCANNER UNIT
Operation Panel
Refer to Smart Operation Panel Manual.
SIB (Scanner I/F Board)

The SIB is placed at the left back of the scanner unit, controls the CIS, scanner motor, and
sensors on the scanner motor, and relays the signals.
The CIS reads image data, which are then converted from analog to digital and sent to the BiCU.
Troubleshooting
LED Status
LED Color LED Status
Power ON: Lit

LED1 Green
Power OFF / Sleep mode: not lit
SM 6-109 D262
Fuses/LEDS/SWITCHES
FUSES
Output
Name Capacity Voltage Type Part No.
terminal
CN436 1.1 A Sensors for

FU1 5V 11090007
CN438 8 V DC scanner unit
CN431 to 1.5 A
FU2 1.1 V CIS 11090097
CB435 6 V DC
2A
FU3 CN437 24 V Scanner motor 11071362
250 V AC
CN431 to 1.5 A
FU4 3.3 V CIS 11090097
CB435 6 V DC
CN431 to 1.1 A
FU5 6.2 V CIS LED 11090071
CB435 16 V DC
D262 6-110 SM
Fuses/LEDS/SWITCHES
6.15.2 MAIN BOARDS (PCB BOX)
CONTROLLER BOARD
The controller board is placed at left in the PCB box and controls the machine. This board controls
the MFP system.
The built-in flash ROM stores various firmware for controlling the machine and security functions,
such as encryption and certification.
The printer and scanner functions can be expanded, using the optional slots (interface/SD card).
Troubleshooting
SM 6-111 D262
Fuses/LEDS/SWITCHES
FUSES
Output
terminal
CN509, 5V
FU1 250 V, 5 A DIMM, USB host -
CN530
CN510, 5V -
CN508, Debug port, USB,
CN507, SD card slot (op,
FU2 250 V, 5 A
CN505, service), LAN, HDD
CN506, (5 V)
CN514
CN509, 5V USB host (5 V), -

FU3 CN530, 250 V, 5 A DIMM (5 V), RIO4
CN501 (5 V)
CN512, 5V -
FU4 250 V, 5 A HDD, RIO4 (3.3 V)
CN501
SW1
 Do not change these switch settings.
No. Factory Setting
1 OFF
2 OFF
3 OFF
4 OFF
5 OFF
6 OFF
7 OFF
8 OFF
D262 6-112 SM
Fuses/LEDS/SWITCHES

The IOB is placed at the center front of the PCB box and installed horizontally.
This functions as the interface for data transmission and power supply to the paper supply module
and scanner module.
This controls the driver for paper supply, head lift, maintenance motor, ink supply and purge
detection.
Troubleshooting
LED Status
Flash: Normal
LED1 Yellow-green
Not lit or Lit: Abnormal
Lit: Abnormal
LED2 Yellow-green
Not lit: Normal
Not lit: Normal

LED3 Orange
Lit: Abnormal
SM 6-113 D262
Fuses/LEDS/SWITCHES
FUSE
Output
terminal
CN263, 254, Paper Feed Clutch,

FU1 - 24V -
255 Paper Feed Motor
FU2 CN268 - 24V IFBOX -
CN254, 263,
FU3 - 5V Sensors -
265, 266
FU4 CN255 - 5V RFDB -
FU5 CN269 - 5V IFBOX -
FU6 CN256 - 24V SIB -
FU7 CN256 - 24V SIB -
CN251, 252, Key Counter, Key

FU8 - 24V -
253 Card
SW1
SW Settings at
Note Note
No. Installation
1 - OFF Prohibited
2 - OFF Prohibited
3 - OFF Prohibited
4 - OFF Prohibited
5 - OFF Prohibited
6 - OFF Prohibited
OFF: Normal
8 Ri debug mode OFF
ON: IC20 debug mode
D262 6-114 SM
Fuses/LEDS/SWITCHES

The BiCU is placed at the back of the IOB in the PCB box.
The control board controls the system, base engine, and scanner, sends the load signal of the
base engine (high-voltage power supply, motors, sensors, solenoids, and clutches) and scanner
This also performs image processing. After processing image data sent from the CIS, this sends
the processed data to the head through IOB and HRB.
Troubleshooting
 FU10 is located on the back surface of the board.
SM 6-115 D262
Fuses/LEDS/SWITCHES
LED Status
Normal: Flash
LED101 Yellow-green
Abnormal: Lit orNot lit
Operation: Flash
LED102 Yellow-green
Others: Not lit
LED103 Yellow-green DSP start check
Normal: Flash
LED105 Yellow-green
Abnormal: Not lit
Normal: Flash
LED106 Yellow-green
Abnormal: Not lit
Standby: Flash
LED107 Yellow
Operation: Lit
Standby: Flash
LED108 Yellow
Operation: Lit
5VX input: Lit

LED109 Red
Others: Not lit
3.3V input: Lit

LED111 Green
Others: Not lit
D262 6-116 SM
Fuses/LEDS/SWITCHES
Fuses
Output
terminal
CN215
FU1 76V 5A 5.1V Operation panel 11071302
CN216
250V
FU2 - 24V BiCU 11071374
T6.3A
250V Main scan and sub

FU3 CN203 24V 11071374
T6.3A scan motor
FU4 CN214 72V 0.5A 5V NMB 11071211
FU5 - 250V T2A 5V Sensors 11071362
FU6 - 72V 2.5A 5V BiCU 11071219
Troubleshooting
CN208 to 250V
FU7 37V HRB 11071226
CN211 T2.5A
FU8 CN214 250V T2A 24V HVP 11071362
FU9 CN210 72V 2.5A 5.1V HRB 11071219
FU10 CN218 76V 1.6A 5.1V MKB 11071127
FU11 CN213 72V 4A 24V Intake fan 11071107
SM 6-117 D262
Fuses/LEDS/SWITCHES

The PSU is placed at right in the PCB box.
DC voltage is loaded to the main unit.
Fuse (100 V)
Output
terminal
T10A
FU102 CN904-3 AC Input protection ‐
250V
T5A
FU11 CN911-3 5.1V BiCU ‐
250V
CN912-5 T10A
FU12 24V IOB ‐
CN912-6 250V
T10A
FU13 CN912-7 24V IOB ‐
250V
T10A
FU14 CN912-8 24V IOB ‐
250V
D262 6-118 SM
Fuses/LEDS/SWITCHES
Fuse (200V)
Output
terminal
T5A
FU102 CN904-3 AC Input protection ‐
250V
T5A
FU11 CN911-3 5.1V BiCU ‐
250V
CN912-5 T10A
FU12 24V IOB ‐
CN912-6 250V
T2.5A
FU13 CN912-7 24V IOB ‐
250V
T6.3A
FU14 CN912-8 24V IOB ‐
250V
Troubleshooting
SM 6-119 D262
Fuses/LEDS/SWITCHES
HRB
The HRB behind the print heads relays signals to the control board from the horizontal encoder
sensor, DRESS sensor, and thermistors.
 FU1 is located on the back surface of the board.
Output
terminal
0.63A Print heads and

FU1 - 3.3V ‐
50V(DC) sensors
D262 6-120 SM
DETAILED DESCRIPTION
None
Overview
7. DETAILED DESCRIPTION
7.1 OVERVIEW
7.1.1 GENERAL OPERATION SEQUENCE

Here is a brief summary of what happens when an original is scanned and printed with roll paper
from Roll Unit 1. Every phase of this operation summary is described in detail in later sections of
this document.
The general operation sequence is composed of these steps:
1 Power ON
2 Scanning
3 Paper Feed
4 Printing
5 Cutting
6 Paper Exit and Job End
1 Power ON
1. The machine checks for paper jams, and issues a jam alert if one is detected.
2. The maintenance unit print head caps are lowered to uncap the print heads.
3. The horizontal motor switches ON and moves the carriage to the start position and then back Description
Detailed
to the maintenance unit.

4. The positions of the print head OCFS feelers are checked to determine whether sufficient ink
remains in each sub tank.
5. The print head sub tanks are air purged and filled as needed and then the print heads are
cleaned.
6. The print heads are capped.
7. The printer beeps twice when it is ready for operation.
SM 7-1 D262
Overview
 When the machine is powered on, especially after a cold start, the machine automatically
checks temperature, ink level, and air sensors. Then it cleans and re-fills the print heads.
This can require more time, depending on how long the machine has been off.
 If the machine is accidentally unplugged from the wall power socket, or if a power outage
occurs during the cleaning cycle after power on, the cycle will not resume from where it
was interrupted after power is restored. You must do cleaning with the user tools after
power is restored.
2 Paper Exit and Job End

1. After the paper has been cut and the cutter has returned to its home position, the machine
feeds the paper out of the machine.
2. When the exit sensor detects the trailing edge of the paper, this signals job end.
3. The paper transport fan switches off and the paper is reverse fed to the registration standby
position.
4. The machine is ready for the next job.
5. If the machine remains idle for more than 14 min. (default), it will enter the Sleep Mode.
D262 7-2 SM
Scanner Unit
7.2 SCANNER UNIT
7.2.1 SCANNER LAYOUT
Side View
No. Item
3 Original entrance roller
5 CIS unit
Description
Detailed
7 Original exit roller
8 Scanner motor
 The original width sensors (1) detect the width of the original, and the original set sensor (2)
detects when the original is set by the operator.
 The original entrance roller (3) feeds the original to the original registration sensor (4). The
original registration sensor detects the leading edge of the original and stops long enough for
the operator to align the original manually if the original is not straight.
 The CIS unit (5) under the original scans the original and sends the data to the SIB in the
scanner unit.
SM 7-3 D262
Scanner Unit
 The original exit sensor (6) detects the leading and trailing edges of the original to check the
feed timing of the original.
 The original exit roller (7) feeds the original out of the scanner unit.
 The scanner motor (8) drives the scanner entrance roller and the exit roller via a single timing
belt.
 Two safety micro-switches (not shown) on the left side of the scanner unit disconnect power
to the scanner unit every time the scanner unit cover is opened. This prevents the CIS unit
from turning ON while the cover is open.
 Pressing the original stop key (a push-switch on the right side of the scanner unit)
interrupts scanning if a problem occurs during scanning (wrinkling, skew) so that the original
can be removed.
D262 7-4 SM
Scanner Unit
Front View
No. Item
1 Safety switches
2 Scanner motor
3 SIB
Description
Detailed
7 CIS unit (5 elements)
8 Original stop switch
SM 7-5 D262
Scanner Unit
7.2.2 ORIGINAL WIDTH DETECTION
Several sensors are used to detect the width of the original when it is set on the original table:
 Metric
10 sensors: 9 original width sensors plus the original set sensor [1] which also functions as a
width sensor.
 Inch
11 sensors: 10 original width sensors and the original set sensor [1] which also functions as a
width sensor. The NA machine has one additional width sensor [2] (30") .
D262 7-6 SM
Scanner Unit
 The sensors to the left of center (set sensor position "0") detect B series (Metric) or
Architecture (USA) sizes.
 The sensors to the right of center (set sensor position "0") detect A series (Metric) or
Engineering (USA) sizes.
 If only one original sensor is detects a paper, the machine detects an A4 or 8 ½" "A" size SEF
original.
Description
Detailed
SM 7-7 D262
Scanner Unit
7.2.3 SCANNING
Original Feed, Exit Sequence
Only one original can be placed face-down on the original table.

 The original set sensor (1) detects the leading edge of the original and the original width
sensors (2) detect the width of the original.
 The original entrance roller (3) grabs the leading edge, feeds it a short distance and then
stops for 1 sec. This is called Delay 1. This gives the operator time to set the paper again if it
is not perfectly straight.
 The original feed roller feeds the original to the original registration sensor (4).
 When the original registration sensor detects the leading edge of the original, the machine
stops original feed again for 1 sec. This is called Delay 2. This gives the operator another
chance to check that the original is straight.
 If the original is not straight, the user can push the original stop key ( ) on the right side of
the scanner unit, remove the original, and try again.
 The length of time for Delay 1 and Delay 2 to pause can be adjusted with User Tools >
System Settings > General Features > Original Feed Delay.
 The CIS (Contact Image Sensor) (5) scans the original from below.
 The original exit sensor (6) checks the timing of the passage between the leading and trailing
edges of the original to make sure that there is no jam.
 The original exit roller (7) feed the original out of the scanner unit while the scanned image is
processed
 The original stacker (8) and original guide (9) comprise the upper output tray (10). The upper
output tray receives the original after scanning. Long originals will curl in the tray.
 If the original guide is removed, the original feeds straight out the back of the scanner unit (11)
D262 7-8 SM
Scanner Unit
 If the original output trays are removed, the original feeds straight out of the rear of
the machine. The user should remove the original output trays when scanning thick
originals.
 The scanner motor (12) drives the entrance roller and exit roller in the scanner unit via a
single timing belt.
Auto Image Density Correction
Auto Image Density Correction corrects the background density.

 First, the CIS unit (1) reads the surface of the white strips (2) on the platen plate.
 There is one white strip mounted above each section of the CIS unit. The machine uses these
readings as reference points for density correction.
Description
Detailed
SM 7-9 D262
Scanner Unit
Scanning Area
During scanning, the CIS corrects the image density line by line. To do this, it starts 3 mm from the
leading edge of the original [B], and reads 60 mm to the left and to the right of center.
These start positions can be adjusted with the following SP codes:
 SP4-901-005 Digital AE -Start Position
 SP4-901-006 Digital AE -Left Start Position
 SP4-901-007 Digital AE -Right Start Position
Scan Magnification Correction

Magnification (enlargement/reduction) correction in the sub scan (vertical) direction is done by
adjusting the speed of the scanner motor with SP2-116 (Copier Sub Scan Magnification Correct)
Adjustment is done relative to the default setting "0" (100%).
 Reducing the setting increases the speed of the scanner motor, and the image is reduced
when it prints.
 Increasing the setting reduces the speed of the scanner motor, and the image is enlarged
when it is printed.
D262 7-10 SM
Scanner Unit
7.2.4 ORIGINAL DRIVE MECHANISM
Scanning Motor, Rollers
 The scanner motor (1) (a stepper motor) and timing belt (2) drive the original entrance roller
(3) and original exit roller (4).
 The original set sensor (5) turns the motor on when the original is set.
 The original exit sensor (6) switches the motor off when the sensor detects the trailing edge of
the original.
Description
Detailed
SM 7-11 D262
Scanner Unit
Original Feed Speed
In the diagram above, the red numbers (%) below the horizontal axis of both graphs show the
magnification steps for copy jobs. The green numbers (dpi) below the horizontal axis of both
graphs show the resolution steps for scanning jobs.
During copying, the speed of original feed is adjusted for magnification (resolution is fixed at 600
dpi). During scanning to a file, the speed of original feed is adjusted for resolution (magnification is
fixed at 100%).
The scanning speed increases as resolution or magnification lowers. But to prevent color
separation caused by excessive speed, scanning speed does not increase any more when
resolution (or magnification) reaches the following values, and then image processing reduces the
data:
 Black-and-white: When resolution is less than 300 dpi or less, or magnification is less than
50% [A]
 Full color: When resolution is less than 400 dpi or less, or magnification is less than 66% [B]
Black-and-White Standard for Copying
 Resolution: 600 dpi (fixed). Copy resoution cannot be adjusted.
 Magnification: 100%
 Original scanning speed : 80 mm/s
Black-and-White Standard for Scan to File
 Resolution: 200 dpi
 Magnification: 100% (fixed)
 Scanning speed: 160 mm/s (with electronic magnification)
This graph shows the reciprocal relation between copy magnification and scan job resolution. For
example:
 A copy reduced to 50% (one-half of an image at 100% 600 dpi) is reduced by removing half
the pixels.
 This is the same as a 300 dpi copy at 100%, in other words, the same as a document
scanned to a file at 300 dpi.
D262 7-12 SM
Scanner Unit
7.2.5 SCANNING MECHANISM
CIS Structure
This machine uses 5 contact image sensors (1) linked in a staggered configuration mounted
below the original feed path. The CIS scans both black-and-white and color originals at a
maximum of 926.5 mm (361/2 inches) wide with 600 dpi.
A pair of safety switches (2) cut off the power circuits of the CIS unit when the scanner cover is
raised. This prevents the CIS unit from lighting up accidentally when the cover is open.
The CIS unit is made of 5 contact image sensors connected at 4 joints. If you look from above, the
CIS sections are numbered from left to right as CIS-1 to CIS-5. Description
Detailed
Printed Image
When you look at the copy to identify the areas scanned by each section, the numbering is in the
opposite sequence, with CIS-5 on the left to CIS-1 on the right.
SM 7-13 D262
Scanner Unit
7.2.6 LONG ORIGINAL OR SPECIAL ORIGINAL WITH CARRIER

SHEET
When a long original, or a special original (extremely thin or fragile) with a carrier sheet, is fed into
the scanner unit, this creates a load on the scanner when the scanned portion of the original
behind the scanner unit starts to sag. This can cause the original to slip in the original feed path
and interfere with smooth operation of the scanner motor. To correct this, the scanning speed can
be switched at a desired location in order to compensate for slippage of the special originals in the
original feed path.
The scanning speed can be switched at designated points:
 Up to 15 switching points can be designated for a long original up to the maximum length of
15,000 mm (15 m or approximately 50 ft.).
 The first starting point (the reference point) is upstream of the CIS.
 The points can be entered with SP codes SP4-993, SP4-994
 The speed of the scanner motor can be set in the range of ±10% where it can be adjusted in
fine increments (±0.1%)
As shown above, as more of the original feeds through the scanner unit, the speed of the scanner
motor is decreased slightly.
 If the speed is set at "0" at any point, the speed will be 100% the normal speed of the scanner
motor.
 If the image is to be magnified, the speed of the vertical motor is automatically adjusted to
account for the changes in scanning speed, so magnification will not be affected.
The machine can also be set not to release the trailing edge of the original at the end of the scan
job. This prevents the original from falling on the floor. The trailing edge is held in the nip of the
exit roller until it can be removed manually. This feature can be switched on/off with SP4-975
(Prevent Original Falling).
D262 7-14 SM
Scanner Unit
7.2.7 RELATED SPS

 4-901-005 Digital [Shading Correction DFU]-[Digital AE -Start Position]:
Defines the start position for digital A/E processing of the scanned image data.
 4-901-006 Digital [Shading Correction DFU]-[Digital AE -Left Start Position]:
This SP sets the start position for digital AE processing for scanned image data in the main
scan direction (from the center of the original as a reference point), starting at the left side of
the original.
 4-901-007 Digital [Shading Correction DFU]-[]:
This SP sets the start position for digital AE processing for scanned image data in the main
scan direction (from the center of the original as a reference point), stopping at the right side
of the original.
 2-116-XXX [Copier Sub Scan Magnification Correct]:
Use these SP codes to correct magnification in the sub scan direction, depending on what
type of paper is used. Correction is done in the range [+1.0% to -1.0%/0.0/0.1%]
 4-993-XXX [Document Feed Speed Adjustment DFU]:
This SP sets the speed adjustments for scanning long originals, or special originals with a
carrier sheet, after SP4992 has been turned on. (See detailed description below for SP4994.)
 4-994-XXX [Document Feed Speed Adjustment]:
 4-975-001 [Prevent Document Fall]:
This SP sets the scanner unit to hold the trailing edge of the original if it is longer than 450
mm to prevent it from falling on the floor. Use this setting for long originals fed straight out the
back of the machine.
Description
Detailed
SM 7-15 D262
Image Processing
7.3 IMAGE PROCESSING
7.3.1 FEATURES FOR PRINTING

For printing, data is written in bands in the direction of main scanning, and these bands are
parallel in the sub scanning direction. The BiCU converts the data.
 The BiCU supports mirror, reverse, and jpeg compression and decompression.
 Writing in the margin is performed after BiCU but not CTL. An abnormal image of writing
in the margin is caused with BiCU.
Scan Write
Other MFPs MP CW2201
D262 7-16 SM
Image Processing
7.3.2 IMAGE FLOW
Copy Job Image Data Flow

For Multiple Copies of an Original of A1 or Smaller for Monochrome or A2 or Smaller for
Color
 Data do not go to the HDD but are stored in DIMM only.

 Data is cached with FPGA for several bands, converted between horizontal and
vertical for each band, and are carried out down sampling.
For Other Size or Multiple Originals
Description
Detailed
 Data is stored on the HDD.

 Data is cached with FPGA for several bands, converted between horizontal and
vertical for each band, and are carried out down sampling.
SM 7-17 D262
Image Processing
Scan Job Image Data Flow

Transfering for Each Twain Page
 The data format depends on the settings.

Delivering Data
 The data format depends on the settings.

 All data is temporarily stored on the HDD.
 Data is distributed through a LAN.
D262 7-18 SM
Image Processing
Print Job Image Data Flow
 All data is temporarily stored on the HDD.

 Data is cached with FPGA for several bands, converted between horizontal and vertical
for each band, and decreased in value.
Description
Detailed
SM 7-19 D262
Image Processing
7.3.3 COPY MODE IMAGE PROCESSING

The copy modes (selected from the operation on the main machine) are provided to achieve the
best possible results in copying, depending on the type and quality of the original. Here is a brief
summary of the copy modes as they appear in order of selection on the operation panel.
Copy Mode For Original Type
Drawing For line drawings with fine lines that could easily break up
during copying.
Text Mainly text with few or no illustrations.
Photo Glossy photos, photos printed on paper, re-produced photos

(generation copies).
Text/Photo Text mixed with photos and drawings.
Glossy Photo Photos or illustrations printed on glossy surface paper.
Printed Photo Printed photos and artwork on magazine pages.
Copied Photo Photos or illustrations copied onto paper and printed in color.
Background Lines Forces background lines of section paper, for example, to

dropout. (Forcing blue to drop out may be difficult.)
Patched Original Text, photos, drawings, pasted up on paper or boards for

layout.
Generation Copy Originals copied many times in succession with text letters
starting to become distorted.
Map Full color maps with fine lines.
Highlight Pen Text marked with yellow highlight that you do not want to lose
in a black-and-white copy.
D262 7-20 SM
Image Processing
7.3.4 PRINT MODE IMAGE PROCESSING

The print modes (selected with the printer driver) are provided to achieve the best possible results
in print jobs.
Print Mode What It Does
Normal (Default) Target for color reproduction quality in printing is RGB

monitor color.
Color/Black-and-White Aims for B&W reproduction detected by the human

eye.
CUD Print Adjusts colors so they are easily distinguished by

those with color blindness.
POP Optimization Best quality of outstanding colors for POP printing.
Ink Save Best possible print production with less ink in order to
conserve toner.
Description
Detailed
SM 7-21 D262
Image Processing
7.3.5 COPY RESOLUTION: COPY JOBS AND PRINT JOBS

In the tables below:
 Uni-Dir means "uni-directional" printing. The print heads lay down ink in only one pass as the
carriage unit moves from right to left.
 Bi-Dir means "bi-directional" printing. The print heads lay down ink in two passes as the
carriage unit moves from right to left and then right to left.
 Switching "Yes/No" means that the operator can/cannot switch between uni-directional and
bi-directional printing.
Copy Jobs
No. Paper Type Quality Direction Resolution

(dpi)
Bi-Dir./Uni-Dir. Switching
1 Normal/Monochrome High Speed Bi-Dir. Yes 600x300
2 Standard Bi-Dir. Yes 600x600
3 Normal/Color High Speed Bi-Dir. Yes 600x300
4 Standard. Bi-Dir. Yes 600x600
5 Recycled/Monochrome High Speed Bi-Dir. Yes 600x300
7 Recycled/Color High Speed Bi-Dir. Yes 600x300
9 IJ Normal/Monochrome High Speed Bi-Dir. Yes 600x300
11 IJ Normal/Color High Speed Bi-Dir. Yes 600x300
13 Translucent/Monochrome Standard Uni-Dir. No 600x600
14 Translucent/Color Standard Uni-Dir. No 600x600
15 Matte Film/Monochrome Standard Uni-Dir. No 600x600
16 Matte Film/Color Standard Uni-Dir. No 600x600
D262 7-22 SM
Image Processing
No. Paper Type Quality Direction Resolution

(dpi)
17 Coated High Speed Bi-Dir. Yes 600x300

(CAD)/Monochrome
19 Coated (CAD)/Color High Speed Bi-Dir. Yes 600x300
21 Coated/Monochrome Standard Uni-Dir. No 600x1200
22 Coated/Color Standard Uni-Dir. No 600x1200
23 Special/Monochrome Standard Uni-Dir. No 600x1200
24 Special/Color Standard Uni-Dir. No 600x1200
Print Jobs
Paper Type Quality Direction Resolution Scan

(dpi)
Normal/Monochrome High Bi-Dir. Yes 600x300 1

Speed
(LD)
Description
Detailed
High Bi-Dir. Yes 600x300 1

Speed
Standard Bi-Dir. Yes 600x600 2
Quality Uni-Dir No 600x600 4
Normal/Color High Bi-Dir. Yes 600x300 1

Speed
(LD)

Speed
SM 7-23 D262
Image Processing

(dpi)
Standard. Bi-Dir. Yes 600x600 2
Recycled/Monochrome High Bi-Dir. Yes 600x300 1

Speed
(LD)

Speed
Recycled/Color High Bi-Dir. Yes 600x300 1

Speed
(LD)

Speed
IJ Normal/Monochrome High Bi-Dir. Yes 600x300 1

Speed
(LD)

Speed
IJ Normal/Color High Bi-Dir. Yes 600x300 1

Speed
(LD)
D262 7-24 SM
Image Processing

(dpi)

Speed
Translucent/Monochrome High Bi-Dir. Yes 600x600 4

Speed
Standard Uni-Dir. No 600x600 4
Translucent/Color High Bi-Dir. Yes 600x600 4

Speed
Matte Film/Monochrome High Uni-Dir. No 600x600 4

Speed

Description
Detailed
Matte Film/Color High Uni-Dir. No 600x600 4

Speed
Coated High Bi-Dir. Yes 600x300 1

(CAD)/Monochrome Speed
(LD)

Speed
SM 7-25 D262
Image Processing

(dpi)
Coated (CAD)/Color High Bi-Dir. Yes 600x600 2

Speed
(LD)

Speed
Coated/Monochrome High Uni-Dir. No 600x600 4

Speed
Coated/Color High Uni-Dir. No 600x600 4

Speed
Special/Monochrome High Uni-Dir. No 600x600 4

Speed
Special/Color High Uni-Dir. No 600x600 4

Speed
D262 7-26 SM
Image Processing
7.3.6 IMAGE TROUBLESHOOTING

Internal Test Patterns
2-902 Internal Test Pattern Select - RI20 (MtoP) Internal Patterns
Pattern
0 No Test Pattern Output
1 Black Grid Pattern
2 Cyan Grid Pattern
3 Magenta Grid Pattern
4 Yellow Grid Pattern
5 Frame Pattern
6 Black 2x2 Pattern
7 Cyan 2x2 Pattern
8 Magenta 2x2 Pattern
9 Yellow 2x2 Pattern
10 Density Pattern 1
Description
Detailed
SM 7-27 D262
Image Processing
IPU Test Patterns
4-417 IPU Test Pattern Setting - Pattern Selection
No. Pattern Name
0 Scanned Image
2 Color Patch 16
3 Grid Pattern A
D262 7-28 SM
Paper Feed and Exit
7.4 PAPER FEED AND EXIT
7.4.1 OVERVIEW
No. Item No. Item
1 DRESS sensor 11 Roll end sensor
2 Platen 12 Encoder sensor 1 (motor)
Description
Detailed
3 Paper transport fan 13 Encoder sensor 2 (paper)
4 Registration roller 14 Spool
5 Bypass sensor 15 Roll rewind switch
6 Pre-registration sensor 16 Paper exit guide
7 Paper release sensor 17 Paper exit guide switch
8 Roll feeder exit sensor 18 Exit sensor
9 Roll feeder entrance sensor (right) 19 Cutter
10 Roll feeder entrance sensor (center) 20 Feed roller
SM 7-29 D262
Paper Feed and Exit
7.4.2 ROLL UNIT OPERATION
General Operation of Roll Unit
Just after the main power is turned ON, the nip between the roll feed roller [1] and its idle roller is
closed. When the user installs a roll, the machine initializes the roll as follows:
 When the paper entrance sensor [2] detects the leading edge, the roll paper feed motor and
roll feed clutch [3] rotate together to feed the paper until the pre-registration sensor [4] detects
its leading edge.
 Next, the vertical feed motor [not shown] on the left side of the machine turns ON.
 When the DRESS sensor [5] detects the leading edge, the motors and roll feed clutch turn
OFF and the machine checks for paper skew.
 Then the roll paper feed motor and roll feed clutch turn [3] ON and reverse feed.
 This process opens the nip between the roll feed roller and its idle roller.
 The registration roller [6] now has the paper and the vertical feed motor controls paper feed.
 The vertical feed motor feeds the paper to the registration standby position below the
registration roller [6].
 The roll paper feed motor reverse feeds with the clutch [3] off. This rotates the roll spool in
reverse to take up slack.
D262 7-30 SM
Paper Feed and Exit
Roll Feed Mechanism
 When the roll paper feed motor [1] rotates forward, the feed roller [2] feeds the paper into the
machine.
 When the roll paper feed motor rotates in reverse with the roll feed clutch [3] OFF, the spool
reverses (for example, to take up slack).
 When the roll paper feed motor rotates in reverse with the roll feed clutch ON, the feed roller
rotates in reverse. The cam [4] also rotates, and this moves the idle roller [5] into and out of
contact with the feed roller, so the paper reverse feeds intermittently.
Description
Detailed
SM 7-31 D262
Paper Feed and Exit
Initializing the First Paper Roll
 The operator manually inserts the leading edge of the roll sheet into the paper path slot of the
roll feeder as far as the closed nip [1] of the paper feed roller and idle roller.
 The roll feed roller [2] rotates briefly. This grabs the paper, and the roll paper feed motor [3]
stops.
 A prompt appears on the screen and asks the user if the paper should be cut ["Cut" or "No
Cut"]. The operator presses "Cut" (recommended).
 The user then selects Paper Type and Thickness.
 The roll paper feed motor [3] starts rotating clockwise. This turns the shaft of the roll feed
roller [2] and feeds the paper.
 The roll paper feed motor rotates the roll feed roller via the drive gears [4].
 The paper continues to feed through the nip [1] of the roll feed roller and the idle rollers, which
are still lifted into contact with the feed roller.
D262 7-32 SM
Paper Feed and Exit
 The roll feed roller [1] feeds the paper over the feeler of the paper exit sensor [2] and out of
the roll feeder into the vertical feed path of the main machine.
 When the leading edge of the paper reaches the pre-registration sensor [3], the vertical motor
on the left side of the machine turns ON and rotates the registration roller [4].
 When the DRESS sensor [5] detects the leading edge of the paper, the vertical motor stops.
Description
Detailed
SM 7-33 D262
Paper Feed and Exit
 At the same time, the roll paper feed motor [1] and clutch [2] also stop.
 Then the clutch turns ON again but the motor rotates counter-clockwise.
 When the motor turns in this direction, the cam shaft [3] rotates and moves the idle roller [4]
down until the paper release sensor [5] turns ON.
 The feed roller and idle roller are now separated.
D262 7-34 SM
Paper Feed and Exit
 The vertical motor turns ON again, and feeds the paper forward to the cutter [1].
 The cutter motor on the left side of the machine (not shown) turns ON and drives the cutter
across the paper to cut it..
 The vertical feed motor turns ON again, feeds the paper forward out of the front of the
machine a short distance [2], stops, and then reverses.
 When the DRESS sensor [3] detects the edge of the paper again, it starts a count, and then
stops the paper at the registration standby position [4] above the registration roller [5].
Description
Detailed
SM 7-35 D262
Paper Feed and Exit
Initializing the Second Paper Roll
 When the user feeds the edge of a roll into Roll Unit 2, as far as the entrance sensor [1] for
roll 2, the vertical feed motor and the roll paper feed motor for Roll 1 reverse feed the paper
from Roll Unit 1.
 When the pre-registration sensor [2] detects the edge of the paper, the machine reverse
feeds the paper to the paper standby position [3] for Roll Unit 1. Then the motors turn OFF.
 "Initializing the First Paper" (described above) is executed for the roll paper in Roll Unit 2.
 The leading edge of the Roll Unit 2 paper stops at the registration standby position at the
registration roller [4].
Roll Rewinding for Removal

Before a roll can be removed, the paper must be rewound onto the roll.
To do this, the user presses the roll rewind switch on the right inner cover of the Roll Unit for at
least 2 seconds and then releases it.
There are two different sequences::
 Reversing a roll from the registration standby position
 Reversing a roll from the paper standby position
From the registration standby position:
D262 7-36 SM
Paper Feed and Exit
 The vertical motor and roll paper feed motor [1] reverse feed the paper from the registration
standby position [2] (the roll feed clutch stays off, so only the spool is reversing the paper, and
not the roll feed roller).
 When the edge of the paper passes the pre-registration sensor [3], the vertical motor stops.
 When the edge of the paper reaches the paper entrance sensor [4] [or after 5 seconds has
passed, whichever is first], the roll paper feed motor also stops.
 Then, the roll paper feed motor reverses briefly with the clutch on. This closes the nip [5]
between the roll feed roller and its idle roller. So the next time paper is inserted, the nip is Description
Detailed
already closed.
 The operator then turns the roll by hand until the edge of the paper comes out of the machine.
SM 7-37 D262
Paper Feed and Exit
From the paper standby position:

 Only the roll paper feed motor [1] reverse feeds the paper from the paper standby position [2]
(the roll feed clutch stays off, so only the spool is reversing the paper, and not the roll feed
roller).
 When the edge of the paper reaches the paper entrance sensor [3] (or after 5 seconds has
passed, whichever is first), the roll paper feed motor stops.
 Then, the roll paper feed motor reverses briefly with the clutch on. This closes the nip [4]
between the roll feed roller and its idle roller. So the next time paper is inserted, the nip is
already closed.
 The operator then turns the roll by hand until the edge of the paper comes out of the machine.
D262 7-38 SM
Paper Feed and Exit
Roll End
The trailing edge of the paper roll may or may not be fastened to the roll core, depending on the
type of roll in use.
If the trailing edge of the paper is not attached to the roll core:
 The machine signals roll end when the traling edge passes the roll feeder entrance sensor (1)
and then the roll feeder exit sensor (2).
 Both actuators pop up once the trailing edge of the paper passes.
 This signals roll end and the machine displays a message to alert the operator that the roll
needs replacement.
If the trailing edge of the paper is attached to the roll core:
 At the end of the roll, the trailing edge of the paper remains attached to the roll core, but the
paper continues to feed.
 The paper is pulled taut, up against the actuator of the roll end sensor (3). This signals roll
end and switches off the vertical feed motor and horizontal motor. This shuts down paper feed
and printing.
 The machine displays a message to alert the operator that the roll needs replacement. Description
Detailed
SM 7-39 D262
Paper Feed and Exit
7.4.3 MAIN UNIT PAPER FEED
Registration Roller
No. Item
1 Vertical motor
2 Vertical encoder wheel
3 Vertical encoder sensor
4 Vertical encoder HP sensor
5 Timing belt
6 Registration roller
 The vertical motor (1), controlled by the vertical encoder wheel (2), vertical encoder sensor
(3), and vertical encoder HP sensor (4), drives the timing belt (5) that rotates the registration
roller (6).
D262 7-40 SM
Paper Feed and Exit
Vertical Feed Mechanism
No. Item
1 Paper holding lever cam
2 Pressure arm
3 Registration roller idle rollers
4 Vertical motor
Description
Detailed
5 Registration roller
6 Vertical encoder sensor
7 Vertical encoder wheel
8 Vertical encoder HP sensor
9 Exit sensor
10 Bypass stopper shaft
11 Bypass stopper clutch
12 Bypass stopper clutch sensor
SM 7-41 D262
Paper Feed and Exit
 When the paper holding lever is down, the paper holding lever cam (1) depresses the
spring-loaded pressure arm (2) that keeps downward pressure on the registration idle rollers
(3). This closes the nip at the registration standby position.
 When the paper holding lever on the right side of the machine is raised, this rotates the paper
holding lever cam down to raise the idle rollers and open the nip. This is done to load paper
for bypass feed.
 The vertical motor (4) uses one drive belt to drive the registration roller (5).
 The vertical encoder sensor (6) reads the codes notched on the edge of the vertical encoder
wheel (7) as it rotates on the end of the shaft of the registration roller. These readings are
used to control vertical paper feed in the main machine.
 The vertical encoder HP sensor (8) detects the small hole in the encoder wheel, and then
stops the vertical motor with the wheel at the home (start) position.
 The exit sensor (9) detects the leading edge and trailing edges of the paper as it leaves the
machine.
 The bypass stopper shaft (10) has bypass stoppers, and it rotates by the vertical motor via
timing belt.
 The bypass stopper clutch sensor (12) detects the bypass stopper position, it controls the
bypass stopper cluth status ON or OFF.
D262 7-42 SM
Paper Feed and Exit
7.4.4 REMAINING PAPER DETECTION
No. Item
1 Roll paper feed motor
2 Roll feed clutch
3 Encoder sensor 1
4 Encoder sensor 2
5 Roll core Description

Detailed
The two encoders in the roll unit are part of the DSP (Digital Signal Processing) system used to
control machine operation.
 Encoder sensor 1 (3): Counts rotations of the roll paper feed motor. This pulse count is used
to measure the operation time of the roll paper feed motor.
 Encoder sensor 2 (4): Counts the rotations of the roll core which vary depending on how
much paper remains on the roll. (The number of rotations increases as the diameter of the
paper roll decreases) . This pulse count is used in a calculation to determine how much paper
remains on the roll.
SM 7-43 D262
Paper Feed and Exit
To tally a count for the operation time of the motor [A]:

 The roll paper feed motor (1) and encoder wheel 1 (2) rotate together.
 Encoder sensor 1 (3) counts the rotations of the encoder wheel.
 The encoder wheel and sensor always monitor the motor while it is operating.
To tally a count for the remaining paper calculation [B]:
 The core of the roll (4) and encoder wheel 2 (5) rotate together.
 Encoder sensor 2 (6) counts the rotations of the encoder wheel. The machine uses the pulse
count to calculate how much paper remains on a paper roll.
The encoder wheel and sensor count the rotations of the roll core when the machine feeds paper
out of the machine, and then reverse feeds the leading edge of the paper to the registration
standby position. This is done at the following times:
 When the roll is replaced or swapped for another roll.
 When the paper is fed back to the registration standby position after the paper is cut at the
end of a job.
 When the other paper roll is selected for paper feed. For example, if paper from Roll Unit 1 is
at the paper registration position, and Roll Unit 2 is selected.
The machine calculates the amount of paper remaining on a roll based on the diameter of the roll
and the number of rotations made by the core, and then displays the amount of paper remaining
as it diminishes.
 The encoder wheel and sensor, and a small PCB in the roll unit, comprise the device that
measures the amount of paper remaining on the roll.
 The residual paper detection encoder is a small wheel with 40 slits (spokes) around its center
capable of generating 503 pulses with one rotation.
5-
D262 7-44 SM
Paper Feed and Exit
Step Operation Panel Display
Panel Pulse Count Remaining % Roll Dia. (mm)

Display
1 < 130 50 to 100% 123 to 156*1
2 130 to 140 30 to 50% 110 to 123
3 140 to 165 10 to 30% 97 to 110
4 > 165 < 10% < 97
5 --- --- ---
*1 The range is wide here because the same "fuzzy logic" is applied to both 2-in. and
3-in. to compensate for the differences in diameters with these rolls.
 100 mm = 1 pulse count

 For a 2-in. roll the maximum (Normal paper 90 m 112 mm) the half count is at "3" above.
 Vertical Feed Amount Table (100 mm = 1 pulse count)
Description
Detailed
% Remaining Pulse Count Roll Dia. (mm)
100 Less than 98 173
90 99 to 107 161
80 108 to 116 149
70 117 to 127 137
60 128 to 141 125
50 142 to 158 113
SM 7-45 D262
Paper Feed and Exit
% Remaining Pulse Count Roll Dia. (mm)
40 159 to 179 101
30 180 to 207 89
20 208 to 245 77
10 More than 246 65
7.4.5 PAPER TRANSPORT FAN
General Operation
The transport fan below the perforated platen plates provides the suction to keep the leading edge
flat during paper registration and cutting, and also keeps the paper flat against the platen during
printing.
When paper is fed:

 The pre-registration sensor (1) detects the leading edge of the paper. This turns the transport
fan (2) ON.
 The paper passes the registration standby position (3) above the registration roller.
 When the DRESS sensor (4) detects the leading edge of the paper, the operation of the fan is
set to Duty 1 mode. This pulls the paper down onto the perforated platen plates and keeps
completely flat for cutting and printing.
 The fan remains on until the end of the job.
 The fan duty is adjusted for each phase of this operation as shown below.
D262 7-46 SM
Paper Feed and Exit
Transport Fan Duty Adjustment

The transport fan below the perforated platen plates provides enough suction to keep the leading
edge flat during paper registration and cutting, and also keeps the paper flat against the platen
during printing. The machine adjusts the duty of the transport fan automatically for the size and
type of paper selected for the job.
No. Item
2 Paper transport fan
3 Registration standby position
4 DRESS sensor
5 Cutter Description
Detailed
SM 7-47 D262
Paper Feed and Exit
When paper is fed:

 The pre-registration sensor (1) detects the leading edge of the paper and turns ON the fan
(2).
 The DRESS sensor (3) on the left side of the carriage goes ON when it detects the leading
edge of the paper and switches operation of the fan to Duty 1.
 The paper transport fan remains in the Duty 1 phase while the paper feeds 79 mm past the
registration standby position (4). This provides maximum suction to keep the leading edge of
the paper flat.
 When the leading edge of the paper exceeds 79 mm of feed, the motor enters the Duty 2
phase.
 When the paper reaches the cutting position, the fan enters the Duty 3 phase.
 When the cutter (5) reaches the left side of the machine after cutting the paper, the cutter
return switch turns ON, and the cutter motor reverses to return the cutter to its home position
on the right side of the machine.
 This switch detection of the cutter shifts the paper transport fan into Duty 2 phase again.
This shift in the operation of the paper transport motor Duty 1 > Duty 2 > Duty 3 and back to Duty
2 is the same for every size and type of paper. However:
 The level of the duty, that is, the amount of suction applied by varying the speed of the motor,
is different for each paper size (width) and paper type.
 As a general rule, Duty 1 is the highest setting to ensure that the leading edge of the paper
remains flat as it passes over the platen.
 The duty settings for thicker paper are much higher than those for thinner, lightweight paper.
 The duty settings are selected automatically as soon as paper size and type are selected for
the job.
The duty levels are set according to paper type, width and thickness for each type of paper:
 Normal, recycled paper
 Ink jet paper
 Translucent paper
 Coated paper
 Matte film
 Special paper
For example, note the differences in the duty levels for normal paper and translucent paper,
especially for wider paper.
D262 7-48 SM
Paper Feed and Exit
Normal Paper, Recycled Paper
Thin Duty[%]
Normal Duty[%]
Width: mm Duty 1 Duty 2 Duty 3
279.4 to 420 30 30 30
420 to 620 30 30 30
620 to 841 30 30 30
841 or wider 30 30 30
279.4 to 420 50 30 30
420 to 620 50 30 30
620 to 841 50 30 30
841 or wider 50 30 30
Description
Detailed
SM 7-49 D262
Paper Feed and Exit
Translucent Paper
Thin Duty[%]
Normal Duty[%]
279.4 to 420 40 30 30
420 to 620 40 30 30
620 to 841 40 30 30
841 or wider 40 30 30
279.4 to 420 40 30 30
420 to 620 40 30 30
620 to 841 40 30 30
841 or wider 40 30 30
The following SP codes can be used to adjust the operation of the paper transport fan by
changing the duty levels.
SP1-956-001.
 Use this SP to review the current duty settings.
SP1-955-001.
 Adjusts fan duty in the range of ±20% for all duty phases. The firmware checks the current fan
operation setting and then uses a lookup table to fetch the specified setting (the percentage to
be added to the current operation level).
 The optimum duty settings for each paper size and type are done at the factory before the
machine is shipped.
SP1-955-002 to 010
 Adjusts fan duty in the range of ±20% for the duty phases of different types of paper. The
firmware checks the current fan operation setting of the motor for the selected paper type,
and then uses a lookup table to fetch the specified setting (the percentage to be added to the
current operation level).
 It is important to remember that if an adjustment is done with this SP code for a particular
paper type, it will be added to any change previously specified with SP1-955-001.
D262 7-50 SM
Paper Feed and Exit
7.4.6 FRONT COVER SWITCHES
 The front cover (2) can be raised to remove paper jams and to load paper for bypass feeding.
 The right front cover switch (3) is push-switches that detect when the front cover is raised and
lowered.
 The guide pins on either end of the front cover are set in tracks which guide the cover into the
correct closed position. The front cover track switch (1) (a push-switch) has been added to
ensure that these guide pins are inserted correctly into the left and right track.
Description
Detailed
SM 7-51 D262
Paper Feed and Exit
7.4.7 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF PAPER FEED SEQUENCE
Paper Feed Layout
No. Item No. Item
1 Paper entrance sensor 8 Bypass sensor
2 Paper feed roller 9 Registration roller
3 Paper exit sensor 10 Registration standby position
4 Paper standby position (RU 1) 11 DRESS sensor
5 Paper standby position (RU 2) 12 Cutter
6 Pre-registration sensor 13 Exit sensor
7 Bypass stopper
D262 7-52 SM
Paper Feed and Exit
Operation Sequence When the First Roll is Set

Here is a detailed description of what happens when the first roll is loaded (Roll Unit 1).
1. The paper entrance sensor goes ON.
2. The roll paper feed clutch > ON delays 50 ms.
3. Roll paper feed motor > ON rotating forward at 100 mm/s.
4. Roll feeder paper exit sensor > ON, roll paper feed motor ON.
5. Paper feeds 65 mm > clutch OFF > roll paper feed motor Off
6. A prompt on the operation panel asks the operator to select cutting the leading edge of the
paper or not cutting the paper.
7. Roll feeder paper feed clutch > ON and delay: 50 ms.
8. Roll paper feed motor > ON and feeds paper toward the pre-registration sensor.
9. Pre-registration sensor > ON
10. Vertical motor > ON and feeds paper. The speed of the vertical motor is 3 mm/s faster than
the speed of the roll paper feed motor (80 mm/s + 3 mm/s).
11. Paper transport fan below the platen > ON.
12. The DRESS sensor on the left side of the carriage detects the leading edge of the paper and
switches the paper feed clutch OFF.
13. Both roll paper feed motor and vertical motor OFF.
14. Horizontal motor ON > carriage moves to the left and delays 1 sec.
15. roll paper feed motor > ON at 35 mm/s and vertical motor > ON forward at 100 mm/s
16. Paper feeds 60 mm > roll paper feed motor OFF > Vertical motor OFF.
Skew Correction
After the paper has arrived at the registration roller:
1. First, the machine does a pre-check. The DRESS sensor detects the right edge of the paper
to see if the paper edge is within ±10 mm of deviation from the right edge. (If the paper size is
greater than 304.8 mm (12"), the paper edge must be within ±6 mm).
If the amount of skew is not within range of pre-check: Description
Detailed
 The roll paper feed motor and vertical motor both reverse and the paper is rewound back
onto the paper roll.
 The leading edge of the paper must be fed manually from the roll unit and the sequence
is done again.
 The operator should check the roll to make sure that the clamps are locked and that the
roll is set correctly.
2. If the amount of skew is within range of pre-check, the horizontal motor ON > Carriage moves
to the leading edge detect position.
3. The roll paper feed motor and vertical motor turns ON again.
4. When the DRESS sensor detects the leading edge of the paper, it allows paper to feed 100
mm and turns the roll paper feed motor and vertical motors OFF.
5. The horizontal motor turns ON and moves the carriage to the left side of the machine.
SM 7-53 D262
Paper Feed and Exit
6. The roll paper feed motor and vertical motor both turn ON and feed the paper 60 mm.
7. Now, the roll paper feed motor reverses while the vertical motor continues to feed the paper
forward. This takes up any slack in the paper to correct skew, and then both motors turn OFF.
8. Paper transport fan remains ON.
9. The horizontal motor turns ON and moves the carriage to the right edge and stops > DRESS
sensor detects the right edge again.
10. If the amount of deviation is within ±5 mm, paper registration ends and the sequence
continues without interruption.
If the deviation is not within ±5 mm, the paper is released, the vertical motor and roll paper
feed motors reverse feed, and the paper rewinds onto the roll.
11. The paper feed sequence continues from Step 2 of above.
Paper Size Detection
1. The horizontal motor > ON and makes a complete pass from right to left, back to the right and
stops.
2. The DRESS sensor detects the left edge of the paper on the platen.
3. The machine records the readings of the horizontal encoder for the right and left edges of the
paper. This is done to confirm the paper size with the selection done with an external coin
operated device if one is attached.
Paper Fan Duty is Adjusted
1. The duty of the transport fan is automatically adjusted for the size of the paper and type of
paper selected for the print job.
2. The suction of this fan below the platen keeps the leading edge of the paper flat against the
platen during paper registration and prevents the paper from floating free during printing.
Paper Cutting
If the operator selected paper cutting, the cutter cuts the paper.
1. Horizontal motor ON > Carriage moves to left side of the machine and stops.
2. roll paper feed motor > ON at 35 mm/s and vertical motor> ON at 100 mm/s
3. Paper feeds 200 mm past cutter > roll paper feed motor > OFF > Vertical motor OFF.
4. Cutter starts the cut.
5. Cutter completes the cut when it reaches the left side of the machine.
6. Cutter return sensor turns ON > Cutter motor drives the cutter back to its home position on
the right.
7. roll paper feed motor > ON reverse feeds and stops.
8. Vertical motor > ON then stops when DRESS sensor detects the leading edge at the paper
registration position.
Operation Sequence When the Second Roll is Set

Here is a description of what happens when roll paper is already loaded and the leading edge of
the paper is at the registration standby position. This sequence is executed when:
D262 7-54 SM
Paper Feed and Exit
 Roll Unit 2 (optional roll unit) is installed.

 Both roll units are installed, but the paper for the roll unit selected for the job is not at the
registration standby position.
At the start of the job, the paper at the registration standby position must be retracted so that the
paper from the other roll can be fed for printing.
1. The roll paper feed motor of the roll with paper at the registration standby position > ON
reverses at 120 mm/s.
2. The vertical motor > ON reverses at 100 mm/s. (The difference in the motor speeds keeps
the paper taut).
3. The pre-registration sensor > OFF and starts a pulse count.
4. Once the paper has fed downstream back into the roll unit paper path, the pre-registration
sensor stops the reverse feed.
5. The roll unit clutch, roll paper feed motor, and paper release sensor go off and the paper
stops.
6. The paper is now at the paper feed standby position 51.5 mm downstream of the
pre-registration sensor, and the path is open for paper from the other roll to feed.
Description
Detailed
SM 7-55 D262
Paper Feed and Exit
7.4.8 CUTTING
At the end of the job the cutter unit cuts from right to left. The circular cutter leaves its home
position on the right, cuts the paper as it moves to the left, and then drops below the paper and
returns to its home position on the right.
1. At the end of the job, the cutter motor (1) switches on.
2. The timing belt pulls the cutter (2) to the left as its circular blade (3) cuts the paper in its path.
3. When the cutter reaches the cutter return switch (4) at the end of the cut, the cutter motor
reverses.
4. Immediately, the cutter drops into a lower race at (5). This lowers the cutter so it is below the
paper.
5. The motor and drive belt pull the cutter back to the right. When the cutter reaches the cutter
HP sensor (6), the sensor signals the machine to shut down the motor and the cutter stops at
its home position.
D262 7-56 SM
Paper Feed and Exit
Manual Cut
Manual Cut is to fed and discard paper that is damaged by moisture or paper jam.
Three different cut lengths can be selected.

 Short: 210 mm
 Normal: 450 mm
 Long: 650 mm
Description
Detailed
SM 7-57 D262
Paper Feed and Exit
7.4.9 BYPASS FEED
No. Item
1 DRESS sensor
2 Bypass sensor
3 Bypass stopper
4 Bypass standby position
5 Bypass stopper clutch
6 Bypass stopper clutch sensor
7 Sub scan motor
Here are the steps for loading paper in the bypass paper path:
1. When there is no paper in the paper path, the registration sensor detects OFF.
2. The operator puts the paper on the bypass tray. Insert the paper [B] as far as the stopper [A]
(registration sensor OFF, bypass sensor ON).
D262 7-58 SM
Paper Feed and Exit
3. The operator closes the front cover and enters the settings for the paper on the operation
panel. The paper transport fan turns ON and the preparation for paper feed is start.
4. The carriage unit moves to the paper detect position and the DRESS sensor detects the
paper. And then, the carriadge unit moves to the air purging position.
5. The bypass stopper clutch turns ON and the vertical motor rotates in the reverse direction to
the position where the bypass stopper clutch sensor detects ON.
6. The bypass stopper clutch is turned OFF.
7. Skew detection is performed.
8. Paper width detection is performed.
9. The carriage unit moves to the paper leading edge detect position.
10. The vertical motor rotates in reverse to the paper length detect position (DRESS sensor
OFF).
11. The carriage unit returns to the home position and the preparation for paper feed on the
bypass tray is finished.
Normally, the margin at the trailing edge is 18 mm, except when printing with color in the following
cases:
Media Print Mode
Special Standard
Description
Detailed
Special Quality
Matte Film Quality
Tracing Paper Quality
SM 7-59 D262
Paper Feed and Exit
7.4.10 RELATED SPS

 1-956-001 [Suction Fan Duty Correction - Suction Fan Duty DFU]:
This SP adjusts the amount of suction created in the Duty 2 phase of the transport fan
operation cycle. This setting applied to Duty 2 only for all jobs, regardless of paper type, width,
thickness, etc.
 1-955-001 [Suction Fan Duty Correction DFU]-[Suction Fan]:
Adjusts fan Duty in the range of ±20% for all Duty phases (1, 2, and 3). The firmware checks
the current fan operation setting and then uses a lookup table to fetch the specified setting
(the percentage to added to current operation level).
 1-955-002 [Suction Fan Duty Correction DFU]-[Normal Paper]:
Adjusts fan Duty in the range of ±20% for all Duty phases for Normal paper.
 1-955-003 [Suction Fan Duty Correction DFU]-[Recycled Paper]:
Adjusts fan Duty in the range of ±20% for all Duty phases for Recycled paper.
 1-955-004 [Suction Fan Duty Correction DFU]-[IJ Normal Paper]:
Adjusts fan Duty in the range of ±20% for all Duty phases for Ink Jet Normal paper.
 1-955-005 [Suction Fan Duty Correction DFU]-[Translucent]:
Adjusts fan Duty in the range of ±20% for all Duty phases for Translucent paper.
 1-955-006 [Suction Fan Duty Correction DFU]-[Mat Film]:
Adjusts fan Duty in the range of ±20% for all Duty phases for Matte Film.
 1-955-007 [Suction Fan Duty Correction DFU]-[Coated (CAD) Paper]:
Adjusts fan Duty in the range of ±20% for all Duty phases for Coated/CAD Paper.
 1-955-008 [Suction Fan Duty Correction DFU]-[Coated Paper]:
Adjusts fan Duty in the range of ±20% for all Duty phases for Coated Paper.
 1-955-010 [Suction Fan Duty Correction DFU]-[Special Paper]:
Adjusts fan Duty in the range of ±20% for all Duty phases for Coated Paper.
D262 7-60 SM
Ink Supply
7.5 INK SUPPLY
7.5.1 OVERVIEW
Description
Detailed
No. Item Qty
1 Air release solenoid 1
2 OCFS (On Carriage Fill Sensors) 7
3 Print head sub tanks 7
4 Main ink level sensor 1 1
5 Main ink level sensor 2 1
SM 7-61 D262
Ink Supply
No. Item Qty
6 Ink supply unit 1
7 Ink cartridges 4
8 Ink end sensors 1
9 Ink supply tubes 7*1
10 Ink pump cams 7
11 Ink pump motors 7
*1 There are four short ink supply tubes (one for each cartridge) between the ink cartridge port
and the pumps. The black tube splits into two supply tubes before the pumps, one for K1 and
one for K2, bringing the total of tubes to 5.
 The ink supply unit (6) houses the ink cartridges, the lower end of the ink supply tubes, and
the ink pumps.
 The ink supply unit holds four replaceable ink cartridges (7), one for each color (K, C, Y, M).
The black cartridge (K) is larger than the other three.
 The ink end sensor (8) detects when the cartridge is out of ink. This is a new component with
this machine.
 The ink supply tube (9) transports ink from the ink cartridges to the print head unit in the
carriage unit. The tube is flexible yet sturdy enough to prevent kinking and blocking the flow of
ink.
 The ink pump cam (10), driven by the ink pump motor (11), rotates against the ink supply tube
to force ink through the tube.
 The air release solenoid (1) provides pressure to push excess air out of the print head sub
tanks.
 The print head sub tanks (3) (1 for C and 2 each for black, M and Y) hold the ink supplied to
the print heads from the ink pumps of the ink supply unit.
 The OCFS (2) (one sensor and one feeler for each sub tank) is mounted in front of the
carriage unit. The sensor is above the actuator of the feeler attached to the side of the sub
tank. This feeler and actuator monitors the level of ink in each sub tank and triggers an alert
when ink runs low.
D262 7-62 SM
Ink Supply
7.5.2 INK CARTRIDGE
Ink inside each cartridge is enclosed in a airtight packet (1) that collapses as ink is drawn from the
cartridge. The unique combination of runners and tracks on the bottoms of the cartridges (2), and
slots in the ink supply unit, prevents any cartridge from being installed in the wrong position.
Each cartridge is provided with an ID chip (3). The machine monitors the ink levels (based on
counts of ink pump operation) and stores this information in ID chips of the ink cartridges.
Description
Detailed
This count data is used to create the graphic display on the operation panel that shows the
amount of ink consumed, as well as the amount of ink remaining.
At the 5th level (35 to 20%):
 When the ink level is between 35% and 20%, this signals pre-near end. The machine displays
a message that alerts the operator to prepare a new ink cartridge to replace the old one.
 When the ink level drops below 20%, this signals near-end. The machine displays a message
that alerts the operator that ink will run out soon.
 Finally, when the ink level drops to zero (the last level of the display), this triggers the ink out
alert. Printing stops and the empty ink cartridge must be replaced.
SM 7-63 D262
Ink Supply
 As soon as a cartridge runs out of ink, its "end history" is written onto the cartridge ID chip to
permanently disable the cartridge and prevent it from being re-used.
When an ink cartridge is inserted, the ID chip (1) contacts a CCB (Cartridge Control Board) (2) at
the back of the ink supply unit slot. When the ID chip and CCBmake contact, this tells the machine
that the cartridge is inserted correctly. Ink usage is based on pulse counts taken during operation
of the ink pump motors. The chip and CCB contact is also used to transfer the ink usage count
from the main machine to the memory map of the chip.
D262 7-64 SM
Ink Supply
7.5.3 INK SUPPLY MECHANISM
No. Item
1 Ink cartridge
2 Ink supply needle
3 Cylinder
Description
Detailed
4 Plunger
5 Ink pump motor
6 Actuator
7 Ink end sensor
 When the ink cartridge (1) inserted, the ink supply needle (2) is inserted and sealed into the
ink supply port.
 Ink flow flows through the cylinder (3) and over the plunger (4) as the ink pump motor (5)
pumps ink from the cartridge.
 While ink is flowing smoothly, the actuator (6) on the end of the plunger remains outside the
gap of the ink end sensor (7).
SM 7-65 D262
Ink Supply
 When the ink in a cartridge runs out, the ink pump motor continues to try to draw ink from the
ink port. But with no ink, this creates a negative pressure between the pump and the ink
cartridge.
 When the negative pressure (suction) becomes strong enough, it will pull the actuator on the
end of the plunger into the gap of the ink end sensor. This will signal that the ink cartridge has
run out of ink and trigger the ink end alert for the cartridge.
Here is a side view of the ink pump mechanism.
 The ink pump motor (1) drives the ink pump cam (2) counter-clockwise and compresses the
ink supply tube (3).
 The pressure on the tube (4) drives the ink bolus (5) ahead of the cam and creates enough
suction to pull ink through the tube behind the pressure point.
 This action of the cam alternately applying and releasing pressure against the side of the tube
drives the ink out of the pump and into the tube (6) to the carriage unit and print head sub tank
above.
D262 7-66 SM
Ink Supply
7.5.4 CONTROLLING INK SUPPLY TO THE SUB TANKS
The OCFS System

The OCFS (On Carriage Filler Sensor) system monitors the ink level of each ink sub tank in the
print heads. This is a new system that constantly monitors the level of ink during printing and then
signals for a re-fill whenever more ink is needed in one or more of the print heads.
 The main advantage of this system is that the sensors are inside the carriage and move with
the carriage unit. This ensures that the ink level in each tank is constantly monitored.
 Printing does not have to be interrupted to move the carriage to the right to check the ink
levels, as in previous ink jet models.
The OCFS system contains the following parts:

 An actuator arm [1] is attached to a hinge [2] at the rear.
Description
Detailed
 The center of the actuator is mounted on a weak spring [3] attached to the flexible side of the
ink sub tank.
 When the sub tank is full of ink, the actuator [4] on the end of the actuator arm points straight
to the front and remains in the gap of the OCFS [5].
 The air sensors [6] are a pair of vertical terminals attached to the top of the ink sub tank.
These sensors detect air in the tank.
SM 7-67 D262
Ink Supply
The OCFS actuator [1] on the top of the actuator arm is not symmetrical.
 The side of the actuator away from the tank has an extended wing [2] (shaded blue in the
drawing) attached to it.
Because this actuator is wider than a normal actuator, it takes longer for it to move from right to
left through and then out of the gap of the OCFS.
The sides of the sub tanks are flexible.

 The sides may bend out slightly when the tank is full [1], and then gradually collapse as ink is
drained from the tank [2] and [3].
 The actual level of the ink does not change at [2] and [3] even though there is less ink in the
tank.
 However, if air enters the tank [4], the air sensors at the top of the tank will be exposed and
detect air in the tank.
D262 7-68 SM
Ink Supply
Controlling Ink Supply During Printing
The illustration above shows how the actuator moves through gap of the OCFS (viewed from
bottom front)..
 As ink is consumed, the side of the tank collapses, and the OCFS actuator moves through the
OCFS sensor gap [1] > [2] > [3].
 When the actuator moves out of the gap at [4], the sensor turns off. This signals low ink.
When this occurs, the ink pump motor in the ink supply unit pumps ink to the tank until the
sensor returns to [5].
 The motor pumps a prescribed amount of ink (Wcc) determined by the machine’s software to
be enough to turn the sensor back on.
 After that, the machine continues to pump ink a very short time (tsec).
 This is the ink full position [6].
Air Detection and Air Purging

The air sensors on top of each ink sub tank check for the presence of air in the tanks. Air is purged
from the tank after it is detected, and then the sub tank is refilled with ink. The air purge, filling, and
full position ‘learning’ sequence is done when one of the following occurs:
 Air is detected in a tank. (The purging and filling is not done until the end of the job.)
 Before print head flushing
Description
Detailed
SM 7-69 D262
Ink Supply
Air Purge Mechanism
When an air sensor detects air in a sub tank, the air is not purged until the job ends. At the end of
the job:
 The machine moves the carriage unit to the right and stops when the tank to be purged is
aligned with the air release solenoid.
 The correct position to stop is detected by monitoring the horizontal encoder strip behind the
carriage unit.
 When the carriage unit has positioned the print head tank [1] behind the air release solenoid
[2], the solenoid switches on and pushes the plunger [3].
 The plunger pushes in the purge valve [4] and the excess air is purged from the sub tank.
 After the air has been purged, the ink supply motor turns on to supply more ink to replace the
purged air with ink.
 As more ink flows into the tank, the actuator moves in direction of the red arrow toward the full
position.
 After air has been purged, ink is pumped from the cartridge up to the sub tank, and then 0.6
cc of ink is pumped out by reversing the ink pump.
D262 7-70 SM
Ink Supply
After Air Purging
After every air purging:

1. The carriage moves to the main ink level sensors [1] and [2]..
2. The carriage stops when the lower actuator [3] on the OCFS sensor feeler enters the main ink
level sensor.
 Main ink level sensor 2 [1] detects the actuators of K2, C, Y, and M.
 Main ink level sensor 1 [2] detects the actuator of K1 only.
 Two main ink level sensors are required because the K1 print head is not level with the
other 4 print heads.
3. The machine records how far the carriage has moved along the horizontal encoder, and
stores this as the new "Tank Full Position".
4. At the end of a job, the machine moves the carriage to the main ink level sensor to compare
with the most recent Tank Full Position.
 This sequence is also done at cleaning and flushing.
 The carriage does not move to this sensor during printing. (Ink level during printing is
checked with the OCFS sensors.)
Description
Detailed
SM 7-71 D262
Ink Supply
7.5.5 EMERGENCY PRINT

When ink in a color cartridge runs out, only monochrome printing can be continued under certain
conditions.
 Even if only color ink runs out, monochrome printing cannot be continued under some
conditions. Printing volume cannot be guaranteed. Cartridge change is strongly
recommended.
Printable Conditions
 Only color ink runs out.
 During monochrome printing, ink used for air purging of an ink head for which ink has run out
remains in the head tank.
 The air-mixed flag is not set for the heads, including those with ink end.
Reason: If the air-mixed flag is set, ink volume in the head tank cannot be determined
correctly, in which case emergency stop of printing because ink consumption cannot be
performed.
 Ink cartridges are mounted at all ink-cartridge ports.
 The ink-cartridge cover is closed.
 Color ink end is not caused by maintenance operations.
Printing
The display shown below appears during copying/printing operation.
"The color ink ends. For color printing, change the cartridges.
Monochrome printing is temporarily enabled. If there is a print job being performed, reset it. Then
perform the monochrome printing."
 Monochrome printing can be continued by touching [Print].

 Color printing can be continued by resetting the current print job then starting
monochrome printing again.
D262 7-72 SM
Ink Supply
Conditions for Function End

If the conditions below are applied, the machine exit Emergency Print mode.
 When three days have passed after entering Emergency Print mode, (SP No.: SP2-802-003
to -007)
* When emergency printing ends and the ink-end display appears, reset the corresponding
SPs (SP2-802-003 to -007, SP2-80l-003 to -007).
 When the specified ink has been consumed with air purging for the color whose ink ends,
If the machine judges itself to be exited Emergency Print mode, the machine stops, Emergency
Print mode is canceled, and the ink-end display appears.
Printing cannot be performed until the empty ink cartridge is replaced.
Number of Printable sheets

 Room temperature and humidity: 34
[Standard], [temperature 25°C], [humidity 15%], [High-Speed mode], [A0 SEF]
 Low temperature and humidity: 6
[Standard], [temperature 10°C], [humidity 15%], [High-Speed mode], [A0 SEF]
 The above values vary according to printing conditions and head status. They are not
guaranteed.
Operation of Emergency Print

If the message "Color ink has run out" is displayed, emergency print is enabled. Follow the
procedure below.
For continuing the current black and white print job
1. When the message is displayed, touch [Print].
2. Wait for a while, and the current black and white print job will start. Description
Detailed
For interrupting the current black and white print job

1. When the message is displayed, touch [Delete] and the [Ready] screen is retrieved.
2. A new black and white print job will be enabled but the color print job will be disabled.
For canceling the current color print job
1. On the [Replace Print Cartridge] screen, select [Exit].
2. The normal screen is retrieved. Touch [Check Status] at the lower left.
3. Select the [Current Job] tab and touch [Cancel Reservation]
4. On the confirmation screen, touch [Delete] to cancel the current job.
5. On the home screen, select the copy application and the [Replace Print Cartridge] screen
is displayed again. Touch [Exit].
6. A printable screen is displayed. A new black and white print job will be enabled but the
color print job will be disabled.
SM 7-73 D262
Printing
7.6 PRINTING
7.6.1 PRINTING DRIVE MECHANISM
No. Item
1 Horizontal motor
2 Drive belt
3 Carriage unit
4 Horizontal encoder sensor
5 Horizontal encoder strip
6 LED indicator
7 DRESS sensor
 The horizontal motor (1), the large motor on the back of the left side of the machine, drives
the belt (2) attached to the back of the carriage unit (3). This mechanism moves the carriage
unit left and right when the motor alternately rotates forward/reverse.
 The horizontal encoder sensor (4) brackets the top edge of the horizontal encoder strip (5),
which stretches behind the drive belt and across the platen. The sensor reads the timing
notches from the strip as the carriage is driven left and right by the horizontal motor. This
controls the operation of the motor and movement of the carriage unit during printing and
D262 7-74 SM
Printing
other operations, such as paper registration and image registration.

 LED (6) lights during operation to prevent users from opening the front cover by mistake.
 The DRESS sensor (7) performs paper registration and image registration while the carriage
unit is moving during paper feed.
7.6.2 CARRIAGE UNIT
No. Item No. Item
1 Horizontal motor 15 Print head (Y2M2)
2 Drive belt 16 HT6 (Head Tank M2)
3 Head lift sensors 17 Print head (C)
4 COM 18 HT5 (Head Tank C)

Description
Detailed
5 Print head thermistors 19 HT4 (Head Tank M1)
6 HRB (Head Relay Board) 20 Print head (Y1M1)
7 Carriage unit 21 HT3 (Head Tank Y1)
8 Horizontal encoder sensor 22 Print head (K2)
9 Horizontal encoder strip 23 HT2 (Head Tank K2)
10 Head lift motor 24 Print head (K1)
11 Temperature/humidity sensor 25 HT1 (Head Tank K1)
12 Ink level sensor 1 26 DRESS sensor
SM 7-75 D262
Printing
No. Item No. Item
13 Ink level sensor 2 27 Guide rod
14 HT7 (Head Tank Y2)
 During printing, the horizontal motor (1) and drive belt (2) drive the carriage unit (7) to the left
and right on its guide rod (27) above the paper on the platen.
 The HRB (6) behind the print head units relays signals to the control board from the horizontal
encoder sensor, DRESS sensor, color print heads and thermistors.
 The COM board (4) relays signals between the main machine and the K1 print head unit.
 The horizontal encoder sensor (8) on the carriage unit brackets the horizontal strip (8) and
reads the codes on the top edge of the strip. This controls the operation of the horizontal
motor and movement of the carriage unit.
 The thermistors (5) measure the temperature of the black (K1, K2) and color print heads (C,
YM). These temperature readings are used to adjust the voltage applied to the piezoelectric
elements above the nozzles that release ink during printing.
 There is one piezoelectric element for each print head: K1 (25), K2 (23), Y1M1(20), C (17),
and Y2M2 (15). An electric charge applied to the element makes it expand and discharge ink
through the print head nozzles and onto the paper below.
 At the beginning of a print job, the carriage moves left then back to the right, so that the
DRESS sensor (26) on the side of the carriage can detect the side edges of the paper below.
Based on these readings, the machine determines the image print start position.
 Ink level sensor 1 (13) checks the position of the feeler mounted on the side of the K1 ink sub
tank. Ink level sensor 2 (12) measures the positions of the feelers on the sides of the K2, C, Y,
and M sub tanks. The position of the feelers is used to determine how much ink needs to be
D262 7-76 SM
Printing
supplied. While ink level sensor 1 services only the K1 print head unit, and ink level sensor 2
services the other four sub tanks.
 The temperature/humidity sensor (11) constantly measures the temperature and humidity
inside the machine, and then uses these readings to adjust operation of the machine.
 The head lift motor (10) can raise the carriage unit (1 mm or 2 mm) to increase the gap
between the print heads and thick paper to prevent ink abrasion. Two head lift sensors (3)
control the raising and lowering of the carriage with the head lift motor.
The K1 print head sits forward of the K2 print head in the direction of paper feed. This allows a
greater band of coverage during black-and-white printing. Three nozzles at the rear section of K1
and three nozzles at the front section of K2 overlap the same area on the paper. However,
the arrangement of the nozzle ports is staggered so positions of the nozzle ports complement
one another when ink is put down on the paper. Description
Detailed
SM 7-77 D262
Printing
7.6.3 PRINT HEAD UNIT
No. Item Qty
1 Air sensors pairs 7
2 Head thermistor (Black) 1
3 Head thermistor (Color) 1
4 Purge valves 7
5 Ink sub tanks (K1, K2, Y1, M1, C, Y2, M2) 7
6 Ink sub tank feelers 7
7 Filter units 7
8 Print head units (K1, K2, Y1M1, C, Y2M2) 5
9 Print heads 5
D262 7-78 SM
Printing
The illustration above shows carriage unit cradles. The left cradle holds the black print head units
(K1, K2) and the right cradle holds the color print heads units (Y1M1, C, Y2M2).
 The black thermistor (2) monitors the head around the black print head units, and the color
thermistor(3) measures the heat around the color print head units.
 A pair of air sensor terminals (1) is attached to the top of each sub tank.
 The purge valves (4) allow air to escape from the ink sub tank if an air sensor detects too
much air in the tank. The valve is operated by a plunger and air release solenoid (not shown).
 The ink sub tanks (5) hold the ink pumped from the ink cartridges by the ink supply unit.
 One ink sub tank feeler (6) is attached to the side of each ink sub tank. The OCFS (On
Carriage Fill Sensors) and the stationary main ink level sensors on the right side of the
machine check the positions of these feelers to determine the level of ink in the sub tanks.
The OCFS actuators are attached to the right sides of the K1, K2, and C tanks, but the OCFS
actuators are attached to both sides of the Y1M1 and M2Y2 tanks.
 A filter unit (7) is set on top of every print head unit (8) as an extra precaution to keep the ink
free of dirt, paper dust.
 The print heads (9) eject the ink onto the paper.
Description
Detailed
SM 7-79 D262
Printing
7.6.4 PRINT HEAD
No. Item
1 Print head
2 Piezoelectric element
3 Vibration plate
4 Flow plate
5 Nozzle array plate
Each print head (1) is comprised of the above parts.

 When a small electric charge is applied to the piezoelectric element (2), this causes it to
expand and expel ink under pressure.
 The vibration plate (3) and flow plate (4) apply the ink evenly to the back of the nozzle array
plate (5).
 The ink flows evenly through the ports of the nozzle array plate.
D262 7-80 SM
Printing
7.6.5 DRESS SENSOR
The DRESS (Direct Realization Edge Scanning Sensor) sensor is mounted on the left side of the
carriage unit (shown above on the left cover with the carriage unit removed).
The sensor contains an LED (1) and a receptor (2). The sensor detects the edges of the paper
when it detects the change in reflectivity between the paper and platen at the edges.
Description
Detailed
The DRESS sensor performs these functions:
 Paper width detection: The sensor checks the right and left edges of the paper on the platen
to determine the size of the paper.
 Image registration: Detects the leading edge, right edge, and left edge of the paper so the
machine can position the image on the paper.
 Skew correction: Checks and corrects skew at the right edge of the paper. If the edge is
skewed more than ±10 mm, the machine rewinds the paper onto the roll.
 Dot position correction (color registration): The carriage moves across the paper during
printing, so the ink drops cannot fall vertically. The readings of the DRESS sensor are used to
adjust the timing of the piezoelectric elements in the print heads that release the ink. Timing is
adjusted for the height of the carriage (and print heads), paper thickness, speed of the
carriage, and print mode (uni-directional or bi-directional).
SM 7-81 D262
Printing
1. When a job starts, the horizontal motor switches on and moves the carriage (1) across the
paper so that the DRESS sensor (2) can detect the right and left edges of the paper.
2. The DRESS sensor (1) (functioning here as an image registration sensor) is comprised of a
sensor with an LED (2) and a receptor (3).
 The strength of the reflection of the light from the paper vary depending on the texture of
the paper.
 Printing problems can occur if the same threshold value of reflectivity is used for every
type of paper.
 For this reason, different threshold values of reflectivity are assigned for different types of
paper to compensate for any difference in the reflectivity of their surfaces.
The readings of the DRESS sensor for the left and right margins are used to determine the
horizontal placement of the image on paper. This can be adjusted with SP1-002 (Print Position
Adjustment). This adjustment determines where the moving carriage starts and ends printing with
every horizontal pass across the paper.
 A larger setting moves the image to create a wider left margin.
 A smaller setting moves the image to the create narrow left margin.
D262 7-82 SM
Printing
Image position adjustment in the main scan (horizontal) direction
Margin (white space)
7.6.6 TEMPERATURE MONITORING
Description
Detailed
Print Head Thermistors

There are two thermistors [1]. One thermistor is for black ink (K1, K2) and one thermistor is for
color ink (C, YM). These thermistors measure the temperature around the print head units inside
the carriage. The machine uses this information to adjust the flow of ink from the print heads.
Monitoring the temperature near the print heads is critical because the temperature can affect the
viscosity of the ink at the ink nozzles.
 At low temperatures, the viscosity of the ink becomes high and can slow ink flow.
 At high temperatures, the viscosity of the ink becomes low and can cause ink to spill and run.
SM 7-83 D262
Printing
 The adjustment is done by changing the duty (strength of electrical charge) used to activate
the piezoelectric elements that project ink through the ink nozzles of the print heads. (The
amount of ink ejected will vary directly with the amount of charge applied to the piezoelectric
element.)
Temperature/Humidity Sensor
The temperature/humidity sensor [2] is mounted on the right side of the machine above the ink
supply unit. The machine uses the readings of the temperature/humidity sensor to set the duty for
operation of the ink cartridge pump motors.
 Ink is pumped to the sub tanks in very small increments, and the operation of the ink pumps
must be regulated to assure that the ink supply is constant.
 Adjustments must be made to compensate for the expansion and contraction of the ink tubes
and other parts of the ink supply system caused by fluctuation in temperature.
The readings of the K2 print head thermistor and the temperature/humidity sensor are used
together to calculate the operating temperature of the machine.
 If the machine overheats and the operating temperature exceeds the maximum temperature,
the machine will shut down automatically and will not restart until it has cooled and been
cycled off/on. The machine must be cycled off/on, even after it has cooled down to the
operational range.
 If the temperature is too low at a cold start in the morning, for example, the machine will not
start the initial cleaning cycle unit the machine has warmed up. In this case, the machine
does not require cycling off/on. The initial cleaning will start as soon as the machine has
warmed up, and then the machine is ready for operation.
D262 7-84 SM
Printing
7.6.7 PRINT HEAD HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT

The gap between the print heads and the platen can be adjusted to accommodate thick paper.
Raising the print heads and widening the gap between the print heads and the paper prevents the
print heads from abrading the paper during printing.
Height Adjustment Mechanism
No. Item
1 Head lift motor Description

Detailed
2 Cam
3 Carriage unit
4 Head lift sensor
 When the operator selects the setting to change the height of the carriage, the carriage
moves to the right, so that the coupling on the end of the shaft can engage the head lift motor
(1).
 The head lift motor rotates the cam (2) and raises the carriage unit (3) with the cam pressing
against the bottom of the carriage.
 Head limit sensor (4) detects the actuator when the carriage is lifted to its setting point and
stops the motor.
SM 7-85 D262
Printing
 When the carriage unit is raised to the selected height, the cam locks in place and the
carriage unit disengages from the head lift motor.
Raising and Lowering the Print Heads

The carriage unit and print heads can be raised to two high positions (1 mm, 2 mm) to eliminate
smearing caused by the print heads rubbing across the surface of thick paper.
 The Prevent Paper Abrasion setting must be done with the User Tools menu before
starting the print job.
1. Touch User Tools icon on the machine operation panel.
2. Touch [System Settings], touch [Next], and then touch [Prevent Paper Abrasion].
3. The first selection is for a bypass print job. The second and third selections are for Roll Feed
1 and Roll Feed 2, respectively.
4. Three selections are available for each feed location: Off (standard), Strong, and Weak.
1: Head Lift Sensor, 2: Actuator, 3: Head Lift Cam
Rotate Rotate CCW

User Rotate CW
Height Sensor CCW (7 (0.5 sec)
Tool (0.15 sec)
sec)
[A] Off Default ON to OFF No Yes Yes
[B] Strong 2 mm OFF to ON No Yes Yes
[C] Weak 1 mm OFF to ON Yes No Yes
D262 7-86 SM
Printing
7.6.8 MAINTENANCE UNIT
Overview
The maintenance unit performs these important functions:
 Raises the print head caps to cap the print heads, to prevent them from drying out while the
machine is idle.
 Lowers the print heads at the start of a job, to uncap the print heads.
 Cleans the print heads when required.
No. Item
1 Carriage unit
2 Maintenance unit
3 Print head cap (K1)/Suction cap
4 Slide sensor
Description
Detailed
5 Maintenance motor
6 Suction pump
7 Suction cap actuator
8 Suction cap sensor
9 Color print head caps (K2, Y1M1, C, Y2M2)
10 Lift lever (K2, Y1M1, C, Y2M2)
11 Carriage stopper
12 Lift sensor
SM 7-87 D262
Printing
No. Item
13 Lift sensor actuator
14 Lift motor
15 Cap pads (K2, C, YM)
Capping/Uncapping
The K1 print head and the K2, C, YM print heads are uncapped and capped at the same time.
K1 Print Head Uncapping/Capping
The maintenance motor uncaps and caps the K1 print head.

 While the machine is idle, the K1 print head (1) on the bottom of the carriage unit is capped
and sealed by the suction cap (2) to prevent it from drying out.
 At the start of the next job, the maintenance motor (3) rotates forward and lowers the suction
cap to uncap the K1 print head.
 At the end of the job, the carriage unit moves to the right and positions itself over the
maintenance unit.
 The maintenance motor rotates forward again and raises the suction cap to cap the K1 print
head.
 The rotating suction cap actuator (4) (mounted on a shaft with a lift cam driven by the
maintenance motor) and suction cap sensor (5) control the raising and lowering of the suction
cap.
D262 7-88 SM
Printing
K2, Y1M1, C, Y2M2 Print Head Uncapping/Capping
 While the machine is idle, the K2, Y1M1, C, and Y2M2 print heads (1) on the bottom of the
carriage unit are capped and sealed by the print head caps (2).
 At the start of the next print job, the lift motor (3) rotates forward and lowers the K2, Y1M1, C,
and Y2M2 caps to uncap the K2, Y1M1, C, Y2M2 print heads.
 The rotating lift actuator (4) (mounted on a shaft with a cam driven by the lift motor) and lift
sensor (5) control the lowering of the four print caps.
 The caps rest on the absorbent cap pads (6) while they are down.
Description
Detailed
 At the end of a print job, the carriage unit moves to the right and positions itself over the
maintenance unit.
 The carriage stopper (1) positions the carriage unit so that the caps and print heads are
aligned.
SM 7-89 D262
Printing
 The maintenance lift motor (2), rotating forward, raises the K2, C, Y,M print head caps (not
shown) on the lift lever (3) and covers the print heads to prevent them from drying out.
 The rotating lift actuator (4) (mounted on a shaft with a lift cam driven by the lift motor) and lift
sensor (5) control the raising of the caps.
Print Head Cleaning Cycle

The four steps of the cleaning cycle are done for each print head that requires cleaning.
Step 1: Sliding the Cleaning Unit to the Rear
This step moves the cleaning unit from [A] to [B] in order to clean the K2, C, and YM print heads.
 This step is done for cleaning the K2, C, and YM print heads in order to position the suction
cap (print head cap for K1) correctly.
 If only the K1 print head is to be cleaned, the cleaning unit is positioned to start cleaning
immediately with the suction cap forward at [A].
 At the start of the cleaning cycle, the carriage unit (1) positions itself over the maintenance
unit (2).
 The lift motor (3) rotates in reverse and drives the gear train (4).
 The gears rotate a shaft with a large cam (5) between two swinging plates attached to the
slide arm (6) linked to the cleaning unit (7)
D262 7-90 SM
Printing
 When the cam pushes the front plate forward, the slide arm and cleaning unit move to the
rear.
 When the slide actuator (8) (attached to the same shaft driven by the lift motor) activates the
slide sensor (9), the lift motor switches off with the cleaning unit at the rear.
Step 2: Raising the Suction Cap
 The carriage moves to the left and stops, with the print head (1) to be cleaned directly above
the suction cap (2).
 The maintenance motor (3) rotates forward and raises the suction cap.
 The suction cap actuator (4) (attached to the shaft with the cam driven by the maintenance
motor to raise the suction cap) and suction cap sensor (5) signal the machine to turn off the
motor when the cap is up and sealed on the print head.
Step 3: Suction
Description
Detailed
SM 7-91 D262
Printing
 The maintenance motor (1) reverses and rotates the cam inside the suction pump (2).
 The rotation of the cam alternately squeezes and releases the suction tube (3) to create
enough pressure to draw ink from the surface of the print head (4).
 The ink is drawn through the tube which exits at the back of the maintenance unit (5) and
continues down to the ink collector tank below the maintenance unit on the right side of the
machine.
 The suction cap lowers away from the print head after suctioning ink for the prescribed time.
Step 4: Scraping and Wiping
 The maintenance motor continues to rotate after lowering the suction cap, and drives the cam
and linkages that complete the cleaning cycle at this step.
 The rubber scraper [1] is raised to the surface of the print head.
 The knock lever [2] taps the edge of the scraper to scrape ink from the print head. The ink
falls into a vent [3] which opens over the right ink sump below the maintenance unit.
 Next, the linkage cocks the spring loaded wipers [4] to the rear, and then releases them so
that they spring forward and flick any remaining ink into the vent. This is done twice.
This completes the cleaning cycle.
Manual Print Head Cleaning and Flushing

The operator can use the User Tools to clean and flush the print heads whenever a problem with
printing occurs.
 Every execution of print head cleaning and flushing is recorded in NVRAM by a counter (0 to
999999).
 This is done so that the service technician can keep track of how many times the operator is
cleaning and flushing the print heads with SP7-212 (User Cleaning) and SP7-213 (User
D262 7-92 SM
Printing
Refreshing).
 Humidity can affect the number of times the print heads require cleaning and refreshing.
 For more details about manual print head cleaning and refreshing, refer to Print Head
Cleaning and Adjustment (p.7-108).
Automatic Downtime Cleaning

Ink can thicken or dry around the nozzles if the print heads remains idle for a long time, especially
at low temperatures. This can affect the quality of printing. To prevent the drying or thickening of
ink around the nozzles, the machine will execute a maintenance cleaning cycle appropriate for the
length of time that the print heads have remained idle. This is done automatically without
intervention by the operator.
The machine monitors two phases of downtime.
 Idle time 1: Starts after the last sheet exits and all the print heads are capped
 Idle time 2: Amount of time each head has remained idle
 Idle (or downtime) refers to the length of time that a print head has not been used. For
example, If the machine is used for extensive black-and-white copying and printing over
a period of several days, a count of idle time for the color print heads (C, YM) is
maintained even though the machine has not been turned off.
These idle time counts are used to execute these operations:
 Air purging (ink supply and purging, filling and cleaning, and air purging/filling together)
 Ink supply sequence
 Cleanings and flushing (refreshing) done by the operator manually
 Ink purging done after idle time
The type of maintenance operation is selected and executed automatically based on the time
elapsed from the start of downtime.
Maintenance Cycles Based on Idle Time Description
Detailed
No. Downtime Try to If air is detected for a If no air detected

1
Detect print head*
Air?
1 < 10 h No --- ---
2 > 10 and < 24 h Yes Ink supply, air purge/ink Small downtime ink
fill sequence purge
3 > 24 h and < 3 Yes Ink supply, air purge/ink Large downtime ink
days fill sequence purge
SM 7-93 D262
Printing
No. Downtime Try to If air is detected for a If no air detected

1
Detect print head*
Air?
4 > 3 days, < 7 Yes Ink supply, air purge/ink Large downtime ink
days fill sequence purge 3 times
5 > 7 days and < Yes Ink supply, air purge/ink Downtime cleaning
45 days fill sequence >
Downtime cleaning
6 > 45 days Yes Ink supply, air purge/ink Ink fill sequence >
fill sequence > Downtime cleaning
Downtime cleaning
*1 The cycle is executed for the affected print head unit only.
The maintenance cycle could be brief or require several minutes to complete depending on
ambient conditions and how long the print heads have remained idle.
Approximate Times Required for Cleaning
No. Downtime Approximate Time
1 < 10 h 16 sec.
2 > 10 and < 24 h 9 sec.*1
3 > 24 h and < 3 days 3 min.
4 > 3 days, < 7 days 3 min. or more
5 > 7 days and < 45 days 30 min.
6 > 45 days More than 30 min.
*1 9 sec. at power on, at job start possibly up to 16 sec.
The following SP codes can be used to modify automatic cleaning after downtime:
 SP2-513 Maintenance After Leftover Threshold
 SP2-514 Auto Cleaning Start Threshold
 SP2-521-001 to -003 Maintenance After Leftover Repeat
 SP2-517 Maintenance After Leftover Information
 SP2-520 Maintenance After Leftover Setting On/Off Switch
D262 7-94 SM
Printing
Automatic Mist Cleaning

The condition of the print head nozzles can deteriorate over time due to ink that starts to cling to
the nozzles and accumulates inside the suction cap and the three protective caps of the
maintenance unit. Paper dust can also accumulate and interfere with the operation of the nozzles.
The illustration above shows droplets of mist and paper fibers and dust that can collect
near the nozzles. This undesirable condition is corrected with periodic automatic cleanings while
the printer is in use, greatly extending the length of time the machine can be used without
operator intervention.
 Mist count. A "mist count" triggers automatic cleaning. This mist count can be extended to
increase the timing between automatic cleanings. The mist count, which determines the
intervals between automatic cleanings, has been doubled for this machine.
 Count adjustment. The count is automatically adjusted for the width of the paper and total
print area.
 Paper dust count. The paper dust count (the total number of pages printed, cutting count) is
used to determine when cleaning is done for paper dust.
Description
Detailed
SM 7-95 D262
Printing
7.6.9 AUTO-NOZZLE CHECK MODULE
Overview
The auto-nozzle check function detects whether the nozzle drops ink correctly. It checks the
change in electrical charge caused by the ink dropped to the electrode plate at constant intervals.
If ink is not dropped well but the effect is not so serious, the adjacent nozzles drop larger dots for
printing to minimize the effect. If the effect is serious, the print head is cleaned automatically.
The part on which the electrode plate and slider are placed is called the holder. It is made of
plastic to maintain high voltage of the electrode and insulation properties of GND.
Name Function
Electrode plate for Placed facing the nozzle and charged to 500 V when
detection detecting.
Wiper Wipes ink from the electrode with the slider after ink drop
detection process.
Slider A wiper is attached. It wipes the electrode by moving back

and forth, driven by the timing belt beneath the holder.
Wiper cleaner Scrapes ink off the wiper with the cutout when the wiper
returns to its home position after wiping.
Ink collector tank Collects the ink scraped with the wiper cleaner
Wiper drive motor Moves the slider back and forth with a timing belt.
Wiper position sensor Detects when the slider reaches the front end. After ink drop
(backward) detection process, the motor rotates in reverse to perform
wiping.
Wipe position sensor Detects the home position of the slider.

(home position)
Auto-nozzle check board Supplies high voltage to the electrode and detects the
change in electrical charge.
D262 7-96 SM
Printing
Timing for Detection

The frequency of Auto-Nozzle Check can be set in the initial settings. The period required for one
check is 25 seconds (no ink deficiency for five heads).
 Standard (default): For every maintenance cycle (automatic and manual) and before printing
after 10 hours have passed after detecting ink deficiency in the previous purging detection.
 Frequent: Before printing or for automatic cleaning between pages.
 OFF: No nozzle check (the same conditions as MP CW2200)
Auto-Nozzle Check does not function at 9°C or lower or 36°C or higher, because such
environments affect detection accuracy.
Detection
The print head performs air purging before printing, moves over the electrode plate charged at
500 V, and starts dropping ink. Dropping of the negatively-charged ink onto the electrode plate
causes variation in the charge of the electrode plate. The auto-nozzle check board detects this
charge variance and judges whether to drop ink or not.
Each print head has 192 nozzles. Each nozzle drops ink and checked one by one. They do not
drop ink all at once.
For example, the 1st nozzle drops ink and is checked, then the 2nd nozzle drops ink and is
checked, then the 3rd nozzle and soon until the 192nd nozzle.
After dropping ink from all nozzle, the carriage moves outside the area, where wiping is inhibited
and the electrode plate is wiped.
Detection Image
Description
Detailed
SM 7-97 D262
Printing
Electrode Plate
Wiping an Electrode Plate

The slider moves back and forth driven by the timing belt, which is driven by a wheel rotated by
the wiper drive motor.
The timing for stopping the slider is determined with the front and back through sensors.
The sensor to stop backward wiping motion is "Wiper position detection [A] (home position)", and
the sensor to stop forward wiping motion is "Wiper position detection [B] (backward)".
D262 7-98 SM
Printing
When moving backward from the home position ( in the picture below), the slider moves from
the back to the front side of the machine, with the wiper maintaining the upper position (retracted
position).
The wiper descends around the backward slope at the end of this motion (starting point for the
reverse motion).
Description
Detailed
For reverse motion ( in the picture above), the motor rotates in the opposite direction to wipe
from the front side to the back side of the machine, with the wiper ([A] in the picture below)
maintaining the lower position (sweeping position).
SM 7-99 D262
Printing
The wiper cleans the electrode plate, then the wiper cleaner cleans the wiper to remove the
attached ink.
Around the slope at the back at the end of this motion (home position), the wiper ascends again.
The wiper drive motor is driven with 24 V. When positive voltage is applied to the motor, the output
axis of the motor rotates counterclockwise and the slider moves from the home position to the
back.
When Ink Deficiency is Detected

If ink deficiency is not so serious, printing continues by compensating with the adjacent nozzles. If
ink deficiency is serious, automatic cleaning is performed.
Type of move Purging detection Move

results
Nozzle Ink deficiency (not If ink deficiency is detected but can be covered
interpolating serious) with nozzle compensation printing, printing will
mode continue in Nozzle Compensating mode.
Recovery Ink deficiency If ink deficiency cannot be covered by nozzle

cleaning (serious) compensation, clean the head and performe
the auto-nozzle check. If the nozzle regains
functionality for normal printing mode or nozzle
compensating mode, the nozzle is treated as
functional. If the nozzle does not regain, nozzle
compensation will not be done.
D262 7-100 SM
Printing
Not serious
The adjacent picture elements are dropped with larger dots to compensate for the dropping
no ink nozzles.
Serious
If nozzle compensation cannot solve the problem, the print head is cleaned automatically.
Operating Life
After 60,606 cleanings (equivalent to 30,000 m), it it recommended to replace the wiper blades.
Replace the holder.
Description
Detailed
SM 7-101 D262
Printing
7.6.10 WASTE INK COLLECTION
No. Item
1 Maintenance unit
2 Ink collector tank
3 Ink collector tank chip
4 Right ink sump
5 Auto-nozzle check unit
6 Left ink sump
 The machine executes the print head cleaning cycle with the carriage unit positioned over the
maintenance unit (1).
 The ink collector tank (2) collects the ink drawn from the print heads by the suction pump
inside the maintenance unit during the print head cleaning cycle.
 The ink collector chip (3) detects when the ink collector tank is installed correctly. It will signal
an error if the tank is not installed or not set correctly. Printing cannot be done unless the tank
is set correctly. This sensor also detects when the ink collector tank is full.
 The right sump (4) resides behind the ink collector tank and directly below the maintenance
cleaning unit. This is an open sump that collects the ink that is wiped and scraped from the
print heads at the end of the cleaning cycle.
 During printing, the machine occasionally flushes ink through the print head nozzles (with a
very small amount of ink) which falls into the left ink sump (6). This keeps the nozzles primed
and in good working condition. This operation is controlled by the machine firmware and is
not part of the print head cleaning cycle.
D262 7-102 SM
Printing
Ink Collector Tank
The ink collector tank collects ink during print head

cleaning. Ink is drawn from the surface of the print
head [1] into the suction cap [2]. The suction pump [3]
pumps the waste ink directly out the back of the
maintenance unit to the ink collector tank [4].
The ink collector tank must be replaced when it
becomes full.
 The ink collector tank has an ID chip that confirms
when the tank was installed, and that it is the
correct type of tank for the machine.
 The machine cannot operate if the tank is not
installed correctly.
 Alert inform the operator when the tank is near-full
and then full. These alerts are triggered by the
information stored in the ID chip of the tank.
 A software count totals the usage of the tank in the
number of times the maintenance unit sucks ink
from the print heads during the head maintenance
cycle. The count is stored in the ID chip of the ink
collector tank.
 The near full alert is triggered at 361 ml and the tank full alert is triggered at 425 ml.
 The ink collector tank must be replaced; it cannot be emptied and reused. After a tank
becomes full, an "end history" setting is written into the ID chip to prevent the tank from being
used again.
Description
Detailed
The tank near full and full thresholds that trigger the near-full and full alerts can be adjusted with
SP2-507-001, 002.
 Tank near full: A prompt appears on the operation panel of the machine, and the machine will
continue to operate.
 Tank full: A prompt appears on the operation panel of the machine. If a page is being printed,
the job will finish, and then the machine will shut down and cannot be used until after the tank
has been replaced.
 Adjusting SP2-507-001 and 002 is not recommended.
SM 7-103 D262
Printing
Right Ink Sump
The ink scraped and wiped from the print head [1] by the scraper and wipers [2] flows through a
vent [3] through the open top of the right ink sump [4].
A software count triggers a prompt to tell the operator when this tank is near-full and then finally
full and in need of replacement. The count is done by counting the usage of the wiper mechanism
in the maintenance unit. The two strokes of the wiper removes ink from the cleaning plate and
drops the ink down into the sump below. The wiper operation count is stored in NVRAM. The right
ink sump has no ID chip.
The tank is near full at 125 ml and full at 147 ml. The estimated period of time between
replacements is about 5 years.
Prompts
 Tank near full. A prompt appears on the operation panel of the machine, and the machine will
 Tank full. A prompt appears on the operation panel of the machine. If a page is being printed,
the print will finish, and then the machine will shut down and cannot be used until after the
tank has been replaced with a new tank and the counter has been reset to "0" with an
SP2-505-002.
D262 7-104 SM
Printing
Left Ink Sump

Occasionally, a printing job will pause long enough for the carriage to move to the left and drain
ink over the left ink sump on the left side of the machine.
A software count triggers a prompt to tell the operator when this tank is near-full and then finally
full and in need of replacement. The left ink sump has no ID chip.
 Near full: 425 ml
 Tank full: 500 ml
Estimated time between replacements: about 5 years
Prompts
 Tank near full. A prompt appears on the operation panel of the machine, and the machine will
 Tank full. A prompt appears on the operation panel of the machine. If a page is being printed,
the job will finish, and then the machine will shut down and cannot be used until after the tank
has been replaced.
The count must be reset with SP2-505-001 after the left ink sump has been replaced. There is no
sensor to detect when the left ink sump is removed and inserted.
The machine refers to a lookup table to determine how to execute draining. The draining intervals
and amount of ink released is determined by the ambient temperature and humidity. Settings in
the lookup table are adjusted for temperature in 1°C steps and for humidity in 3 steps.
Humidity
Steps Range (rH%)
1 Up to 35%
2 35% to 65%
Description
Detailed
3 65% and over
 Temperature and humidity are always sampled by the temperature/humidity sensor

immediately before a scheduled daraining.
 Normally, draining is done in this order: Color heads Y1M1, C, Y2M2 and then Black heads
K1, K2 with no delay between color and black purging.
 Draining may be slightly slower at cooler temperatures around 15°C (59°F)
SM 7-105 D262
Printing
7.6.11 RELATED SPS

 1-002-XXX [Print Position Adj (Left Edge)]:
This SP adjusts the horizontal registration of the image area on paper for each paper feed
station. This adjustment determines where the moving carriage starts and ends printing with
every horizontal pass across the paper.
 7-212-XXX [User Cleaning]:
This SP displays the number of print head cleanings executed manually. Print head cleaning
can be done with the User Tools.
 7-213-XXX [User Refreshing]:
This SP displays the number of print head flushings executed manually. Print head flushing
(refreshing) can be done with the User Tools.
 2-513-XXX [Mainten. after Leftover Thresh` DFU]:
Even with the print heads capped, if the machine remains idle for a long period, this can
cause the ink around the nozzles to dry slightly and become too viscous to produce good
quality images. To prevent this, the machine will execute a maintenance cycle appropriate for
the length of time that the machine has remained idle. This is done automatically without
intervention by the operator after the machine is turned on, or after a print head has not been
used for a long period of time.
 2-514-XXX [Auto Cleaning Start Threshold DFU]:
This SP code sets the threshold setting to trigger automatic cleaning, based on the mist
count.
 2-517-XXX [Mainten. after Leftover Info.]:
The machine executes a maintenance cycle at power on, and at the start of a print job after it
has remained idle for a significant length of time.
 2-520-001 [Mainten. after Leftover Setting -On/Off Switch]:
Use this SP code to switch on/off the number of times that the downtime cycles execute. The
settings of SP2-521-001 to -003 allow you to set the number of times the cycles (small
downtime purge, large downtime purge, and downtime) cleaning execute.
 2-521-XXX [Mainten. after Leftover Repeat]:
These SP codes allow you to set the number of times the cleaning cycles (small downtime
purge, large downtime purge, and downtime) execute. To use these settings, SP2-520 must
be set.
 2-507-001 [Waste Ink Related Threshold DFU]-[Change Waste Ink Box Full Threshold]:
This SP adjusts the threshold for the tank full alert for the ink collector tank on the right side of
the machine.
 2-507-002 [Waste Ink Related Threshold DFU]-[Change Waste Ink Box Near Full Threshold]:
This SP adjusts the threshold for the near-tank full alert for the ink collector tank on the right
side of the machine.
D262 7-106 SM
Printing
 2-505-002 [Reset Waste Ink Counter]-[Waste Ink: Right C/R]:

A software count triggers a prompt to tell the operator when the right ink sump is nearfull, and
then finally full and in need of replacement.
 2-505-001 [Reset Waste Ink Counter]-[Waste Ink: Right C/R]:
The firmware count triggers a prompt to tell the operator when the left ink sump tank is
near-full, and then finally full and in need of replacement. The count is stored in NVRAM.
Description
Detailed
SM 7-107 D262
Print Head Cleaning and Adjustment
7.7 PRINT HEAD CLEANING AND ADJUSTMENT
When printing repeatedly, print quality may be deteriorated because the inside of the machine
gets dirty. In such a case, do maintenance using the Maintenance Menu.
7.7.1 NOZZLE CHECK PATTERN PRINT

Print the nozzle check pattern after filling the ink for the first time or for checking the clogging of
the print head nozzle.
 Before printing the nozzle check pattern, make sure that Prevent Paper Abrasion mode is
not enabled (p.7-116).
5. Touch [Print Nozzle Check Pattern].
6. Select the input location and touch [OK].
7. Check the print results of the test pattern.

 Normal print results:
 If a nozzle is clogged:
There are broken lines on the pattern. Clean the print head for the color.
The pattern corresponds to Black (K1), Black (K2), Yellow (Y1), Magenta (M1), Cyan,
Magenta (M2), and Yellow (Y2) for [Clean Print-heads] and [Flush Print-heads] in
D262 7-108 SM
[Maintenance], from left to right.

8. Touch [Exit].
9. Touch [User Tools] on the top right of the screen.
 If a nozzle is clogged, perform the maintenance, cleaning the print head three times and
flush it once. For each maintenance, check the nozzle check pattern. (p.7-109, p.7-110)
7.7.2 CLEAN PRINT HEADS

Clean the print heads when a nozzle is clogged, a specific color is not printing, or prints out
unclearly.
 During cleaning the print heads, do not conduct any other operations.
 During cleaning the print heads, do not open the cover.
 If the ink collector box is full, cleaning print heads cannot be performed.
 If one of the ink tanks is empty, cleaning print heads cannot be performed.
 If ink-near-end or ink-end is detected during cleaning, cleaning print heads may not be
completed.
 Cleaning print heads consumes ink.
5. Touch [Clean Print-heads].
6. Select the color of the head for cleaning, and then touch [Start].
 If you touch [Start] while operating the machine, the operation is canceled (touching Description
Detailed
operation is ignored and the beep sounds).
7. Touch [Exit].
SM 7-109 D262
 To check the results of cleaning print heads, print the test pattern again and check it.
 If all nozzles are dropping ink and colors are not mixed, cleaning ends.
 If a nozzle is clogged after cleaning print heads three times, perform flushing print heads.
For each maintenance, check the nozzle check pattern.
7.7.3 FLUSH PRINT HEADS

If a nozzle is clogged after repeated cleaning print heads, perform flushing print heads to clean
the print heads strongly.
 During flushing the print heads, do not conduct any other operations.
 During flushing the print heads, do not open the cover.
 If the ink collector box is full, flushing print heads cannot be performed.
 If one of the ink tanks is empty, flushing print heads cannot be performed.
 If ink-near-end or ink-end is detected during flushing, flushing print heads may not be
completed.
 As flushing print heads consumes more ink than cleaning, perform flushing only when
necessary.
5. Touch [Flush Print-heads].
6. Select the color of the head for flushing and touch [Start].
 If you touch [Start] while operating the machine, the operation is canceled (touching
operation is ignored and the beep sounds).
7. Touch [Exit].
D262 7-110 SM
 To check the results of flushing print heads, print the test pattern again and check it.
 If all nozzles are dropping ink and colors are not mixed, flushing ends.
7.7.4 ADJUST HEAD POSITION

If bi-directional printing produces misaligned vertical lines or blurred colors, print the test pattern
and adjust the print head position. The test pattern differs depending on the print quality.
 Before adjustment, make sure that Prevent Paper Abrasion mode is not enabled
(p.7-116).
 During test pattern printing, do not conduct any other operations.
 For Film (Matte), the head position cannot be adjusted automatically. Adjust it manually.
 For the bypass paper feed location, the head position cannot be adjusted automatically.
Adjust it manually.
Automatic Adjust Head Position

5. Touch [Auto Adjust Head Position].
6. Select the items for adjusting the head position and touch [Adjustment].
Description
Detailed
7. Touch [Exit].
 If automatic adjustment fails, do the adjustment manually.
SM 7-111 D262
Manual Adjust Head Position

5. Touch [Manual Adjust Head Position]
6. Select the items for adjusting the head position and touch [Start Printing].
7. Check the test pattern.

To determine the adjustment value, the optimal adjustment value is the number above the
square pattern that has the faintest color closest to gray and aligned vertical lines on both
sides. If the value in column "A" is "+2", the adjustment value of "A" is "+2".
8. Touch [Adjustment].
9. Touch the plus or minus button to enter the value, and touch [OK].
10. Repeat steps 5 to 7 to print the test pattern, until the optimum adjustment value is "0".
11. Touch [Exit].
D262 7-112 SM
7.7.5 ADJUST PAPER FEED

Adjust paper feed if you see these problems in the prints:
 Broken horizontal lines
 Patchy images (uneven filled areas)
 White lines at regular intervals
(p.7-116).
 During test sheet printing, do not conduct any other operations.
5. Touch [Adjust Paper Feed].
6. Select the paper feed location for adjusting, and touch [Print Test Sheet].
7. Touch [Start Printing].

8. Check the test sheet.
To determine the adjustment value, the optimal adjustment value is the number above the
square pattern that has the faintest color closest to gray and aligned vertical lines on both Description
Detailed
sides. If the number appeared to the left of the lightest gray square with straight horizontal
lines on both sides is "+2", the adjustment value is "+2".
SM 7-113 D262
 Even for the pattern with the lightest gray square, if the horizontal lines are not
straight, select the value referring to the above or below pattern whose horizontal
lines are misaligned in the opposite direction. For example, "+2" square is the
faintest and the horizontals on both sides of "+6" are in the opposite direction to "+2",
so the adjustment value is between "+3" and "+5"depending on the degree of
misalignment. After completing the adjustment, adjust the paper feed again to check
if the optimal adjustment value is set.
9. Select the paper feed location for adjusting, and touch [Adjustment].
10. Touch the plus or minus button to enter the value and touch [OK].
11. Touch [Exit].
 To check the results of the adjustment, print the test sheet again.
D262 7-114 SM
7.7.6 ADJUST PRINT POSITION

Print the test sheet for adjusting the print start position of paper for each paper feed location.
(p.7-116).
 During test sheet printing, do not conduct any other operations.
5. Touch [Adjust Print Position].
6. Select the paper feed location, and touch [Print Test Sheet].
7. Touch [Start Printing] to print the test sheet.

8. Check the test sheet.
To determine the adjustment value, measure the margins between the center of the printed
lines and the paper edges. Adjust so that the margins are 5 mm.
Description
Detailed
For example, if the center of the horizontal line is printed 4 mm from the top edge of the test
sheet, the adjustment value of Top Margin is "1.0 mm".
In the same manner, if the center of the vertical line is printed 8 mm from the left edge of the
test sheet, the adjustment value of Left Margin is "-3.0mm".
9. Select the paper feed location for adjusting, and touch [Adjustment].
SM 7-115 D262
10. Enter the adjustment value, and touch [OK].
 Touch the Up or Down button to adjust the Top Margin and the Left or Right button to
adjust the Left Margin.
11. Touch [Exit].
7.7.7 PREVENT PAPER ABRASION

When printing on an extremely thick or thin paper, the printed image may get dirty because the
paper rubs the print heads or ink blurs. To avoid this, adjust the height of the print heads for each
paper supply location
 Off: Head Height Standard
 Weak: Head Height Higher
 Strong: Head Height Highest
 As the print quality may deteriorated, this function should be enabled only when paper
abrasion is distinct.
 If Film (Matte) is selected for the paper type, prevent paper abrasion is automatically
enabled.
1. Touch [Home] at the bottom of the operation panel in the center.
2. Flick the screen to the left and touch [Initial Settings].
4. Touch [System Settings].
5. Check that the General Features tab is selected.
6. Touch [Prevent Paper Abrasion].
D262 7-116 SM
7. Set Prevent Paper Abrasion for the paper supply location.

8. Touch [OK].
9. Touch [Exit].
10. Touch [User Tools] on the top right of the operation panel.
11. Touch [Home] at the bottom of the operation panel in the center.
Description
Detailed
SM 7-117 D262
7.8.1 BOARDS
Block Diagram
D262 7-118 SM
Parts Layout
No. Component No. Component
1 Controller Board 4 PSU
2 HDD 5 IOB
3 BiCU
Description
Detailed
SM 7-119 D262
7.8.2 SIB (SCANNER I/F BOARD)

The SIB is located at the left back of the scanner unit. It controls the CIS, scanner motor, and
sensors on the scanner motor, and relays the signals.
The CIS reads image data, which are then converted from analog to digital and sent to the BiCU.
D262 7-120 SM
7.8.3 CONTROLLER BOARD

The controller board is located on the left in the PCB box and controls the machine. This board
controls the MFP system.
The built-in flash ROM stores various firmware for controlling the machine and security functions,
such as encryption and certification.
The printer and scanner functions can be expanded, using the optional slots (interface/SD card).
Description
Detailed
SM 7-121 D262
Electrical Components for the Controller
Item Function
Functions as the program operation area for copying, printing, and

Memory SDK, and the data processing area for image processing.
Capacity: 4096 MB (common for all models)
Functions as the total counter.

NV-RAM Also functions as a storage area for part of the initial settings and
SP settings.
Used for optional functions.

There are two SD card slots.
SD card
 OCR Unit Type M13
 Data Overwrite Security Unit Type M19
D262 7-122 SM

The IOB is located at the center front of the PCB box and installed horizontally.
It functions as the interface for data transmission and power supply to the paper supply module
and scanner module.
It controls the driver for paper supply, head lift, maintenance motor, ink supply and ink drop
detection.
Description
Detailed
SM 7-123 D262
7.8.5 HDD
The HDD is located at the upper left front of the BiCU in the PCB box.
It is used for saving the data listed below (capacity: 320 GB).
Area Data
 Thumbnail image
 Address book
 Debug log
 TX/RX mail
 Job spool save
Partition 1 (UNIX-FS)
 Print data area
Data stored before RIP processing
Media print thumbnail images
Media print preview images
Media print print data (temporarily)
 Local storage
Document box images
Sample/Located/Hold/Stored Print documents
 Tentative electronic sorting for copying
Partition 2 (raw)
 Scanning area (2 GB max.)
 Electric sorting for printing
 Fixed stamp image, halftone pattern, storing copy
data for print
D262 7-124 SM

The BiCU is located at the back of the IOB in the PCB box.
The BiCU controls the system, base engine, and scanner, sends the load signal of the base
engine (high-voltage power supply, motors, sensors, solenoids, and clutches) and scanner
It also performs image processing. After processing image data sent from the CIS, the BiCU
sends the processed data to the head through IOB and HRB.
Description
Detailed
SM 7-125 D262

The PSU is located at right in the PCB box.
DC voltage is loaded to the main unit.
7.8.8 OPTION
File Format Converter Type M23 (MLB)

The following values apply when File format converter is installed. When Using the E-mail, Folder
Sending, Storing, or Network Delivery Functions If File format converter is not installed, any size
up to 2700 mm at 600 dpi can be scanned.
1. Copier, Printer related
No limitations (both color and B/W)
2. Scanner related
B/W:
Resolution Length Maximum length
600 dpi 2.7 m 2,774 mm
400 dpi 4.1 m 4,161 mm
Not installed 300 dpi 5.5 m 5,548 mm
200 dpi 8.3 m 8,323 mm
150 dpi 11.0 m 11,097 mm
Installed 600 dpi 15 m
D262 7-126 SM
Color: JPEG
Resolution Length Maximum length
600 dpi 2.7 m 2,774 mm
400 dpi 4.1 m 4,161 mm

Regardless of
whether installed or 300 dpi 5.5 m 5,548 mm
not installed
200 dpi 8.3 m 8,323 mm
150 dpi 11.0 m 11,097 mm
 The scanning length with PDF files is 5.08m, regardless of whether or not the File
Format Converter is installed. This is due to a limitation with the PDF1.4 format itself.
3. Document Server related
B/W:
If the File Format Converter is installed, it is possible to print out stored documents using
reduction/enlargement.
 The maximum size to which these documents may be enlarged is A0/E (which is A4
x 400%).
The image density cannot be adjusted, regardless of whether the File Format Converted is
installed.
Color:
Neither image density adjustment nor reduction/enlargement are possible, regardless of Description
Detailed
whether the File Format Converted is installed.

4. File import
When the File Format Converter is installed, it is possible to import Copier and Printer files
from the Document server to a PC (color and B/W).
5. Capture related
This feature is not supported, regardless of whether or not the File Format Converter is
installed.
SM 7-127 D262
Energy Save
7.9 ENERGY SAVE
7.9.1 ENERGY SAVE MODE

This machine has the following energy saving functions.
Low Power mode
If you do not use the machine for a certain period after an operation, the display will turn off
and the machine goes into Low Power mode. The machine uses less electricity in Low Power
mode.
You can change the amount of time that the machine waits before switching to Low Power
mode under [Low Power Mode Timer].
You can change the machine's settings to enter Low Power mode when you press [Energy
Saver].
To exit Low Power mode, touch the display panel.
Sleep mode
If the machine remains inactive for a specified period or [Energy Saver] is pressed, it enters
Sleep mode to further reduce the electricity it consumes.
You can change the amount of time that the machine waits before switching to Sleep mode
under [Sleep Mode Timer].
To exit Sleep mode, touch the display panel.
 When a machine is in Low Power mode, the main power indicator is lit. In Sleep mode,
the main power indicator flashes slowly.
 The energy saving functions will not operate in the following cases:
 When operations are suspended during printing
 When a warning message appears
 When paper is jammed
 When the Data In indicator is lit or flashing
 The machine does not enter Low Power mode or Sleep mode in the following cases:
 During communication with external equipment
 When the hard disk is active
 When the service call message appears
 When the machine's cover is opened
 When the “Add Ink” message appears
 When ink is being replenished
 When one of the following screens is displayed:
•Machine Features
•Counter
•Inquiry
D262 7-128 SM
Energy Save
•Address Book Management

•Tray Paper Settings
 When data is being processed
 When a recipient is being registered in the address list
 When the sample print, locked print, hold print, or stored print screen is displayed
 When the screen of a document that was stored under the printer function appears
(The machine enters Low Power mode if this happens)
 When accessing the machine using Web Image Monitor
 When the internal cooling fan is active
 When the machine's covers are open
7.9.2 SPECIFICATION
EU
Specification
Reduced electrical consumption in Low

45.0 W
Power mode *1
Time of switch into Low Power mode 1 minute
Time of switch out from Low Power mode

1.3 seconds
*1
Reduced electrical consumption in Sleep

0.83 W
mode *1
Time of switch into Sleep mode 14 minutes

Description
Detailed
Time of switch out from Sleep mode *1 3.5 seconds
*1 The time it takes to switch out from energy saving functions and electrical consumption may
differ depending on the conditions and environment of the machine.
SM 7-129 D262
Energy Save
NA
Specification
Reduced electrical consumption in Low

44.4 W
Power mode *1
Time of switch into Low Power mode 1 minute
Time of switch out from Low Power mode

1.8 seconds
*1
Reduced electrical consumption in Sleep

0.84 W
mode *1
Time of switch into Sleep mode 14 minutes
Time of switch out from Sleep mode *1 4.7 seconds
*1 The time it takes to switch out from energy saving functions and electrical consumption may
differ depending on the conditions and environment of the machine.
 Specifications can vary depending on which options are installed on the machine.
 The machine enters sleep mode directly in the following situations:
 Low Power Mode Timer and Sleep Mode Timer are set to the same time
 Sleep Mode Timer is set shorter than Low Power Mode Timer
 Depending on which embedded software application is installed on it, the machine might
take longer than indicated to enter Sleep mode.
D262 7-130 SM
D262
SERVICE MANUAL APPENDICES
D262 APPENDICES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................................... 1-1

1.1 SPECIFICATIONS ......................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................ 1-1
1.1.2 PRINTER SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................. 1-8
1.1.3 SCANNING SPECIFICATIONS......................................................................... 1-10
1.1.4 OPTION SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................. 1-12
Roll Feed Units ...................................................................................................... 1-12
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE TABLES .................................... 2-1

2.1 MAINTENANCE TABLES .............................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.1 KEY FOR PM TABLE .......................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.2 PM TABLE: MAIN MACHINE .............................................................................. 2-2
3. SP MODE TABLES ..................................................................... 3-1

3.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE ........................................................................................ 3-1
3.2 MAIN SP TABLES-1 ....................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2.1 SP1-XXX ............................................................................................................. 3-2
3.3 MAIN SP TABLES-2 ..................................................................................................... 3-10
3.3.1 SP2-XXX ........................................................................................................... 3-10
3.4 MAIN SP TABLES-3 ..................................................................................................... 3-45
3.4.1 SP3-XXX ........................................................................................................... 3-45
3.5 MAIN SP TABLES-4 ..................................................................................................... 3-60
3.5.1 SP4-XXX ........................................................................................................... 3-60
3.6 MAIN SP TABLES-5 ..................................................................................................... 3-68
3.6.1 SP5-XXX ........................................................................................................... 3-68
3.7 MAIN SP TABLES-6 ................................................................................................... 3-119
3.7.1 SP6-XXX ......................................................................................................... 3-119
3.8 MAIN SP TABLES-7 ...................................................................................................3-120
3.8.1 SP7-XXX .........................................................................................................3-120
3.9 MAIN SP TABLES-8 ...................................................................................................3-181
3.9.1 SP8-XXX .........................................................................................................3-181
3.10 PRINTER SERVICE MODE ................................................................................ 3-235
3.10.1 PRINTER SERVICE MODE ............................................................................ 3-235
3.11SCANNER SERVICE MODE .....................................................................................3-251
3.11.1 SP-1XXX SYSTEM AND OTHERS ................................................................. 3-251
SM Appendix i D262
3.11.2 SP2-XXX SCANNING IMAGE QUALITY ........................................................ 3-253
3.12 INPUT AND OUTPUT CHECK ............................................................................ 3-255
3.12.1 INPUT CHECK TABLE (SP5-803) .................................................................. 3-255
3.12.2 OUTPUT CHECK TABLE (SP5-804) .............................................................. 3-259
D262 ii SM Appendix
APPENDIX:
SPECIFICATIONS
None
Specifications
1. SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS
1.1.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Configuration Console
Printing Method On-demand piezo inkjet system
Color Monochrome, Full Color Printing
Nozzle Numbers 192 nozzles x 2 lines = 384 nozzles

Black (K): 768, Color (Y, C, M): 192 each
Memory 4 GB
HDD Capacity 295 GB
Originals
Type Sheet
Thickness Recommended 0.090 to 0.2 mm (64 to 190 g/m2)
Possible 0.035 to 1.0 mm*1
Scan Method Face-down, center set
Delivery Top stacker or straight-through*2
Size (W x L) Max. 914.4 x 15,000 mm (36 x 591 in.) *3
Min. 210 x 210 mm (8.3 x 8.3 in.)
*1 Quality is not guaranteed. A carrier sheet is required for paper less than 0.07 mm
thick.
*2 The original guide should be removed for originals thicker than 135 g/m2 so they
can exit the back of the scanner unit.
*3  An original up to 960 mm (37.8") wide can pass through the scanning unit but
scanned width is limited to 914.4 mm (36").
 Width detection of Arch, ANSI sizes possible at same time.
SM Appendix 1-1 D262

Specifications
Paper
Feed Method Roll paper, cut sheets (bypass feed only)
Paper Type Normal, recycled, ink jet standard, tracing paper, matte film,
coated paper (CAD), coated paper, special paper
Paper Thickness Roll 0.068 to 0.2 mm, 51 to 200 g/m2
Sheet 0.068 to 0.4 mm, 51 to 220 g/m2
Paper Rolls Core diameter 2 in./3 in. *1
Circumference Less than 176 mm (7 in.)
Width*2 mm 297, 364, 420,440, 490, 515, 594, 610, 620, 625,
660, 680, 707, 728, 800, 841, 880, 914
in. 11, 12, 13.4, 15, 17, 18, 22, 24, 30, 34, 36 in.
Paper Size W x L Max. 914.4 x 15,000 mm (36 x 590 in.) *3
Min. 279.4 x 210 mm (11 x 8.3 in.)
Bypass Max. length: 2,000 mm (79 in.)
Image Borders Roll Less than 3 mm (all edges)
Bypass Leading edge: Less than 3 mm

Trailing edge: Less than 18 mm*4
Left/right edges: Less than 3 mm
Straight Line Deviation Vertical Less than ±1/184 mm
Horizontal Less than ±2/841 mm
Angle Less than 1/200 mm
*1 Roll holders easy to adjust for 2-in. or 3-in. roll cores.
*2 The machine can handle Middle Eastern paper sizes (450, 600, 900 mm) but they
cannot be recognized by the firmware.
*3 The maximum length applies to normal and recycled paper only. For other types of
paper the maximum length is 3,600 mm (142 in.).
D262 1-2 SM Appendix

Specifications
*4 Trailing edge is less than 21 mm for the following: special paper (color/standard
Specifications
mode, color/quality mode), matte film (color/quality mode), tracing paper
(color/quality mode).
Resolution*1
Scanning 600 dpi
Copying 600 dpi
*1 Resolution is determined by the speed/quality selection in the printer driver. For

more details, please refer to the operating instructions.
Warm-up Time Less than 40 sec. at 23°C (73.4°F).
Recovery 7 sec. (from Sleep Mode)
LCD Recovery 3 sec. (from Low Power Mode)
First Copy A0 SEF High Speed BW: 51 sec. FC: 81 sec.
Standard BW: 71 sec. FC: 155 sec.
A1 LEF High Speed BW: 29 sec. FC: 53 sec.
Continuous Copy Speed
A0 SEF High Speed BW: 1.9 cpm FC: 1.1 cpm
Standard BW: 1.1 cpm FC: 0.6 cpm
A1 LEF High Speed BW: 3.8 cpm FC: 2.1 cpm
Standard BW: 2.0 cpm FC: 1.2 cpm

Specifications
Continuous Copy Speed*1 (After Recovery)
D Size LEF High Speed BW: 110 sec. FC: 189 sec.
*1 Time (sec.) required to print 5 continuous copies after recovery from the energy
save mode.
Magnification
Fixed
Engineering (NA) 25.0%, 32.4%, 50.0, 64.7%, 100.0%, 129.4%, 200.0%,

258.8%, 400.0%
Architecture (NA) 25.0%, 33.3%, 50.0%, 66.7%, 100.0%, 133.3%m

200.0%, 266.7%, 400.0%
Other 25.0%,35.4%, 50.0%, 70.7%, 100.0%, 141.4%,

200.0%, 282.8%, 400.0%
Zoom 25.0% to 400.0% (0.1% Steps)
Magnification Difference 100 to 400%: less than ±0.5%

99.9 to 50%: less than ±0.7%
49.9 to 25%: less than ±1.0%
Magnification Deviation Less than ±0.1%
Continuous Copies 1 to 99

Specifications
Specifications
Languages
North America English, French, Spanish, Portuguese (Brazil)
Europe/Oceania English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Dutch,

Swedish, Norwegian, Danish, Czech, Hungarian,
Finnish, Portuguese, Polish, Russian, Catalan,
Turkish, Greek
China Chinese (simplified characters), English
Paper Feed
Paper Input Std. 1 paper roll + bypass feed
Max. 2 paper rolls + bypass feed (1 roll option)
Paper Cutting (Roll)
Std. Cut Synchro Cut
23°C, 50% 23°C, 50%
Standard 297 mm ±2.0 mm ±3.5 mm
420 mm ±3.5 mm ±4.0 mm
594 mm ±3.5 mm ±4.0 mm
841 mm ±3.5 mm ±4.5 mm
1219 mm ±3.5 mm ±6.0 mm
Long Size 2m ±4.5 mm ±12.0 mm
3m ±9.0 mm ±18.0 mm
3.6 m ±11.0 mm ±22.0 mm
15 m ±150 mm ±150 mm

Specifications
Ink
Ink Type Water-resistant pigment ink
Supply Method Ink cartridge, pump tube system
Ink Cartridges Colors K, C, Y, M
Capacity K 200 cc
C 100 cc
Y 100 cc
M 100 cc
Left Sump Capacity 500 cc
Right Sump Capacity 147 cc
Ink Collector Capacity 1000 cc
Exit Stacker (Stack Mode)
Stack Mode Paper A0 SEF, A1 LEF, A2 SEF
Capacity 10 sheets A0 SEF/A1 LEF
10 sheets A1 SEF/A2 LEF
Basket Mode 1 sheet
Power Source Required
North America 120-127V 15A 60 Hz
Europe/Asia/China 220-240V 8A 50/60 Hz

Specifications
Specifications
Power Consumption Ave. Less than 100W
Max. Less than 180W
Sleep Mode Less than 1.1W
Low Power Mode Less than 80W EU, Asia, China
Less than 70W NA
Dimensions (w x d x h) 1384 x 1022 x 1214 mm

(54.5 x 40.2 x 48 in.)
Weight Less than 120 kg (264 lb.)
Environment
Sound Power Level Standby 40 dB or less
Copying B&W 68 dB or less
FC 66 dB or less
Sound Pressure Level Standby 36 dB or less
Copying B&W 60 dB or less
FC 60 dB or less
Ozone Emission None

Specifications
1.1.2 PRINTER SPECIFICATIONS
Ink Pigment based YMCK
Interface
Standard Ethernet(1000BASE-T/100BASE-TX/10BASE-T),USB2.0,SD
card slot
Options Wireless LAN (IEEE802.11a/b/g/n*1), Gigabit Ethernet
*1 IEEE802.11a/b only in Europe, and wireless LAN not supported in China.
Print Resolution Determined by driver selection
High Speed 600 x 300 dpi (default)
Standard 600 x 600 dpi
Quality 1200 x 1200 dpi
Print Speed BW Color
A0 SEF High Speed 1.9 ppm 1.1 ppm
Standard 1.1 ppm 0.6 ppm
A1 LEF High Speed 3.8 ppm 2.1 ppm
Standard 2.0 ppm 1.2 ppm
First Print*1
D124 (A0) A0 SEF High Speed BW: 51 sec. FC: 83 sec.
*1 Time elapsed from when the machine receives the print job start command in
standby mode until the sheet is cut and stacked (roll stops rotating).

Specifications
Specifications
Printer Drivers PS3, HDI
Supported Languages RP-GL/GL2, PS3, PDF, RTIFF
Operating Systems Windows Vista/7/8/8.1, Windows Server 2003/2003

R2/2008/2008 R2/2012/2012 R2, OS X 10.7 or later
Protocols TCP/IP (IPv4, IPv6)
Built-in Fonts 136 Roman fonts (standard), Euro currency compatible
Interfaces
Standard  Ethernet (1000BASE-T/100Base-TX/10Base-T)

 USB2.0
 SD card slot
 USB Host (built-in)
Option  IEEE802.11 a/b/g/n Wireless LAN*1

 IEEE802.11b Wireless LAN (Europe)
*1 Wireless LANs not compatible in China.

Specifications
1.1.3 SCANNING SPECIFICATIONS
Scanning Method Original transport under CIS sensor array
Illumination LED array, RGB method for full color and black-and-white
scanning
Scanning Resolution 600 dpi (150/200/300/400/600 dpi)
RGB Support Standard
Gradation
Monochrome 1-bit (2 steps)
Grayscale 8-bit (256 steps)
Full Color 24-bit (RGB 256 steps), 8-bit (RGB 256 steps)
Scanning Length (at 600 dpi)
Black-and-White Max. 914.4 x 15,000 mm (36 x 591 in.)*1
Min. 210 x 210 mm (8.3 x 8.3 in.)
Full Color Max. 914.4 x 2,774 mm (36 x 109 in.)
Min. 210 x 210 mm (8.3 x 8.3 in.)
*1 15,000 mm (50 ft.) with File Format Converter (MLB) installed.

2,774 mm (9 ft.) without File Format Converter installed.
Scanning Speed
Black-and-White Resolution Speed
600 dpi 80 mm/s
200 dpi 160 mm/s
Full Color 600 dpi 26.7 mm/s
200 dpi 40 mm/s

Specifications
Specifications
Interfaces
Standard  Ethernet (1000BASE-T/100Base-TX/10Base-T)

 USB2.0 (SD card slot)
 USB Host (built-in)
Option  IEEE802.11 a/b/g/n Wireless LAN*1

 IEEE802.11b Wireless LAN (Europe)
*1 Wireless LANs not compatible in China.
Mail TX
Scanning Speed 150, 200, 300, 400, 600 dpi
Protocol SMTP
Output Format TIFF (single/multi), JPEG

PDF (single/multi, high-compression)
File TX
Scanning Speed 150, 200, 300, 400, 600 dpi
Protocol SMB, FTP
Output Format TIFF (single/multi), JPEG

PDF (single/multi, high-compression)
Network TWAIN Scanning
Scanning Speed 150 to 1200 dpi (adjustable in 1 dpi steps)
Protocols TCP/IP
Operating Systems Windows Vista/7/8/8.1, Windows Server 2003/2003

R2/2008/2008 R2/2012/2012 R2

Specifications
1.1.4 OPTION SPECIFICATIONS
Roll Feed Units

These specifications for Roll Unit 1 (Standard) and Roll Unit 2 (option) are the same.
Power Source From main machine
Dimensions (w x d x h) 1108 x 432 x 398 mm (43.6 x 17 x 15.7 lb.)
Weight 14.5 kg (32 lb.)

APPENDIX:
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE TABLES
None
Maintenance Tables
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE TABLES
2.1 MAINTENANCE TABLES
2.1.1 KEY FOR PM TABLE
Maintenance
Preventive
Tables
Item Meaning
A Adjust
C Clean
I Inspect
L Lubricate
R Replace
K K = 1,000
PM Machine site visit, scheduled or as needed.
Meters Feet Sqf
5K m 5,000 16,404 45,250
10K m 10,000 32,800 90,500
20K m 20,000 65,600 181,000
30K m 30,000 98,400 271,500

Maintenance Tables
2.1.2 PM TABLE: MAIN MACHINE
 The PM intervals of parts may vary, depending on the amount of coverage in prints and
the color usage ratio. The expected color ratio for this machine is 9:1 (9 black-and-white
prints for every 1 color print.)
Item 5K m 10K m 20K m 30K m EM
Scanner Unit
1 Exposure Glass I, C
2 Original Width Sensors C
3 Original Feed Roller C
4 Original Exit Roller C
5 White Plate I, C
6 CIS Lens C
Horizontal Unit
7 Black Print Head Unit (K1, K2) R
8 Color Print Head Unit (C, YM) R
9 Horizontal Encoder C
10 DRESS Sensor C
Maintenance Unit
11 Maintenance Unit R
12 Ink Collector Tank R
13 Right Ink Sump I
14 Left Ink Sump R

Maintenance Tables
Item 5K m 10K m 20K m 30K m EM
Ink Supply
15 Ink Tube Guide C
Maintenance
Preventive
Paper Feed
Tables
16 Platen C C
17 Paper Feed Rollers C
Vertical Unit
18 Vertical Encoder C
Auto Nozzle Check
19 Auto Nozzle Check Unit I, C
20 Electrode I, C
21 Wiper R I, C
Notes
Refer to the next section for more details.
1 Exposure Glass. Optical glass cleaner, damp cloth.
2 Original Width Sensors. Blower brush.
3 Original Feed Roller. Alcohol, damp cloth, dry cloth.
4 Original Exit Roller. Alcohol, damp cloth, dry cloth.
5 White Plate. Alcohol, damp cloth, dry cloth.
6 CIS Lens. Lens paper, alcohol.
7 Black Print Head Unit. Replace when necessary. After replacement, do Nozzle
Check pattern, head cleaning, head flushing.
8 Color Print Head Unit. Replace when necessary. After replacement, do Nozzle
Check pattern, head cleaning, head flushing.
9 Horizontal Encoder. Clean cloth dampened with alcohol, dry cloth.

Maintenance Tables
10 DRESS Sensor. Clean with clean white cloth.

Note: The recommended cleaning interval is 10Km. However, if the operator is
frequently printing on tracing paper, or frequently using Quality mode printing,
cleaning every 5Km is recommended.
11 Maintenance Unit. Use a dry linen cloth to clean around the lips of the suction
cup and print head caps.
12 Ink Collector Tank. Swap with new ink collector tank.
13 Right Ink Sump. Never attempt to empty it and re-use it.
14 Left Ink Sump. Use a dry linen cloth to clean the gate of the sump. You may need
to use the tip of a small screwdriver to remove hardened ink.
15 Ink Tube Guide. Use a damp cloth to clean the areas where the guide is rubbing.
16 Platen. Use a linen cloth dampened slightly with water to clean the surface of the
platen. Use a blower brush to clean the holes of the plates to clear any clogging.
17 Paper Feed Rollers. Use a linen cloth dampened with alcohol to clean the
surfaces of the rollers.
18 Vertical Encoder. Use a linen cloth dampened with alcohol to clean the edge of
the vertical encoder wheel.
19 Auto Nozzle Module. Replace when necessary.
20 Electrode. Use a damp cloth to clean.
21 Wiper. Use a damp cloth to clean.

APPENDIX:
SP MODE TABLES
P a ge Da t e A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew
18  19 01/30/2018 Added SP2031
Service Program Mode
3. SP MODE TABLES
3.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
Notation What it means
[range/default step] Example: [-9 to +9/+3.0/0.1 mm].

 Setting can be adjusted in the range ±9
SP Mode Tables
 Default: +3.0. Value reset to default after an NVRAM reset
 Value is changed in 0.1 mm steps with each key push.
DFU “Design or Factory Use”. Do not change this value. The factory
default setting provides optimum performance.
CTL Means "controller". This is used to denote SP codes related to

the GW+ controller.
Not Used These SP's appear in the SP mode menus but these codes are
not used because:
 Currently the feature is not available for the main machine,
or its use has been discontinued.
 The SP is intended for use with a peripheral that is
currently under development but not available at this time.
 Executing these SP's has no effect on operation of the
main machine or any peripheral device.
Japan Only This feature or item is for Japan only. Do not change this value.
 Always cycle the machine off/on after changing an SP setting.

Main SP Tables-1
3.2 MAIN SP TABLES-1
3.2.1 SP1-XXX
1001 Print Position Adj (Top Edge)
1 By-pass Feed
[-2 to 2/0.0/0.1 mm]
2 Paper Input 1
[-2 to 2/0.0/0.1 mm]
3 Paper Input 2
[-2 to 2/0.0/0.1 mm]
1002 Print Position Adj (Left Edge)
1 By-pass Feed
[-10 to 10/0.0/0.1 mm]
2 Paper Input 1
[-10 to 10/0.0/0.1 mm]
3 Paper Input 2
[-10 to 10/0.0/0.1 mm]
7 By-pass Input (Paper Edge)
[0 to 65535 / 0 / 1]
8 Paper Input 1 (Paper Edge)
[0 to 65535 / 0 / 1]
9 Paper Input 2 (Paper Edge)
[0 to 65535 / 0 / 1]

Main SP Tables-1
1830 Sub Scan Feed Ad (Special) - Thin
[-400 to 400/01]
1 Applying Size 1/Rem1/Thin
SP Mode Tables

Main SP Tables-1
1831 Sub Scan Feed Ad (Special) - Normal
[-400 to 400/01]
1 Applying Size 1/Rem1/Normal

Main SP Tables-1
SP Mode Tables
1832 Sub Scan Feed Ad (Special) - Semi Thick
[-400 to 400/01]
1 Applying Size 1/Rem1/Semi Thick

Main SP Tables-1
1833 Sub Scan Feed Ad (Special) – Thick 1
[-400 to 400/01]
1 Applying Size 1/Rem1/Thick 1

Main SP Tables-1
SP Mode Tables

Main SP Tables-1
1834 Sub Scan Feed Ad (Special) – Thick 2
[-400 to 400/01]

Main SP Tables-1
1921 Cut Length Adjustment - Cutting Position Adjustment
SP Mode Tables
1 [-10 to 10/0.0/0.1 mm]
1925 Cutter Simultaneous Drive Adj
1 Cut Timing [0.1 to 1.0 / 0.3 / 0.1]
1926 Carriage Updown Adjustment
1 Updown Time [-5.0 to 5.0 / 0.0 / 0.1]
1930 Manual Cut
1 Active Roll [0 to 2 / 1 / 1]
2 Roll 1 [0 to 2 / 1 / 1]
3 Roll 2 [0 to 2 / 1 / 1]
10 Jam [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]

Main SP Tables-2
3.3.1 SP2-XXX
2010 User Maintenance
1 Cleaning
[EXECUTE]
2 Refreshing (Flushing)
[EXECUTE]
2012 Initial Operation Setting
[0 to 10/0/1]
2015 Auto Nozzle Check
1 Setting [0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
2 Mode Memory Flag [0 to 10 / 0 / 1]
2016 Nozzle Compensation Mode Start
1 H1 [0 to 0xFFFFFFF / 0 / 1]
2 H2
3 H3
4 H4
5 H5
2017 Nozzle Compensation Mode Release
1 - [0 to 168 / 10 / 1 hour]

Main SP Tables-2
2018 Nozzle Fracture Condition
1 H1ODD 1-32 [0xFFFFFFFF to 0xFFFFFFFF / 0 / 1]
2 H1ODD 33-64
3 H1ODD 65-96
4 H1ODD 97-128
5 H1ODD 129-160
SP Mode Tables
6 H1ODD 161-192
7 H1EVEN 1-32
8 H1EVEN 33-64
9 H1EVEN 65-96
10 H1EVEN 97-128
11 H1EVEN 129-160
12 H1EVEN 161-192
13 H2ODD 1-32
14 H2ODD 33-64
15 H2ODD 65-96
16 H2ODD 97-128
17 H2ODD 129-160
18 H2ODD 161-192
19 H2EVEN 1-32
20 H2EVEN 33-64
21 H2EVEN 65-96 [0xFFFFFFFF to 0xFFFFFFFF / 0 / 1]
22 H2EVEN 97-128
23 H2EVEN 129-160
24 H2EVEN 161-192
25 H3ODD 1-32

Main SP Tables-2
26 H3ODD 33-64
27 H3ODD 65-96
28 H3ODD 97-128
29 H3ODD 129-160
30 H3ODD 161-192
31 H3EVEN 1-32
32 H3EVEN 33-64
33 H3EVEN 65-96
34 H3EVEN 97-128
35 H3EVEN 129-160
36 H3EVEN 161-192
37 H4ODD 1-32
38 H4ODD 33-64
39 H4ODD 65-96
40 H4ODD 97-128
41 H4ODD 129-160 [0xFFFFFFFF to 0xFFFFFFFF / 0 / 1]
42 H4ODD 161-192
43 H4EVEN 1-32
44 H4EVEN 33-64
45 H4EVEN 65-96
46 H4EVEN 97-128
47 H4EVEN 129-160
48 H4EVEN 161-192
49 H5ODD 1-32
50 H5ODD 33-64
51 H5ODD 65-96

Main SP Tables-2
52 H5ODD 97-128
53 H5ODD 129-160
54 H5ODD 161-192
55 H5EVEN 1-32
56 H5EVEN 33-64
57 H5EVEN 65-96
SP Mode Tables
58 H5EVEN 97-128
59 H5EVEN 129-160
60 H5EVEN 161-192
2019 Retry Sensor Nozzle
1 H1ODD 1-32 [0 to 0xFFFFFFFF / 0 / 1]
2 H1ODD 33-64
3 H1ODD 65-96
4 H1ODD 97-128
5 H1ODD 129-160
6 H1ODD 161-192
7 H1EVEN 1-32
8 H1EVEN 33-64
9 H1EVEN 65-96
10 H1EVEN 97-128
11 H1EVEN 129-160
12 H1EVEN 161-192
13 H2ODD 1-32
14 H2ODD 33-64
15 H2ODD 65-96

Main SP Tables-2
16 H2ODD 97-128
17 H2ODD 129-160
18 H2ODD 161-192
19 H2EVEN 1-32
20 H2EVEN 33-64
21 H2EVEN 65-96 [0 to 0xFFFFFFFF / 0 / 1]
22 H2EVEN 97-128
23 H2EVEN 129-160
24 H2EVEN 161-192
25 H3ODD 1-32
26 H3ODD 33-64
27 H3ODD 65-96
28 H3ODD 97-128
29 H3ODD 129-160
30 H3ODD 161-192
31 H3EVEN 1-32
32 H3EVEN 33-64
33 H3EVEN 65-96
34 H3EVEN 97-128
35 H3EVEN 129-160
36 H3EVEN 161-192
37 H4ODD 1-32
38 H4ODD 33-64
39 H4ODD 65-96
40 H4ODD 97-128

Main SP Tables-2
41 H4ODD 129-160 [0 to 0xFFFFFFFF / 0 / 1]
42 H4ODD 161-192
43 H4EVEN 1-32
44 H4EVEN 33-64
45 H4EVEN 65-96
46 H4EVEN 97-128
SP Mode Tables
47 H4EVEN 129-160
48 H4EVEN 161-192
49 H5ODD 1-32
50 H5ODD 33-64
51 H5ODD 65-96
52 H5ODD 97-128
53 H5ODD 129-160
54 H5ODD 161-192
55 H5EVEN 1-32
56 H5EVEN 33-64
57 H5EVEN 65-96
58 H5EVEN 97-128
59 H5EVEN 129-160
60 H5EVEN 161-192

Main SP Tables-2
1 Execute Detecting row by [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]

row of Nozzles
2 Exec. Auto Nozzle Check: [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]

No Plate Wiping
3 Reset:Freqcy,Accumulatn [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
Count/Head Replacemt
4 Reset:Freqcy,Accumulatn [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
Count/Md Replacemt
10 Condition Auto Nozzle [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]

Check.DisableFlag(WiperErr)
11 Condition Auto Nozzle Check [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]

Replacement Flag
12 Condition Electrode Plate [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]

Discharge Flag
14 Condition Execute Elect. Plate [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]

Powerful Cleaning Flag
16 Condition Disable Auto Nozzle [0xFF or 1 / 0 / 1]

Check (Before Start)
17 Condition Disable Auto Nozzle [0xFF or 1 / 0 / 1]

Check (Midway)

Main SP Tables-2
2022 Auto Nozzle Check Setting
11 Temperature Range [0.0 to 55.0 / 10.0 / 0.1]

Lower Limit
12 Temperature Range [0.0 to 55.0 / 35.0 / 0.1]

Upper Limit
13 Setting Humidity Range [0.0 to 100.0 / 1.0 / 0.1]

Lower Limit
SP Mode Tables
14 Humidity Range Upper [0.0 to 100.0 / 80.0 / 0.1]
Limit
17 Number of Retry [0 to 255 / 1 / 1]
18 Over Retrying Permit [0 to 192 / 192 / 1]

Setting
2023 Electrode Plate Wiping
1 Execute Elect. Plate [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]

Wiping Sequence
3 Execute Outward Only [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
4 Execute Wiping HP [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
Detection
6 Reset Elect. Plate Wiping [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]

Count.

Main SP Tables-2 Rev.01/30/2018
2024 Auto Nozzle Check Replacement
1 Retract Carriage [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
2 Retract Cutter [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
3 Move Auto Nozzle Check Wiper [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
4 Reset:Freqcy,Accumulatn Count/Md Replacemt [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
5 Execute Elect. Plate Wiping Sequence [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
2025 Auto Nozzle Check Maintenance
1 Recovery CL Upper Limit ENG* [0 to 255 / 6 / 1]
2 Recovery CL Continuous Count H1 [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
2026 Soft Count Ink End Detection
1 ON/OFF [0 or 1 / 1 / 1]
2 Detection Threshold [1.3 to 2.0 / 1.6 / 0.1]
3 No. of Detections (Black) [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1]
4 No. of Detections (Cyan) [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1]
5 No. of Detections [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1]

(Magenta)
6 No. of Detections (Yellow) [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1]

Rev.01/30/2018 Main SP Tables-2
2030 Extract Filling Liq Prog Mng
1 Completed State Flag
2 H1
3 H2
4 H3
5 H4
SP Mode Tables
6 H5
0 1st sequence finished (initial)
1 2nd sequence finished
2 3rd sequence finished
3 4th sequence finished
6 Negative pressure formation incomplete
7 Completed
 2031 Vertical Judgment Settings

1 Function Setting
[ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
0: Valid
1: Invalid
2 Algorithm Setting
[ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1 ]
0: Normal (Accuracy: High, Time: Long).
1: Simple (Accuracy: Low, Time: Short)
2: Combined (Accuracy: Medium, Time: Medium)
NOTE: (For SP2031)

 These SPs are used for the OCR function. If the direction of a certain original image is not
correctly recognized, the algorithm (recognition pattern) should be changed.
 These SPs are available after installing “Scanner” firmware from Ver. 01.06.

Main SP Tables-2
2050 Air Detection Check
1 Air Detection Sensor: Execute Check
[EXECUTE]
2 Air Detection Sensor: Check Result
[0 to 127/0/1]
Bit HT (Head Tank)
0 M
1 Y
2 C
3 K2
2090 NV Clear at Supply Unit Exc. - Execute NV Value Clear
[EXECUTE]
[0 to 1/0/1]
2100 Special Maintenance
3 Fully Automated Cleaning
[EXECUTE]
4 Extract Filling Liquid
[EXECUTE]
5 Extract Air
[EXECUTE]

Main SP Tables-2
2102 Maintenance Unit Exchange
1 Reset
[EXECUTE]
4 Decapping
[EXECUTE]
SP Mode Tables
2103 Printing Erase Margin
1 Leading Edge (Roll Paper)
[0 to 20/3/0.1 mm]
2 Trailing Edge (Roll Paper)
[0 to 20/3/0.1 mm]
3 Left Edge (Roll Paper)
[0 to 20/3/0.1 mm]
4 Right Edge (Roll Paper)
[0 to 20/3/0.1 mm]
5 Leading Edge (By-pass)
[0 to 20/3/0.1 mm]
6 Trailing Edge (By-pass)
[0 to 20/18/0.1 mm]
7 Left Edge (By-pass)
[0 to 20/3/0.1 mm]
8 Right Edge (By-pass)
[0 to 20/3/0.1 mm]

Main SP Tables-2
2104 Paper Edge Detection Delay Adj
1 Normal Paper Right Edge
[-20 to 20/4/0.1 mm]
2 Normal Paper Left Edge
[-20 to 20/0/0.1 mm]
3 Recycled Paper Right Edge
[-20 to 20/4/0.1 mm]
4 Recycled Paper Left Edge
[-20 to 20/0/0.1 mm]
5 IJ Normal Paper Right Edge
[-20 to 20/4/0.1 mm]
6 IJ Normal Paper Left Edge
[-20 to 20/0/0.1 mm]
7 Tracing Paper Right Edge
[-20 to 20/2.5/0.1 mm]
8 Tracing Paper Left Edge
[-20 to 20/1.0/0.1 mm]
9 Mat Film Right Edge
[-20 to 20/2.5/0.1 mm]
10 Mat Film Left Edge
[-20 to 20/1.0/0.1 mm]
11 Coated Paper (CAD) Right Edge
[-20 to 20/4.0/0.1 mm]
12 Coated Paper (CAD) Left Edge
[-20 to 20/0.0/0.1 mm]

Main SP Tables-2
13 Coated Paper Right Edge
[-20 to 20/4.0/0.1 mm]
14 Coated Paper Left Edge
[-20 to 20/0.0/0.1 mm]
17 Special Paper Right Edge
[-20 to 20/4.0/0.1 mm]
SP Mode Tables
18 Special Paper Left Edge
[-20 to 20/0.0/0.1 mm]
19 Special Paper Right Edge
[-25.0 to 25.0 / 4.0 / 0.1mm]
20 Special Paper Left Edge
[-25.0 to 25.0 / -0.0 / 0.1mm]
31 Automatic Conversion
[EXECUTE]
2116 Copier Sub Scan Magnification Correct
1 Normal/Recycled Paper
[-1 to 1/0/0.1%]
2 IJ Normal Paper
[-1 to 1/0/0.1%]
3 Translucent
[-1 to 1/0/0.1%]
4 Coated Paper (CAD)
[-1 to 1/0/0.1%]
5 Coated Paper
[-1 to 1/0/0.1%]

Main SP Tables-2
6 Mat Film
[-1 to 1/0/0.1%]
7 Special Paper
[-1 to 1/0/0.1%]
8 Glossy Paper
[-1 to 1/0/0.1%]
9 Reserved 1
[-1 to 1/0/0.1%]
10 Reserved 2
[-1 to 1/0/0.1%]
11 Normal/Recycled Paper
[-1 to 1/0/0.1%]
12 IJ Normal Paper
[-1 to 1/0/0.1%]
13 Translucent
[-1 to 1/0/0.1%]
[-1 to 1/0/0.1%]
15 Coated Paper
[-1 to 1/0/0.1%]
16 Mat Film
[-1 to 1/0/0.1%]
17 Special Paper
[-1 to 1/0/0.1%]
18 Glossy Paper
[-1 to 1/0/0.1%]

Main SP Tables-2
19 Reserved 4
[-1 to 1/0/0.1%]
20 Reserved 5
[-1 to 1/0/0.1%]
2117 Copier Mainscan Magnif Correct
1 Normal/Recycled Paper [-1.0 to 1.0 / 0.0 / 0.1%]
SP Mode Tables
2 IJ Normal Paper
3 Translucent Paper
5 Coated Paper
6 Mat Film
7 Special Paper
8 Glossy Paper
9 Reserved 1
2193 Image Regist. Calibration
1 Paper Feed Tray1:LED [0 to 4000 / 0 / 1]

PWM Setting
2 Paper Feed [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
Tray1:Magnifi. Ratio
Regist.
3 Paper Feed Tray2:LED [0 to 4000 / 0 / 1]

PWM Setting
4 Paper Feed [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
Tray2:Magnifi. Ratio
Regist.

Main SP Tables-2
5 Bypass Tray:LED PWM [0 to 4000 / 0 / 1]

Setting
6 Bypass Tray:Magnifi. [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
Ratio Regist.
20 ON/OFF [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
2194 DRESS Executed Result
1 Year
[0 to 99/12/1 year]
2 Month
[1 to 12/1/1 month]
3 Day
[1 to 31/1/1 day]
4 Hour
[0 to 23/0/1 hour]
5 Minute
[0 to 59/0/1 minute]
6 Head Temperature H1
[-100 to 100/0/1 deg]
[-100 to 100/0/1 deg]
[-100 to 100/0/1 deg]
[-100 to 100/0/1 deg]
10 Result
[0 to 255/0/1]

Main SP Tables-2
11 Executed Count
[0 to 65 535/0/1 times]
12 Reading Failure Count
[0 to 65 535/0/1 times]
13 Calculation Failure Count
[0 to 65 535/0/1 times]
SP Mode Tables
14 Effect Recognition Failure Count
[0 to 65 535/0/1 times]
15 Elapsed Failure Notice Count
[0 to 65 535/0/1 times]
16 DRAMA_failure reason_notice
[0 to 65 535/0/1 times]
17 Executed Count: Normal Paper
[0 to 65 535/0/1 times]
18 Executed Count: Recycled Paper
[0 to 65 535/0/1 times]
19 Executed Count: IJ Normal Paper
[0 to 65 535/0/1 times]
20 Executed Count: Tracing Paper
[0 to 65 535/0/1 times]
21 Executed Count: Mat Film
[0 to 65 535/0/1 times]
22 Executed Count: Coated Paper (CAD)
[0 to 65 535/0/1 times]
23 Executed Count: Coated Paper
[0 to 65 535/0/1 times]

Main SP Tables-2
24 Executed Count: Special Paper
[0 to 65 535/0/1 times]
25 Executed Count: Glossy Paper
[0 to 65 535/0/1 times]
26 Failure Count: Normal Paper
[0 to 65 535/0/1 times]
27 Failure Count: Recycled Paper
[0 to 65 535/0/1 times]
28 Failure Count: IJ Normal Paper
[0 to 65 535/0/1 times]
29 Failure Count: Tracing Paper
[0 to 65 535/0/1 times]
30 Failure Count: Mat Film
[0 to 65 535/0/1 times]
31 Failure Count: Coated Paper (CAD)
[0 to 65 535/0/1 times]
32 Failure Count: Coated Paper
[0 to 65 535/0/1 times]
33 Failure Count: Special Paper
[0 to 65 535/0/1 times]
34 Failure Count: Glossy Paper
[0 to 65 535/0/1 times]

Main SP Tables-2
2211 Air Detection Freq. Check Result
1 Carriage Unit (Black)
[EXECUTE]
2 Carriage Unit (Color)
[EXECUTE]
SP Mode Tables
2213 Air Detection Freq. Checked Date
2214 Air Detection Freq. Check Result
1 H1
[0 or 1/0/1]
2 H2
[0 or 1/0/1]
3 H3
[0 or 1/0/1]
4 H4
[0 or 1/0/1]
5 H5
[0 or 1/0/1]
2215 Air Detection Freq. Check Period
[0 to 255/10/1 day]

Main SP Tables-2
2217 Prev. Air Leakage Check Counter
1 H1
[0 to 999 999/0/1]
2 H2
[0 to 999 999/0/1]
3 H3
[0 to 999 999/0/1]
4 H4
[0 to 999 999/0/1]
5 H5
[0 to 999 999/0/1]
2218 Accumulated Air Leakage Counter
1 H1
[0 to 999 999/0/1]
2 H2
[0 to 999 999/0/1]
3 H3
[0 to 999 999/0/1]
4 H4
[0 to 999 999/0/1]
5 H5
[0 to 999 999/0/1]

Main SP Tables-2
2231 PM Counter Indication
[0 to 500/0/1 %]
[0 to 500/0/1 %]
3 Maintenance Unit
SP Mode Tables
[0 to 500/0/1 %]
4 Waste Ink Box: Left
[0 to 200/0/1 %]
5 Waste Ink Box: Right
[0 to 200/0/1 %]
[0 to 0xFFFF FFFF/0/1 mm]
8 Maintenance Unit

Main SP Tables-2
2235 Temp. Rise User CL Switch
1 ON/OFF Setting [0 to 31 / 31 / 1]
2 Temperature Threshhold [0.0 to 55.0 / 7.0 / 0.5]

H1
3 Temperature Threshhold
H2
H3
H4
H5
2245 Air Detection Flag
1 H1
[0 to 31/0/1]
0: Normal
1: Air mixing at job end
2: Air mixing after idle time
4: Air mixing after ink pumps idle
2 H2
[0 to 31/0/1]
0: Normal
3 H3

Main SP Tables-2
[0 to 31/0/1]
0: Normal
4 H4
[0 to 31/0/1]
0: Normal
SP Mode Tables
5 H5
[0 to 31/0/1]
0: Normal
2246 Ink Supply Operation Time
1 H1
[0xFFFF FFFF/0/1]
2 H2
[0xFFFF FFFF/0/1]
3 H3
[0xFFFF FFFF/0/1]
4 H4
[0xFFFF FFFF/0/1]
5 H5
[0xFFFF FFFF/0/1]

Main SP Tables-2
2247 Ink Supply Seq. Progress Control
1 H1
[0xFFFF FFFF/0/1]
2 H2
[0xFFFF FFFF/0/1]
3 H3
[0xFFFF FFFF/0/1]
4 H4
[0xFFFF FFFF/0/1]
5 H5
[0xFFFF FFFF/0/1]
2249 Set Air Detection Flag - Flag Continued Time
[0 to 255/6/1 hour]
2252 Air Purge Fill Feeler Position
1 HT1 OFF_ON
[0 to 65 535/0/1 count]
2 HT2 OFF_ON
[0 to 65 535/0/1 count]
3 HT3 OFF_ON
[0 to 65 535/0/1 count]
4 HT4 OFF_ON
[0 to 65 535/0/1 count]
5 HT5 OFF_ON
[0 to 65 535/0/1 count]

Main SP Tables-2
6 HT6 OFF_ON
[0 to 65 535/0/1 count]
7 HT7 OFF_ON
[0 to 65 535/0/1 count]
8 HT1 ON_OFF
[0 to 65 535/0/1 count]
SP Mode Tables
9 HT2 ON_OFF
[0 to 65 535/0/1 count]
10 HT3 ON_OFF
[0 to 65 535/0/1 count]
11 HT4 ON_OFF
[0 to 65 535/0/1 count]
12 HT5 ON_OFF
[0 to 65 535/0/1 count]
13 HT6 ON_OFF
[0 to 65 535/0/1 count]
14 HT7 ON_OFF
[0 to 65 535/0/1 count]
2306 OCFS Position Check Repeat
1 H1
2 H2
3 H3
4 H4
5 H5
[0 to 1/0/1]

Main SP Tables-2
2400 NV Clear at Carriage Exchange
[0 to 2/0/1]
 0: Clears counter for all print heads for carriage replacement if both
cradles are to be replaced.
 1: Clears counters for K1, K2 if the left black print head cradle is to be
replaced.
 2: Clears counters for C, Y, M if the right color cradle is to be replaced.
2438 Motor Control Log Save Setting
1 DDR/HDD Log Save [0 to 3 / 0 / 1]

Setting
2505 Reset Waste Ink Counter
1 Waste Ink: Left C/R
[EXECUTE]
[0 to 1/0/1]
2 Waste Ink: Right C/R
[EXECUTE]
[0 to 1/0/1]
2508 Remove Ink Setting
1 No. of Times [0 to 5 / 0 / 1]
2515 OCFS Filling Flag After CL(eaning)
[0 to 127/0/1] 0: Not executed, 1: Executed

Main SP Tables-2
2516 Automatic Cleaning Off/On
1 Automatic Mist Cleaning [0 or 1 / 1 / 1]
2 Automatic Paper Dust [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]

Cleaning
3 Auto Cleaning for [0 or 1 / 1 / 1]

Decapping
SP Mode Tables
4 Auto Cleaning for Bk [0 or 1 / 1 / 1]
Head Decapping
5 Auto Cleaning for Single [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]

Head Decapping
2517 Mainten. after Leftover Info.
1 Printing Standby Time
[0 to 4294967295/0/1 sec]
2 Last Maintenance Time H1
[0 to 4294967295/0/1 sec]
[0 to 4294967295/0/1 sec]
[0 to 4294967295/0/1 sec]
[0 to 4294967295/0/1 sec]
[0 to 4294967295/0/1 sec]
7 Last Maintenance Type H1
[0 to 255/0/1]

Main SP Tables-2
[0 to 255/0/1]
[0 to 255/0/1]
[0 to 255/0/1]
[0 to 255/0/1]
12 Temperature Leftover Began H1
[0 to 55/0/0.5 C]
[0 to 55/0/0.5 C]
[0 to 55/0/0.5]
[0 to 55/0/0.5]
[0 to 55/0/0.5]
2518 All Channel Flushing Time
[0 to 0xFFFFFFFF ]
2520 Mainten. after Leftover Setting -On/Off Switch
[0 to 31/0/1]

Main SP Tables-2
2521 Mainten. after Leftover Repeat
1 Little Flushing
[0 to 10/1/1]
2 Rich Flushing
[0 to 10/1/1]
3 Cleaning after Leftover
SP Mode Tables
[0 to 10/1/1]
2600 Head Accumulated Decap Time
1 HT1 [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1]
2 HT2
3 HT3
4 HT4
5 HT5
2610 Bk Head Accumulated Decap Time
1 HT1 [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1]
2 HT2 [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1]
2705 Ink on Normal Operation
1 Consumption Counter HT1
[0 to 99999999 nl]
[0 to 99999999 nl]
[0 to 99999999 nl]

Main SP Tables-2
[0 to 99999999/0/1 nl]
[0 to 99999999 nl]
[0 to 99999999 nl]
[0 to 99999999 nl]
2707 OCFS Consumption Counter
1 HT1
2 HT2
3 HT3
4 HT4
5 HT5
6 HT6
7 HT7
[0 to 99999999/0/1 nl]
2708 Ink After End
1 Consumption Counter K
2 Consumption Counter C
3 Consumption Counter M
4 Consumption Counter Y
[0 to 2550000000/0/1 nl]

Main SP Tables-2
2720 DecapCount per Head (Flushing)
1 HT1 [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1]
2 HT2
3 HT3
4 HT4
5 HT5
SP Mode Tables
2721 Decap Flushg Count Threshold
1 - [1 to 255 / 3 / 1]
2722 Decap Flushing Counter
1 HT1 [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
2 HT2
3 HT3
4 HT4
5 HT5
2800 EM Print Mode Setting
1 ON/OFF [0 to 10 / 1 / 1]
2 Release Threshold (Ink [0 to 99999999 / 98960 / 1]

Consumption)
3 Release Threshold (Time) [0 to 255 / 73 / 1]
2801 EM Print Mode
3 Ink Consumption Counter [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

HT3
4 Ink Consumption Counter

HT4

Main SP Tables-2

HT5

HT6

HT7
2802 EM Print Mode Start Time
3 HT3 [0 to 4294967295 / 0 / 1]
4 HT4
5 HT5
6 HT6
7 HT7
2803 Ink End (EM Print)
2 Cyan [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
3 Magenta [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
4 Yellow [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
2902 Internal Test Pattern Select - RI20 (MtoP) Internal Patterns
Pattern
0 No Test Pattern Output
1 Black Grid Pattern
2 Cyan Grid Pattern
3 Magenta Grid Pattern
4 Yellow Grid Pattern
5 Frame Pattern

Main SP Tables-2
6 Black 2x2 Pattern
7 Cyan 2x2 Pattern
8 Magenta 2x2 Pattern
9 Yellow 2x2 Pattern
SP Mode Tables
2903 KISSIN Internal Pattern
1 Image Datamask Setting [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
2 Select Internal Test [0 to 2 / 0 / 1]

Pattern
2904 LVDS Test Pattern
1 Select LVDS Test Pattern [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
2920 FFC Connect Error Flag
001 - [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]

Main SP Tables-2
2959 Engine Control IC ID Indication
1 IC Name
[0 to 255/0/1]
2 Version
[0 to 0xFFFFFFFF/0/1]
2974 KAKA1 Variation Adj.
1 Correction Value a [0.0501 to 0.2285 / 0.1000 / 0.0001]
2 Correction Value b [-6.1400 to 11.9871 / 0.0000 / 0.0001]

Main SP Tables-3
3.4.1 SP3-XXX
3005 Head Gap Adjust Mj4-20KHz
1 Adjusted Value on Fitting [-400 to 400 / 0 / 1dot]

A
SP Mode Tables
3 Adjusted Value on Fitting
B

C

D
51 By-pass: Normal-Thick A [-400 to 400 / 0 / 1dot]
53 By-pass: Normal-Thick B
55 By-pass: Normal-Thick C
58 By-pass: Normal-Thick D
101 Paper Supply 1: [-400 to 400 / 0 / 1dot]

Normal-Thick A
103 Paper Supply 1:

Normal-Thick B
105 Paper Supply 1:

Normal-Thick C
108 Paper Supply 1:

Normal-Thick D
151 Paper Supply 2:

Normal-Thick A
153 Paper Supply 2:

Normal-Thick B

Main SP Tables-3
155 Paper Supply 2:

Normal-Thick C
158 Paper Supply 2:

Normal-Thick D
3008 Head Gap Adjust Mj5-16kHz
1 Adjusted Value on Fitting [-400 to 400 / 0 / 1dot]

A

B

C

D
51 By-pass: Normal-Thick A [-400 to 400 / 0 / 1dot]
53 By-pass: Normal-Thick B
55 By-pass: Normal-Thick C
58 By-pass: Normal-Thick D
101 Paper Supply 1: [-400 to 400 / 0 / 1dot]

Normal-Thick A
103 Paper Supply 1:

Normal-Thick B
105 Paper Supply 1:

Normal-Thick C
108 Paper Supply 1:

Normal-Thick D
151 Paper Supply 2:

Normal-Thick A
153 Paper Supply 2:

Normal-Thick B

Main SP Tables-3
155 Paper Supply 2:

Normal-Thick C
158 Paper Supply 2:

Normal-Thick D
3100 DRAMA DL Tool Connection Check
1 - [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
SP Mode Tables
3106 Short Paper Width Detection
1 Switching Modes [0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
2 Paper Width Detection [0.0 to 255.0 / 10.0 / 0.1]

Mask Value
3 Noise Detection Mask [0.0 to 255.0 / 10.0 / 0.1]

Value
3109 Test Pattern Output
5 Gap Section Correction [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]

1016 Black&White H1fH
6 Gap Section Correction

Pre

1016 H2fH2r

847 & 423 H2fH1f

847 & 423 H2fH4f

1016 H2fH1r & H2fH1f


Main SP Tables-3

1016 H1fH1r

847 & 423 H1fH2f

847 & 423 H1fH4f


20 Forward-Backward [1 to 3 / 1 / 1]
Adjustment Pattern
Printing
21 Printing Position [1 to 3 / 2 / 1]
Adjustment
22 Transport Roller [1 to 3 / 1 / 1]
Correction
100 Nozzle Check Pattern [1 to 3 / 1 / 1]

Printing (User)
101 Paper Feed Length [1 to 3 / 2 / 1]

Adjustment

Printing (Mj2)

Printing (Mj4)
104 2 by 2 Pattern (High [1 to 3 / 1 / 1]

Speed)
105 2 by 2 Pattern (Standard) [1 to 3 / 1 / 1]

Main SP Tables-3
3113 Pattern Notice Paper Thickness v
1 By-pass Feed
[0 to 255/0/1]
 Normal Paper: 0h
 Thin Paper: 1h
 Medium Thick Paper: 2h
 Thick 1: 3h
SP Mode Tables
 Thick 2: 4h
2 Paper Input 1
3 Paper Input 2
3114 Avoid Head Friction
1 By-pass Feed
2 Paper Input 1
3 Paper Input 2
[0 to 2/0/1]
 0: Normal height
 1: 1 mm
 2: 2 mm
3115 Pattern Notice Image Mode - Image Mode
1: Standard
2: Quality
3: High Speed
[0 to 255/0/1]

Main SP Tables-3
145 1016:color H1fA [-100 to 100 / 0 / 1]
146 1016:color H1fB
147 11016:color H1fC
148 1016:color H1fD
149 1016:color H1fE
150 1016:color H1fF
151 1016:color H1fG [-100 to 100 / 0 / 1]
152 1016:color H1fH
153 1016:color H1fI
154 1016:color H1fJ
155 1016:color H1fK
156 1016:color H1fL
157 847:H1fA [-100 to 100 / 0 / 1]
158 847:H1fB
159 847:H1fC
160 847:H1fD
161 847:H1fE
162 847:H1fF
163 847:H1fG [-100 to 100 / 0 / 1]
164 847:H1fH
165 847:H1fI
166 847:H1fJ
167 847:H1fK
168 847:H1fL

Main SP Tables-3
169 423:H1fA [-100 to 100 / 0 / 1]
170 423:H1fB
171 423:H1fC
172 423:H1fD
173 423:H1fE
174 423:H1fF
SP Mode Tables
175 423:H1fG [-100 to 100 / 0 / 1]
176 423:H1fH
177 423:H1fI
178 423:H1fJ
179 423:H1fK
180 423:H1fL
181 1016:Black&WhiteH2fA [-100 to 100 / 0 / 1]
182 1016:Black&WhiteH2fB
183 1016:Black&WhiteH2fC
184 1016:Black&WhiteH2fD
185 1016:Black&WhiteH2fE
186 1016:Black&WhiteH2fF
187 1016:Black&WhiteH2fG [-100 to 100 / 0 / 1]
188 1016:Black&WhiteH2fH
189 1016:Black&WhiteH2fI
190 1016:Black&WhiteH2fJ
191 1016:Black&WhiteH2fK
192 11016:Black&WhiteH2fL
193 1016:ColorH2rA [-100 to 100 / 0 / 1]
194 1016:ColorH2rB

Main SP Tables-3
195 1016:ColorH2rC
196 1016:ColorH2rD
197 1016:ColorH2rE
198 1016:ColorH2rF
199 1016:ColorH2rG [-100 to 100 / 0 / 1]
200 1016:ColorH2rH
201 1016:ColorH2rI
202 1016:ColorH2rJ
203 1016:ColorH2rK
204 1016:ColorH2rL
205 847:H2fA [-100 to 100 / 0 / 1]
206 847:H2fB
207 847:H2fC
208 847:H2fD
209 847:H2fE
210 847:H2fF
211 847:H2fG [-100 to 100 / 0 / 1]
212 847:H2fH
213 847:H2fI
214 847:H2fJ
215 847:H2fK
216 847:H2fL
217 423:H2fA [-100 to 100 / 0 / 1]
218 423:H2fB
219 423:H2fC
220 423:H2fD

Main SP Tables-3
221 423:H2fE
222 423:H2fF
223 423:H2fG [-100 to 100 / 0 / 1]
224 423:H2fH
225 423:H2fI
226 423:H2fJ
SP Mode Tables
227 423:H2fK
228 423:H2fL
229 423:H1fH4fA [-100 to 100 / 0 / 1]
230 423:H1fH4fB
231 423:H1fH4fC
232 423:H1fH4fD
233 423:H1fH4fE
234 423:H1fH4fF
235 423:H1fH4fG [-100 to 100 / 0 / 1]
236 423:H1fH4fH
237 423:H1fH4fI
238 423:H1fH4fJ
239 423:H1fH4fK
240 423:H1fH4fL
241 1016:H1fH4rA [-100 to 100 / 0 / 1]
242 1016:H1fH4rB
243 1016:H1fH4rC
244 1016:H1fH4rD
245 1016:H1fH4rE
246 1016:H1fH4rF

Main SP Tables-3
247 1016:H1fH4rG [-100 to 100 / 0 / 1]
248 1016:H1fH4rH
249 1016:H1fH4rI
250 1016:H1fH4rJ
251 1016:H1fH4rK
252 1016:H1fH4rL
1 1016:Black&WhiteH2rA [-100 to 100 / 0 / 1]
2 1016:Black&WhiteH2rB
3 1016:Black&WhiteH2rC
4 1016:Black&WhiteH2rD
5 1016:Black&WhiteH2rE
6 1016:Black&WhiteH2rF
7 1016:Black&WhiteH2rG
8 1016:Black&WhiteH2rH
9 1016:Black&WhiteH2rI
10 1016:Black&WhiteH2rJ
11 1016:Black&WhiteH2rK
12 1016:Black&WhiteH2rL
3132 ECB Correction Value
1 H1
[94 to 97/94/1 %]
2 H2
[94 to 97/94/1 %]

Main SP Tables-3
5 H5
3140 Ink Drying Time Setting
1 Normal Paper
[0 to 1800/0/1 sec]
2 Recycled Paper
[0 to 1800/0/1 sec]
SP Mode Tables
3 IJ Normal Paper
[0 to 1800/0/1 sec]
5 Translucent
[0 to 1800/0/1 sec]
6 Mat Film
[0 to 1800/15/1 sec]
7 Coated (CAD) Paper
[0 to 1800/0/1 sec]
8 Coated Paper
[0 to 1800/0/1 sec]
10 Special Paper
[0 to 1800/0/1 sec]
11 Photo Gloss Paper
[0 to 1800/0/1 sec]
106 Mat Film (Color)
[0 to 1800/15/1 sec]

Main SP Tables-3
3141 Paper Feed Part Correction
[0 to 1/0/1]
3144 Print Head Joint Amount Decr.
001 OFF/ON [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
3146 Sub Scan White Area Skip
These SP codes switch the skipping of blank areas on/off during printing and
scanning.
1 Printer 0:OFF/1:ON
[0 to 1/0/1] 0:OFF 1:ON
2 Copy 0:OFF/1:ON
[0 to 1/0/1] 0:OFF 1:ON
3147 Resolution Conversion:Printer
1 0: C2Process 1: [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
C1Compatibility
3147 Resolution Conversion:Copy
2 0: C2Process 1: [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
C1Compatibility
3147 Resolution Conversion:Printer
3 ContinuousExec.Count [1 to 100 / 4 / 1]
UpperLmt (600/300dpi)
3147 Resolution Conversion:Copy
4 ContinuousExec.Count [1 to 100 / 4 / 1]
UpperLmt (600/300dpi)

Main SP Tables-3
3148 No Discharge Compensation
1 Normal Paper OFF/ON [0 or 1 / 1 / 1]
2 Translucent Paper [0 or 1 / 1 / 1]
OFF/ON
3 Mat Film OFF/ON [0 or 1 / 1 / 1]
4 Coated (CAD) Paper [0 or 1 / 1 / 1]
SP Mode Tables
OFF/ON
5 Special Paper OFF/ON [0 or 1 / 1 / 1]
6 Photo Glossy Paper [0 or 1 / 1 / 1]

OFF/ON
3149 No Discharge: No. of Nozzles
1 Upper Limit (Auto Nozzle [0 to 32 / 5 / 1]

Check.: Std)
2 Upper Limit (Auto Nozzle [0 to 32 / 2 / 1]

Check.: High)
3150 No Discharge Threshold
1 Normal Paper: Speed [0 to 256 / 130 / 1]

Priority
2 Normal Paper: Standard [0 to 256 / 256 / 1]
3 Normal Paper: Quality [0 to 256 / 224 / 1]

Priority
4 Translucent Paoer: Speed [0 to 256 / 206 / 1]

Priority
5 Translucent Paper: [0 to 256 / 206 / 1]

Standard
6 Translucent Paper: [0 to 256 / 256 / 1]

Quality Priority

Main SP Tables-3
7 Mat Film: Speed Priority [0 to 256 / 175 / 1]
8 Mat Film: Standard [0 to 256 / 224 / 1]
9 Mat Film: Quality Priority [0 to 256 / 256 / 1]
10 Special Paper: Speed [0 to 256 / 224 / 1]

Priority
11 Special Paper: Standard [0 to 256 / 128 / 1]
12 Spesial Paper: Quality [0 to 256 / 256 / 1]

Priority
13 CoatedPaper (CAD): [0 to 256 / 201 / 1]

Standard
14 Coated Paper (CAD) : [0 to 256 / 201 / 1]

Quality Priority
15 Photo Glossy Paper: [0 to 256 / 127 / 1]

Standard
16 Photo Glossy Paper: [0 to 256 / 127 / 1]

Quality Priority
17 Normal Paper: Speed [0 to 256 / 130 / 1]

Priority (Drawing)
18 Coated Paper (CAD): [0 to 256 / 130 / 1]

Speed Priority (Drawing)
19 Coted(CAD) Paper Speed [0 to 256 / 130 / 1]

Priority
3151 4-valued Process Parameter
1 Translucent [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]

Main SP Tables-3
3160 Carriage LED
1 ON/OFF [0 to 3 / 1 / 1]
2 Control High Light Level [1 to 99 / 80 / 1]
3 Control Medium Light [1 to 99 / 50 / 1]

Level
4 Control Low Light Level [0 ot 1 / 0 / 1]
SP Mode Tables

Main SP Tables-4
3.5.1 SP4-XXX
4008 Scanner Sub Scan - Magnification Adjustment
[-0.9 to 0.9/0.0/0.1%]
4010 Scanner Sub Scan
1 Leading Edge Registration Adjustment
[-10 to 10/0.0/ 0.1 mm]

 A higher setting "+" shifts the image down (against the sub scan
direction).
 A lower setting "-" shifts the image up (with the sub scan direction).
2 Trailing Edge Registration Adjustment
[-10 to 10/0/0.1 mm]

 A higher setting "+" shifts the image down (against the sub scan
direction).
 A lower setting "-" shifts the image up with the sub scan direction).
4011 Scanner Main Scan - Registration Adjustment
[-4 to 4/0.0/0.1 mm]

 A higher setting "+" shifts the image away from the right edge of the
paper as it exits for a wider margin.
 A lower setting "-" shifts the image to toward the right edge of the paper
as it exits for a narrower margin.

Main SP Tables-4
4012 Scanner Edge Margin
5 DF: Leading Edge
[0 to 9/0.0/0.1 mm]
6 DF: Trailing Edge
[0 to 9/0.0/0.1 mm]
7 DF: Left Edge
SP Mode Tables
[0 to 9/0.0/0.1 mm]
8 DF: Right Edge
[0 to 9/0.0/0.1 mm]
4013 Scanner Free Run
1 Execute
[OFF] [ON]
2 Dummy Page Interval Setting
[0 to 25/0.9/0.1 sec]
3 Dummy Document Length Setting
[0.2 to 30/0.6/0.1 m]
4101 Scanner Main Scan
1 Magnification Adjustment
[-0.9 to 0.9/0/0.1%]

Main SP Tables-4
4417 IPU Test Pattern Setting - Pattern Selection
[0 to 8/0/1]
No. Pattern Name
*0 Scanned Image
2 Color Patch 16
3 Grid Pattern A
4606 White Level Adjust
1 Gain Adjustment [0 to 1023 / 860 / 1 digit]
2 LED Adjustment [0 to 1023 / 800 / 1 digit]
3 LED Adjustment(Gain [0 to 1023 / 450 / 1 digit]

Default)
4700 FPGA ID Indication – Volans

Main SP Tables-4
4709 Gray Balance Adj Value: Current
[-1024 to 1023/0/1]
 Display format: Hexadecimal
 The values are stored after the machine is cycled off/on.
 The settings are stored in the RI2005-SIB register
1 to 3 CIS1: G, R, B
SP Mode Tables
10 to 12 CIS4: G, R, B
13 to15 CIS5: G, R, B
4820 Lamp Defective - Lamp Error Flag
0: Normal 1: Abnormal
Bit (7) 0000 0000 (0)
0 CIS 1 lamp
1 CIS 2 lamp
2 CIS 3 lamp
3 CIS 4 lamp
4 CIS 5 lamp
4903 Filter Setting
1 Ind Dot Erase: Text
[0 to 7/ 4/1]
0 (Weakest), 4 (Medium: Default), 7 (Strongest)
2 Ind Dot Erase : Generation Copy
[0 to 7/4/1]

Main SP Tables-4
3 Ind Dot Erase : Drawing
[0 to 7/0/1]
4961 Document Length Adjustment
1 Input Tolerance: 210mm
[-9.9 to +9.9/0.0/0.1 mm ]
2 Input Tolerance: 1000 mm
[-9.9 to +9.9/0.0/0.1 mm]
3 Check Document Length
4965 Scan Speed Adjustment
1 Leading Edge
[-1 to 0/-0.9/0.1%]
2 Position
[0 to 200/112/1 mm]
3 Trailing Edge
[-1 to 1/0.3/0.1%]
4966 Scan Speed Adjustment
[5 to 170/80/0.1 mm/s]
4972 Scan Correction
1 CIS Joint Adjustment CIS1-2 Main Scan
[0 to 656/241/1]
2 CIS Joint Adjustment CIS2 Main Scan
[0 to 656/242/1]

Main SP Tables-4
[0 to 656/243/1]
[0 to 656/425/1]
[0 to 656/426/1]
SP Mode Tables
6 CIS Joint Adjustment CIS1-2 Sub Scan
[0 to 2815/1860/1]
7 CIS Joint Adjustment CIS2 Sub Scan
[0 to 255/16/1]
[0 to 2815/1860/1]
[0 to 255/84/1]
[0 to 2815/1860/1]
4973 Scan Correction – CIS Scan Setting Difference in Grade Adj.
[0 to 2/2/1]
0: No adjustment
1: Simple adjustment at joints
2: Gradation adjustment at joint

Main SP Tables-4
4975 Prevent Document Fall
[0 to 1/0/1]
0: The scanner exit roller does not hold the leading edge
1: The scanner exit roller does not release the trailing edge of the original if it is
longer than 450 mm. The original remains in the nip of the exit rollers until it is
removed manually.
4978 Scan LED Wavelength
1 CIS1:R [400.0 to 700.0 / 620.0 / 0.1]
2 CIS1:G [400.0 to 700.0 / 530.0 / 0.1 nm]
3 CIS1:B [400.0 to 700.0 / 465.0 / 0.1 nm]
4 CIS2:R [400.0 to 700.0 / 620.0 / 0.1]
5 CIS2:G [400.0 to 700.0 / 530.0 / 0.1 nm]
6 CIS2:B [400.0 to 700.0 / 465.0 / 0.1 nm]
7 CIS3:R [400.0 to 700.0 / 620.0 / 0.1]
8 CIS3:G [400.0 to 700.0 / 530.0 / 0.1 nm]
9 CIS3:B [400.0 to 700.0 / 465.0 / 0.1 nm]
10 CIS4:R [400.0 to 700.0 / 620.0 / 0.1]
11 CIS4:G [400.0 to 700.0 / 530.0 / 0.1 nm]
12 CIS4:B [400.0 to 700.0 / 465.0 / 0.1 nm]
13 CIS5:R [400.0 to 700.0 / 620.0 / 0.1]
14 CIS5:G [400.0 to 700.0 / 530.0 / 0.1 nm]
15 CIS5:B [400.0 to 700.0 / 465.0 / 0.1 nm]

Main SP Tables-4
4992 Document Feed Speed Adjustment - ON/OFF
[0 to 1/0/1]
4994 Document Feed Speed Adjustment
[0 to 15000/0/1]
1 Position 1
SP Mode Tables
2 Position 2
3 Position 3
4 Position 4
5 Position 5
6 Position 6
7 Position 7
8 Position 8
9 Position 9
10 Position 10
11 Position 11
12 Position 12
13 Position 13
14 Position 14
15 Position 15

Main SP Tables-5
3.6.1 SP5-XXX
5009 Add display language
201 1-8 [1 to 255 / 0 / 1]
202 9-16
203 17-24
204 25-32
205 33-40
206 41-48
207 49-56
5024 mm/inch Display Selection
Europe/Asia model: [0 = mm/1 = inch]

American model: [0 = mm/1 = inch]
5045 Accounting Counter CTL
1 Counter Method
[0 to 7/0/1]
0: Development counter (black prints)
1: Paper counter. Shows the total page counts
2 Counter Unit
[0 to 8/0/1]
0 Meters
1 Yards
2 Feet
3 Meters2

Main SP Tables-5
4 Yards2
5 Feet2
6 A3=1 Surface area count
7 0.1 meters Only for counting devices by user.
8 01. yards
5051 Toner Refill Detection Display Not Used
SP Mode Tables
[0 to 1/0/1] [0:ON] [1:OFF]
5055 Display IP Address
[0 to 1/0/1] [OFF] [ON]
5062 Part Replacement Alert Display
[0 to 1/0/1] [0: No display] [1: Display]

Note: This display is enabled with SP7624.
1 Maintenance Kit
2 Left Ink Sump
3 Right Ink Sump
9 Print Head Unit: Black
10 Print Head Unit: Color
5066 PM Parts Display
[*0: No Display] [1: Display]

Main SP Tables-5
5067 Part Replacement Operation Type
[0 to 1/0/1] [0: Service] [1: User]
1 Maintenance Kit
2 Left Ink Sump
3 Right Ink Sump
9 Print Head Unit (Black)
10 Print Head Unit (Color)
5071 Set Bypass Paper Size Display
[0 to 1/0/1] 0:Disabled 1:Enabled
5075 USB Keyboard
[0 to 1/0/1] 0:Disabled 1:Enabled
5083 LED Light Switch Setting
[0 to 1/0/1] 0:OFF 1:ON
5101 Copy automatic clear timer setting
202 0:ON 1:OFF
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1]

Main SP Tables-5
5113 Optional Counter Type
1 Default Optional Counter Type
[0 to 8/0/1]
0: None
1: Key Card (RK3, 4)
2: Key Card Down
3: Pre-paid Card
SP Mode Tables
4: Coin Rack
5: MF Key Card
8: Key Counter + Vendor
Note: Items 1, 2, 3, 5, 5 are for Japan Only
2 External Optional Counter Type
[0 to 3/0/1]
 0: None
 1: Expansion Device 1
5114 Optional Counter I/F
0: OFF, 1: ON
5118 Disable Copying
Temporarily denies access to the machine. Japan Only

[0 to 1/0/1]
0: Release for normal operation
1: Prohibit access to machine

Main SP Tables-5
5120 Mode Clear Opt. Counter Removal
Do not change. Japan Only

[0 to 2/ 0/1]
0: Yes. Normal reset
1: Standby. Resets before job start/after completion
2: No. Normally no reset
5121 Counter Up Timing
[0 to 1/1/1]
0: Feed count, 1: No feed count
5127 APS OFF Mode
[0 to 1/0/1]
0: On, 1: Off
5128 Code Mode With Key/Card Option Japan Only
5162 App. Switch Method
[0: Soft Key Set] [1: Hard Key Set]
5169 CE Login
[0 to 1/0/1]
0: Off. Printer bit switches cannot be adjusted.
1: On. Printer bit switches can be adjusted.
5180 Change Count Method Japan Only
5188 Copy NV Version

Main SP Tables-5
5191 Mode Set
[0 to 1/1/0]
1: Allowed 0: Not allowed
5195 Limitless SW Not Used
[0 to 1/0/1]
0: Productivity priority
SP Mode Tables
1: Tray priority
5227 Page Numbering
201 Allow Page No. Entry
[2 to 9 / 9 / 1]
202 Zero Surplus Setting
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
5305 Auto Off Set
[0 to 1/0/1]
0: On (Auto Off cannot be released
1: Off (Auto Off can be released)
5307 Daylight Saving Time
1 Setting [0 to 1/0/1]
0: Disable, 1: Enable
3 Rule Set (Start) The start of summer time.
4 Rule Set (End) The end of summer time.

Main SP Tables-5
5402 Access Control Not Used
101-170 SDJK1 Limit Settings
5404 User Code Count Clear
[EXECUTE]
5411 LDAP Certification
4 Simplified Authentication
[0 or 1/1/1] 1: On, 0: Off
5 Password Null Not Permit
[0 or 1/0/-]
0: Password NULL not permitted.
1: Password NULL permitted.
6 Detail Option
[0 to 0xff/0/0x01] 0: Off 1:On
5412 Krb Certification
(7) 00000000 (0)

Main SP Tables-5
5413 Lockout Setting
1 Lockout On/Off
[0 or 1/0/-]
0: Off, 1: On
2 Lockout Threshold
[1 to 10/5/1/step]
SP Mode Tables
3 Cancellation On/Off
[0 or 1/0/-]
0: Off (no wait time, lockout not cancelled)
1: On (system waits, cancels lockout if correct user ID and password are
entered.
4 Cancellation Time
[1 to 999/60/1 min./step]
5414 Access Mitigation
1 Mitigation On/Off
[0 or 1/0/1]
0: Off, 1: On
2 Mitigation Time
[0 to 60/15/1 min./step]
5415 Password Attack
1 Permissible Number
[0 to 100/30/1 attempt/step]
2 Detect Time
[1 to 10/5/1 sec./step]

Main SP Tables-5
5416 Access Information
1 Access Use Max Num
[50 to 200/200/1 users/step]
2 Access Password Max Num
[50 to 200/200/1 password/step]
3 Monitor Interval
[1 to 10/3/1 sec./step]
5417 Access Attack
1 Access Permissible Number
[0 to 500/100/1/step]
2 Attack Detect Time
[10 to 30/10/1 sec./step]
3 Productivity Fall Wait
[0 to 9/3/1 sec./step]
4 Attack Max Number
[50 to 200/200/1 attempt/step]
5420 User Authentication
1 Copy
[0 or 1/ 0 /1]
0: On, 1: Off
2 Color Security Setting
11 Document Server
[0 or 1/ 0 /1]
0: On, 1: Off

Main SP Tables-5
31 Scanner
[0 or 1/ 0 /1]
0: On, 1: Off
41 Printer
[0 or 1/ 0 /1]
0: On, 1: Off
51 SDK1 [0 or 1/0/1] 0: ON. 1: OFF
SP Mode Tables
61 SDK2
71 SDK3
81 Browser
[0 to 1/0/1] 0:Authenticate 1:Do not authenticate
5430 Auth Dialog Message Change
1 Message Change On/Off
2 Message Text Download
3 Message Text ID
[0 to 1/0/1
0: OFF
1: ON
5431 External Auth User Preset
[0 or 1/1/1]
0: Not allowed copying, 1: Allowed copying
10 Tag
11 Entry
12 Group
20 Mail
32 Folder

Main SP Tables-5
33 ProtectCode
34 SmtpAuth
35 LdapAuth
36 Smb Ftp Fldr Auth
37 AcntAcl
38 Document Acl
40 CertCrypt
5481 Authentication Error Code
1 System Log Disp
[0 or 1/ 0 /1]
0: Off, 1: On
2 Panel Disp
[0 or 1/ 1 /1]
0: Off, 1: On
5490 MF Key Card
1 Job Permit Setting
2 Count Mode Setting
[0 to 1/0/1]
1: Allowed
0: Not allowed
1: Certification executes with a user code (9999 9999). Printing executes and
the counter increments for the user code.
0: Certification executes without a user code but printing is cancelled.
5491 Optional Counter Not Used

Main SP Tables-5
5501 PM Alarm CTL
1 PM Alarm Level
[0 to 9999/0/1 step]
0: Alarm off
1 to 9999: Alarm goes off when Value (1 to 9999) > PM counter
2 Original Count Alarm
SP Mode Tables
[0 to 1/0/1]
0: No alarm sounds
1: Alarm sounds after the number of originals passing through the ARDF >
10,000
5504 Jam Alarm Japan Only
[0 to 3/3/1 step]
0: Zero (Off)
1: Low (2.5K jams)
2: Medium (3K jams)
3: High (6K jams)
5507 Supply/CC Alarm
1 Power Supply Alarm
3 Toner Supply Alarm
80 Toner Call Timing
81 Toner Call Threshold
97 Interval: 841 mm
98 Interval: 594 mm
99 Interval: 420 mm
100 Interval: 297 mm

Main SP Tables-5
128 Interval: Other
129 Interval: A0
130 Interval:A1
132 Interval: A3
133 Interval: A4
138 Interval: B1
139 Interval: B2
141 Interval: B4
160 Interval: DLT
164 Interval: LG
165 Interval: Foolscap
166 Interval: LT
175 Interval: 12x18
225 Interval: 36 inch
238 Interval: 8.5 inch

Main SP Tables-5
5508 CC Call Japan Only
1 Jam Remains [0 to 1/1]

0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
2 Continuous Jams
3 Continuous Door Open
11 Jam Detection: Time Length
[03 to 30/1]
SP Mode Tables
This setting is enabled only when SP5508-4 is enabled (set to 1).
12 Jam Detection Continuous Count
[02 to 10/1]
This setting is enabled only when SP5508-4 is enabled (set to 1).
13 Door Open: Time Length
[03 to 30/1]
This setting is enabled only when SP5508-4 is enabled (set to "1").
5515 SC/Alarm Setting
1 SC Call
2 Service Parts Near End Call
3 Service Parts End Call
4 User Call
[0 to 1/1/1] 0: Off 1: On
6 Communication Test Call
7 Machine Information Notice
8 Alarm Notice
[0 or 1/1/1 ] 0: Off 1: On
9 Non-Genuine Toner Alarm
10 Supply Automatic Ordering Call

Main SP Tables-5
11 Supply Management Report Call
[0 to 1/1/1]
12 Jam/Door Open Call
[0 to 1/1/1]
50 Timeout:Manual Call
[1 to 255 / 5 / 1 min]
51 Timeout:Other Call
[1 to 255 / 10 / 1 min]
5618 Color Mode Display Selection
[0 to 1/0/1] 0:EXP 1:DOM

0: Presents 5 selections:
 Auto color select
 Full color
 B&W
 2-color
 Single-color.
5728 Network Setting
1 NAT Machine Port1 [0 to 65535 / 49101 / 1]
2 NAT UI Port1 [0 to 65535 / 55101 / 1]
4 NAT UI Port2 [0 to 65535 / 55102 / 1]
6 NAT UI Port3 [0 to 65535 / 55103 / 1]
8 NAT UI Port4 [0 to 65535 / 55104 / 1]

Main SP Tables-5
10 NAT UI Port5 [0 to 65535 / 55105 / 1]
12 NAT UI Port6 [0 to 65535 / 55106/ 1]
14 NAT UI Port7 [0 to 65535 / 55107 / 1]
SP Mode Tables
16 NAT UI Port8 [0 to 65535 / 55108 / 1]
18 NAT UI Port9 [0 to 65535 / 55109 / 1]
20 NAT UI Port10 [0 to 65535 / 55110 / 1]
5728 Network Setting
101 PacketCapture
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
102 PacketCapture:mode
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
103 PacketCapture:interface
[0 to 3 / 0 / 3]
104 PacketCapture:length
[54 to 65535 / 128 / -]
105 PacketCapture:broadcast
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
106 PacketCapture:specify port
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
107 PacketCapture:portnumber
[0 to 65535 / 0 / -]

Main SP Tables-5
108 PacketCapture:time
[0 to 0xffffffff / 128 / 1]
5730 Extended Function Setting Not Used
5731 Counter Effect Not Used
5734 PDF Setting
[0 to 1/0/1] 0:Setting not fixed 1:Setting fixed

 0: Allows setting clear write PDF, PDF/A, or encoded PDF on the
application screen.
 1: PDF/A can be selected on the application screen, but PDF, Clear Write
PDF, or encoded PDF are grayed-out and cannot be selected.
5745 DeemedPowerConsumption
211 Controller Standby [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1]
212 STR
213 Main Power Off
214 Scanning and Printing
215 Printing
216 Scanning
217 Engine Standby
218 Low Power Consumption
219 Silent condition
220 Heater Off

Main SP Tables-5
5748 OpePanel Setting
101 Op Type Action Setting
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
201 Cheetah Panel Connect Setting
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
SP Mode Tables
5749 Import/Export
1 Export
101 Import
5751 Key Event Encryption Setting
001 Password [0 to 255 / 0 /- ]
5752 Copy:WebAPI Setting
001 Copy:FlairAPI Setting [0 to 255 / 0 /1 ]
bit0 FlairAPI server start up 0:Off 1: On
bit1 Access permission from FlairAPI 0: Disabled 1: Enabled

external device
bit2 Switching dedicated IPv6 0: IPv6 only 1: IPv4

priority
bit3 Remote UI function 0: Disabled 1: Enabled
bit4 Not used
bit5 Not used
bit6 Not used
bit7 Not used

Main SP Tables-5
5755 Display Setting
1 Disp Administrator Password Change Scrn
2 Hide Administrator Password Change Scrn
5758 RemoteUI Setting
1 Authentication [0 or 1 / 0 /1 ]
5761 SmartOperationPanel Setting
1 Restore the default [0 to 255 / 0 /1 ]

Home screen
5801 Memory Clear
1 All Clear
2 Engine
3 SCS
4 IMH Memory Clr
5 MCS
6 Copier application
7 Fax application Not Used
8 Printer application
9 Scanner application
10 Web Service
11 NCS (Network Control Service)
14 Clear DCS Setting
15 Clear UCS Setting
16 MIRS Setting

Main SP Tables-5
17 CCS
18 SRM Memory Clr
19 LCS
20 Web Uapl
21 ECS
25 websys
SP Mode Tables
26 PLN
27 SAS
28 Rest WebService
5802 Carriage Free Run
11 Release Paper Feed Pressure: Upper
12 Release Paper Feed Pressure: Lower
5803 Input Check
1 Paper Inlet Sensor: Upper
2 Paper Inlet Sensor: Lower
3 Paper Exit Sensor: Upper
4 Paper Exit Sensor: Lower
5 Front Register Sensor
6 By-pass Sensor
7 Output Sensor
10 Paper Feed Pressure Release Sensor: Upper
11 Paper Feed Pressure Release Sensor: Lower
12 Register Pressure Release Sensor: Lower
13 Residual Amount. Sensor Upper

Main SP Tables-5
14 Residual Amount. Sensor Lower
15 Residual Qty. Ratio M
16 Residual Qty. Ratio Y
17 Main Scan Encoder Sensor
18 Sub Scan Encoder Sensor
19 Roll End Sensor/Upper
20 Roll End Sensor/Lower
21 Front Cover Pre-Sensor
22 Total Counter
23 Separation claw position sensor
30 Outside Temperature
31 Outside Humidity
41 Head Rising Sensor 1
43 Head Temperature Sensor: Color
45 Head Temperature Sensor: Black
48 DRESS Sensor 1
49 DRESS Sensor 2
50 Front Cover Sensor Left
51 Front Cover Sensor Right
52 Cartridge Cover Sensor
53 Roll Paper Cover Sensor
54 Waste Ink Box Cover Sensor
55 Waste Ink Box Setting Sensor
60 Sub Scan HP Sensor
61 Cutter Sensor Right

Main SP Tables-5
62 Cutter Sensor Left
70 Maintenance Suction Unit HP Detection Sensor
71 MaintenDehumidify Unit HP Detection Sensor
72 MaintenanceCleaner Slide HP Detection Sensor
91 Ink Cartridge Sensor: Y
92 Ink Cartridge Sensor: M
SP Mode Tables
93 Ink Cartridge Sensor: C
94 Ink Cartridge Sensor: K
150 MainFillerSens Front
151 MainFillerSens Rear
152 OCFS HT1
153 OCFS HT2
154 OCFS HT3
155 OCFS HT4
156 OCFS HT5
157 OCFS HT6
158 OCFS HT7
159 INKEND SENSOR K
160 INKEND SENSOR C
161 INKEND SENSOR M
162 INKEND SENSOR Y
201 Original Width Sensor:A0
205 Original Width Sensor:B1

Main SP Tables-5
209 Original Width Sensor:914mm
210 Original Width Sensor:30"
211 Original Set Sensor
212 Original Registration Sensor
213 Original Exit Sensor
214 Original Emergency Stop Sensor
215 Original Feed Unit Open Sensor
250 Auto Nozzle Check Wiper Pos Detect HP Sen
251 Auto Nozzle Check Wiper Pos Detect
5804 Output Check
51 Paper Feed Motor: Upper
52 Paper Feed Motor Speed: Upper
53 Paper Feed Motor: Lower
54 Paper Feed Motor Speed: Lower
55 Paper Feed Clutch: Upper
56 Paper Feed Clutch: Lower
59 Sub Scan Motor
60 Sub Scan Motor Speed
63 Move Cutter Toward Right
64 Move Cutter Toward Left
65 Start Suction Fan
66 Suction Fan Speed

Main SP Tables-5
67 Suction Fan Revolution
68 MCU Cooling Fan
69 PSU Cooling Fan
71 DRESS LED On
72 Manual feed clutch
100 Auto Nozzle Check LED On
SP Mode Tables
110 Air Release Solenoid On/Off
111 Carriage LED On/Off
112 Carriage LED Duty Setting
201 Document
211 CIS_LED_R
212 CIS_LED_G
213 CIS_LED_B
5811 Machine Serial Number
1 Set
[0 to 255/0/1]
2 Display
[0 to 255/0/1]
5812 Service Tel. No. Setting
1 Service
2 Facsimile
3 Supply
4 Operation

Main SP Tables-5
5816 Remote Service CTL
1 I/F Setting
[0 to 2/2/1 /step]
0: Remote service off
1: CSS remote service on
2: @Remote service on
2 CE Call
[0 or 1/0/1 /step]
0: Start of the service
1: End of the service
NOTE: This SP is activated only when SP 5816-1 is set to "2".
3 Function Flag
[0 to 1/0/1 /step]
NOTE: This SP setting is changed to "1" after @Remote registor has been
completed.
7 SSL Disable
[0 to 1/0/1 /step]
0: Uses the RCG certification
1: Does no use the RCG certification
8 RCG Connect Timeout
[1 to 90/30/1 second /step]
9 RCG Write Timeout
10 RCG Read Timeout
11 Port 80 Enable
[0 or 1/0/– ]

Main SP Tables-5
13 RFU (Remote Frimware Update) Timing
[0 or 1/1/– ]
 0: RFU is executed whenever update request is received.
 1: RFU is executed only when the machine is in the sleep mode.
14 RCG Error Cause
[0 to 1/0/1] 0:Normal condition 1:Error

 If "1" is displayed, this means that the authentication from client to server
SP Mode Tables
failed when the network re-booted.
 To restore normal operation, cycle the machine off/on to return a "0"
(normal condition).
21 RCG – C Registed
0: Installation not completed

1: Installation completed
23 Connect Type (N/M/3G)
[0 or 2/0/1 /step
0: Internet connection
1: Dial-up connection
2: Wirelss lan connection
62 Use Proxy
63 Proxy Host
64 Proxy Port Number
65 Proxy User Name
66 Proxy Password
67 CERT: Up State
0 The certification used by Embedded RC Gate is set correctly.
1 The certification request (setAuthKey) for update has been received

from the GW URL and certification is presently being updated.
2 The certification update is completed and the GW URL is being notified

of the successful update.

Main SP Tables-5
3 The certification update failed, and the GW URL is being notified of the
failed update.
4 The period of the certification has expired and new request for an
update is being sent to the GW URL.
11 A rescue update for certification has been issued and a rescue

certification setting is in progress for the rescue GW connection.
12 The rescue certification setting is completed and the GW URL is being

notified of the certification update request.
13 The notification of the request for certification update has completed

successfully, and the system is waiting for the certification update
request from the rescue GW URL.
14 The notification of the certification request has been received from the
rescue GW controller, and the certification is being stored.
15 The certification has been stored, and the GW URL is being notified of
the successful completion of this event.
16 The storing of the certification has failed, and the GW URL is being
notified of the failure of this event.
17 The certification update request has been received from the GW URL,
the GW URL was notified of the results of the update after it was
completed, but a certification error has been received, and the rescue
certification is being recorded.
18 The rescue certification of No. 17 has been recorded, and the GW URL
is being notified of the failure of the certification update.
68 CERT: Error
0 Normal. There is no request for certification update in progress.
1 Request for certification update in progress. The current certification

has expired.
2 An SSL error notification has been issued. Issued after the certification
has expired.
3 Notification of shift from a common authentication to an individual

certification.

Main SP Tables-5
4 Notification of a common certification without ID2.
5 Notification that no certification was issued.
6 Notification that GW URL does not exist.
69 CERT: Up ID
83 Firmware Up Status
85 Firm Up User Check
SP Mode Tables
86 Firmware Size
87 CERT: Macro Ver.
88 CERT: PAC Ver.
Displays the PAC version of the @Remote certification.
89 CERT: ID2 Code
90 CERT: Subject
91 CERT: Serial No.
92 CERT: Issuer
93 CERT: Valid Start
94 CERT: Valid End
102 CERT: Encrypt Level
[1 to 2/1/1]
103 Client Communication Method
[0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
104 Client Communication Limit
[1 to 7 / 7 / 1]
115 Network Information Waiting timer
150 Selection Country
Not used

Main SP Tables-5
151 Line Type Automatic Judgment
Not used
152 Line Type Judgment Result
Not used
153 Selection Dial/Push
Not used
154 Outside Line/Outgoing Number
Not used
156 Dial Up User Name
Not used
157 Dial Up Password
Not used
161 Local Phone Number
Not used
162 Connection Timing Adjustment: Incoming
Not used
163 Access Point
Not used
164 Line Connecting
Not used
173 Modem Serial Number
Not used
174 Retransmission Limit
Not used

Main SP Tables-5
187 FAX TX Priorit
Not used
190 3G DongleID
199 ppp Connect Timer
200 Manual Polling
Not used
SP Mode Tables
201 Regist: Status
 0: Neither the @Remote device nor Embedded RCG Gate is set.

 1: The Embedded RCG Gate is being set. Only Box registration is
completed. In this status, @Remote device cannot communicate with this
device.
 2: The Embedded RCG Gate is set. In this status, the @Remote device
cannot communicate with this device.
 3: The @Remote device is being set. In this status the Embedded RCG
Gate cannot be set.
 4: The @Remote module has not started.
202 Letter Number
Allows entry of the request number needed for the Embedded RCG Gate.
203 Confirm Execute
Executes the confirmation request to the @Remote Gateway.
204 Confirm Result
0: Succeeded
1: Confirmation number error
2: Registration in progress
3: Proxy error (proxy enabled)
4: Proxy error (proxy disabled)
5: Proxy error (Illegal user name or password)
6: Communication error
7: Certification update error
8: Other error
9: Confirmation executing

Main SP Tables-5
205 Confirm Place
206 Register Execute
207 Register Result
0: Succeeded
2: Registration in progress
3: Proxy error (proxy enabled)
4: Proxy error (proxy disabled)
5: Proxy error (Illegal user name or password)
6: Communication error
7: Certification update error
8: Other error
9: Registration executing
208 Error Code
Cause Code Meaning
Illegal Modem -11001 Chat parameter error

Parameter
-11002 Chat execution error
-11003 Unexpected error
Operation Error, -12002 Inquiry, registration attempted without

Incorrect Setting acquiring device status.
-12003 Attempted registration without execution

of an inquiry and no previous
registration.
-12004 Attempted setting with illegal entries for

certification and ID2.
- -12005 @Remote communication is prohibited.

The device has an Embedded RC
gate-related problem.
-12006 A confirmation request was made after

the confirmation had been already
completed.

Main SP Tables-5
-12007 The request number used at registration

was different from the one used at
confirmation.
-12008 Update certification failed because

mainframe was in use.
208 Error Caused by -2385 Attempted dial up overseas without the

Response from GW correct international prefix for the
URL telephone number.
SP Mode Tables
-2387 Not supported at the Service Center
-2389 Database out of service
-2390 Program out of service
-2391 Two registrations for same device
-2392 Parameter error
- -2393 RCG device not managed
-2394 Device not managed
-2395 Box ID for RCG device is illegal
-2396 Device ID for RCG device is illegal
-2397 Incorrect ID2 format
-2398 Incorrect request number format
209 Instl Clear
240 CommErrorTime
241 CommErrorCode 1
[0 to 0xffffffff / 0x00000000 / 1]
242 CommErrorCode 2
[0 to 0xffffffff / 0x00000000 / 1]
243 CommErrorCode 3
[0 to 0xffffffff / 0x00000000 / 1]

Main SP Tables-5
244 CommErrorState 1
[0 to 0xffff / 0x0000 / 1]
[0 to 0xffff / 0x0000 / 1]
[0 to 0xffff / 0x0000 / 1]
247 SSL Error Count
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
248 Other Err Count
250 CommLog Print Prints the communication log.
5821 Remote Service Address CTL
2 RCG IP Address
3 RCG Port
[0 to 65 535/443/1]
4 RCG URL Path
5 RCG IPv6 Address
6 RCG IPv6 URL Path
7 RCG Host Name
8 RCG Host URL Path
5824 NVRAM Data Upload
[EXECUTE]
5825 NVRAM Data Download
[EXECUTE]

Main SP Tables-5
5828 Network Setting CTL
039 User Class
040 Class Id
50 1284 Compatibility (Centro)
[0 or 1/1/1/step]
52 ECP (Centro)
SP Mode Tables
[0 or 1/1/1/step]
Note: This SP is activated only when SP5-828-50 is set to "1".
65 Job Spooling
[0 or 1/0/1/step]
66 Job Spooling Clear: Start Time
0: ON (Data is cleared)
1: OFF (Automatically printed)
69 Job Spooling (Protocol)
0: Validates
1: Invalidates
bit0: LPR
bit1: FTP
bit2: IPP
bit3: SMB
bit4: BMLinkS
bit5: DIPRINT
bit6: sftp
bit7: wsprnd
87 Protocol usage
90 TELNET (0: OFF 1: ON)
[0 or 1/1/– ]

Main SP Tables-5
91 Web (0: OFF 1: ON)
[0 or 1/1/– ]
145 Active IPv6 Link Local Address
147 Active Ipv6 Stateless Address 1
156 Ipv6 Manual Address
158 Ipv6 Gateway Address
161 Ipv6 Stateless Auto Setting
[0 or 1/1/1 /step]
219 IPsec Aggressive Mode Setting
236 Web Item Visible
[0 x 0000 to 0 x ffff/0 x ffff] 0: Not displayed, 1: Displayed

 bit0: Net RICOH
 bit1: Consumable Supplier
 bit2-15: Reserved (all)
237 Web shopping Link Visible
[0 to 1/1/1]
0: Not display, 1:Display
238 Web Supplies Link visible
[0 to 1/1/1]
239 Web Link 1 Name

Main SP Tables-5
240 Web Link 1 URL
241 Web Link 1 visible
[0 to 1/1/1]
242 Web Link 2 Name Same as "-239"
243 Web Link 2 URL Same as "-240"
244 Web Link 2 visible Same as "-241"
SP Mode Tables
249 DHCPv6 DUID
5832 HDD
1 HDD Formatting (All)
2 HDD Formatting (IMH)
3 HDD Formatting (Thumbnail/OCR)
4 HDD Formatting (Job Log)
5 HDD Formatting (Printer Fonts)
6 HDD Formatting (User Info)
7 Mail RX Data
8 Mail TX Data
9 HDD Formatting (Data for Design)
10 HDD Formatting (Log)
11 HDD Formatting (Ridoc I/F) (for Ridoc Desk Top Binder)
12 HDD Formatting (Thumbnail)

Main SP Tables-5
5840 IEEE 802.11
6 Channel MAX
[1 to 14/1]
7 Channel MIN
[1 to 14/1]
11 WEP Key Select
[0 to 1/1]
0: If the initiator receives another login request while logging in, the request is
refused.
1: If the initiator receives another login request while logging in, the request is
refused and the initiator logs out.
Note: Displayed only when the wireless LAN card is installed.
45 WPA Debug Lvl1
[1 to 3/3/1] 1: Info, 2: warning, 3: error

This SP is displayed only when the IEEE802.11 card is installed.
46 11w
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
47 PSK Set Type
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
5841 Supply Name Setting
1 Toner Name Setting: Black
2 Toner Name Setting: Cyan
3 Toner Name Setting: Yellow
4 Toner Name Setting: Magenta
9 WasteTonerBottle

Main SP Tables-5
5844 USB
1 Transfer Rate
[Full Speed] [Auto Change]
4 Device Release Number.
[0000 to 9999/1]
Enter as a decimal number. NCS converts the number to hexadecimal
SP Mode Tables
number recognized as the BCD.
5 Fixed USB Port
[0 to 2/0/1/step]
0: Disable
1: Level 1
2: Level 2
6 PnP Model Name
7 PnP Serial Number
8 Mac Supply Level
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1]
100 Notify Unsupport
[0 or 1/1/1]
0: Not displayed,
5845 Delivery Server Setting CTL
1 FTP Port No.
[0 to 65535/3670/1 /step]
2 IP Address (Primary)
Range: 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255
6 Delivery Error Display Time

Main SP Tables-5
8 IP Address (Secondary)
Range: 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255
9 Delivery Server Model
[0 to 4/ 0/1 /step]
0: Unknown
1: SG1 Provided
2: SG1 Package
3: SG2 Provided
4: SG2 Package
10 Delivery Svr Capability
[0 to 255/0/1 /step]
Bit7 = 1 Comment information exits
Bit6 = 1 Direct specification of mail address possible
Bit5 = 1 Mail RX confirmation setting possible
Bit4 = 1 Address book automatic update function exists
Bit3 = 1 Fax RX delivery function exists
Bit2 = 1 Sender password function exists
Bit1 = 1 Function to link MK-1 user and Sender exists
Bit0 = 1 Sender specification required (if set to 1, Bit6 is set to "0")
11 Delivery Svr Capability (Ext)
[0 to 255/0/1 /step]
Bit7 = 1 Address book usage limitation (Limitation for each authorized user)
Bit6 = 1 RDH authorization link
Bit5 to 0: Not used
22 Rapid Sending Control
[0 to 1/0/1]

Main SP Tables-5
5846 UCS Settings CTL
1 Machine ID (For Delivery Server)
2 Machine ID Clear (For Delivery Server)
3 Maximum Entries
[2000 to 20000/ 2000 /1 /step]
6 Delivery Server Retry Timer
SP Mode Tables
[0 to 255/0/1 /step]
7 Delivery Server Retry Times
[0 to 255/0/1 /step]
8 Delivery Server Maximum Entries
[2000 to 50000/2000/1/step]
10 LDAP Search Timeout
[1 to 255/60/1 /step]
21 Fold Auth Change
40 Addr Book Migration (SD -> HDD) Not Used
41 Fill Addr Acl Info.

Main SP Tables-5
This SP must be executed immediately after installation of an HDD unit in a

basic machine that previously had no HDD. The first time the machine is
powered on with the new HDD installed, the system automatically takes the
address book from the NVRAM and writes it onto the new HDD. However, the
new address book on the HDD can be accessed only by the system
administrator at this stage. Executing this SP by the service technician
immediately after power on grants full address book access to all users.
Procedure
2. Install a new HDD.
3. Turn the machine on.
4. The address book and its initial data are created on the HDD automatically.
However, at this point the address book can be accessed by only the system
administrator or key operator.
6. Enter the SP mode and do SP5846-041. After this SP executes
successfully, any user can access the address book.
43 Addr Book Media
[0 to 30/- /1]
 0: Unconfirmed
 1: SD Slot 1
 2: SD Slot 2
 4: USB Flash ROM
 20: HDD
 30: Nothing
47 Initialize Local Addr Book
48 Initialize Delivery Addr Book
49 Initialize LDAP Addr Book
50 Initialize All Addr Book
51 Backup All Addr Book
52 Restore All Addr Book
53 Clear Backup Info
60 Search Option

Main SP Tables-5
Bit: Meaning
0: Checks both upper/lower case characters
1: Japan Only
2: Japan Only
3: Japan Only
4 to 7: Not Used
62 Complexity Option 1
[0 to 32/0/1 /step]
SP Mode Tables
91 FTP Auth Port Setting
[0 to 65535/3671/1 /step]
94 Encryption Stat
5847 Rep Resolution Reduction
1 Rate for Copy Color
[0 to 5 / 2 / 1]
2 Rate for Copy B&W Text
[0 to 6 / 0 / 1]
3 Rate for Copy B&W Other
[0 to 6 / 0 / 1]
4 Rate for Printer Color
[0 to 5 / 2 / 1]
5 Rate for Printer B&W
[0 to 6 / 0 / 1]
6 Rate for Printer Color 1200dpi
[0 to 5 / 4 / 1]
7 Rate for Printer B&W 1200dpi
[0 to 6 / 1 / 1]

Main SP Tables-5
21 Network Quality Default for JPEG
[5 to 95 / 50 / 1]
5848 Web Service
2 Acc. Ctrl.: Repository (only Lower 4 Bits)
0000: No access control

0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder.
3 Acc. Ctrl.: Doc. Svr. Print (Lower 4 Bits)
0000: OFF, 0001: ON
4 Acc. Ctrl.: User Directory (Lower 4 Bits)
0000: OFF, 0001: ON
7 Access Ctrl: Comm. Log Fax (Lower 4bits)
0000: OFF, 0001: ON
9 Acc. Ctrl.: Job Control (Lower 4 Bits)
0000: OFF, 0001: ON
11 Acc. Ctrl: Device Management (Lower 4 Bits)
0000: OFF, 0001: ON
21 Acc. Ctrl: Delivery (Lower 4 Bits)
0000: OFF, 0001: ON
22 Acc. Ctrl: User Administration (Lower 4 Bits)
0000: OFF, 0001: ON
24 Access Ctrl: Log Service (Lower 4bits)
25 Access Ctrl: Rest WebService (Lower 4bits)
99 Repository: Download Image Setting
100 Repository: Download Image Max. Size
[1 to 1024/1 K]

Main SP Tables-5
150 Log Operation Mode
[0 to 9 / 0 / 1]
217 Setting: Timing
5849 Installation Date
1 Display
2 Switch to Print
SP Mode Tables
[0 to 1/0/1]
0: No Print, 1: Print
3 Total Counter
[0 to 9999 9999]
5851 Bluetooth Mode
[0: Public] [1: Private]
5853 Stamp Data Download
[Execute]
5856 Remote ROM Update
[0 to 1/0/1]
0: Not allowed, 1: Allowed
5858 Collect Machine Info
1 0:OFF 1:ON [0 or 1 / 1 / 1]
2 Save To (0:HDD 1:SD) [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
3 Make Log Trace Dir [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
101 Failure Occuring Date [0 or 20371212 / 0 / 1]
102 Tracing Days [1 to 180 / 2 / 1 day]

Main SP Tables-5
103 Acquire Fax Address(0:OFF [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]

1:ON)
111 Acquire All Info & Logs [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
121 Acquire Configuration Page [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
122 Acquire Font Page [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
123 Acquire Print Setting List [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
124 Acquire Error Log [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
131 Acquire Fax Info [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
141 Acquire All Debug Logs [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
142 Acquire Controller Debug Logs [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]

Only
143 Acquire Engine Debug Logs [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]

Only
144 Acquire Opepanel Debug Logs [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]

Only
145 Acquire FCU Debug Logs Only [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
146 Acquire Only Network Packets [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
5860 SMTP/POP3/IMAP4
20 Partial Mail Receive Timeout
[1 to 168/72/1]
21 MDN Response RFC2298Compliance
[0 to 1/1]
0: No, 1: Yes
22 SMTP Auth. From Field Replacement
[0 to 1/1]
0: No. "From" item not switched.
1: Yes. "From" item switched.

Main SP Tables-5
25 SMTP Auth Direct Sending
Bit0: LOGIN
Bit1: PLAIN
Bit2: CRAM_MD5
Bit3: DIGEST_MD5
Bit4 to Bit 7: Not Used
26 S/MIME: MIME Header Settings
[0 to 2/0/1]
SP Mode Tables
0: Microsoft Outlook Express standard
1: Internet Draft standard
2: RFC standard
28 S/MIME: Authentication Check
[0 to 1/0/1] 0: No Checking 1: Checking
5866 E-Mail Report
1 Report Validity
[0 or 1/0/1 ]
0: Enable, 1: Disable
5 Add Date Field
[0 to 1/0/1]
5870 Common Key Info Writing Not Used
1 Writing
3 Initialize
4 Writing 2048 bit
5873 SD Card Appli Move
1 Move Exec
2 Undo Exec

Main SP Tables-5
5875 SC Auto Reboot
1 Reboot Setting
[0 to 1/0/1]
0: On, 1: Off
On: default: 0 (Reboots automatically) The machine reboots automatically
when the machine issues an SC error and logs the SC error code. If the same
SC occurs again, the machine does not reboot.
OFF: 1 (Does not reboot automatically. Changing this setting to "0" sets the
machine to reboot automatically after an SC occurs.
2 Reboot Type
[0 to 1/0/1]
0: Allows manual reboot, 1: Automatic reboot
5878 Option Setup
1 Data Overwrite Security
[EXECUTE]
2 HDD Encryption
[EXECUTE]
4 OCR Dictionary
[EXECUTE]
5881 Fixed Phase Block Erasing
1 [EXECUTE]
5884 Factory Setting
1 Restore
2 Backup
3 Head Gap Backup

Main SP Tables-5
5886 Farm Update Setting
100 Skip Version Check [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
101 Skip LR Check [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
5887 SD Get Counter CTL
This SP sends a text file to an SD card inserted in SD card Slot 2 (lower slot).
The operation stores. The file is stored in a folder created in the root directory
SP Mode Tables
of the SD card called SD_COUNTER. The file is saved as a text file (*.txt)
prefixed with the number of the machine.
1. Insert the SD card in SD card Slot 2 (lower slot).
2. Select SP5887 then touch [EXECUTE].
3. Touch [EXECUTE] in the message when you are prompted.
5888 Personal Information Protect
[0 to 1/0/1}
0: No authentication, No protection for logs
1: No authentication, Protected logs (only an administrator can see the logs)
5895 Application invalidation
1 Printer [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
2 Scanner [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
5900 Engine Log Upload
1 Pattern [0 to 4 / 0 / 1]
2 Triggerw [0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
5907 Plug & Play Maker/Model Name

Main SP Tables-5
5913 Switchover Permission Time
[0 to 1/1/1]
0: OFF
1: ON
5967 Copy Server: Set Function
[0 to 1/1/1]
0: ON, 1: OFF
5973 User Stamp Registration
101 Frame deletion setting [0 to 3 / 0 / 1 mm]
5985 Device Setting
1 On Board NIC
[0: Disable] [1: Enable]
2 On Board USB
[0: Disable] [1: Enable]
5987 Counter Falsifying Guard - 0:OFF/1:ON DFU
[0 to 1/0/1]

Main SP Tables-5
5990 SP Print Mode
1 All (Data List)
3 User Program
4 Logging Data
5 Diagnostic Report
SP Mode Tables
6 Non-Default (Prints only SPs set to values other than defaults.)
7 NIB Summary
22 Scanner SP
24 SDK/J Summary
26 Printer SP
27 SmartOperationPanel SP
28 SmartOperationPanel UP

Main SP Tables-5
5992 SP Text Mode
1 All (Data List)
3 User Program Data
4 Logging Data
5 Diagnostic Report
6 Non-Default (Prints only SPs set to values other than defaults.)
7 NIB Summary
22 Scanner SP
24 SDK/J Summary
26 Printer SP
27 SmartOperationPanel SP
28 SmartOperationPanel UP

Main SP Tables-6
3.7.1 SP6-XXX
There are no SP codes for this group because there are no peripheral units for this machine at the
present time.
SP Mode Tables

Main SP Tables-7
3.8.1 SP7-XXX
7001 Operating Period Indication
[0 to 9999999/0/1 min]
1 Main Scan Motor
2 Scanner Motor
3 Sub Scan Motor
7 Suction Fan
8 Head Rising Motor (Lift Motor)
9 MCU Cooling Fan
10 PSU Cooling Fan
11 Supply Motor P1 (Bk1)
12 Supply Motor P2 (Bk2)
13 Supply Motor P3 (C)
14 Supply Motor P4 (M1)
15 Supply Motor P5 (M2)
16 Supply Motor P6 (Y1)
17 Supply Motor P7 (Y2)
7002 GL Total Count
[0 to 9999999/0/1 page]
1 Color (Volume)

Main SP Tables-7
2 Black & White (Volume)
3 Color (Converted into A4)
4 Black & White (Converted into A4)
10 Color: width≥841 (High Speed/Standard)
[0 to 0xFFFFFFF/0/1]
11 Color: width: ≥841 (Fine)
SP Mode Tables
12 Color: width: ≥594 (High Speed/Standard)
14 Color: width: ≥420 (High Speed/Standard)
16 Color: width: <420 (High Speed/Standard)
17 Color: width: <420 (Fine)
18 Mono: width: ≥841 (High Speed/Standard)
19 Mono: width: ≥841 (Fine)
24 Mono: width: <420 (High Speed/Standard)
25 Mono: width: <420 (Fine)
7212 User Cleaning
11 Count H1
[0 to 999 999/0/1]
12 Count H2
[0 to 999 999/0/1]

Main SP Tables-7
13 Count H3
[0 to 999 999/0/1]
14 Count H4
[0 to 999 999/0/1]
15 Count H5
[0 to 999 999/0/1]
7213 User Refreshing
11 Count H1
[0 to 999 999/0/1]
12 Count H2
[0 to 999 999/0/1]
13 Count H3
[0 to 999 999/0/1]
14 Count H4
[0 to 999 999/0/1]
15 Count H5
[0 to 999 999/0/1]
7214 Front Cover Open
1 Recovery Cleaning Count H1
[0 to 999 999/0/1]

Main SP Tables-7
6 Open Count During Maintenance
[0 to 3/0/1]
SP Mode Tables
[0 to 999999/0/1
001 Refreshing Count H1 [0 to 99999 / 0 / 1]
002 Refreshing Count H2
7217 Cleaning After Leftover
Time Time Power Job Start Energy Save

ON
<10 hr 16 s No Yes No
>10 hr<24 9 s (Power ON) Yes Yes No

16 s (Job Start)
>24 hr.<1 week 3 min. Yes Yes No
>1 week<2 weeks 3 min. Yes Yes Yes

Main SP Tables-7
Time Time Power Job Start Energy Save

ON
>2 weeks<45 days 30 min. Yes Yes Yes
1 Count H1
[0 to 999 999/0/1]
2 Count H2
[0 to 999 999/0/1]
3 Count H3
[0 to 999 999/0/1]
4 Count H4
[0 to 999 999/0/1]
5 Count H5
[0 to 999 999/0/1
6 Count H1 LV2
[0 to 20000/0/1]
7 Count H2 LV2
[0 to 20000/0/1]
8 Count H3 LV2
[0 to 20000/0/1]
9 Count H4 LV2
[0 to 20000/0/1]
10 Count H5 LV2
[0 to 20000/0/1]
7218 Ink Supply Seq. After Leftover

Main SP Tables-7
Idle Time 1
1 Count H1
[0 to 999 999/0/1]
2 Count H2
[0 to 20000/0/1]
3 Count H3
SP Mode Tables
[0 to 20000/0/1]
4 Count H4
[0 to 20000/0/1]
5 Count H5
[0 to 20000/0/1]
Idle Time 2
6 Count H1 LV2
[0 to 20000/0/1]
7 Count H2 LV2
[0 to 20000/0/1]
8 Count H3 LV2
[0 to 20000/0/1]
9 Count H4 LV2
[0 to 20000/0/1]
10 Count H5 LV2
[0 to 20000/0/1]
7222 Electrified Mist

[0 to 0xFFFFFFFF/0/1 nl]
1 Nozzle 1

Main SP Tables-7
2 Nozzle 2
3 Nozzle 3
4 Nozzle 4
5 Nozzle 5
6 Nozzle 6
7 Nozzle 7
8 Nozzle 8
9 Nozzle 9
10 Nozzle 10
7223 Cleaning Total
1 Count H1
[0 to 999999/0/1]
2 Count H2
[0 to 999999/0/1]
3 Count H3
[0 to 999999/0/1]
4 Count H4
[0 to 999999/0/1]
5 Count H5
[0 to 999999/0/1]

Main SP Tables-7
7224 Refreshing Total
1 Count H1
[0 to 999999/0/1]
2 Count H2
[0 to 999999/0/1]
3 Count H3
SP Mode Tables
[0 to 999999/0/1]
4 Count H4
[0 to 999999/0/1]
5 Count H5
[0 to 999999/0/1]
7227 Automatic Mist Cleaning
1 Count H1
[0 to 999999/0/1]
2 Count H2
[0 to 999999/0/1]
3 Count H3
[0 to 999999/0/1]
4 Count H4
[0 to 999999/0/1]
5 Count H5
[0 to 999999/0/1]

Main SP Tables-7
7228 Automatic Paper Dust Cleaning
1 Count H1
[0 to 999999/0/1]
2 Count H2
[0 to 999999/0/1]
3 Count H3
[0 to 999999/0/1]
4 Count H4
[0 to 999999/0/1]
5 Count H5
[0 to 999999/0/1]
7229 Decap Auto Cleaning
1 Count H1
[0 to 999999/0/1]
2 Count H2
[0 to 999999/0/1]
3 Count H3
[0 to 999999/0/1]
4 Count H4
[0 to 999999/0/1]
5 Count H5
[0 to 999999/0/1]

Main SP Tables-7
7230 Decap Auto Cleaning (Flushing)
1 Count H1 [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1]
2 Count H2
3 Count H3
4 Count H4
5 Count H5
SP Mode Tables
7235 Ink Removal
1 Maintenance Count H1 [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1]
2 Maintenance Count H2
7401 Total SC Counter CTL
1 SC Counter
[0 to 65 535/0]
2 Total SC Counter
[0 to 65 535/0]

Main SP Tables-7
7402 Feeler Position Error Count
1 HT1
[0 to 10000/0/1]
2 HT2
[0 to 10000/0/1]
3 HT3
[0 to 10000/0/1]
4 HT4
[0 to 10000/0/1]
5 HT5
[0 to 10000/0/1]
6 HT6
[0 to 10000/0/1]
7 HT7
[0 to 10000/0/1]
7403 SC History CTL
1 Latest
2 Latest 1
3 Latest 2
4 Latest 3
5 Latest 4
6 Latest 5
7 Latest 6
8 Latest 7

Main SP Tables-7
9 Latest 8
10 Latest 9
7404 SC991 History
7405 Maintenance Motor Error SC Count
1 ST Motor (after Replace)
SP Mode Tables
[0 to 10000/0/1]
2 ST Motor (Accumulated)
[0 to 10000/0/1]
3 DC Motor (after Replace)
[0 to 10000/0/1]
4 DC Motor (Accumulated)
[0 to 10000/0/1]
7502 Total Paper Jam Counter CTL
1 Jam Counter
2 Total Jam Counter
7503 Total Original Jam Counter CTL
1 Original Jam Counter
2 Total Original Counter

Main SP Tables-7
7504 Paper Jam Loc
1 Initial jam
2 Main Scan HP jam
8 Pre-registration sensor lag jam (Roll Unit 1)
13 DRESS sensor late jam during image registration
16 Exit sensor lag jam
34 Bypass paper set jam
41 Main scan printing jam
53 Paper out (Roll Unit 1)
63 DRESS sensor lag during image registration
84 Bypass sensor late jam
7505 Original Jam Detection
1 Duplex Transport SN 3: Late
2 Duplex Exit SN: Late
3 1st Paper Feed SN: Lag
4 2nd Paper Feed SN: Lag
5 LCT Paper Feed SN: Lag
6 3rd Vertical Transport SN: Lag
7 4th Vertical Transport SN: Lag
8 Relay SN: Lag

Main SP Tables-7
7506 Jam Count by Paper Size
97 A0T/A1
98 A1T/A2
99 A2T/A3
100 A3T/A4
101 A4T
SP Mode Tables
106 B1T/B2
107 B2T/B3
108 B3T/B4
109 B4T
225 36x48T/24x36
226 24x36T/18x24
227 18x24T/12x18
228 12x18T/9x12
229 9x12T
234 34x44T/22x34
235 22x34T/17x22
236 17x22T/11x17
237 11x17T/8.5x11
238 8.5x11T
255 Other

Main SP Tables-7
7507 Plotter Jam History
1 Last Sample Display

CODE :103
2 Latest 1
SIZE: :00h
3 Latest 2 TOTAL :0000063
DATE: Thu Aug 23 00:58:16 2012
4 Latest 3
where:
5 Latest 4 CODE is the SP7504-* number (see above).
SIZE is the ASAP paper size code in hex.
6 Latest 5
TOTAL is the total jam error count
7 Latest 6 DATE is the date the jams occurred.
8 Latest 7
9 Latest 8
10 Latest 9
Paper Hex Codes
Size Code Size Code Size Code
A4 (S) 05 A3 (L) 84 DLT (L) A0
A5 (S) 06 A4 (L) 85 LG (L) A4
B5 (S) 0E A5 (L) 86 LT (L) A6
LT (S) 26 B4 (L) 8D HLT (L) AC
HLT (S) 2C B5 (L) 8E Others FF
7508 Original Jam History
1 Last Sample Display:

CODE : 002
2 Latest 1
SIZE : aeh
3 Latest 2 TOTAL : 00000063
DATE : Thu Sep 20 04:51:14: 2012
4 Latest 3

Main SP Tables-7
5 Latest 4 where:
CODE is the SP7-505-* number.
6 Latest 5
SIZE is the paper size code in hex. (See "Paper Size Hex
7 Latest 6 Codes" below.)
TOTAL is the total jam error count (SP7003)
8 Latest 7
DATE is the date the previous jam occurred
9 Latest 8
10 Latest 9
SP Mode Tables
Paper Size Hex Codes
Paper Size Code (hex) Paper Size Code (hex)
A4 LEF 05 B4 SEF 8D
A5 LEF 06 B5 SEF 8E
B5 LEF 0E DLT SEF A0
LT LEF 26 LG SEF A4
HLT LEF 2C LT SEF A6
A3 SEF 84 HLT SEF AC
A4 SEF 85 Others FF
A5 SEF 86
7514 Paper Jam Count by Location
1 Initial jam [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1]
2 Main scan HP jam
13 DRESS sensor late jam during image registration
34 Bypass paper set jam

Main SP Tables-7
41 Main scan printing jam
58 Pre-registration sensor lag jam
63 DRESS sensor lag jam during image registration
84 Bypass sensor late jam
7515 Original Jam Count by Detection
1 Initial jam [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1]
2 Original registration sensor late
3 Original registration sensor off jam
4 Original registration sensor lag jam
5 Original exit sensor lag jam
6 Original stop jam
7 Original exit late jam
8 Next original set jam
7516 Paper Size Jam Count
97 A0T/A1 [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1]
98 A1T/A2
99 A2T/A3
100 A3T/A4
101 A4T
106 B1T/B2
107 B2T/B3

Main SP Tables-7
108 B3T/B4
109 B4T
225 36×48T/24×36
226 24×36T/18×24
227 18×24T/12×18
228 12×18T/9×12
SP Mode Tables
229 9×12T
234 34×44T/22×34
235 22×34T/17×22
236 17×22T/11×17
237 11×17T/8.5×11
238 8.5×11T
255 Others
7520 Update Log
1 ErrorRecord1 [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
2 ErrorRecord2
3 ErrorRecord3
4 ErrorRecord4
5 ErrorRecord5
6 ErrorRecord6
7 ErrorRecord7
8 ErrorRecord8
9 ErrorRecord9
10 ErrorRecord10

Main SP Tables-7
7624 Part Replacement Operation ON/OFF
0 to 99999999
1 Maintenance Unit
2 Left Ink Sump
3 Right Ink Sump
9 Print Head Unit: Black
10 Print Head Unit: Color
7703 Accumulated Decapping Time
[0 to 65535/0/1 sec]
7704 Move Carriage (Tube)
7710 InternalTempMonitor: RF Switch
1 H1 [0.0 to 55.0 / 0.0 / 0.5]
2 H2
3 H3
4 H4
5 H5
7713 Cartridge Empty
1 Occurrence Count: K
2 Occurrence Count: C
3 Occurrence Count: M
4 Occurrence Count: Y
[0 to 1000/0/1]

Main SP Tables-7
7714 Air Purge Filling after SC202
1 H Sucking Count H1
SP Mode Tables
[0 to 999999/0/1]
7717 Air in SubTank
1 Count HT1
[0 to 999999/0/1]
2 Count HT2
[0 to 999999/0/1]
3 Count HT3
[0 to 999999/0/1]
4 Count HT4
[0 to 999999/0/1]
5 Count HT5
[0 to 999999/0/1]
6 Count HT6
[0 to 999999/0/1]
7 Count HT7
[0 to 999999/0/1]

Main SP Tables-7
7720 Refilled Cartridge
1 Detection Count: K
[0 to 999999/0/1]
2 Detection Count: C
3 Detection Count: M
4 Detection Count: Y
7721 Ink Supply Sequence
1 Count H1
[0 to 999999/0/1]
2 Count H2
[0 to 999999/0/1]
3 Count H3
[0 to 999999/0/1]
4 Count H4
[0 to 999999/0/1]
5 Count H5
[0 to 999999/0/1]

Main SP Tables-7
7722 Under Humidity Change
1 Air Purge Filling H1
[0 to 999999/0/1]
[0 to 999999/0/1]
SP Mode Tables
[0 to 999999/0/1]
[0 to 999999/0/1]
[0 to 999999/0/1]
1 Ink Supply Sequence Count H1
[0 to 999999/0/1]
[0 to 999999/0/1]
[0 to 999999/0/1]
[0 to 999999/0/1]
[0 to 999999/0/1]

Main SP Tables-7
7724 Supply After Time Out
1 Reverse Success Count HT1
[0 to 999999/0/1]
[0 to 999999/0/1]
[0 to 999999/0/1]
[0 to 999999/0/1]
[0 to 999999/0/1]
7725 Air Purge Filling After Leftover
Idle Time 1
1 Count H1
[0 to 999999/0/1]
2 Count H2
[0 to 999999/0/1]
3 Count H3
[0 to 999999/0/1]
4 Count H4
[0 to 999999/0/1]
5 Count H5
[0 to 999999/0/1]
Idle Time 2 (LV2)

Main SP Tables-7
6 Count H1 (LV2)
[0 to 999999/0/1]
7 Count H2 (LV2)
[0 to 999999/0/1]
8 Count H3 (LV2)
[0 to 999999/0/1]
SP Mode Tables
9 Count H4 (LV2)
[0 to 999999/0/1]
10 Count H5 (LV2)
[0 to 999999/0/1]
7726 Little Flushing After Leftover
Idle Time 1
1 Count H1
[0 to 999999/0/1]
2 Count H2
[0 to 999999/0/1]
3 Count H3
[0 to 999999/0/1]
4 Count H4
[0 to 999999/0/1]
5 Count H5
[0 to 999999/0/1]
Idle Time 2
6 LV2 Count H1
[0 to 999999/0/1]

Main SP Tables-7
7 LV2 Count H2
[0 to 999999/0/1]
8 LV2 Count H3
[0 to 999999/0/1]
9 LV2 Count H4.
[0 to 999999/0/1]
10 LV2 Count H5.
[0 to 999999/0/1]
7727 Rich Flushing After Leftover
Idle Time 1
1 Count H1
[0 to 999999/0/1]
2 Count H2
[0 to 999999/0/1]
3 Count H3
[0 to 999999/0/1]
4 Count H4
[0 to 999999/0/1]
5 Count H5
[0 to 999999/0/1]
Idle Time 2
6 LV2 Count H1
[0 to 999999/0/1]
7 LV2 Count H2
[0 to 999999/0/1]

Main SP Tables-7
8 LV2 Count H3
[0 to 999999/0/1]
9 LV2 Count H4
[0 to 999999/0/1]
10 LV2 Count H5
[0 to 999999/0/1]
SP Mode Tables
7728 Flushing Before Printing
1 Count K
[0 to 999999/0/1]
2 Count C
[0 to 999999/0/1]
3 Count M
[0 to 999999/0/1]
4 Count Y
[0 to 999999/0/1]
7729 Before & During Printing
1 Flushing Amount K
[0 to 999999/0/1x10 nl]
2 Flushing Amount C
[0 to 999999/0/1x10 nl]
3 Flushing Amount M
[0 to 999999/0/1x10 nl]
4 Flushing Amount Y
[0 to 999999/0/1x10 nl]

Main SP Tables-7
7730 After Printing
1 Flushing Amount K
[0 to 999999/0/1x10 nl]
2 Flushing Amount C
[0 to 999999/0/1x10 nl]
3 Flushing Amount M
[0 to 999999/0/1x10 nl]
4 Flushing Amount Y
[0 to 999999/0/1x10 nl]
7731 User Cleaning
1 Count/ K Cartridge
[0 to 999999/0/1]
2 Count/ C Cartridge
[0 to 999999/0/1]
3 Count/ M Cartridge
[0 to 999999/0/1]
4 Count/ Y Cartridge
[0 to 999999/0/1]

Main SP Tables-7
7732 User Refreshing
[0 to 999999/0/1]
[0 to 999999/0/1]
SP Mode Tables
[0 to 999999/0/1]
[0 to 999999/0/1]
7733 Cleaning After Leftover
[0 to 20000/0/1]
[0 to 20000/0/1]
[0 to 20000/0/1]
[0 to 20000/0/1]
7734 Ink Supply Seq. After Leftover
[0 to 20000/0/1]
[0 to 20000/0/1]

Main SP Tables-7
[0 to 20000/0/1]
[0 to 20000/0/1]
7735 Cleaning Total
[0 to 999999/0/1]
[0 to 999999/0/1]
[0 to 999999/0/1]
[0 to 999999/0/1]
7736 Refreshing Total
[0 to 999999/0/1]
[0 to 999999/0/1]
[0 to 999999/0/1]
[0 to 999999/0/1]

Main SP Tables-7
7737 Automatic Mist Cleaning
[0 to 999999/0/1]
[0 to 999999/0/1]
SP Mode Tables
[0 to 999999/0/1]
[0 to 999999/0/1]
7738 Automatic Paper Dust Cleaning
[0 to 999999/0/1]
[0 to 999999/0/1]
[0 to 999999/0/1]
[0 to 999999/0/1]
7739 Decap Auto Cleaning
[0 to 999999/0/1]
[0 to 999999/0/1]

Main SP Tables-7
[0 to 999999/0/1]
[0 to 999999/0/1]
7740 Air Purge Filling After SC202
1 H Sucking Count/ K Cartridge
[0 to 999999/0/1]
2 H Sucking Count/ C Cartridge
[0 to 999999/0/1]
3 H Sucking Count/ M Cartridge
[0 to 999999/0/1]
4 H Sucking Count/ Y Cartridge
[0 to 999999/0/1]
7741 Front Cover Open CL Count
1 Count/K Cartridge
2 Count/C Cartridge
3 Count/M Cartridge
4 Count/Y Cartridge

Main SP Tables-7
7742 Air Purge Fill After Pressure Lost
1 Air Purge Filling/ K Cartridge
[0 to 999999/0/1]
2 Air Purge Filling/ C Cartridge
[0 to 999999/0/1]
3 Air Purge Filling/ M Cartridge
SP Mode Tables
[0 to 999999/0/1]
4 Air Purge Filling/ Y Cartridge
[0 to 999999/0/1]
7743 Air in SubTank
[0 to 999999/0/1]
[0 to 999999/0/1]
[0 to 999999/0/1]
[0 to 999999/0/1]

Main SP Tables-7
7744 Decap Auto Cleaning (Flushing)
1 Count/ K Cartridge [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1]
7745 Auto Nozzle Check Recov. CL
1 Count/ K Cartridge [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1]
7746 Ink Supply Sequence
[0 to 999999/0/1]
[0 to 999999/0/1]
[0 to 999999/0/1]
[0 to 999999/0/1]

Main SP Tables-7
1 Air Purge Filling/K Cartridge
[0 to 999999/0/1]
2 Air Purge Filling/C Cartridge
[0 to 999999/0/1]
3 Air Purge Filling/M Cartridge
SP Mode Tables
[0 to 999999/0/1]
4 Air Purge Filling/Y Cartridge
[0 to 999999/0/1]
1 Ink Supply Sequence Count K Cartridge
[0 to 999999/0/1]
2 Ink Supply Sequence Count C Cartridge
[0 to 999999/0/1]
3 Ink Supply Sequence Count M Cartridge
[0 to 999999/0/1]
4 Ink Supply Sequence Count Y Cartridge
[0 to 999999/0/1]
7749 Air Purge Filling After Leftover
[0 to 999999/0/1]
[0 to 999999/0/1]

Main SP Tables-7
[0 to 999999/0/1]
[0 to 999999/0/1]
7750 Little Flushing After Leftover
[0 to 999999/0/1]
[0 to 999999/0/1]
[0 to 999999/0/1]
[0 to 999999/0/1]
7751 Rich Flushing After Leftover
[0 to 999999/0/1]
[0 to 999999/0/1]
[0 to 999999/0/1]
[0 to 999999/0/1]

Main SP Tables-7
7752 Flushing before Printing
[0 to 999999/0/1]
[0 to 999999/0/1]
SP Mode Tables
[0 to 999999/0/1]
[0 to 999999/0/1]
7753 Before & During Printing
1 Flushing Amount K
[0 to 999999/0/1 nl]
2 Flushing Amount C
[0 to 999999/0/1 nl]
3 Flushing Amount M
[0 to 999999/0/1 nl]
4 Flushing Amount Y
[0 to 999999/0/1 nl]

Main SP Tables-7
7754 After Printing
1 Flushing Amount K
[0 to 999999/0/1 nl]
2 Flushing Amount C
[0 to 999999/0/1 nl]
3 Flushing Amount M
[0 to 999999/0/1 nl]
4 Flushing Amount Y
[0 to 999999/0/1 nl]
7755 OCFS Check Execution Count
1 H1
[0 to 999999/0/1]
2 H2
[0 to 999999/0/1]
3 H3
[0 to 999999/0/1]
4 H4
[0 to 999999/0/1]
5 H5
[0 to 999999/0/1]

Main SP Tables-7
7756 OCFS Filling Count per Job
1 HT1
[0 to 1000/0/1]
2 HT2
[0 to 1000/0/1]
3 HT3
SP Mode Tables
[0 to 1000/0/1]
4 HT4
[0 to 1000/0/1]
5 HT5
[0 to 1000/0/1]
6 HT6
[0 to 1000/0/1]
7 HT7
[0 to 1000/0/1]
7760 Print Volume from Latest Cleaning
1 H1
[0 to 99999999/0/1 page]
2 H2
[0 to 99999999/0/1 page]
3 H3
[0 to 99999999/0/1 page]
4 H4
[0 to 99999999/0/1 page]

Main SP Tables-7
5 H5
[0 to 99999999/0/1 page]
7761 Auto Nozzle Check Count
1 /H1(head replacement) [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 Page]
2 /H2(head replacement)
8 Sequence Count(head replacement)
9 Error Count (head replacement)
11 /H1(Md replacement)
18 Sequence Count (Md replacement)
19 Error Count (Md replacement)
20 Electrode Plate Wiping Count
7761 Auto Nozzle Check Condition
21 Residual Auto Nozzle Check Quantity [0 to 100 / 100 / 1 Page]

Main SP Tables-7
7762 Nozzle Fracture Condition
1 H1ODD Nozzle Undischarge Ink [0 to 192 / 0 / 1]
2 H1EVEN Nozzle Undischarge Ink
3 H2ODD Nozzle Undischarge Ink
SP Mode Tables
7763 Retry Sensor Nozzle
1 H1ODD Retry Nozzle Number [0 to 192 / 0 / 1]
2 H1EVEN Retry Nozzle Number)
3 H2ODD Retry Nozzle Number
4 H2EVEN Retry Nozzle Number

Main SP Tables-7
7764 Life Counter Display
1 Carriage Unit (Black) [0 to 500 / 0 / 1]
3 Maintenance Kit
4 Left Ink Sump [0 to 200 / 0 / 1]
5 Right Ink Sump
7765 Life Counter (Calculate
1 Print Head Unit (Black) [0 to 0xFFFFFFFF / 0 / 1]
2 Print Head Unit (Color)
3 Maintenance Kit
4 Left Ink Sump
5 Right Ink Sump
7766 Nozzle Compensation Mode Start
1 Head 1 [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1]
2 Head 2
3 Head 3
4 Head 4
5 Head 5
7767 Accum. Nozzle Fracture Counts
1 Nozzle1/Head Replacement [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
2 Nozzle2/Head Replacement

Main SP Tables-7
SP Mode Tables
11 Nozzle1/Auto Nozzle Check Unit Replacement
7768 Accum. Nozzle Fracture Number
1 Nozzle1/Head Replacement [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

Main SP Tables-7
7770 No Filling Negative Pressure
1 Pressure/Humidity Fluctuation Count H1
[0 to 999999/0/1]
[0 to 999999/0/1]
[0 to 999999/0/1]
[0 to 999999/0/1]
[0 to 999999/0/1]

Main SP Tables-7
7771 No Filling Negative Pressure
1 Pressure/Humidity Fluctuation Count/ K Cart
[0 to 999999/0/1]
2 Pressure/Humidity Fluctuation Count/ C Cart
[0 to 999999/0/1]
3 Pressure/Humidity Fluctuation Count/ M Cart
SP Mode Tables
[0 to 999999/0/1]
4 Pressure/Humidity Fluctuation Count/ Y Cart
[0 to 999999/0/1]
1 Refreshing Count/K [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1]
2 Refreshing Count/C
3 Refreshing Count/C
4 Refreshing Count/Y
7780 EM Print Mode Count
1 Head Tank 1 [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1]
2 Head Tank 2
3 Head Tank 3
4 Head Tank 4
5 Head Tank 5
6 Head Tank 6
7 Head Tank 7

Main SP Tables-7
7781 EM Print Finish
1 Ink Consumption Count [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1]
2 Time Exceed Count
3 Bk Ink End Count
4 Air Leak Count
5 Cartridge Replacement Count
6 Require Maintenance Count
7782 EM Print Quantity
1 New Number of Sheets [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
2 New Number of Sheets (A4)
3 Total Number of Sheets
4 Total Number of Sheets (A4)
7801 ROM Part Number
2 Engine
7801 ROM Version
102 Engine
7801 ROM Part Number
7803 PM Counter Display
7804 PM Counter Reset
[EXECTUE]

Main SP Tables-7
7807 SC/Jam Counter Reset
[EXECTUE]
7826 MF Error Counter Japan Only
1 Error Total
2 Error Staple
SP Mode Tables
7827 MF Error Counter Clear Japan Only
[EXECTUE]
7832 Self-Diagnose Result Display
7836 Total Memory Size
7840 ServiceSP Entry Code Chg Hist
1 Change Time :Latest
2 Change Time :Last1
101 Initialize Time :Latest
102 Initialize Time :Last1
7853 Cartridge Replace
1 Count K
[0 to 1000/0/1]
2 Count C
[0 to 1000/0/1]
3 Count M
[0 to 1000/0/1]

Main SP Tables-7
4 Count Y
[0 to 1000/0/1]
7854 Move Carriage (Tube)
1 Carriage Moving Count [0 to 4294967295 / 5 / 1]
7901 Assert Info.
1 File Name Module name
2 Number of Lines Lines where error occurred.
3 Location Component affected by error
7910 ROM No
1 System/Copy
2 Engine
3 Lcdc
15 Scanner
18 NetworkSupport
22 BIOS
23 HDD Format Option
132 NetWare
150 RPCS
151 PS
155 RPGL
157 RTIFF
160 MSIS
162 PDF

Main SP Tables-7
165 PJL
167 MediaPrint:JPEG
168 MediaPrint:TIFF
180 FONT
181 FONT1
182 FONT2
SP Mode Tables
183 FONT3
184 FONT4
185 FONT5
200 Factory
201 Copy
202 NetworkDocBox
204 Printer
205 Scanner
210 MIB
211 Websupport
212 WebUapl
213 SDK1
214 SDK2
215 SDK3
250 Package
7911 Firmware Version
1 System/Copy
2 Engine
3 Lcdc

Main SP Tables-7
15 Scanner
18 NetworkSupport
22 BIOS
23 HDD Format Option
132 NetWare
150 RPCS
151 PS
155 RPGL
157 RTIFF
160 MSIS
162 PDF
165 PJL
167 MediaPrint:JPEG
168 MediaPrint:TIFF
180 FONT
181 FONT1
182 FONT2
183 FONT3
184 FONT4
185 FONT5
200 Factory
201 Copy
202 NetworkDocBox
204 Printer
205 Scanner
210 MIB

Main SP Tables-7
211 Websupport
212 WebUapl
213 SDK1
214 SDK2
215 SDK3
250 Package
SP Mode Tables
7931 Cartridge: Black
7932 Cartridge: Magenta
7933 Cartridge: Cyan
7934 Cartridge: Yellow
1 Model ID
[0 to 255/0/1]
2 Cartridge Version
3 Brand Name ID
4 Area ID
5 Type ID
6 Color ID
7 Maintenance ID
8 Brand New Information
9 Recycling Counter
10 Manufactured Date
[0 to 1/0/1]
11 Serial No.
12 Remaining Ink
[0 to 100/100/1]

Main SP Tables-7
13 EDP Code
14 Empty Log
15 Refill Log
16 Fitted: Total Counter
[0 to 99999999/0/1]
17 Fitted: Color Counter
18 Empty: Total Counter
19 Empty: Color Counter
20 Fitted Date
[0 to 1/0/1]
21 Empty Date
22 Ink Consumption Volume
23 Expiry Date
[0 to 255/0/1]
24 Initial Fill Count
25 Refreshing Count
26 Cleaning Count
27 Ink Capacity
28 Air Purge Filling Count
[0 to 255/0/1]
29 Print Volume per Cartridge
[0 to 16777215/0/1]
30 Machine Serial Number Log: 1 Previous
[0 to 255/0/1]

Main SP Tables-7
35 Machine Counter (m)
[0 to 4294967295 / 0 / 1]
SP Mode Tables
7935 Cartridge: Black Log 1
7936 Cartridge: Magenta Log 1
7937 Cartridge: Cyan Log 1
7938 Cartridge: Yellow Log 1
1 Serial No.
[0 to 1/0/1]
2 Fitted Date & Time
[0 to 99999999/0/1]
4 Refill Log
[0 to 1/0/1]
5 Serial No.
[0 to 99999999/0/1]
8 Refill Log
9 Serial No.

Main SP Tables-7
12 Refill Log
[0 to 1/0/1]
13 Serial No.
[0 to 99999999/0/1]
16 Refill Log
[0 to 1/0/1]
17 Serial No.
[0 to 99999999/0/1]
20 Refill Log
7960 Cutter Drive Count
1 Drive Count
[0 to 99999999/0/1 times]
2 Clear Drive Count
[EXECUTE]
3 Unit Drive Count
[0 to 99999999/0/1 times]
4 Clear Unit Drive Count
[EXECUTE]
7961 Waste Ink Analysis
Right Ink Sump 001 - 004

Main SP Tables-7
1 Right Ink Box Amount Counter
[0 to 999999/0/0.001]
2 Right Ink Box Near Full Date
3 Right Ink Box Full Date
SP Mode Tables
4 Right Ink Box Fitting Count
[0 to 255/0/1]
Left Ink Sump
5 Left Ink Box Amount Counter
[0 to 2000000/0/10.001 ul]
6 Left Ink Box Near Full Date
7 Left Ink Box Full Date
8 Left Ink Box Fitting Count
Carriage Unit
9 Carriage Unit (Black) Initial Count
[0 to 255/0/1]
10 Carriage Unit (Color) Initial Count
[0 to 255/0/1]
11 Total Cleaning Count
[0 to 65535/0/1]
12 Total Refreshing Count
[0 to 65535/0/1]

Main SP Tables-7
13 Total Ink Supply Sequence Count
[0 to 255/0/1]
14 Air Purge Filling Count: Total
[0 to 65535/0/1]
15 Air Purge Filling Count: Maintenance Total
[0 to 65535/0/1]
16 Flushing Count after Printing
[0 to 999999/0/1]
17 Little Flushing Count after Leftover
[0 to 65535/0/1]
18 Total Decapping Cleaning Count
[0 to 65535/0/1]
19 Negative Pressure Recovery Count
[0 to 9999/0/1]
20 User Cleaning Count
[0 to 65535/0/1]
21 User Refreshing Count
[0 to 65535/0/1]
22 Cleaning Count after Leftover
[0 to 65535/0/1]
23 Ink Supply after Leftover Count
[0 to 255/0/1]
24 Air Purge Filling Count: after Leftover
[0 to 65535/0/1]
25 Total Decapping Flushing Count
[0 to 65535 / 0 / 1]

Main SP Tables-7
26 Ink Supply Count
[0 to 255/0/1]
27 Air Purge Filling Count (Pressure)
[0 to 65535/0/1]
28 Air Purge Filling Count (Humidity)
[0 to 65535/0/1]
SP Mode Tables
29 Maintenance Count without Waste Box
[0 to 65535/0/1]
30 Flushing Count before Printing
[0 to 1677215/0/1]
31 Flushing Count during Printing
[0 to 1677215/0/1]
32 Flushing Count after Printing
[0 to 65535/0/1]
33 Feed Count Cleared Count
[0 to 65535/0/1]
34 Mist Count Cleared Count
[0 to 65535/0/1]
35 Wiping Count after Suction
[0 to 1677215/0/1]
Ink Collector Unit
36 Front Ink Box Printed Length
[0 to 72 000 000/0/1 mm]
37 Front Ink Box Amount Counter
[0 to 3000/0/0.001 ml]
38 Front Right Ink Box Amount Counter

Main SP Tables-7
[0 to 999/0/0.001 ml]
39 Front Right Ink Box C/R Date
40 Front Left Ink Box Amount Counter
[0 to 2000/0/0.001 ml]
41 Front Left Ink Box C/R Date
42 Ink Box Exchange Count
[0 to 255/0/1]
44 Front Cover Open Maintenance Count
45 Total Auto Nozzle Check Recov. CL Count
[0 to 65535 / 0 / 1]
46 RF Count at Temperature rises
[0 to 65535 / 0 / 1]
7962 Waste Ink Box
1 Model ID
[0 to 255/0/1]
2 Waste Ink Box Version
3 Brand Name ID
4 Area ID
5 Type ID
6 Color ID
7 Maintenance ID
8 Brand New Information
9 Recycling Counter

Main SP Tables-7
10 Manufactured Date
[0 to 1/0/1]
11 Serial No.
12 Remaining Capacity
[0 to 100/0/1%]
13 EDP Code
SP Mode Tables
14 Full Log
15 Refill Log
[0 to 99999999/0/1]
17 Fitted: Color Counter
18 Full: Total Counter
19 Full: Color Counter
20 Fitted Date
[0 to 1/0/1]
21 Full Date
22 Full Threshold
[0 to 65535/0/0.1 ml]
23 Near Full Threshold
[0 to 100/0/1]
24 Waste Volume Count
[0 to 0xFFFFFFFF/0/1 nl]
25 Accum. Printed Length (High Speed/Standard)
[0 to 0xFFFFFFFF/0/1 mm]
26 Accum. Printed Length (Fine)
[0 to 0xFFFFFFFF/0/1 mm]

Main SP Tables-7
27 User Cleaning Count
[0 to 0xFFFF/0/1]
28 Driven Refreshing Count in Suction
[0 to 0xFFFF/0/1]
29 Air Purge Filling Count: Weak Pressure
[0 to 0xFFFF/0/1]
30 Air Purge Filling Count: Humidity Change
[0 to 0xFFFF/0/1]
31 Maintenance Count after Box Cover Open
[0 to 255/0/1]
32 Cleaning Count
33 Initial Fill Count
[0 to 255/0/1]
34 Ink Supply Sequence Count
[0 to 255/0/1]
7963 Waste Ink Box Log 1
1 Serial No.
[0 to 1/0/1]
3 Fitted: Total Counter (Box 1)
[0 to 99999999/0/1]
4 Refill Log
[0 to 1/0/1]
5 Serial No.

Main SP Tables-7
[0 to 99999999/0/1]
8 Refill Log
[0 to 1/0/1]
9 Serial No.
SP Mode Tables
[0 to 99999999/0/1]
12 Refill Log
[0 to 1/0/1]
13 Serial No.
[0 to 99999999/0/1]
16 Refill Log
[0 to 1/0/1]
17 Serial No.
[0 to 99999999/0/1]
20 Refill Log
[0 to 1/0/1]

Main SP Tables-7
7972 Carriage Unit B Counter - Mono (per A4 Converted)
[0 to 99999999/0/1 page]
7973 Carriage Unit C Counter - Color (per A4 Converted)
[0 to 99999999/0/1 page]

Main SP Tables-8
3.9.1 SP8-XXX
Many of these counters are provided for features that are currently not available, such as sending
color faxes, and so on. However, here are some Group 8 codes that when used in combination
with others, can provide useful information.
SP Numbers What They Do
SP Mode Tables
SP8211 to SP8216 The number of pages scanned to the document server.
SP8401 to SP8406 The number of pages printed from the document server
SP8691 to SP8696 The number of pages sent from the document server
Specifically, the following questions can be answered:

 How is the document server actually being used?
 What application is using the document server most frequently?
 What data in the document server is being reused?
Most of the SPs in this group are prefixed with a letter that indicates the mode of operation (the
mode of operation is referred to as an 'application'). Before reading the Group 8 Service Table,
make sure that you understand what these prefixes mean.
PREFIX WHAT IT MEANS
T: Total: (Grand Total). Grand total of the items counted for all applications
(C, F, P, etc.)..
C: Copy application. Totals (pages, jobs, etc.) executed for each

application when the job was not stored on the
P: Print application.
document server.
S: Scan application.

Main SP Tables-8
PREFIX WHAT IT MEANS
L: Local storage Totals (jobs, pages, etc.) for the document server.
(document server) The L: counters work differently case by case.
Sometimes, they count jobs/pages stored on the
document server; this can be in document server
mode (from the document server window), or from
another mode, such as from a printer driver or by
pressing the Store File button in the Copy mode
window. Sometimes, they include occasions when
the user uses a file that is already on the document
server. Each counter will be discussed case by
case.
O: Other applications Refers to network applications such as Web Image

(external network Monitor. Utilities developed with the SDK (Software
applications, for Development Kit) will also be counted with this
example) group in the future.
The Group 8 SP codes are limited to 17 characters, forced by the necessity of displaying them on
the small LCDs of printers and faxes that also use these SPs. Read over the list of abbreviations
below and refer to it again if you see the name of an SP that you do not understand.
Key for Abbreviations
ABBREVIATION WHAT IT MEANS
/ "By", e.g. "T:Jobs/Apl" = Total Jobs "by" Application
> More (2> "2 or more", 4> "4 or more"
AddBook Address Book
Apl Application
B/W Black & White
Bk Black
C Cyan
ColCr Color Create
ColMode Color Mode

Main SP Tables-8
Comb Combine
Comp Compression
Deliv Delivery
DesApl Designated Application. The application (Copy, Fax, Scan, Print)

used to store the job on the document server, for example.
Dev Counter Development Count, no. of pages developed.
SP Mode Tables
Dup, Duplex Duplex, printing on both sides
Emul Emulation
FC Full Color
FIN Post-print processing, i.e. finishing (punching, stapling, etc.)
Full Bleed No Margins
GenCopy Generation Copy Mode
GPC Get Print Counter. For jobs 10 pages or less, this counter does not
count up. For jobs larger than 10 pages, this counter counts up by the
number that is in excess of 10 (e.g., for an 11-page job, the counter
counts up 11-10 =1)
IFax Internet Fax
ImgEdt Image Edit performed on the original with the copier GUI, e.g. border
removal, adding stamps, page numbers, etc.
K Black (YMCK)
LS Local Storage. Refers to the document server.
LSize Large (paper) Size
Mag Magnification
MC One color (monochrome)
NRS New Remote Service, which allows a service center to monitor

machines remotely. "NRS" is used overseas, "CSS" is used in Japan.
Org Original for scanning

Main SP Tables-8
OrgJam Original Jam
Palm 2 Print Job Manager/Desk Top Editor: A pair of utilities that allows print
jobs to be distributed evenly among the printers on the network, and
allows files to moved around, combined, and converted to different
formats..
PC Personal Computer
PGS Pages. A page is the total scanned surface of the original. Duplex
pages count as two pages, and A3 simplex count as two pages if the
A3/DLT counter SP is switched ON.
PJob Print Jobs
Ppr Paper
PrtJam Printer (plotter) Jam
PrtPGS Print Pages
R Red (Toner Remaining). Applies to the wide format model A2 only.

This machine is under development and currently not available.
Rez Resolution
SC Service Code (Error SC code displayed)
Scn Scan
Sim, Simplex Simplex, printing on 1 side.
S-to-Email Scan-to-E-mail
SMC SMC report printed with SP5990. All of the Group 8 counters are
recorded in the SMC report.
Svr Server
TonEnd Toner End
TonSave Toner Save
TXJob Send, Transmission
WSD Web Services Devices

Main SP Tables-8
YMC Yellow, Magenta, Cyan
YMCK Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Black
 All of the Group 8 SPs are reset with SP5 801 1 Memory All Clear, or the Counter Reset
SP7 808.
SP Mode Tables
8001 T:Total Jobs These SPs count the number of times each application is
used to do a job.
8002 C:Total Jobs
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8004 P:Total Jobs Note: The L: counter is the total number of times the other
applications are used to send a job to the document
8005 S:Total Jobs
server, plus the number of times a file already on the
8006 L:Total Jobs document server is used.
 These SPs reveal the number of times an application is used, not the number of pages
processed.
 When an application is opened for image input or output, this counts as one job.
 Interrupted jobs (paper jams, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
 Only jobs executed by the customer are counted. Jobs executed by the customer engineer
using the SP modes are not counted.
 When using secure printing (when a password is required to start the print job), the job is
counted at the time when either "Delete Data" or "Specify Output" is specified.
 When a copy job on the document server is printed, SP8022 also increments, and when a
print job stored on the document server is printed, SP8024 also increments.
 When an original is both copied and stored on the document server, the C: and L: counters
both increment.
 When a print job is stored on the document server, only the L: counter increments.
 When the user presses the Document Server button to store the job on the document server,
only the L: counter increments.
 When the user enters document server mode and prints data stored on the document server,
only the L: counter increments.
 When an image received from Palm 2 is received and stored, the L: counter increments.
 When the customer prints a report (user code list, for example), the O: counter increments.

Main SP Tables-8
8011 T:Jobs/LS These SPs count the number of jobs stored to the document
server by each application, to reveal how local storage is
8012 C:Jobs/LS
being used for input.
8014 P:Jobs/LS [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of jobs stored from within
8015 S:Jobs/LS
the document server mode screen at the operation panel.
8016 L:Jobs/LS
8017 O:Jobs/LS
 When a scan job is sent to the document server, the S: counter increments. When you enter
document server mode and then scan an original, the L: counter increments.
 When a print job is sent to the document server, the P: counter increments.
 When a network application sends data to the document server, the O: counter increments.
 When an image from Palm 2 is stored on the document server, the O: counter increments.
8021 T:Pjob/LS These SPs reveal how files printed from the document server
were stored on the document server originally.
8022 C:Pjob/LS
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8024 P:Pjob/LS The L: counter counts the number of jobs stored from within
the document server mode screen at the operation panel.
8025 S:Pjob/LS
8026 L:Pjob/LS
8027 O:Pjob/LS
 When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with another application, the C:
counter increments.
 When an application like DeskTopBinder merges a copy job that was stored on the document
server with a print job that was stored on the document server, the C: and P: counters both
increment.
 When a job already on the document server is printed with another application, the L: counter
increments.
 When a scanner job stored on the document server is printed with another application, the S:
counter increments. If the original was scanned from within document server mode, then the
L: counter increments.
 When images stored on the document server by a network application (including Palm 2), are
printed with another application, the O: counter increments.
 When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with a network application (Web

Main SP Tables-8
Image Monitor, for example), the C: counter increments.
8031 T:Pjob/DesApl
8032 C:Pjob/DesApl
8034 P:Pjob/DesApl
8035 S:Pjob/DesApl
SP Mode Tables
8036 L:Pjob/DesApl
8037 O:Pjob/DesApl
These SPs reveal what applications were used to output documents from the
document server.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of jobs printed from within the document
server mode screen at the operation panel.
 When documents already stored on the document server are printed, the count for the
application that started the print job is incremented.
 When the print job is started from a network application (Desk Top Binder, Web Image Monitor,
etc.) the L: counter increments.
8041 T:TX Jobs/LS
8042 C:TX Jobs/LS
8044 P:TX Jobs/LS
8045 S:TX Jobs/LS
8046 L:TX Jobs/LS
8047 O:TX Jobs/LS

Main SP Tables-8
These SPs count the applications that stored files on the document server
that were later accessed for transmission over the telephone line or over a
network (attached to an e-mail).
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
Note: Jobs merged for sending are counted separately.
The L: counter counts the number of jobs scanned from within the document
 When a stored copy job is sent from the document server, the C: counter increments.
 When images stored on the document server by a network application or Palm2 are sent as
an e-mail, the O: counter increments.
8051 T:TX Jobs/DesApl
8052 C:TX Jobs/DesApl
8054 P:TX Jobs/DesApl
8055 S:TX Jobs/DesApl
8056 L:TX Jobs/DesApl
8057 O:TX Jobs/DesApl
These SPs count the applications used to send files from the document server
over the telephone line or over a network (attached to an e-mail). Jobs merged
for sending are counted separately.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of jobs sent from within the document server
mode screen at the operation panel.
 If the send is started from Desk Top Binder or Web Image Monitor, for example, then the O:
counter increments.

Main SP Tables-8
8061 T:FIN Jobs
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total the finishing methods. The finishing method is specified by the
application.
8062 C:FIN Jobs
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for copy jobs only. The finishing method is
SP Mode Tables
specified by the application.
8064 P:FIN Jobs
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for print jobs only. The finishing method is
8065 S:FIN Jobs
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for scan jobs only. The finishing method is
Note: Finishing features for scan jobs are not available at this time.
8066 L:FIN Jobs
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for jobs output from within the document
server mode screen at the operation panel. The finishing method is specified
from the print window within document server mode.
8067 O:FIN Jobs
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for jobs executed by an external application,
over the network. The finishing method is specified by the application.
1 Sort Number of jobs started in Sort mode. When a stored

copy job is set for Sort and then stored on the
document server, the L: counter increments. (See
SP8066 1)
2 Stack Number of jobs started out of Sort mode.

Main SP Tables-8
3 Staple Number of jobs started in Staple mode.
4 Booklet Number of jobs started in Booklet mode. If the machine

is in staple mode, the Staple counter also increments.
5 Z-Fold Number of jobs started In any mode other than the

Booklet mode and set for folding (Z-fold).
6 Punch Number of jobs started in Punch mode. When Punch is

set for a print job, the P: counter increments. (See
SP8064 6.)
7 Other Reserved. Not used.
8 Inside-Fold
9 Three-in-Fold
10 Three-Out-Fold
11 Four-Fold
12 Kannon-Fold
13 Perfect Bind
14 Ring Bind
15 3rd Vendor
16 eWireBinder
8071 T:Jobs/PGS
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of jobs broken down by the number of pages in
the job, regardless of which application was used.
8072 C:Jobs/PGS
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of copy jobs by size based on the
number of pages in the job.

Main SP Tables-8
8074 P:Jobs/PGS
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of print jobs by size based on the
8075 S:Jobs/PGS
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of scan jobs by size based on the
SP Mode Tables
8076 L:Jobs/PGS
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of jobs printed from within the
document server mode window at the operation panel, by the number of pages
in the job.
8077 O:Jobs/PGS
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of "Other" application jobs (Web
Image Monitor, Palm 2, etc.) by size based on the number of pages in the job.
1 1 Page 8 21 to 50 Pages
2 2 Pages 9 51 to 100 Pages
6 6 to 10 Pages 13 701 to 1000 Pages
7 11 to 20 Pages 14 1001 to Pages
 For example: When a copy job stored on the document server is printed in document server
mode, the appropriate L: counter (SP8076 0xx) increments.
 Interrupted jobs (paper jam, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
 If a job is paused and re-started, it counts as one job.
 If the finisher runs out of staples during a print and staple job, then the job is counted at the
time the error occurs.

Main SP Tables-8
 For copy jobs (SP 8072) and scan jobs (SP 8075), the total is calculated by multiplying the
number of sets of copies by the number of pages scanned. (One duplex page counts as 2.)
 The first test print and subsequent test prints to adjust settings are added to the number of
pages of the copy job (SP 8072).
 When printing the first page of a job from within the document server screen, the page is
counted.
8131 T:S-to-Email Jobs
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs scanned and attached to an
e-mail, regardless of whether the document server was used or not.
8135 S:S-to-Email Jobs
These SPs count the number of jobs scanned and attached to an e-mail,
without storing the original on the document server.
1 B/W Count for the number of jobs with black-and-white.
2 Color Count for the number of jobs with color.
3 ACS Count for the number of jobs using ACS mode.
 These counters count jobs, not pages.

 If the job is stored on the document server, after the job is stored it is determined to be color
or black-and-white then counted.
 If the job is cancelled during scanning, or if the job is cancelled while the document is waiting
to be sent, the job is not counted.
 If the job is cancelled during sending, it may or may not be counted, depending on what stage
of the process had been reached when the job was cancelled.
 If several jobs are combined for sending to the Scan Router, Scan-to-Email, or Scan-to-PC, or
if one job is sent to more than one destination. each send is counted separately. For example,
if the same document is sent by Scan-to-Email as well as Scan-to-PC, then it is counted twice
(once for Scan-to-Email and once for Scan-to-PC).

Main SP Tables-8
8141 T:Deliv Jobs/Svr
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs scanned and sent to a Scan
Router server.
8145 S:Deliv Jobs/Svr
These SPs count the number of jobs scanned in scanner mode and sent to
a Scan Router server.
SP Mode Tables

 The jobs are counted even though the arrival and reception of the jobs at the Scan Router
server cannot be confirmed.
 If even one color image is mixed with black-and-white images, then the job is counted as a
"Color" job.
 If the job is cancelled during scanning, or if the job is cancelled while the document is waiting
to be delivered, the job is not counted.
 Even if several files are combined for sending, the transmission counts as one job.

Main SP Tables-8
8151 T:Deliv Jobs/PC
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs scanned and sent to a folder on a
PC (Scan-to-PC).
8155 S:Deliv Jobs/PC
These SPs count the total number of jobs scanned and sent with Scan-to-PC.

 If the job is cancelled during scanning, it is not counted.
 If the job is cancelled while it is waiting to be sent, the job is not counted.
 Even if several files are combined for sending, the transmission counts as one job.
8171 T: Deliv Jobs/WSD
Total jobs for WSD (WS-Scanner for Web Services Devices).
8175 S: Deliv Jobs/WSD
8181 T: Scan to Media Jobs
8185 S: Scan to Media Jobs
Total number of jobs scanned for WSD.
001 B/W
002 Color
003 ACS

Main SP Tables-8
8191 T:Total Scan PGS
8192 C:Total Scan PGS
8195 S:Total Scan PGS
8196 L:Total Scan PGS
These SPs count the pages scanned by each application that uses the
scanner to scan images.
SP Mode Tables
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
 SP 8191 to 8196 count the number of scanned sides of pages, not the number of physical
pages.
 These counters do not count reading user stamp data, or reading color charts to adjust color.
 Previews done with a scanner driver are not counted.
 A count is done only after all images of a job have been scanned.
 Scans made in SP mode are not counted.
Examples:
 If 3 B5 pages and 1 A3 page are scanned with the scanner application but not stored, the S:
count is 4.
 If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server using the Store File
button in the Copy mode window, the C: count is 6 and the L: count is 6.
 If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied but not stored, the C: count is 6.
 If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6.
8211 T:Scan PGS/LS
8212 C:Scan PGS/LS
8215 S:Scan PGS/LS
8216 L:Scan PGS/LS
These SPs count the number of pages scanned into the document server.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document
server mode screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File button from
within the Copy mode screen
 Reading user stamp data is not counted.

Main SP Tables-8
 If a job is cancelled, the pages output as far as the cancellation are counted.
 If the scanner application scans and stores 3 B5 sheets and 1 A4 sheet, the S: count is 4.
 If pages are copied but not stored on the document server, these counters do not change.
 If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server, the C: count is 6
and the L: count is 6.
 If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6.
8221 ADF Org Feeds
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages fed through the ADF for front and
back side scanning.
1 Front
Number of front sides fed for scanning:

With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Front side count
is the same as the number of pages fed for either simplex or duplex
scanning.
With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously, the Front side
count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex front side
scanning. (The front side is determined by which side the user loads face
up.)
2 Back
Number of rear sides fed for scanning:

With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Back count is the
same as the number of pages fed for duplex scanning.
With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously, the Back count is
the same as the number of pages fed for duplex rear-side scanning.
 When 1 sheet is fed for duplex scanning the Front count is 1 and the Back count is 1.
 If a jam occurs during the job, recovery processing is not counted to avoid double counting.
Also, the pages are not counted if the jam occurs before the first sheet is output.

Main SP Tables-8
8231 Scan PGS/Mode
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by each ADF mode to
determine the work load on the ADF.
1 Large Volume
Selectable. Large copy jobs that cannot be loaded in the ADF at one time.
SP Mode Tables
2 SADF
Selectable. Feeding pages one by one through the ADF.
3 Mixed Size
Selectable. Select "Mixed Sizes" on the operation panel.
4 Custom Size
Selectable. Originals of non-standard size.
5 Platen
Book mode. Raising the ADF and placing the original directly on the platen.
6 Mixed 1 Side/2 Side
Mixed scanning jobs with one-side, 2-side originals.
 If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches from ADF to
Platen mode, the count is done for the last selected mode.
 If the user selects "Mixed Sizes" for copying in the platen mode, the Mixed Size count is
enabled.
 In the SADF mode if the user copies 1 page in platen mode and then copies 2 pages with
SADF, the Platen count is 1 and the SADF count is 3.

Main SP Tables-8
8241 T:Scan PGS/Org
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of scanned pages by original type for all
jobs, regardless of which application was used.
8242 C:Scan PGS/Org
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Copy jobs.
8245 S:Scan PGS/Org
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Scan jobs.
8246 L:Scan PGS/Org
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned and stored from within the
document server mode screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File
button from within the Copy mode screen
8241 8242 8245 8246
1: Text Yes Yes Yes Yes
2: Text/Photo Yes Yes Yes Yes
3: Photo Yes Yes Yes Yes
4: GenCopy, Pale Yes Yes Yes Yes
5: Map Yes Yes No Yes
6: Normal/Detail Yes No No No
7: Fine/Super Fine Yes No No No
8: Binary Yes No Yes No
9: Grayscale Yes No Yes No
10: Color Yes No Yes No
11: Other Yes Yes Yes Yes

Main SP Tables-8
 If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches from ADF to
Platen mode, the count is done for the last selected mode.
8251 T:Scan PGS/ImgEdt
8252 C:Scan PGS/ImgEdt
8255 S:Scan PGS/ImgEdt
8256 L:Scan PGS/ImgEdt
SP Mode Tables
8257 O:Scan PGS/ImgEdt
These SPs show how many times Image Edit features have been selected at
the operation panel for each application. Some examples of these editing
features are:
 Erase> Border
 Erase> Center
 Image Repeat
 Centering
 Positive/Negative
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
Note: The count totals the number of times the edit features have been used. A
detailed breakdown of exactly which features have been used is not given.
 The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode
screen.
8261 T: Scn PGS/ColorCr
8262 C: Scn PGS/ColorCr
8265 S: Scn PGS/ColorCr
8266 L: Scn PGS/ColorCr
1 Color Conversion
2 Color Erase
3 Background

Main SP Tables-8
4 Other
8281 T:Scan PGS/TWAIN
8285 S:Scan PGS/TWAIN
These SPs count the number of pages scanned using a TWAIN driver. These
counters reveal how the TWAIN driver is used for delivery functions.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
Note: At the present time, these counters perform identical counts.
8291 T:Scan PGS/Stamp
8295 S:Scan PGS/Stamp
8301 T:Scan PGS/Size
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by all applications.
Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output (printing)
page size [SP 8-441].
8302 C:Scan PGS/Size
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Copy
application. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and
output (printing) page size [SP 8-442].
8305 S:Scan PGS/Size
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Scan
application. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and
output page size [SP 8-445].
8306 L:Scan PGS/Size

Main SP Tables-8
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned and stored from
within the document server mode screen at the operation panel, and with the
Store File button from within the Copy mode screen. Use these totals to
compare original page size (scanning) and output page size [SP 8-446].
1 A3
2 A4
4 B4
SP Mode Tables
6 DLT
7 LG
8 LT
100 A2
101 B3
102 A0
103 A1
104 B1
105 B2
106 30x42
107 34x44
108 22x34
109 17x22
110 36x48
111 24x36
112 18x24
113 12x18
114 9x12
115 15x20

Main SP Tables-8
254 Other (Standard)
255 Other (Custom)
8311 T:Scan PGS/Rez
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned by
applications that can specify resolution settings.
8315 S:Scan PGS/Rez
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned by
applications that can specify resolution settings.
Note: At the present time, 8311 and 8315 perform identical counts.
1 1200dpi to
2 600dpi to 1199dpi
3 400dpi to 599dpi
4 200dpi to 399dpi
5 to 199dpi
 Copy resolution settings are fixed so they are not counted.
8381 T:Total PrtPGS
8382 C:Total PrtPGS
8384 P:Total PrtPGS
8385 S:Total PrtPGS
8386 L:Total PrtPGS
8387 O:Total PrtPGS

Main SP Tables-8
These SPs count the number of pages printed by the customer. The counter for
the application used for storing the pages increments.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
server mode screen at the operation panel. Pages stored with the Store File
button from within the Copy mode screen go to the C: counter.
1 Field Number
2 Length (High)
SP Mode Tables
3 Length (Low)
4 Area (High)
5 Area (Low)
 When the A3/DLT double count function is switched on with SP5104, 1 A3/DLT page is
counted as 2.
 When several documents are merged for a print job, the number of pages stored are counted
for the application that stored them.
 These counters are used primarily to calculate charges on use of the machine, so the
following pages are not counted as printed pages:
 Blank pages in a duplex printing job.
 Blank pages inserted as document covers, chapter title sheets, and slip sheets.
 Reports printed to confirm counts.
 All reports done in the service mode (service summaries, engine maintenance reports, etc.)
 Test prints for machine image adjustment.
 Error notification reports.
 Partially printed pages as the result of a copier jam.

Main SP Tables-8
8401 T:PrtPGS/LS
8402 C:PrtPGS/LS
8404 P:PrtPGS/LS
8405 S:PrtPGS/LS
8406 L:PrtPGS/LS
These SPs count the number of pages printed from the document server. The
counter for the application used to print the pages is incremented.
The L: counter counts the number of jobs stored from within the document
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
 Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the L: count.
8421 T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of
pages processed for printing. This is the total for all applications.
8422 C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
pages processed for printing by the copier application.
8424 P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
pages processed for printing by the printer application.
8425 S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
pages processed for printing by the scanner application.
8426 L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb

Main SP Tables-8
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
pages processed for printing from within the document server mode window
at the operation panel.
8427 O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
pages processed for printing by Other applications
SP Mode Tables
1 Simplex> Duplex
2 Duplex> Duplex
3 Book> Duplex
4 Simplex Combine
5 Duplex Combine
6 2-in-1 2 pages on 1 side (2-Up)
12 Booklet
13 Magazine
14 2-in-1 + Booklet
15 4-in-1 + Booklet
16 6-in-1 + Booklet
17 8-in-1 + Booklet
18 9-in-1 + Booklet
19 2-in-1 + Magazine

Main SP Tables-8
 These counts (SP8421 to SP8427) are especially useful for customers who need to improve
their compliance with ISO standards for the reduction of paper consumption.
 Pages that are only partially printed with the n-Up functions are counted as 1 page.
Here is a summary of how the counters work for Booklet and Magazine modes:
Booklet Magazine
Original Pages Count Original Pages Count
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
3 2 3 2
4 2 4 2
5 3 5 4
6 4 6 4
7 4 7 4
8 4 8 4
8431 T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features
below, regardless of which application was used.
8432 C:PrtPGS/ImgEdt

Main SP Tables-8
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
below with the copy application.
8434 P:PrtPGS/ImgEdt
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
below with the print application.
8436 L:PrtPGS/ImgEdt
SP Mode Tables
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of pages output from within the document
server mode window at the operation panel with the three features below.
8437 O:PrtPGS/ImgEdt
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
below with Other applications.
1 Cover/Slip Sheet
Total number of covers or slip sheets inserted. The count for a cover printed on
both sides counts 2.
2 Series/Book
The number of pages printed in series (one side) or printed as a book with
booklet right/left pagination.
3 User Stamp
The number of pages printed where stamps were applied, including page
numbering and date stamping.
8441 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by all
applications.

Main SP Tables-8
8442 C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the copy
application.
8444 P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the printer
application.
8445 S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the
scanner application.
8446 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed from within
the document server mode window at the operation panel.
8447 O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by other
applications.
1 A3
2 A4
4 B4
6 DLT
7 LG
8 LT
100 A2
101 B3
102 A0

Main SP Tables-8
103 A1
104 B1
105 B2
106 30x42
107 34x44
108 22x34
SP Mode Tables
109 17x22
110 36x48
111 24x36
112 18x24
113 12x18
114 9x12
115 15x20
237 15inch Custom
238 14inch Custom
239 841 mm Custom: A0-
240 841 mm Custom: -A0
241 594 mm Custom
242 420 mm Custom
243 297 mm Custom
244 210 mm Custom
245 228 mm Custom
246 515 mm Custom
247 364 mm Custom
248 257 mm Custom
249 30/34/36 Custom

Main SP Tables-8
250 22/24 Custom
251 12/18 Custom
252 11/12 Custom
253 8.5/9 Custom
254 Other (Standard)
255 Other (Custom)
 These counters do not distinguish between LEF and SEF.
8451 PrtPGS/Ppr Tray
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of sheets fed from each paper feed station.
1 Bypass Bypass Tray
2 Tray 1 Copier
3 Tray 2 Copier
4 Tray 3 Paper Tray Unit (Option)
5 Tray 4 Paper Tray Unit (Option)
6 Tray 5 LCT (Option)
7 Tray 6 Currently not used.

Main SP Tables-8
101 LC Inserter
102 3rd Vendor
8461 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type
SP Mode Tables
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by all applications.
 These counters are not the same as the PM counter. The PM counter is
based on feed timing to accurately measure the service life of the feed
rollers. However, these counts are based on output timing.
 Blank sheets (covers, chapter covers, slip sheets) are also counted.
 During duplex printing, pages printed on both sides count as 1, and a page
printed on one side counts as 1.
8462 C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the copy
application.
8464 P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the printer
application.
8466 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed from within the
document server mode window at the operation panel.
1 Normal
2 Recycled
3 Special
4 Thick

Main SP Tables-8
5 Normal (Back)
6 Thick (Back)
7 OHP
8 Other
8471 PrtPGS/Mag
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by magnification rate the number of pages printed.
1 - 49%
2 50% to 99%
3 100%
4 101% to 200%
5 201% -
 Counts are done for magnification adjusted for pages, not only on the operation panel but
performed remotely with an external network application capable of performing magnification
adjustment as well.
 Magnification adjustments done with printer drivers with PC applications such as Excel are
also counted.
 Magnification adjustments done for adjustments after they have been stored on the document
server are not counted.
 Magnification adjustments performed automatically during Auto Reduce/Enlarge copying are
counted.
 The magnification rates of blank cover sheets, slip sheets, etc. are automatically assigned a
rate of 100%.

Main SP Tables-8
8481 T:PrtPGS/TonSave
8484 P:PrtPGS/TonSave
These SPs count the number of pages printed with the Toner Save feature
switched on.
Note: These SPs return the same results as this SP is limited to the Print
application.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
SP Mode Tables
8491 T:PrtPGS/Col Mode
8492 C:PrtPGS/Col Mode
8496 L:PrtPGS/Col Mode
8497 O:PrtPGS/Col Mode
These SPs count the number of pages printed for each color mode.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
1 B/W
2 Single Color
3 Two Color
4 Full Color
8501 T:PrtPGS/Col Mode
8504 P:PrtPGS/Col Mode
8507 O:PrtPGS/Col Mode
These SPs count the number of pages printed for each color mode.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
1 B/W
2 Mono Color
3 Full Color
4 Single Color

Main SP Tables-8
5 Two Color
8511 T:PrtPGS/Emul
These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages
printed.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8514 P:PrtPGS/Emul
These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages
printed.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
1 RPCS
2 RPDL
3 PS3
4 R98
5 R16
6 GL/GL2
7 R55
8 RTIFF
9 PDF
10 PCL5e/5c
11 PCL XL
12 IPDL-C
13 BM-Links Japan Only
14 Other
15 IPDS
16 XPS
 SP8511 and SP8514 return the same results as they are both limited to the Print application.

Main SP Tables-8
 Print jobs output to the document server are not counted.
8521 T:PrtPGS/FIN
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by all
applications.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8522 C:PrtPGS/FIN
SP Mode Tables
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the
Copy application.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8524 P:PrtPGS/FIN
Print application.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8525 S:PrtPGS/FIN
Scanner application.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8526 L:PrtPGS/FIN
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed from
within the document server mode window at the operation panel.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
1 Sort
2 Stack
3 Staple
4 Booklet
5 Z-Fold
6 Punch
7 Other

Main SP Tables-8
8 Inside Fold Half-Fold (FM2) (Multi Fold Unit)
9 Three-IN-Fold Letter Fold-in (FM4) (Multi Fold Unit)
10 Three-OUT-Fold Letter Fold-out (FM3) (Multi Fold Unit)
11 Four Fold Double Parallel Fold (FM5) (Multi Fold Unit)
12 KANNON-Fold Gate Fold (FM6) (Multi Fold Unit)
13 Perfect-Bind Perfect Binder Not Used
14 Ring-Bind Ring Binder Not Used
15 3rd Vendor
16 eWireBinder
 If stapling is selected for finishing and the stack is too large for stapling, the unstapled pages
are still counted.
 The counts for staple finishing are based on output to the staple tray, so jam recoveries are
counted.
8531 Staples
This SP counts the amount of staples used by the machine.

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8551 T: PrtBooks/FIN Not Used
8552 O: PrtBooks/FIN Not Used
8554 P: PrtBooks/FIN Not Used
8556 L: PrtBooks/FIN Not Used
1 Perfect-Bind
2 Ring-Bind
3 eWireBinder

Main SP Tables-8
8581 T:Counter
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total output broken down by color output, regardless of
the application used. In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report,
these counters are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy
machine.
1 Total
SP Mode Tables
2 Total: Full Colopr
3 B&W/Mono Color
4 Development: CMY
5 Development: K
6 Copy: Color
7 Copy: B/W
8 Print: Color
9 Print: B/W
10 Total: Color
11 Total: B/W
14 Full Color Print
15 Mono Color Print
101 Total: Full Color Length (Low)
102 Total: Full Color Length (High)
103 Total: Full Color Area (Low)
104 Total: Full Color Area (High)
105 B&W/Mono Color Length (Low)
106 B&W/Mono Color Length (High)
107 B&W/Mono Color Area (Low)

Main SP Tables-8
108 B&W/Mono Color Area (High)
117 Copy: Color Length (Low)
118 Copy: Color Length (High)
119 Copy: Color Area (Low)
120 Copy: Color Area (High)
121 Color: B/W Length (Low)
122 Color: B/W Length (High)
123 Color: B/W Area (Low)
124 Color: B/W Area (High)
125 Print: Color Length (Low)
126 Print: Color Length (High)
127 Print: Color Area (Low)
128 Print: Color Area (High)
129 Print: B/W Length (Low)
130 Print: B/W Length (High)
131 Print: B/W Area (Low)
132 Print: B/W Area (High)
133 Total Color: Length (Low)
134 Total Color: Length (High)
135 Total Color: Area (Low)
136 Total Color: Area (High)
137 Total B/W Length (Low)
138 Total B/W Length (High)
139 Total B/W Area (Low)
140 Total B/W Area (High)
141 Full Color Print Length (Low)

Main SP Tables-8
142 Full Color Print Length (High)
143 Full Color Print Area (Low)
144 Full Color Print Area (High)
145 Mono Color Print Length (Low)
146 Mono Color Print Length (High)
147 Mono Color Print Area (Low)
SP Mode Tables
148 Mono Color Print Area (High)
8582 C: Counter
8584 P: Counter
8586 L: Counter
1 B/W
2 Single Color
3 Two Color
4 Full Color
101 Length (High), B/W
102 Length (Low), B/W
103 Area (High), B/W
104 Area (Low), B/W
111 Length (High), Single
112 Length (Low), Single
113 Area (High), Single
114 Area (Low), Single
121 Length (High), Twin
122 Length (Low), Twin
123 Area (High), Twin

Main SP Tables-8
124 Area (Low), Twin
131 Length (High), Full
132 Length (Low), Full
133 Area (High), Full
134 Area (Low), Full
8601 T: Coverage Counter
1 B/W
2 Color
11 B/W Printing Pages
12 Color Printing Pages
21 Coverage Counter 1
31 Coverage Counter 1 (YMC)
41 Cvg Counter 1 Length (High)
42 Cvg Counter 1 Length (Low)
51 Cvg Counter 1 (YMC) Length (High)
52 Cvg Counter 1 (YMC) Length (Low)

Main SP Tables-8
61 Cvg Counter 1 Area (High)
62 Cvg Counter 1 Area (Low)
SP Mode Tables
71 Cvg Counter 1 (YMC) Area (High)
72 Cvg Counter 1 (YMC) Area (Low)
8602 D: Coverage Counter
8604 P: Coverage Counter
8606 L: Coverage Counter
Provide a breakdown about coverage.
1 B/W
2 Single Color
3 Two Color
4 Full Color

Main SP Tables-8
8617 SDK Apli Counter DFU
SDK 1 to 12
8621 Func Use Counter Not Used
001 to 064: Function 001 to 064
8651 T:S-to-Email PGS
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an
e-mail for both the Scan and document server applications.
Note: This SP is expanded for color MFP and color LP machines. For this
machine, the count is done for black only.
1 B/W
2 Color
8655 S:S-to-Email PGS
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an
e-mail for the Scan application only.
1 B/W
2 Color Color MFP machines only
 For SP8651 and SP8655 the count for B/W and Color pages is done after the document is
stored on the HDD. If the job is cancelled before it is stored, the pages are not counted.
 If Scan-to-Email is used to send a 10-page document to 5 addresses, the count is 10 (the
pages are sent to the same SMTP server together).
 If Scan-to-PC is used to send a 10-page document to 5 folders, the count is 50 (the document
is sent to each destination of the SMB/FTP server).
 Due to restrictions on some devices, if Scan-to-Email is used to send a 10-page document to
a large number of destinations, the count may be divided and counted separately. For

Main SP Tables-8
example, if a 10-page document is sent to 200 addresses, the count is 10 for the first 100
destinations and the count is also 10 for the second 100 destinations, for a total of 20.).
8661 T:Deliv PGS/Svr
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan
Router server by both Scan and LS applications.
SP Mode Tables
8665 S:Deliv PGS/Svr
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan
Router server by the Scan application.
1 B/W
2 Color
 The B/W and Color counts are done after the document is stored on the HDD of the Scan
Router server.
 If the job is canceled before storage on the Scan Router server finishes, the counts are not
done.
 The count is executed even if regardless of confirmation of the arrival at the Scan Router
server.
8671 T:Deliv PGS/PC
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a folder
on a PC (Scan-to-PC) with the Scan and LS applications.
8675 S:Deliv PGS/PC

Main SP Tables-8
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent with
Scan-to-PC with the Scan application.
1 B/W
2 Color
8691 T:TX PGS/LS
8692 C:TX PGS/LS
8694 P:TX PGS/LS
8695 S:TX PGS/LS
8696 L:TX PGS/LS
These SPs count the number of pages sent from the document server. The
counter for the application that was used to store the pages is incremented.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
server mode screen at the operation panel. Pages stored with the Store File
button from within the Copy mode screen go to the C: counter.
 Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the count.
 If several documents are merged for sending, the number of pages stored is counted for the
application that stored them.
8701 TX PGS/Port
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages sent by the physical port used to send
them. For example, if a 3-page original is sent to 4 destinations via ISDN G4,
the count for ISDN (G3, G4) is 12.
1 PSTN-1
2 PSTN-2
3 PSTN-3

Main SP Tables-8
4 ISDN (G3,G4)
5 Network
8711 T:Scan PGS/Comp
[0 to 9999999/ 1]
These SPs count the number of compressed pages scanned into the
SP Mode Tables
document server, counted by the formats listed below.
1 JPEG/JPEG2000
2 TIFF (Multi/Single)
3 PDF
4 Other
5 PDF/Comp
6 PDF/A
7 PDF(OCR)
8 PDF/Comp(OCR)
9 PDF/A(OCR)
8715 S:Scan PGS/Comp
[0 to 9999999/ 1]
These SPs count the number of compressed pages scanned by the scan
application, counted by the formats listed below.
1 JPEG/JPEG2000
2 TIFF (Multi/Single)
3 PDF
4 Other

Main SP Tables-8
5 PDF/Comp
6 PDF/A
7 PDF(OCR)
8 PDF/Comp(OCR)
9 PDF/A(OCR)
8721 T: Deliv PGS/WSD
8725 S: Deliv PGS/WSD
8731 T: Scan PGS/Media
8735 S: Scan PGS/Media
Total number of pages sent via WSD (WS-Scanner for Web Services
Devices).
1 B/W
2 Color
8741 RX PGS/Port
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages received by the physical port used to
receive them.
1 PSTN-1
2 PSTN-2
3 PSTN-3
4 ISDN (G3,G4)
5 Network

Main SP Tables-8
8781 Ink_Botol_Info.
This SP displays the number of toner bottles used. The count is done based on
the equivalent of 1,000 pages per bottle.
1 BK
2 Y
3 M
SP Mode Tables
4 C
8791 LS Memory Remain
This SP displays the percent of space available on the document server for
storing documents.
[0 to 100/ 0 / 1]
8801 Ink Remain
This SP displays the percent of ink remaining for each color. This SP allows the
user to check the toner supply at any time.
[0 to 100/ 0 / 1]
1 BK
2 Y
3 M
4 C
8811 Eco Counter
1 Eco Total
2 Color
3 Full Color
5 Combine
9 Combine (%)

Main SP Tables-8
10 Paper Cut (%)
51 Sync Eco Total
52 Sync Color
53 Sync Full Color
55 Sync Combine
56 Sync Color(%)
57 Sync Full Color(%)
59 Sync Combine(%)
60 Sync Paper Cut(%)
101 Eco Totalr:Last
102 Color: Last
103 Full Color: Last
105 Combine: Last
106 Color (%): Last
107 Full Color (%): Last
109 Combine (%): Last
110 Paper Cut (%): Last
151 Sync Eco Totalr:Last
152 Sync Color:Last
153 Sync Full Color:Last
154 Sync Combine:Last
155 Sync Color(%):Last
156 Sync Full Color(%):Last
157 Sync Combine(%):Last
159 Sync Paper Cut(%):Last
160 Sync Eco Totalr:Last

Main SP Tables-8
8851 Cvr Cnt: 0 - 10%
8861 Cvr Cnt: 11 - 20%
8871 Cvr Cnt: 21 - 30%
8881 Cvr Cnt: 31%
[0 to 9999999]
These SPs count the percentage of dot coverage for each color.
SP Mode Tables
1 BK
2 Y
3 M
4 C
8891 Page/Ink Bottle
Total number of pages per toner bottle.
1 BK
2 Y
3 M
4 C
8901 Page/Toner_Prev1 DFU
1 BK
2 Y
3 M
4 C

Main SP Tables-8
8911 Page/Toner_Prev2 DFU
1 BK
2 Y
3 M
4 C
8921 Cvr Cnt/Total
1 Coverage (%): BK
2 Coverage (%): Y
3 Coverage (%): M
4 Coverage (%): C
11 Coverage/P: BK
12 Coverage/P: Y
13 Coverage/P: M
14 Coverage/P: C
21 Ink Cons (ml): BK
22 Ink Cons (ml): Y
23 Ink Cons (ml): M
24 Ink Cons (ml): C

Main SP Tables-8
8941 Machine Status
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the amount of time the machine spends in each operation
mode. These SPs are useful for customers who need to investigate machine
operation for improvement in their compliance with ISO Standards.
1 Operation Time
Engine operation time. Does not include time while controller is saving data to
SP Mode Tables
HDD (while engine is not operating).
2 Standby Time
Engine not operating. Includes time while controller saves data to HDD. Does
not include time spent in Energy Save, Low Power, or Off modes.
3 Energy Save Time
Includes time while the machine is performing background printing.
4 Low Power Time
Includes time in Energy Save mode with Engine on. Includes time while
machine is performing background printing.
5 Off Mode Time
Includes time while machine is performing background printing. Does not

include time machine remains powered off with the power switches.
6 SC
Total down time due to SC errors.
7 PrtJam
Total down time due to paper jams during printing.
8 OrgJam
Total down time due to original jams during scanning.
9 Supply PM Wait End
Total down time due to toner end.

Main SP Tables-8
8951 AddBook Register
These SPs count the number of events when the machine manages data
registration.
1 User Code
User code registrations.

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
2 Mail Address
Mail address registrations.

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
4 Group
Group destination registrations.

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
6 F-Code
F-Code box registrations.

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
7 Copy Program
Copy application registrations with the Program (job settings) feature.

[0 to 255 / 0 / 255]
9 Printer Program
Printer application registrations with the Program (job settings) feature.

[0 to 255 / 0 / 255]
10 Scanner Program
Scanner application registrations with the Program (job settings) feature.

[0 to 255 / 0 / 255]

Main SP Tables-8
8961 Electricity Status
1 Ctrl Standby Time [0 to 99999 / - / 1]
2 STR Time
3 Main Power Off Time
4 Reading and Printing
SP Mode Tables
Time
5 Printing Time
6 Reading Time
7 Eng Waiting Time
8 Low Pawer State Time
9 Silent State Time
10 Heater Off State Time
11 LCD on Time
8971 Unit Control
1 Engine Off Recovery [0 to 99999 / - / 1]

Count
2 Power Off Count
3 Force Power Off Count

Main SP Tables-8
8999 Admin Counter List
1 Total
2 Copy: Full Color
3 Copy: BW
4 Copy: Single Color
5 Copy: Two Color
6 Printer: Full Color
7 Printer: BW
8 Printer: Single Color
9 Printer: Two Color
22 Copy: Full Color (%)
23 Copy: B/W (%)
24 Copy: Single Color (%)
25 Copy: Two Color (%)
26 Printer: Full Color (%)
27 Printer: B/W (%)
28 Printer: Single Color (%)
29 Printer: Two Color (%)
101 Transmission Total: Color
102 Transmission Total: BW
103 Fax Transmission
104 Scanner Transmission: Color
105 Scanner Transmission: BW

Printer Service Mode
3.10 PRINTER SERVICE MODE
3.10.1 PRINTER SERVICE MODE
1001 Bit Switch
001 Bit Switch 1 0 1
bit 0 DFU - -
SP Mode Tables
bit 1 Responding with the hostname as the Model Hostname
sysName name
(PnP
name)
This BitSwitch can change the value of the sysName.

0 (default): Model name (PnP name) such as "MP C401SP"
1: Host name
bit 2 DFU - -
bit 3 No I/O Timeout 0:Disabled 1:Enabled
Enables/Disables MFP I/O Timeouts. If enabled, the MFP I/O Timeout

setting will have no affect. I/O Timeouts will never occur.
bit 4 SD Card Save Mode 0:Disabled 1:Enabled
If this bit switch is enabled, print jobs will be saved to the GW SD slot and
not output to paper.
bit 5 [PS and PDF] Paper size error margin ±5pt ±10pt
When a PS job is printed by using a custom paper size, the job might not
be printed because of a paper size mismatch caused by a calculation
error. By default, the error margin for matching to a paper size is ±5
points. By enabling this BitSwitch, the error margin for matching to a
paper size can be extended to ±10 points.
bit 6 Color balance switching 0:Disabled 1:Enabled

1001 Bit Switch
This BitSwitch can be used to restore the color balance to match that of
previous models. If this BitSwitch is set to "1" (Enabled), the color balance
that is equivalent to Fuji-Xerox printers will be used.
bit 7 [RPCS,PCL]: Printable area frame border 0: Disable 1: Enable
Prints all RPCS and PCL jobs with a border around the printable area.
1001 Bit Switch
Color balance switching Disabled Enabled
bit 0 This BitSwitch can be used to restore the color balance to match that of
from 09S and earlier models will be used.
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 DFU - -
bit 3 [PCL5e/c.PS]: PDL Auto Switching 0: Enable 1: Disable
Enables/disable the MFPs ability to change the PDL processor mid-job.

Some host systems submit jobs that contain both PS and PCL5e/c. If Auto
PDL switching is disabled, these jobs will not be printed properly.
bit 4 Color balance switching Disabled Enabled
This BitSwitch can be used to restore the color balance to match that of
from 09A and Extended 09A models will be used.
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 Switch dither 0: Use 1: Use

normal alternative
dither dither
See RTB#RD014018.
bit 7 DFU - -

1001 Bit Switch
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 [PCL5e/c]: Legacy HP compatibility 0:Disabled 1:Enabled
Uses the same left margin as older HP models such as HP4000/HP8000.

In other words, the left margin defined in the job (usually "<ESC>*r0A")
SP Mode Tables
will be changed to "<ESC>*r1A".
bit 3
DFU - -
to 7
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0 -
DFU -
to 7
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 Multiple copies if a paper size or type 0:Disabled 1:Enabled

mismatch occurs (Single (Multiple
copy) copy)
If a paper size or type mismatch occurs during the printing of multiple

copies, only a single copy is output by default. Using this bit switch, the
device can be configured to print all copies even if a paper mismatch
occurs.
bit 2 Prevent SDK applications from altering

0:Disabled 1:Enabled
the contents of a job.

1001 Bit Switch
Enable: SDK applications will not be able to alter print data. This is
achieved by preventing SDK applications from accessing a module called
the "GPS Filter".
Note: The main purpose of this bit switch is for troubleshooting the effects
of SDK applications on data.
bit 3 [PS] PS Criteria 0: Pattern3 1: Pattern1
Change the number of PS criterion used by the PS interpereter to

determine whether a job is PS data or not.
Pattern3: (2 to 4): The larger the pattern number, the greater the number
of criterion used. Pattern 4 includes most PS commands.
Pattern1: A small number of PS tags and headers
bit 4 Increase max. number of stored jobs. 0:Disabled 1:Enabled

(100) (750)
Changes the maximum number of jobs that can be stored on the HDD.
The default (disabled) is 100. If this is enabled, the max. will be raised to
750 or 1000 depending on the model.
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 Method for determining the image rotation

for the edge to bind on.
Enable: The image rotation will be performed as they were in the

specifications of older models for the binding of pages of mixed
orientation jobs.
The old models are below:
- PCL: Pre-04A models
- PS/PDF/RPCS: Pre-05S models
bit 7 Letterhead mode printing 1:Enabled

0:Disabled
(Duplex)
Routes all pages through the duplex unit.

If this is disabled, simplex pages or the last page of an odd-paged duplex
job are not routed through the duplex unit. This could result in problems
with letterhead/pre-printed pages.
Only affects pages specified as Letterhead paper.

1001 Bit Switch
Include bypass in auto tray select 0:Disabled 1:Enabled

bit 0
If enabled, the Bypass tray tray will be included in auto tray selection.
bit 1
DFU - -
to 7
SP Mode Tables
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0
DFU - -
to 7
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0
DFU - -
to 2
bit 3 [PCL.PS]: Allow BW jobs to print without 1:Enabled

requiring User Code (allow BW
0:Disabled jobs to print
without a
user code)
BW jobs submitted without a user code will be printed even if usercode

authentication is enabled.
Note: Color jobs will not be printed without a valid user code.
bit 4
DFU - -
to 5
PCL, RPCS, PS: Forced BW print 0:Disabled 1:Enabled

bit 6
Switches whether to ignore PDL color command.
bit 7 DFU - -

1001 Bit Switch
bit 0 PDL Auto Detection timeout of jobs

submitted via USB or Parallel Port (IEEE
(Immediately) (10 seconds)
1284).
To be used if PDL auto-detection fails. A failure of PDL autodetection does

not necessarily mean that the job can not be printed. This bit switch tells the
device whether to time-out immediately (default) upon failure or to wait 10
seconds.
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 Job Cancel 0:Disabled

1:Enabled
(Not
(Cancelled)
cancelld)
Enable: All jobs will be cancelled after a jam occurs.

Note: If this bit switch is enabled, printing under the following conditions
might result in problems:
- Job submission via USB or parallel port
- Spool printing (WIM > Configuration > Device Settings > System)
bit 3 DFU - -
bit 4 Timing of the PJL Status ReadBack (JOB

END) when printing multiple collated 0:Disabled 1:Enabled
copies.
This bit switch determines the timing of the PJL USTATUS JOB END sent
when multiple collated copies are being printed.
Disable (=0 (default)):
JOB END is sent by the device to the client after the first copy has
completed printing. This causes the page counter to be incremented after
the first copy and then again at the end of the job.
Enable (=1):
JOB END is sent by the device to the client after the last copy has finished
printing. This causes the page counter to be incremented at the end of each
job.

1001 Bit Switch
bit 5 Display UTF-8 text in the operation panel 0:Enabled 1:Disabled
Enable (=0):
Text composed of UTF-8 characters can be displayed in the operation
panel.
Disable (=1):
UTF-8 characters cannot be displayed in the operation panel.
SP Mode Tables
For example, job names are sometimes stored in the MIB using UTF-8
encoded characters. When these are displayed on the operation panel,
they will be garbled unless this bit switch is enabled (=0).
bit 6 Disable super option 0:Enabled 1:Disabled
Switches super option disable on / off. It this is On, multiple jobs are
grouped at LPR port. PJL settings are enabled even jobs that are
specified queue names are sent.
bit 7 Enable/Disable Print from USB/SD's

0:Enabled 1:Disabled
Preview function
Determines whether print from USB/SD will have the Preview function.
Enabled (=0): Print from USB/SD will have the Preview function.
Disabled (=1): Print from USB/SD will not have the Preview function.

1001 Bit Switch
010 Bit Switch A 0 1
bit 0
DFU - -
to 3
bit 4 Not Used - -
bit 5 Store and Skip Errored Job locks the 0: Queue

1: Queue
queue is not
locked after
locked
SSEJ
after SSEJ
If this is 1, then after a job is stored using Store and Skip Errored Job
(SSEJ), new jobs cannot be added to the queue until the stored job has
been completely printed.
bit 6 0: Does
1: Allows
Allow use of Store and Skip Errored Job if not allow
SSEJ with
connected to an external charge device. SSEJ with
ECD
ECD
If this is 0, Store and Skip Errored Job (SSEJ) will be automatically

disabled if an external charge device is connected.
Note: We do not officially support enabling this bit switch (1). Use it at
your own risk.
Job cancels remaining pages when the

Job does
paid-for pages have been printed on an Job cancels
not cancel
external charge device
bit 7 When setting 1 is enabled, after printing the paid-for pages on an external
charge device, the job that includes any remaining pages will be
canceled.
This setting will prevent the next user from printing the unnecessary
pages from the previous user's print job.

1001 Bit Switch
011 Bit Switch B 0 1
bit 0
DFU - -
to 1
Switch for enabling or disabling Limitless

0: Enable 1: Disable
Paper Feeding for the Bypass Tray
SP Mode Tables
When the Bypass Tray is the target of the Auto Tray Select and Any
Size/Type is configured for the Tray Setting Priority setting of the Bypass
Tray, this BitSwitch can switch the behavior whether or not Limitless
Paper Feeding is applied to the Bypass Tray.* The default is Enabled (=0).
*Limitless Paper Feeding will try a matching tray of the next highest
priority if a job specified to Auto Tray Select as the tray setting is
submitted and the tray runs out of paper.
Enabled (=0: Default):
Limitless Paper Feeding is applied to the Bypass Tray.
bit 2 If a tray other than the Bypass Tray matches the job's paper size and type
but has run out of paper, printing will occur from the Bypass Tray.
Disabled (=1):
Limitless Paper Feeding is not applied to the Bypass Tray.
If a tray other than the Bypass Tray matches the job's paper size and type
but has run out of paper, printing will stop and an alert will appear on the
LCD screen, stating that the tray has run out of paper. This prevents
unexpected use of the Bypass Tray.
Limitations when this BitSwitch is set to "1":
- The "Paper Tray Priority: Printer" setting must be configured to a tray
other than the Bypass Tray.
- Jobs that contain more than one paper size cannot be printed.
011 bit 3 DFU - -
Add "Apply Auto Paper Select" is the

condition that decides if the device's
bit 4 0:Enabled 1:Disabled
paper size or paper type should be
overwritten.

1001 Bit Switch
If this BitSwitch is set to "1" (enabled), the "Apply Auto Paper Select"
setting will decide if the paper size or paper type that is specified in the
device settings should be overwritten by the job's commands when "Tray
Setting Priority" is set to "Driver/Command" or "Any Type".
- Apply Auto Paper Select = OFF: Overwritten (priority is given to the job’s
commands)
- Apply Auto Paper Select = ON: Not overwritten (priority is given to the
device settings)
bit 5
Not Used - -
to 7
1001 Bit Switch
012 Bit Switch C 0 1
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1
Not Used - -
to 4
Change the user ID type displayed on the

0:Enabled 1:Disabled
operation panel
As of 15S models, the Login User Name can be displayed on the
bit 5 operation panel. The user ID type displayed on the operation panel can be
changed by configuring BitSwitch #12-5 as follows:
- 0 (default): Login User Name
- 1: User ID. If this is enabled, User ID will be displayed, which is
equivalent to the behavior exhibited in 14A and earlier models.
bit 6
Not Used - -
to 7
1003 Clear setting
1 Initialize Printer System

Initializes the settings in the printer feature settings of UP mode.
3 Delete Program DFU

1004 Print Summary
Touch [Execute] to print the printer summary sheets.
1005 Display Version.
Printer Application Version
Displays the version of the controller firmware.
SP Mode Tables
1006 Sample/Locked Print
This SP disables/enables use of the document server.

[0 or 1/ 0 /1]
0: Enabled. Document server can be used.
1: Disabled. Document server cannot be used.
1101 Data Recall Not Used
The copier firmware has a test pattern with eight stepped gradation scales for
each color (KCYM), including background white, for Text and Photo modes.
The ACC procedure automatically calibrates the gamma curve when the user
selects ACC. Generally, here is what happens:
 The operator prints the pattern.
 Operator places the pattern on the exposure glass.
 Copier scans 8 lines (1 for each color in text mode and one for each color
in photo mode).
 Machine corrects the printer gamma by comparing the ideal settings with
the current image density.
 Machine combines the corrected gamma curve with the High, Middle,
Low ID values currently in memory.
 Machine calculates the ID max (amplitude and gamma curve) based on
data from the ACC scan. The correct gamma curves can be adjusted
with SP4918.
Note: This is done only with machines that support ACC.
The SP codes below display the settings for factory, previous setting, current
setting, and ACC setting.

1 Factory
2 Previous
3 Current
4 ACC
1102 Resolution Setting
This setting matches supported resolution with a dithering mode.
1103 Test Page
1 Color Gray Scale
2 Color Pattern
1104 Gamma Adjustment
1 to 4 Set Black 1 to 4
21 to 24 Set Cyan 1 to 4
41 to 44 Set Magenta 1 to 4
61 to 64 Set Yellow 1 to 4

1105 Save Tone Control Value
1106 Toner Limit
Full color: Range 0 to 400

2-Color : Range 0 to 200
1108 Ext. Ink Save
SP Mode Tables
1 Mode1:Text [0 to 255 / 75 / 1]
2 Mode2:Text [0 to 255 / 50 / 1]
3 Mode1:Image [0 to 255 / 75 / 1]
4 Mode2:Image [0 to 255 / 50 / 1]
5 Mode1:Line [0 to 255 / 75 / 1]
6 Mode2:Line [0 to 255 / 50 / 1]
7 Mode1:Paint [0 to 255 / 75 / 1]
8 Mode2:Paint [0 to 255 / 50 / 1]
1110 Media Print Device Setting
Sets which tray given priority for paper feed
The bypass tray is "0".

[0 to 4/1/1] 0: Bypass 1:Tray 1 2:Tray 2 3:Tray 3 4:LCT

1111 All Jobs Delete Mode
This switch determines whether all SCS jobs in progress are included in the SMC
report when SP5990 is executed.
[0 to 1/1/1] 1:Jobs included 0:Jobs not included

1400 RPGL Setting (EXP)
These SP codes set up the print parameters for RPGL.
1 Set Thin Line Width (EXP)
[0 to 99/5/1]
2 Correct Line Width (EXP)
[0 to 3/2/1]
SP Mode Tables
0:Mode 1 1:Mode 2 2:Mode 3 3:Mode 4
4 Character Density (EXP)
[15 to 30/15/1]
5 Photo Density (EXP)
[15 to 30/15/1]
6 Default Blank Space (EXP)
[0 to 1/0/1]
0: Margin 1: No margin
7 Job Reset (EXP)
[0 to 1/0/1]
0;Enble 1:Disable
8 Search Not Set Tray (EXP)
[0 to 1/0/1]
 0: Include tray not specified in search
 1: Do not included unspecified tray in search
9 Character Total Amount (EXP)
[99 to 400/99/1]
10 Photo Total Amount (EXP)
[99 to 400/99/1]
11 Basis of Scale (EXP)

[0 to 1/1/1]
0: Allow maximum size paper
1: Submenu setting

Scanner Service Mode
3.11 SCANNER SERVICE MODE
3.11.1 SP-1XXX SYSTEM AND OTHERS
1001 Scan Nv Version
5 Name_Model Name_History No.
SP Mode Tables
1005 Erase Margin (Remote Scan)
1 [0 to 5/ 0 /1 mm]
1009 Remote Scan Disable
1 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1] 0: ON (enabled) 1: OFF (disabled)
1010 Non Display Clear Light PDF
1 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1] 0: Display ON 1: Display OFF
1011 Org Count Display
1 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1] 0: OFF (no display) 1: ON (count displays)
1012 User Info Release
1 [0 or 1 / 1 / 1] 1: Release 0: Do not release
1013 Scan to Media Device Setting
2 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1] 0: Disable 1: Enable
1014 Scan to Folder Pass Input Set
1 0:OFF 1:ON [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

1041 Scan: Flair API Setting
001 0x00 - 0xff [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
This SP code enables/disables the scanner’s FlairAPI function.
bit0 FlairAPI server 0: Off 1: On

start up
For setting whether to start the HTTP server for FlairAPI or not.
O: All the scanner’s FlairAPI functions* are to be disabled.
*Example of FlairAPI functions
 Remote UI
bit1 Access 0: Disabled 1: Enabled

permission from
FlairAPI external
device
0: Accessible only from internal devices of the machine (the operation panel,
SKD/J, MFP browser, etc.)
1: Accessible from both internal devices of the machine and external devices (a
PC, remote UI, IT-BOX, etc.)
bit2 Switching 0: IPv6 only 1: IPv4 priority

dedicated IPv6
0: Accessible only by IPv6

1: Accessible by IPv4 if the IPv4 address is effective or by IPv6 if the IPv4
address is not effective.
If the IPv4 address is effective, access from the Android operation panel is
disabled.
bit3 Remote UI 0:Disabled 1:Enabled

function
For setting whether the remote UI (scanner function) is to be used or not

O: Remote UI is not to be used.
1: Remote UI is to be used.
bit4 Not used
bit5 Not used
bit6 Not used

bit7 Not used
3.11.2 SP2-XXX SCANNING IMAGE QUALITY
2021 Compression Level (Grayscale)
1 Comp 1: 5-95
[5 to 95 / 20 / 1]
SP Mode Tables
2 Comp 2: 5-95
[5 to 95 / 40 / 1]
3 Comp 3: 5-95
[5 to 95 / 65 / 1]
4 Comp 4: 5-95
[5 to 95 / 80 / 1]
5 Comp 5: 5-95
[5 to 95 / 95 / 1]
2026 High Compression of PDF
1 Comp1: 5–95
[5 to 95 / 15 / 1]
2 Comp2: 5–95
[5 to 95 / 25 / 1]
3 Comp3: 5–95
[5 to 95 / 40 / 1]
4 Comp4: 5–95
[5 to 95 / 70 / 1]
5 Comp5: 5–95

[5 to 95 / 90 / 1]
2030 OCR PDF DetectSens
001 White Lumi Value:0 - 255 [0 to 255 / 250 / 1]
002 White Pix Ratio: 0 - 100 [0 to 100 / 80 / 1]
003 White Tile Ratio: 0 - 100 [0 to 100 / 80 / 1]

Input and Output Check
3.12 INPUT AND OUTPUT CHECK
3.12.1 INPUT CHECK TABLE (SP5-803)
5803 Input Check
1 Paper Inlet Sensor: Upper
2 Paper Inlet Sensor: Lower
SP Mode Tables
3 Paper Exit Sensor: Upper
4 Paper Exit Sensor: Lower
5 Front Register Sensor
6 By-pass Sensor
7 Output Sensor
10 Paper Feed Pressure Release Sensor: Upper
11 Paper Feed Pressure Release Sensor: Lower
12 Register Pressure Release Sensor: Lower
13 Residual Amount. Sensor Upper
14 Residual Amount. Sensor Lower
15 Residual Qty. Ratio M
16 Residual Qty. Ratio Y
17 Main Scan Encoder Sensor
18 Sub Scan Encoder Sensor
19 Roll End Sensor/Upper
20 Roll End Sensor/Lower
21 Front Cover Pre-Sensor
22 Total Counter
23 Separation claw position sensor

30 Outside Temperature
31 Outside Humidity
43 Head Temperature Sensor: Color
45 Head Temperature Sensor: Black
48 DRESS Sensor 1
49 DRESS Sensor 2
50 Front Cover Sensor Left
51 Front Cover Sensor Right
52 Cartridge Cover Sensor
53 Roll Paper Cover Sensor
54 Waste Ink Box Cover Sensor
55 Waste Ink Box Setting Sensor
60 Sub Scan HP Sensor
61 Cutter Sensor Right
62 Cutter Sensor Left
70 Maintenance Suction Unit HP Detection Sensor
71 MaintenDehumidify Unit HP Detection Sensor
72 MaintenanceCleaner Slide HP Detection Sensor
91 Ink Cartridge Sensor: Y
92 Ink Cartridge Sensor: M
93 Ink Cartridge Sensor: C
94 Ink Cartridge Sensor: K
150 MainFillerSens Front
151 MainFillerSens Rear

152 OCFS HT1
153 OCFS HT2
154 OCFS HT3
155 OCFS HT4
156 OCFS HT5
157 OCFS HT6
SP Mode Tables
158 OCFS HT7
159 INKEND SENSOR K
160 INKEND SENSOR C
161 INKEND SENSOR M
162 INKEND SENSOR Y
209 Original Width Sensor:914mm
210 Original Width Sensor:30"
211 Original Set Sensor
212 Original Registration Sensor
213 Original Exit Sensor
214 Original Emergency Stop Sensor
215 Original Feed Unit Open Sensor

250 Auto Nozzle Check Wiper Pos Detect HP Sen
251 Auto Nozzle Check Wiper Pos Detect

3.12.2 OUTPUT CHECK TABLE (SP5-804)
5804 Output Check
Most of these sensors present [OFF] [ON] selections. After pressing the [ON]
selection, be sure to press [OFF] to switch the component off.
52 Paper Feed Motor Speed: Upper
SP Mode Tables
54 Paper Feed Motor Speed: Lower
55 Paper Feed Clutch: Upper
56 Paper Feed Clutch: Lower
59 Sub Scan Motor
60 Sub Scan Motor Speed
63 Move Cutter Toward Right
64 Move Cutter Toward Left
65 Start Suction Fan
66 Suction Fan Speed
67 Suction Fan Revolution
68 MCU Cooling Fan
69 PSU Cooling Fan
71 DRESS LED On
72 Manual feed clutch
100 Auto Nozzle Check LED On
110 Air Release Solenoid On/Off
111 Carriage LED On/Off
112 Carriage LED Duty Setting

201 Document
211 CIS_LED_R
212 CIS_LED_G
213 CIS_LED_B

SOP 2ndGEN
SMART OPERATION PANEL 2nd
GENERATION
None
SMART OPERATION PANEL 2nd
GENERATION
(SOP 2NDGEN)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................... 1

1.1 SMART OPERATION PANEL ........................................................................................... 1
1.1.1 OPERATION PANEL UNIT..................................................................................... 1
1.1.2 CPU BOARD .......................................................................................................... 5
1.1.3 MICRO COMPUTER BOARD ................................................................................ 8
1.1.4 WI-FI MODULE .................................................................................................... 10
1.1.5 LCD....................................................................................................................... 11
1.1.6 SPEAKER ............................................................................................................. 13
1.1.7 MICROPHONE ..................................................................................................... 14
2. MECHANISM................................................................................ 16
2.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................................................... 16
2.1.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS .................................................................................... 16
Hardware Specifications ........................................................................................... 16
Software Specifications ............................................................................................ 21
Communication specifications.................................................................................. 22
Application Specifications......................................................................................... 25
2.1.2 PANEL COMPONENTS/SCREEN LAYOUT ........................................................ 30
Components of the Control Panel ............................................................................ 30
Panel display ............................................................................................................ 32
2.1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ............................................................................ 35
Touch panel .............................................................................................................. 35
2.2 CONTROLLING THE POWER SUPPLY ........................................................................ 37
2.2.1 EXITING ENERGY SAVING MODES .................................................................. 37
2.2.2 SCREEN STARTUP MODE ................................................................................. 37
Startup Modes .......................................................................................................... 37
Changing the Screen Startup Mode ......................................................................... 37
How the Control Panel Starts Up ............................................................................. 38
How the Screen Shuts Down When Quick mode Is Selected ................................. 39
2.2.3 SHUTDOWN FUNCTIONS .................................................................................. 40
Normal Shutdown ..................................................................................................... 41
nd
SM i SOP 2 GEN
Other Shutdown Functions ....................................................................................... 41
3. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE ............................................................ 42

3.1 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE .............................................................................................. 42
3.1.1 MAINTENANCE MODES ..................................................................................... 42
3.1.2 LOGIN TO/LOGOUT FROM CONTROL PANEL SERVICE MODE .................... 43
Login ......................................................................................................................... 43
Login Status Indicator ............................................................................................... 43
Logout....................................................................................................................... 44
When Entry to Service Mode Is Prohibited by the Administrator ............................. 44
3.1.3 SERVICE MODE MENU ...................................................................................... 45
WIRELESS & NETWORKS ..................................................................................... 45
DEVICE .................................................................................................................... 47
SYSTEM ................................................................................................................... 48
3.1.4 PANEL SELF CHECK .......................................................................................... 51
LED Check ............................................................................................................... 52
Key Check ................................................................................................................ 52
LCD Check ............................................................................................................... 53
Speaker Check ......................................................................................................... 54
TouchPanel Check ................................................................................................... 55
TouchPanel Calibration ............................................................................................ 56
MultiTouch Calibration .............................................................................................. 57
Wireless LAN Check ................................................................................................ 58
Bluetooth Check ....................................................................................................... 59
3.1.5 RECOVERY MODE.............................................................................................. 60
3.1.6 SPECIAL KEY COMBINATIONS.......................................................................... 61
3.2 SOFTWARE UPDATE .................................................................................................... 62
3.2.1 UPDATING THE SMART OPERATION PANEL................................................... 62
3.2.2 INSTALLATION/UPDATE FROM AN SD CARD .................................................. 64
Updating the Smart Operation Panel Firmware ....................................................... 64
Installing/Updating an Application ............................................................................ 67
3.2.3 PACKAGE UPDATE ............................................................................................. 67
When Installation/Update Is Prohibited .................................................................... 67
3.2.4 INSTALLATION/UPDATE FROM THE EDC SERVER ........................................ 68
Check Server Connect ............................................................................................. 68
Installation ................................................................................................................ 69
Activation .................................................................................................................. 69
Update ...................................................................................................................... 70
3.2.5 APPLICATION SITE ............................................................................................. 70
nd
SOP 2 GEN ii SM
4. TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................. 71
4.1 TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................................................................... 71
4.1.1 SOFTWARE UPDATE ERRORS ......................................................................... 71
Errors that occur during application update from an SD card.................................. 71
Errors that occur during update from the eDC Server ............................................. 72
Errors that occur during remote (batch file) update ................................................. 73
4.1.2 ERRORS THAT OCCUR WHEN THE CONTROL PANEL DOWNLOADS DATA
FROM THE CONTROLLER AT STARTUP ..................................................................... 79
nd
SM iii SOP 2 GEN
READ THIS FIRST
Symbols, Abbreviations and Trademarks

This manual uses several symbols and abbreviations. The meaning of those symbols and
abbreviations are as follows:
Clip ring
Screw
Connector
Clamp
SEF Short Edge Feed
LEF Long Edge Feed
[A] Short Edge Feed (SEF)

[B] Long Edge Feed (LEF)
Trademarks
Microsoft®, Windows®, and MS-DOS® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and /or other countries.
PostScript® is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
PCL® is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
Ethernet® is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
PowerPC® is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
Android is a trademark of Google Inc.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be trademarks of
their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights involved with those marks.
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.1 SMART OPERATION PANEL
1.1.1 OPERATION PANEL UNIT
 Turn off the main power switch of the MFP and disconnect the power cord.
 After replacing, make sure that all disconnected harnesses are connected up again
and secured in their clamps (if the MFP has harnesses).
 When handling the operation panel cable, hold down the connector of the cable
with your finger as shown in the picture to prevent excessive force from being
applied to the connector of the PCB.
nd
SM 1 SOP 2 GEN
 If excessive force is applied to the connector of the PCB in the direction of the
arrow, connection failure may occur.
 For machines manufactured in October 2016 or later, a bracket [A] will be added to
cover the connector of the cable.
1. Remove the operation panel unit from the MFP.
 For details about how to remove the operation panel unit, refer to the service manual
for the MFP.
2. Operation panel arm bracket [A] ( ×4)
nd
SOP 2 GEN 2 SM
 By factory default, switches No.3 and No.7 of the DIP switch [A] on the micro computer
board are set to ON. When installing the operation panel unit, make sure that the DIP
switch setting is correct for the MFP on which you are installing the panel.
 The correct DIP switch setting depends on the MFP. Note the DIP switch settings of the
old operation panel unit before replacing, and apply the same settings to the new Smart
Operation Panel. (Below are two examples for DIP switch settings.)
nd
SM 3 SOP 2 GEN
When No.3 and No.7 are set to ON
 This is the factory default setting of a When only No.3 is set to ON
service part
 If the DIP switch setting is wrong, SC672 will be displayed.

 After replacing the operation panel unit, make sure that the latest version of the firmware
is installed on the Smart Operation Panel. Update it if necessary (page 62 "Updating the
Smart Operation Panel").
nd
SOP 2 GEN 4 SM
1.1.2 CPU BOARD
1. Operation panel unit (page 1)
2. Bottom cover [A] ( ×4)
 There are four hooks inside the operation panel unit. Before removing the operation
panel bottom cover, check the photos below.
3. Base bracket [A] ( ×9)
nd
SM 5 SOP 2 GEN
4. Remove the fixing screws ( ×4) on the CPU board [A], and remove the CPU board
from the micro computer board.
 Make sure that the orientation of the connector is correct when attaching the CPU
board.
5. Lift the fastener of the LCD I/F cable on the CPU board side.
nd
SOP 2 GEN 6 SM
6. CPU board [A] (LCD I/F cable ×1)
 After replacing the CPU board, make sure that the latest version of the firmware is
installed on the Smart Operation Panel. Update it if necessary. (page 62 "Updating the
Smart Operation Panel")
nd
SM 7 SOP 2 GEN
1.1.3 MICRO COMPUTER BOARD
2. CPU board (page 5)
3. Remove the FFC from the micro computer board ( ×1).
 Pull out the black part to unlock the connector, and then remove the FFC.
4. Micro computer board [A] ( ×1, ×2)
 By factory default, switches No.3 and No.7 of the DIP switch [A] on the micro computer
board are set to ON. When installing the operation panel unit, make sure that the DIP
switch setting is correct for the MFP on which you are installing the panel.
nd
SOP 2 GEN 8 SM
 The correct DIP switch setting depends on the MFP. Note the DIP switch settings of the
old operation panel unit before replacing, and apply the same settings to the new Smart
Operation Panel. (Below are two examples for DIP switch settings.)
When No.3 and No.7 are set to ON

 This is the factory default setting of a When only No.3 is set to ON
service part
 If the DIP switch setting is wrong, SC672 will be displayed.

 After replacing the micro computer board, perform the following checks:
 LED Check (page 52)
 Key Check (page 52)
nd
SM 9 SOP 2 GEN
1.1.4 WI-FI MODULE
3. Base bracket [A] ( ×9)
4. Wi-Fi module [A] ( ×1)
nd
SOP 2 GEN 10 SM
 After replacing the Wi-Fi module, perform the following checks:
 Wireless LAN Check (page 58)
 Bluetooth Check (page 59)
1.1.5 LCD
3. Micro computer board (page 8)
4. Speaker [A] ( ×2)
5. Lift the fastener of the LCD I/F cable.
6. LCD I/F cable (cable ×1)
nd
SM 11 SOP 2 GEN
7. Remove the tapes for fixing the microphone harness (tape ×3).
8. LCD [A] ( ×4)
 After replacing the LCD, perform the following checks.

 LCD Check (page 53)
 TouchPanel Check (page 55)
 Perform "TouchPanel Calibration" (page 56) and "MultiTouch Calibration" (page 57) of the
Self Check function.
nd
SOP 2 GEN 12 SM
1.1.6 SPEAKER
3. Speaker [A] ( ×2, ×1)
 After replacing the speaker, perform the following check.

 Speaker Check (page 54)
nd
SM 13 SOP 2 GEN
1.1.7 MICROPHONE
3. Micro computer board (page 8)
4. Lift up the securing wire of the LCD I/F cable.
5. LCD I/F cable (cable ×1)
nd
SOP 2 GEN 14 SM
6. Remove the tapes for fixing the microphone harness (tape ×3).
7. LCD [A] ( ×4)
8. Microphone [A] (cushioning ×1)
nd
SM 15 SOP 2 GEN
2. MECHANISM
2.1 OVERVIEW
2.1.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS
Hardware Specifications
Components
No. Name No. Name
1 Speaker 13 [Check Status] indicator
2 [Login/Logout] key 14 [Check Status] key
Data In indicator (facsimile and printer

3 Main power indicator 15
modes)
4 [Energy Saver] key 16 Fax indicator
5 USB slot for digital cameras 17 Extended Feature key (EX3)
6 HDMI slot 18 Extended Feature key (EX2)
7 USB slot for NFC card readers 19 Extended Feature key (EX1)
8 Microphone 20 Control panel reboot key
9 [Stop] key 21 SD card slot
nd
SOP 2 GEN 16 SM
No. Name No. Name
10 [Menu] key 22 Media access lamp
11 [Home] key 23 USB slot
12 [Back] key
Basic Specifications
Category Specification
LCD panel  Size

10.1 inch panel
 Resolution
WSVGA (1024x600)
 Bit width
RGB666 (18 bit color)
 Brightness
200cd/m2 (typ.)
 Backlight
LED Backlight (life: 15,000 hours)
CPU ARM Cortex-A9 Dual Core 1GHz (SoC: MCIMX6D5EYM10AC)
Touch panel Low load touch panel (recognizes touches to two points)
Memory  Volatile Memory

RAM (DDR3-1066), 2G
 Non-Volatile Memory
eMMC NAND, 8GB
 Uses a 16GB product in SLC Mode.

 Program area and data area for the operating
system and applications.
nd
SM 17 SOP 2 GEN
External interfaces  USB Memory

USB2.0 Host Type-A
 SD Card
SD card slot 1ch (SD*1/SDHC*2)
*1 Up to 2GB
*2 Up to 32GB
 USB expansion
USB2.0 Host Type-A
(for camera, USB keyboard, USB card reader)
 USB expansion
USB2.0 Host Type-miniB
(for NFC expansion)
 HDMI
HDMI 1.4
(for large screens available as custom order)
Internal interfaces  Extended Features

microSD card slot
 When a media is inserted in the microSD card

slot, its capacity is shown in the control panel
service mode (Screen Features > Device >
microSD card) and the SMC (in the report for the
Smart Operation Panel).
Network  Wireless LAN

802.11b/g/n
 Bluetooth
Bluetooth4.0
Audio input/output Monaural speaker 1ch (output: 1 to 2 W), Microphone
±52.56 seconds per month (using external crystal oscillator, 20

RTC accuracy
ppm)
 Extended Feature keys (EX1, EX2, and EX3)

Use for startup in extended mode etc.
Hard keys
 Control panel reboot key
Use to reboot the control panel when it freezes.
nd
SOP 2 GEN 18 SM
 Main power indicator (blue)

Lights when the power is on. Flashes slowly in Sleep
mode.
 [Check Status] indicator lamp (red/blue)
Lights when an error occurs.
 Data In indicator (blue)
Flashes when the machine receives data from a printer
LED types
driver or LAN-Fax driver.
 Fax indicator (blue)
Flashes while sending or receiving a fax. Lights when there
is a received fax document in the fax memory.
 Media access lamp (blue)
Lights when there is an SD card inserted in the SD card
slot.
Maximum power 4 W or less

consumption (excluding external interfaces and internal feature expansions)
Power 0.35 W or less

consumption in (When in Sleep mode, power is not supplied to USB devices
Sleep mode connected to the USB slots.)
nd
SM 19 SOP 2 GEN
Specification comparison with the previous model
Item This model Previous model
Appearance
Control panel size

267 × 160 mm 345 × 161 mm
(Width × Height)
CPU operating frequency 1 GHz 533 MHz
RAM size 2 GB 1 GB
LCD panel size 10.1 inch 10.1 inch
Android OS Version. 4.2 Version. 2.3
Types of the following

keys
 [Home] key
 [Stop] key Soft keys Hard keys
 [Check Status] key
 [Back] key
 [Menu] key
Seven types
 Main power indicator
Four types  [Check Status]
 Main power indicator indicator
LED types  [Check Status] indicator  Data In indicator
 Data In indicator  Media access lamp
 Media access lamp  [Home] key
 [Menu] key
 [Back] key
Wireless LAN interface IEEE802.11bgn IEEE802.11bgn
 USB port (type A/mini)  USB port (mini)

Types of external
 USB media slot  USB media slot
interfaces
 SD card slot  SD card slot
nd
SOP 2 GEN 20 SM
Item This model Previous model
Bluetooth Available Not available
Available languages
Japanese, English, French, German, Italian, Spanish, Dutch, Norwegian, Danish, Swedish,
Polish, Portuguese, Hungarian, Czech, Finnish, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese,
Russian, Greek, Korean, Catalan, Turkish, Brazilian Portuguese
Software Specifications
A software package consisting of the Android Firmware and the manufacturer’s own pre-installed
applications is installed on the Smart Operation Panel.
The following three types of software are installed on the Smart Operation Panel.
1. Android Firmware (Android OS)
2. Pre-installed applications
3. Applications that can be installed additionally
nd
SM 21 SOP 2 GEN
Android Firmware (Android OS)
The Android Firmware (Android OS) consists of the following modules that are called
“stacks”.
 Linux kernel
 Android Runtime
 Library
 Application Framework
Pre-installed applications
On the Smart Operation Panel, applications such as the GW applications
(Copy/Printer/Document Server/Scanner/Fax), Control Panel Browser, the standard keyboard,
Installer, Gallery, Self Check are pre-installed. Unlike those installed on the controller board of
the MFP, GW applications that are installed on the Smart Operation Panel are for controlling
operation and display of the Smart Operation Panel.
Pre-installed applications are provided as part of the control panel firmware (Cheetah
System) together with the Android firmware. When you update the control panel firmware
using the recovery mode or another method, the pre-installed applications will also be
updated.
Applications that can be installed
On the Smart Operation Panel, applications can be installed in addition to the pre-installed
applications.
Applications that can be installed include optional applications that customers can purchase,
applications that are installed only on machines sold in specific regions, and custom-made
applications.
On an MFP, applications such as Simple UI applications (Quick Copy, Quick Fax, and Quick
Scanner) and Scan to Me are installed.
Communication specifications
The Smart Operation Panel and the GW controller are connected by a USB 2.0 cable. They
communicate with each other via the Android OS on the Smart Operation Panel, using protocols
called “OCS Library” and “Flair-API (System/Application)”.
nd
SOP 2 GEN 22 SM
System block diagram
nd
SM 23 SOP 2 GEN
Overview of Components
Communication
Details
module/signal name
OSC stands for Operating Control Service. It is a module that

controls the control panel. The set of signals used by this
module to control the control panel are called the OCS Library.
It is used during communication between the Legacy UI
(system) module on the Smart Operation Panel and the GW
OCS Library
module for the following processes.
 Deciding on the display format suitable for a particular
model of the control panel, so that the intended image data
can be converted to actual image data.
 Converting touch panel operations to commands.
Flair is the manufacturer's own communication interface

between software modules. The interface uses a generic
WebAPI.
Flair-API It is divided into two parts: a part that communicates directly with
(System/Application) applications such as the application manager, Home,
Authentication, Banner, Check Status, and Widgets, and a part
that monitors applications. It communicates with the GW
controller via the CATS module.
CATS stands for Cheetah Application Total System. It is a

module in the GW controller.
Because the Smart Operation Panel uses the Android OS, the
contents and protocols of communication are not the same as
those of the conventional control panel. CATS serves as an
CATS intermediary between the GW controller and the Smart
Operation Panel.
It also controls the power status of the control panel.
CATS communicates with the Smart Operation Panel using the
Flair-API, and communicates with the GW module using the
GW-API.
The name of the interface used among modules in the GW

GW-IPC
controller. The role is the same as that of the Flair-API.
nd
SOP 2 GEN 24 SM
 API stands for Application Programming Interface. An API is an interface that software
modules use in order to communicate with each other.
Application Specifications
The pre-installed applications and applications that can be additionally installed on the Smart
Operation Panel can be classified into the following 3 categories.
 System applications
Applications that operate in conjunction with multiple functions (operating regardless of the
application)
 Program applications
Applications that provide a single additional function
 Widget applications
Applications that provide a widget
The following table explains the function of each application.
Application Functions
Settings Provides the Android OS’s standard settings.
Screen Features Provides the manufacturer’s own settings.
Authentication Monitors login to/logout from the MFP, and transmits

authentication information to other services and
applications.
Monitoring service Monitors the status of the MFP. This service is used by
widgets and applications including Banner, Check Status,
Authentication, and Home.
Launcher (Legacy This application provides an application switching function

Application Manager) when there is no Home application.
Installer Provides the installer UI. Internal operation is controlled by

the Package Installer application.
nd
SM 25 SOP 2 GEN
Server service Provides server functions for application installation.
Remote control Works together with the server service and provides the
functions and displays of RFU and import/export of
settings, including the UI.
Manual Provides connection to the server where manuals are

stored (HTTP server). Manuals are displayed using the
Web Browser application.
Splash screen Provides the image that is displayed immediately after the
MFP is turned ON.
Startup animation Provides the startup animation for the operation screen.
Validation Performs validation when the machine is started in CC

certified mode.
* CC stands for Common Criteria. It is the evaluation
criteria for IT security (ISO15408).
LUI system LUI stands for Legacy User Interface. The conventional
control panel display is displayed by this application.
Model-specific settings are included in this application
Package Installer Provides installation and update functions for applications.

Also provides the screen for uninstallation.
Self Check Provides a self-check function for the control panel

hardware.
See page 51 "Panel Self Check" for contents of the
self-check.
Initialization Initializes settings of the MFP or the control panel.
Web Browser Android OS’s standard Browser application
Gallery Reads images from SD cards or other media, and sets

them as wallpaper or live wallpaper.
Standard keyboard Android OS’s standard operation panel that is called up

when the user enters characters or numbers.
nd
SOP 2 GEN 26 SM
Home screen Provides the Home screen. Also provides screen

customization and application switching.
Banner Displays balloon messages in the banner area at the

bottom of the panel display.
OCS emulator This application serves as an intermediary between the

control panel and the controller board. (The emulator
allows the controller board to work the same way
regardless of the type of control panel.)
Simple UI applications Simple (Quick) applications.

 Quick Copy
Provides the Quick Copy function.
 Quick Fax
Provides the Quick Fax function.
 Quick Scanner
Provides the Quick Scanner function.
Widgets Resident applications that display information on the

screen as configured.
 Date/time indicator
Displays the date and time.
 Supply information
Displays toner status.
 Change Languages
Provides the language switching function.
 Eco-friendly
Displays detailed information about the eco functions.
 Fax Received File
Displays the fax reception status.
 Stop
Provides a [Stop] key on the application screen. Used
by functions such as Quick Copy and Scan to Me.
 System Message
Displays system messages.
nd
SM 27 SOP 2 GEN
IME (excluding the standard Multiple settings can be configured (the user can select
keyboard) one when using the keyboard).
 iWnn IME Chinese (Simplified) Pack
Chinese (simplified) language pack for iWnnIME
 iWnn IME Chinese (Traditional) Pack
Chinese (traditional) language pack for iWnnIME
 iWnn IME Korean Pack
Korean language pack for iWnnIME
ICCardDispatcher Host application for NFC (Near Field Communication).

Transmits card information to authentication applications.
Quick Card Authentication Provides simple authentication using an IC card.
Standard IC card plugin A plugin for using IC cards. Examples of IC cards are the
FeliCa (Lite) and Mifare card systems.
Bluetooth Service Provides configurations for standard Bluetooth on the

Android OS.
Bluetooth Authentication This plugin is required to use Bluetooth authentication.

Plugin
Copy Copy application with a new UI.

This application is not available for MP C 306Z/406Z
series.
Fax Fax application with a new UI.

series.
Scan Scan application with a new UI.

series.
Printer Printer application with a new UI.

series.
Quick Print Release Ability to view and print stored documents.

series.
nd
SOP 2 GEN 28 SM
Print/Scan (Memory "Media Print" and "Scan to Media" have been integrated
Storage Device) into this application.
series.
Web Browser NX Provides an operating environment for solution

applications' functions and configuration.
Proximity Card Reader Provides support for USB card readers.

Support Plugin
nd
SM 29 SOP 2 GEN
2.1.2 PANEL COMPONENTS/SCREEN LAYOUT
Components of the Control Panel
No. Name Description
1 Speaker There is currently no function that uses this.
Displays icons for functions and applications.

2 Display panel Displays the operation screens, operation keys and
other information.
3 Main power indicator Indicates power OFF/ON status.
4 USB slot for digital cameras A digital camera can be connected here.
USB slot for NFC card A near field communication (NFC) device can be
5
readers connected here.
6 Microphone There is currently no function that uses this.
7 [Check Status] indicator Indicates system status.
Flashes when the machine receives data from a

8 Data In indicator
printer driver or LAN-Fax driver.
nd
SOP 2 GEN 30 SM
Indicates fax status.

 During communication: Flashes
 When fax documents have been received using
9 Fax indicator
Substitute Reception: Lights
 When the machine has received a confidential
fax document: Lights
Extended Feature key Used for system maintenance, such as control panel
10
(EX3) self-check.
11
(EX2) self-check.
12
(EX1) self-check.
13 Control panel reboot key Used when rebooting the control panel.
14 SD card slot Insert an SD card here.
Lights when an external media is inserted into the SD

15 Media access lamp
card slot or the USB slot.
16 USB slot Insert a USB memory device here.
nd
SM 31 SOP 2 GEN
Panel display
Screen Layout
1 Login information area Login information is displayed.
Displayed when authentication is enabled. The login

screen appears if you press [Login]. [Logout] is
2 [Login/Logout] key
displayed if you have already logged in. You will be
logged out when you press [Logout].
3 [Energy Saver] key Enters Sleep mode.
Application icons, widgets, and system messages are

4 Icon display area
displayed.
nd
SOP 2 GEN 32 SM
Soft keys displayed on the screen
Users can assign shortcuts for each application. Up

to three applications can be assigned as shortcuts.
When an application is assigned as a function key,
1 Function keys users can call the application from any screen. The
function keys are disabled by default. Users must
enable this function to be able to allocate applications
to function keys.
System messages are displayed in this area. If there

are multiple messages to be displayed, they are
2 System messages key
displayed in rotation. Tapping the message opens a
dialog which shows all the messages.
3 [Application List] key Displays the list of installed applications.
Stops the scanning of a document, fax transmission,

4 [Stop] key
or printing to paper.
Displays the menu screen of the application in use.

5 [Menu] key
May not be available depending on the application.
6 [Home] key Displays the Home screen.
nd
SM 33 SOP 2 GEN
Use this to go back to the previous screen when the

7 [Back] key Screen Features screen or the screen of an
application is displayed.
You can check the status of the MFP, each function,

8 [Check Status] key and the current job. You can also check the job
history and maintenance information of the MFP.
nd
SOP 2 GEN 34 SM
2.1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
 The CPU board has a CPU, memory, and a flash drive.

 The Microcomputer board has various interfaces, Wi-Fi module and other devices.
Touch panel
The touch panel of this machine uses a 4-wire resistive film method (low load resistive film analog
4-wire method). It can detect two points for flick/drag/pinch-in/pinch-out operations. Resistive
touch panel has been adopted in order to allow operation with a prosthetic hand.
Basic Structure
An analog 4-wire resistive film touch panel has 2 layers. Two materials (mainly film or glass)
with transparent conductive film (ITO) are attached such that the transparent conductive film
layers face each other.
When the film is pressed with a finger or a pen, the transparent conductive films contact each
other and the touch panel operation is recognized.
Insulators (spacing dots) secure space between the two transparent conductive film layers to
prevent short-circuiting.
Because the transparent conductive film has a uniform resistance characteristic, the
resistance value reflects the distance of contact.
nd
SM 35 SOP 2 GEN
[A]: Spacing dot
[B]: PET film
[C]: Transparent conductive film
[D]: Base glass
[E]: LCD panel
Self-Check (multi-touch calibration) mechanism
With the Multi-touch calibration in the self-check function, the touch panel is automatically
calibrated using the results of touches to the top left and bottom right positions.
The values of “EVR_X”, “EVR_Y”, “X_MAX”, and “Y_MAX” are used for internal processing.
They do not indicate the positions or distance of the touched points. There is no problem
unless there is a huge difference between the values of the first calibration and the second
calibration.
nd
SOP 2 GEN 36 SM
2.2 CONTROLLING THE POWER SUPPLY
2.2.1 EXITING ENERGY SAVING MODES

Because this model of Smart Operation Panel has no hardware keys, the MFP exits from energy
saving mode when the user does one of the following:
 Touches the display panel
 Lifts the ADF
 Sets an original in the ADF
2.2.2 SCREEN STARTUP MODE
Startup Modes
There are two screen startup modes. The factory default setting is Normal.
1. Normal
This is the standard startup mode. When the main power of the MFP is turned ON, the control
panel starts up using less power compared to Quick mode.
2. Quick
By preparing for the next startup when the machine shuts down, the control panel starts up
faster than in Normal mode.
Changing the Screen Startup Mode

Screen Startup Mode can be changed in Screen Features.
Select [Screen Features] > [SYSTEM] > [Screen Device Settings] > [Screen Startup Mode], and
then select [Normal] or [Quick].
nd
SM 37 SOP 2 GEN
 In the following cases, the control panel starts up in Normal mode even if [Quick] is
selected.
 The power cord has been disconnected from the power outlet after the last
shutdown.
 The MFP is turned ON after being turned OFF due to reasons such as a power
failure.
 The MFP was not properly shut down the last time it was turned OFF.
How the Control Panel Starts Up

In Normal mode
The startup screen is displayed on the display panel, followed by the startup animation.
In Quick mode
The [Home] screen is displayed immediately after the main power of the MFP is turned ON.
The startup screen displayed when starting in Normal mode is not displayed.
nd
SOP 2 GEN 38 SM
How the Screen Shuts Down When Quick mode Is Selected
When Quick mode is selected, the MFP prepares for the next startup when it shuts down The
main power indicator flashes during preparation for the next startup. The indicator turns off when
preparation is completed.
If the MFP is turned ON during shutdown, the preparation for the next startup continues. When
preparation for the next startup is completed, the control panel starts up in Quick mode.
 When Quick mode is selected, the control panel starts up faster than in Normal mode but
shutdown takes longer than in Normal mode.
nd
SM 39 SOP 2 GEN
2.2.3 SHUTDOWN FUNCTIONS
The shutdown functions and their uses are as follows.
Shutdown mode Use Operation
Turn the main power switch

Normal Shutdown Same as shutdown by users.
off.
When normal shutdown does not

Hold the main power switch
Forced shutdown complete even though you waited a
6 seconds or longer.
long time.
 When you have to disconnect the

power cord from the power
outlet, such as when replacing
parts.
Shutdown for parts  When you want to start the
off while holding down
replacement machine normally and then enter
[Stop].
recovery mode, without changing
the Startup mode in Screen
Features. (For updating control
panel firmware)
When you are going to turn on the

MFP within 5 minutes for updating the
Shutdown for MFP firmware or package.
off while holding down the
software update (Use shutdown for parts replacement
[EX1] key.
if you are updating the control panel
firmware.)
nd
SOP 2 GEN 40 SM
Normal Shutdown
The MFP is equipped with a function to shut down safely in order to:
 Prevent damage to the file systems in the HDD and the NAND flash memory.
 Prevent paper from being left inside the body of the MFP (except when paper is jammed).
If the main power switch is a rocker switch, the shutdown process begins when the rocker switch
is moved to the OFF position.
If the main power switch is a push switch, the shutdown process begins when the switch is
pressed. To make a forced shutdown, press and hold the push switch for 6 seconds. However, if
you force a shutdown during the shutdown process, data being processed may be lost. Forced
shutdown is to be used to shut down the MFP without disconnecting the power cord when the
shutdown process cannot be completed.
Other Shutdown Functions

This MFP has two additional shutdown functions to facilitate maintenance.
Shutting down the MFP for parts replacement (Starting up in Normal mode when Quick
mode is selected)
When Quick mode is selected, the MFP prepares for the next startup when it shuts down.
This causes the shutdown process to take longer than when Normal mode is selected.
If you need to disconnect the power cord after shutdown in order to replace parts or for other
reasons, you can use the following procedure to shut down the MFP just like you do in Normal
mode. This shortens the time it takes to shut down the MFP.
 Procedure
Turn the main power switch OFF while holding down the [Stop] key on the control panel.
Continue to hold down the [Stop] key until the shutdown screen is displayed.
Shutting down the MFP for software updates (Shutting down the MFP with the control
panel in Sleep mode)
If you are going to turn ON the MFP within 5 minutes, you can use the following procedure to
shut down the MFP with the control panel in Sleep mode.
 Procedure
Turn the main power switch OFF while holding down the [EX1] key. Continue to hold
down the [EX1] key until the shutdown screen is displayed.
 You must turn ON the MFP within 5 minutes.

 If more than 5 minutes has elapsed after shutting down the MFP using the above
procedure, the machine starts up in Normal mode even if Quick mode is selected.
nd
SM 41 SOP 2 GEN
3. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
3.1 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
3.1.1 MAINTENANCE MODES

Service program (SP) modes for the Smart Operation Panel are as follows:
Mode Use Notes
The numeric keys are

required to enter this
mode. Display the soft
SP Mode (MFP) SP modes for the MFP (controller, engine)
keys of the GW
application or of the SP
mode.
SP modes for the Smart Operation Panel.

 Changing SP mode settings in the
Service mode
Screen Features menu. Same as above
(control panel)
 Installing and updating applications
that can be installed
Maintenance modes for the Android OS

Recovery mode  Updating firmware -
 Initializing all data
nd
SOP 2 GEN 42 SM
3.1.2 LOGIN TO/LOGOUT FROM CONTROL PANEL SERVICE MODE
Login
In the same way as you log in to the SP Mode on the MFP, you use the soft keys to enter a
combination of numbers in order to login to the service mode of the control panel.
 You cannot log in to the service mode of the control panel when one of the following
screens is displayed.
 Stop All Jobs
 User Tools
 Address Book Management
Use the numeric keys on one of the following screens.
 Soft keys on the GW application screen
 Soft keys for the control panel’s service mode (displayed by pressing both the [EX3] key and
[Check Status] at the same time)
 To exit the soft keys, press [EXIT] on the screen.
Login Status Indicator

When you log in to the control panel’s service mode, the Screen Features screen is displayed.
 “Service” is displayed in the login information area [A].
 [Logout] is displayed in the Login key area [B] to allow logout from the service mode.
nd
SM 43 SOP 2 GEN
Logout
Press [Logout] to log out from the control panel’s service mode.
 You need to logout manually because the Auto Logout function does not work.
Depending on the authentication settings of the MFP, the following screen is displayed after you
log out.
Authentication settings
Administrator Administrator Administrator

authentication: OFF authentication: ON authentication: ON
User authentication: OFF User authentication: OFF User authentication: ON
Screen of the function Screen of the function

selected in [Function selected in [Function [Home] screen
Priority] Priority]
When Entry to Service Mode Is Prohibited by the Administrator

The administrator of the MFP can prohibit entry into the control panel’s service mode by enabling
[Service Mode Lock] in [System Settings].
When [Service Mode Lock] is enabled, the machine does not enter the service mode even if you
enter the number combination for the control panel’s service mode. There will be no error
messages or beeping sounds to indicate login failure.
 The machine can enter the recovery mode even if [Service Mode Lock] is enabled.
nd
SOP 2 GEN 44 SM
3.1.3 SERVICE MODE MENU
There are three menus of settings.
 WIRELESS & NETWORKS
 DEVICE
 SYSTEM
WIRELESS & NETWORKS
Menu level
Description
1st level 2nd level 3rd level
Wireless
Direct Group Owner Mode You can only view the setting.
Settings
Connection Password You can only view the setting.
DHCP Server IP Address You can only view the setting.
DHCP IP Address Range You can only view the setting.
Select Channel You can only view the setting.
View and configure devices that

PEER DEVICES
can be connected.
REMEMBERED Displays groups that have been

GROUPS previously connected.
Bluetooth ON/OFF You can only view the setting.
nd
SM 45 SOP 2 GEN
Menu level
Description
Scans for Bluetooth devices in the

SEARCH FOR DEVICES
vicinity.
(name of this device) You can only view the setting.
PAIRED DEVICES View and configure paired devices.
View and configure available

AVAILABLE DEVICES
devices.
Requests sent to the wireless LAN

unit of the Smart Operation Panel
Port Port
can be forwarded to the controller
Forwarding Port Forwarding Settings Forwarding
of the MFP. You can enable or
to Machine Cinfig 1-20
disable ports to forward these
requests.
Enables/disables the PathMTU

MTU size set in [MTU Size]. When you
PathMTU(Enable/Disable)
Settings change this setting, the control
panel restarts.
Sets the size of PathMTU. Default:

MTU Size
1500.
nd
SOP 2 GEN 46 SM
DEVICE
Menu level
Description
INTERNAL Displays the total size of the

Storage Total space
STORAGE internal storage.
Displays the available space of the

Available
internal storage.
Apps (app data

Displays the size of applications in
& media
the internal storage.
content)
Displays the total size of the SD

SD CARD *1 Total space
card.
Displays the available space of the

Available
SD card.
Apps (app data

Displays the size of applications in
& media
the SD card.
content)
Erase SD card Erase data written to the SD card.
Install from SD Install or update applications from

Apps Install
Card an SD card.
Enter a product key to install or

Install from
update applications from the
Server
server.
Activate Activate applications that have

Applications been installed from the server.
Update Update applications that have

Applications been installed.
Uninstall Uninstall applications.
nd
SM 47 SOP 2 GEN
Menu level
Description
Check Server Check if you can connect to the

Connect Server.
*1 Displayed only when an SD card is inserted into the SD card slot of the control panel.
SYSTEM
Menu level
Description
Displays the following:

Screen
 Wi-Fi MAC address
Device
Status  Bluetooth address
Settings
 Interface Settings
Information
 Wi-Fi settings (ON/OFF)
Open source Displays the open source license

Legal information
licenses information.
Displays the versions of control

panel firmware and installed
applications.
Software Version When saving the software version
List list on an SD card, insert an SD
card into the SD card slot of the
control panel, and then press
[Save to SD Card].
Input a port number for

communication with the
Screen import/export and RFU server. The
Device Server Settings Port number input number is used for both
Settings HTTP and HTTPS connections.
(Normally, input a number within
55101-55111.)
nd
SOP 2 GEN 48 SM
Menu level
Description
Displays a list of installed

applications.
If you press [Settings] for an
Application
application, the setting screen for
Settings
the CE is displayed. The screen
does not change if the application
has no setting items.
This setting gives priority to the

recovery time from energy saving
modes when an IC card
authentication device is
Authentication Authentication
connected.
priority mode priority mode
When this setting is selected, the
MFP does not enter Engine OFF
mode, and always recovers from
Silent mode.
You can specify the start time of

Authentication priority mode.
Start
Note: This can be changed only
time(hhmm)
when [Authentication priority
mode] is deselected.
You can specify the period of

validity of Authentication priority
Expiration mode.
time(hours) Note: This can be changed only
when [Authentication priority
mode] is deselected.
nd
SM 49 SOP 2 GEN
Menu level
Description
This setting prevents the control

panel from entering Sleep mode,
so that Bluetooth and other
Screen device communication devices remain
always-connection connected.
Setting When this setting is selected, the
control panel does not enter Sleep
mode. Only the LCD (display
panel) turns OFF.
Starts self-diagnosis of the control

Panel Self Check panel.
(page 51 "Panel Self Check")
nd
SOP 2 GEN 50 SM
3.1.4 PANEL SELF CHECK
The following are available as self-diagnostics functions of the control panel:
 LED Check
 Key Check
 LCD Check
 Speaker Check
 TouchPanel Check
 TouchPanel Calibration
 MultiTouch Calibration
 Wireless LAN Check
 Bluetooth Check
 The [Self Check] menu is displayed in either English or Japanese. The language can be
changed using [Change Language] in the Home screen.
 If an unavailable language is selected, English will be displayed.
 With some diagnostic items, press [Back] [A] at the bottom of the screen to return to the
top menu of [Self Check].
nd
SM 51 SOP 2 GEN
LED Check
Select the [All Light On] check box, and make sure the following LEDs light:
 Data In indicator (facsimile and printer modes)
 Fax indicator
 [Check Status] indicator (flashes in red and orange alternately)
When the check is completed, press [Back] to return to the top menu of [Self Check].
Key Check
Check if the Extended Feature keys on the left side of the control panel (EX1, EX2, EX3 from top
to bottom) are functioning normally. If they are functioning normally, the key will turn green when
pressed.
[FOOT SW] is not used.
When the check is completed, press [End] to return to the top menu of [Self Check].
nd
SOP 2 GEN 52 SM
LCD Check
Visually inspect the color of the LCD. The displayed colors are white/black/red/green/blue. The
LCD changes to the next color when you press it.
The check is completed when all colors have been displayed. The screen returns to the top menu
of [Self Check].
nd
SM 53 SOP 2 GEN
Speaker Check
Tests the speaker by playing the reference sound.
1. Select the frequency (220Hz, 440Hz, 880Hz, 1760Hz, or 2000Hz).
2. Press [START/STOP] to play the sound.
3. Touch the volume bar, and play the sound at minimum and maximum volumes.
4. Press [START/STOP] to stop the sound.
nd
SOP 2 GEN 54 SM
TouchPanel Check
For each of the nine reference points on the screen, the distance between the detected position
and the nearest reference point is displayed.
nd
SM 55 SOP 2 GEN
TouchPanel Calibration
Calibrate the touch panel by touching the center of each of the five “+” signs.
The five “+” signs are displayed in the order of top left, bottom right, bottom left, center, and top
right.
After you have touched the five “+” signs, the display switches to the [Retry/OK] screen.
 If you want to calibrate again, press [EX1].
 If you want to confirm that the calibration results are OK, press the [EX3] key to return to the
nd
SOP 2 GEN 56 SM
MultiTouch Calibration
Calibrate the touch panel for multi-tap input methods such as pinch-in/pinch-out.
Touch the center of both “+” signs. The two “+” signs are displayed in the order of top left and
bottom right. Repeat the procedure. The touch panel will be calibrated.
 If you want to adjust it again, press the [EX1] key.
 If you want to confirm that the calibration results are OK, press the [EX3] key to return to the
The “Back Key” in the message is actually the [EX1] key and the “Menu Key” in the message is
actually the [EX3] key.
 The values of “EVR_X”, “EVR_Y”, “X_MAX”, and “Y_MAX” are for internal processing
and do not indicate the positions or distance of the points touched. There is no problem
unless there is a huge difference between the values of the first calibration and the
second calibration.
nd
SM 57 SOP 2 GEN
Wireless LAN Check
Checks the condition of the wireless LAN connection.
When you select the connected access point, the signal strength, IP address and other
information are displayed.
nd
SOP 2 GEN 58 SM
Bluetooth Check
Check and configure the Bluetooth device connection.
 You cannot switch Bluetooth to [ON] or [OFF] from the [Self Check] menu. Before
checking the Bluetooth device connection, specify [ON] for [Bluetooth] in [Screen
Features] > [WIRELESS & NETWORKS] > [Bluetooth].
nd
SM 59 SOP 2 GEN
3.1.5 RECOVERY MODE
The recovery mode menu is as follows. Ask your manager for details on how to enter Recovery
mode.
Menu Description
reboot system now Reboots the Android OS.
Updates the Cheetah System firmware by specifying the

apply update from sdcard
folder path.
Deletes all installed applications and all settings on the

wipe data/factory reset
Cheetah.
Deletes all data that is stored on the cache partition.

wipe cache partition Currently, Cheetah does not use the cache partition, so
nothing happens when this menu item is accessed.
Deletes all data that is stored on the free partition. Cheetah

wipe free area partition stores the version history on the free partition. When this
menu item is selected, it will then disappear.
wipe LegacyUI area Deletes Legacy UI.
micon update from sdcard Updates Keymicon by specifying the folder path.
 If [Update Firmware] is set to [Prohibit] in [System Settings] of the MFP, the control panel
cannot enter the recovery mode.
 Ask your manager for information on how to enter the recovery Mode.
nd
SOP 2 GEN 60 SM
3.1.6 SPECIAL KEY COMBINATIONS
This section describes special key combinations for operations which required combinations of
hardware keys on the previous models.
Operation for Smart Operation

Function Operation for previous models
Panel
SSP (Super Login to SP mode, and then press Login to SP mode, and then press
Service) mode an SP mode item while holding an SP mode item while holding
login down the [#] key. down the EX3 key.
Resetting User In the User Tools screen, press a In the User Tools screen, press a
Tools User Tools category while holding User Tools category while holding
down the [#] key. down the EX3 key.
Available for: System Settings, Available for: System Settings,
Copier/Document Server Copier/Document Server
Features, and Scanner Features. Features, and Scanner Features.
System Reset Hold down the [*] and [#] keys Hold down the EX3 key and [#]
simultaneously for 10 seconds. simultaneously for 10 seconds.
Resets the controller software. Resets the controller software of
the main machine.
Application Hold down the [7] and [9] keys Hold down the EX3 key and [9]
Reset simultaneously for 10 seconds. simultaneously for 10 seconds.
Resets a single application. Resets a single application.
Resetting User Press the [Reset] key and [Clear] Hold down [Reset] for 2 seconds.
Code key simultaneously. Returns to the User Code entry
Authentication Returns to the User Code entry screen.
screen.
nd
SM 61 SOP 2 GEN
3.2 SOFTWARE UPDATE
3.2.1 UPDATING THE SMART OPERATION PANEL

There are four methods to update the Smart Operation Panel. The method is different depending
on what you want to update.
1. Installation/update from an SD card
2. Package update
3. Installation/update from the eDC Server
4. Installation/update from Application Site
Control
Update method Features panel Applications
firmware
Update using an SD card.

 This is the only method to install an older
version of currently installed software.
 Enter the recovery mode to update the control
Installation/update panel firmware.
Yes Yes
from an SD card  Use the installation screen in the control
panel’s service mode to update applications.
 You can install or update multiple applications
at once.
 You can also uninstall an application.
Uses the Package update function of the GW+

controller to update the software.
 The software is updated in the following order:
controller firmware, applications, and then the
Package update Yes Yes
control panel firmware.
 The procedure for updating the control panel
firmware is the same as when updating from an
SD card using Recovery mode.
Downloads applications from the eDC Server for

Installation/update installation or update.
from the eDC This method is mainly for paid applications. A No Yes
Server product key is required when an application is
installed for the first time.
nd
SOP 2 GEN 62 SM
Control
Update method Features panel Applications
firmware
Installation and Updating of applications and

firmware update can be done from Application Site.
Installation/update When administrator authentication is enabled, an
from Application administrator privilege is required to start Yes*1 Yes
Site Application Site. If you log in to the operation panel
service mode, however, you can use it with CE
privilege.
*1 Update can only be done by using a package file.

The following three methods can be used for updating the firmware.
 Update from an SD card (recovery mode)
 Package update
 Installation/update from Application Site
The following three methods can be used for updating an application.
 Installation/update from an SD card
 Package update
 Installation/update from the eDC Server
 Installation/update from Application Site
nd
SM 63 SOP 2 GEN
3.2.2 INSTALLATION/UPDATE FROM AN SD CARD
Updating the Smart Operation Panel Firmware

Enter the recovery mode to update the firmware of the Smart Operation Panel.
 When [Quick] is selected for [Screen Startup Mode], the control panel cannot enter the
recovery mode. Change the startup mode to [Normal]. When update is completed,
restore the startup mode setting because the setting affects startup time.
 Shut down the MFP with [Normal] selected for [Screen Startup Mode], or shut it down
using the special shutdown procedure used for maintenance.
 If [Prohibit] is selected for [Update Firmware] in [System Settings], the machine cannot
enter Recovery mode. Ask the administrator of the MFP to change the setting.
Creating an SD card for firmware update
1. Download the update module “Cheetah System” from the Firmware Download
Center.
2. Execute the downloaded file.
A file named “part number + suffix.zip” will be created.
 Do not unzip the created file.

3. Copy the “part number + suffix.zip” file to the root directory of the SD card.
Updating the firmware (for the Cheetah System)
1. Turn OFF the MFP.
 Shut down the MFP with [Normal] selected for [Screen Startup Mode], or shut it
down using the special shutdown procedure used for maintenance.
2. Insert the SD card into the SD card slot of the control panel and start up the MFP in
Recovery mode.
 Ask your manager for details on how to enter the recovery mode.
 In the recovery mode, key functions are shown on the screen. However, the key
functions for moving/selecting directories are different for executing an update.
Check the key functions while operating.
nd
SOP 2 GEN 64 SM
When moving/selecting
Keys When executing an update
directories
[EX1] Moves the cursor up. Executes updating.
[EX2] Moves the cursor down.

Cancels updating.
[EX3] Selects the item.
3. Select “apply update from sdcard” in the “Android system recovery” screen, and
then press the [EX3] key.
4. The contents of the SD card is displayed. Select “part number + suffix.zip” with the
[EX1] or [EX2] key, and then press the [EX3] key.
Example: “D1961400A.zip”
nd
SM 65 SOP 2 GEN
5. The installation screen is displayed.
6. The version of the firmware installed in the control panel is displayed as “Current
version” and the version of the firmware saved on the SD card is displayed as
“Update version”. Make sure that you have the correct version.
7. When “Continue Update?” is displayed, press [OK] ([EX1] key).
The update process starts.
 To cancel the firmware update, press the [EX2] or [EX3] key.

8. When “Install from sdcard complete.” is displayed, select “reboot system now”
and then press the [EX1] key to reboot the system.
nd
SOP 2 GEN 66 SM
Installing/Updating an Application
Creating an SD card for update
1. Download the update modules from the Firmware Download Center.
2. Unzip the downloaded file.
3. Create a folder named “romdata” in the root directory of the SD card.
4. Put the unzipped file in the “romdata” folder.
Update procedure
1. Log in to the control panel in service mode.
2. Insert the SD card into the SD card slot of the control panel.
3. Select [Apps] > [Install] > [Install from SD Card].
4. Select the application you want to install or update, and then press [Install]
5. The installation or update results are displayed.
6. Check that the application is correctly installed or updated, and then press [reboot
operation panel].
3.2.3 PACKAGE UPDATE

This method uses the package update function to update the control panel firmware and/or
applications. The package update function is provided by the controller.
Update is done in the following order:
1. Controller firmware
2. Applications
3. Control panel firmware
If the control panel firmware has to be updated, the control panel starts in the recovery mode and
the firmware is automatically updated.
The control panel restarts when updating is completed. The result notification is processed after
the control panel restarts.
When Installation/Update Is Prohibited

If [Prohibit] is selected for [Update Firmware] in [System Settings], the execution key is grayed out
and installation/update cannot be executed.
When trying to update from a PC, updating fails and the result is recorded as “Failed”.
nd
SM 67 SOP 2 GEN
3.2.4 INSTALLATION/UPDATE FROM THE EDC SERVER
Downloads applications from the eDC Server, and installs or updates them.
This method is mainly for paid applications. A product key is required when an application is
installed for the first time.
 Installation/activation/update of applications from the server can only be done in the

service mode.
Check Server Connect

1. Log in to the control panel’s service mode.
2. Select [Apps] > [Install].
3. Press [Check Server Connect] and make sure that “Connect Server Succeeded!” is
displayed.
 The server address is stored in the firmware of the Smart Operation Panel.
 To connect to the server, the network settings of the MFP must be configured
correctly. For the required configuration, see the Field Service Manual of the MFP.
 If server connection fails, see page 71 "Troubleshooting" for error codes.
nd
SOP 2 GEN 68 SM
Installation
3. Select [Install from Server].
4. Enter the product key and press [Execute].
5. Follow the instructions shown on the screen.
 An application cannot be installed unless it is digitally signed by Ricoh.
Activation
3. Select [Activate Applications].
4. Select the application to be activated, and then enter the activation key and press
[Execute].
 Only charged applications have to be activated.
nd
SM 69 SOP 2 GEN
Update
3. Select [Update Applications].
4. Select the application to be updated, and then press [Check Update Status].
3.2.5 APPLICATION SITE

"Application Site" has been added to Screen Service mode. Field engineers can start up
Application Site to install or update applications or firmware without needing user administrator
credentials.
This menu item opens Application Site by using the Web Browser NX app.
nd
SOP 2 GEN 70 SM
4. TROUBLESHOOTING
4.1 TROUBLESHOOTING
4.1.1 SOFTWARE UPDATE ERRORS
Errors that occur during application update from an SD card
Error message /
Explanation Solution
screen display
 Remove the SD card and

insert it again.
 Make sure that the directory
Insert a correct SD of the SD card is correct. You
-
card. must create the "app" folder
in the root directory of the SD
card and put the zip file in the
"app" folder.
You are trying to

Displayed when you attempt
install the same
to update an application that Check the file, and select [OK] or
application with a
is the same but has a [Cancel].
different part number.
different part number.
Is it OK to continue?
Displayed in the following

cases.
 You attempted to update
Some applications Restart the control panel and
a module (application) in
could not be installed. repeat the update procedure.
use.
 The application is
corrupted.
nd
SM 71 SOP 2 GEN
Error message /
Explanation Solution
screen display
 Make sure that the directory

of the SD card is correct. You
-
must create the "app" folder
(The application you
in the root directory of the SD
want to update is not -
card and put the zip file in the
displayed in the list of
"app" folder.
applications.)
 Check the application file in
the SD card.
Errors that occur during update from the eDC Server
Error code Explanation
101 Server connection error
102 Signature verification error
103 License error (for example, the product key was keyed in wrongly)
Dependency check error

Displayed when the control panel firmware version does not meet the
215 installation requirement of the application.
Example: The firmware version of the control panel is 1.02 and you
attempted to install an application that requires firmware version 1.03.
20X Other errors
Example of an error code display
nd
SOP 2 GEN 72 SM
 An additional 3-digit code may be displayed to indicate the details.
Example: 101-805
Errors that occur during remote (batch file) update

When the update is completed, a result report file (install_result_yyyymmddhhmm.txt) is created
in the same folder as the batch file.
The result report file shows the IP address of the MFP and whether the update process was
successful or not. “yyyymmddhhmm” shows the date and time according to the clock of the MFP.
Result Explanation
Succeed Updated the machine successfully.
Failed Failed to update the machine. An error code follows.
Not connected Failed to connect to the machine.
Can't get result Failed to obtain the result (occurs only with firmware updates).
Example of a result report file

 Name: install_result_201512041005.txt
 Contents:
192.168.0.100: Successful
192.168.0.102: Failed error:XX (XX indicates an error code.)
192.168.0.103: Not connected
Error codes
The meanings of error codes recorded after "error:" in the result file are as follows:
Error codes recorded during firmware update
nd
SM 73 SOP 2 GEN
Error
Explanation Access Log
code
-2 Invalid file Recorded
-3 The target application cannot be found. Recorded
-501 Installation has already been requested. Recorded (*1)
-602 Invalid signature Recorded
-603 Updating is prohibited. Recorded
-604 Failed to put the application offline. Not recorded
-610 Authentication failed. Not recorded
-699 Unknown error Recorded (*2)
-701 Version of the micro computer firmware is invalid. Recorded
-709 File structure error (invalid file) Recorded
-710 Writing failure Recorded
Error codes recorded during application update
Error
Explanation Access Log
code
-2 Invalid file Recorded
-3 The target application cannot be found. Recorded
-4 The storage capacity is not enough. Recorded
-12 The version of the Android application cannot be Recorded

installed.
-602 Invalid signature Recorded
-603 Updating is prohibited. Recorded
-604 Failed to put the application offline. Not recorded
-610 Authentication failed. Not recorded
-699 Unknown error Recorded (*2)
nd
SOP 2 GEN 74 SM
*1 The error code recorded in the Access Log will be "223: machine-busy".
*2 If the error occurs during preparation for configuration change, it will not be recorded in the
Access Log.
 If the preparation for configuration change (putting the application offline,

authentication, file size check) cannot be carried out, an error code is displayed on
the screen. However, it is not recorded in the Access Log as a firmware
update/installation error.
Error codes recorded in the Access Log
Error
Error name Explanation Solution
code
Firmware update is Enable firmware update, and

49 fwu-prohibit
prohibited. repeat the procedure.
 Turn the main power OFF

and ON, and then repeat
60 other:E60 The HDD cannot be used. the procedure.
 If the HDD is damaged,
replace it.
The structure of the

application or control
62 other:E62 Prepare a valid package file.
panel firmware in the
package is invalid.
 If a job is under way in the

target application, wait until
Failed to terminate an
the job is finished, and then
application when
221 terminate-fail repeat the procedure.
attempting to update or
uninstall it.
the procedure.
Failed to verify the

Repeat the procedure using a
222 signature-invalid signature attached to the
valid signature.
application or firmware.
nd
SM 75 SOP 2 GEN
Error
code
 Wait a while and repeat the

Failed to execute
procedure.
installation because
223 machine-busy  Turn the main power OFF
another function was
being used on the MFP.
the procedure.
 Reduce the number of

The storage capacity is applications to be installed.
224 capacity-lack
not enough.  Uninstall unnecessary
applications.
The product ID is
225 download-fail Use a correct product key.
incorrect.
The control panel does Check the installation

not meet the installation requirements of the application.
226 dependency-check-fail
requirements of the Update the control panel as
application. necessary.
There are no remaining

licenses. The product key
that you are trying to use Use an unused product key to
has already been activate the application.
activated for another
device.
An invalid product key

Update the application using an
was used to issue the
activated product key.
license.
227 license-invalid
The number of licenses
Deactivate the application, and
issued has exceeded the
then activate it again.
limit.
The license has expired.

Use an unused product key to
The product key being
activate the application.
used is no longer valid.
The license contract is Use a valid product key to

invalid. activate the application.
nd
SOP 2 GEN 76 SM
Error
code

the procedure.
 Check the file in the SD
The target firmware file
228 file-not-found * card.
cannot be found.
 Check the SD card slot. If
there is a problem with the
hardware, replace the
control panel PCB.
The target update file is

invalid. Occurs in the
following cases.
 Failed to decompress
the file.
Repeat the procedure using a
229 file-invalid *  Failed to obtain
valid file.
application
information.
 Failed to read the
public key for
signature verification.
The folder directory of the

wrong-folder-structure Repeat the procedure using a
230 control panel firmware is
* valid directory.
invalid.
 Failed to write data

Turn the main power OFF and
when updating the
ON, and then repeat the
control panel
231 write-fail * procedure. If updating fails
firmware.
again, replace the control
 There is a problem
panel.
with the hardware.
nd
SM 77 SOP 2 GEN
Error
code
 Check whether the network

The application could not is configured correctly.
be uninstalled because  If the server is under
deactivation failed. maintenance, wait a while
232 deactivate-fail  Failed to connect to and repeat the procedure.
the server.  Check the activation status
 The license has not of the application. If it has
been issued. not been activated, activate
it.

ON, and then repeat the
Failed to uninstall an
233 uninstall-fail procedure. If updating fails
application.
again, replace the control
panel.
You attempted to uninstall

234 fixed-app an application that cannot Cancel uninstallation.
be uninstalled.
 Repeat the procedure

using a valid file.
The target file is invalid,
 If the same application has
235 install-fail and the Android OS
already been installed,
returns an error.
uninstall it and then repeat
the procedure.
The Android SDK version Check that the Android SDK

required by the version required by the
236 sdk-incompatible
application is not installed application is installed on the
on the control panel. control panel.
 Check the network

connection (SSL) settings.
Failed to connect to the  Check the proxy settings.
237 server-disconnect
eDC server.  If the server is under
maintenance, wait a while
and repeat the procedure.
nd
SOP 2 GEN 78 SM
Error
code

255 panel-system * Software malfunction. ON, and then repeat the
procedure.
* These errors are not expected to occur.
4.1.2 ERRORS THAT OCCUR WHEN THE CONTROL PANEL

DOWNLOADS DATA FROM THE CONTROLLER AT STARTUP
Some of the graphic data used in the control panel display is model-specific. Model-specific
components are stored in the controller board of the MFP.
During startup, the control panel checks if it is necessary to update the model-specific data. If it is
necessary, the control panel downloads the data from the MFP controller board and installs it in
the control panel.
During update, a dialog appears to inform you that the settings are being changed. When the
update process is completed, a dialog indicates whether update was successful or not.
Error code Explanation
E1 An error has occurred when downloading data from the controller

board of the MFP.
E2 An error has occurred when installing data on the control panel.

An additional error code is displayed after "E2".
nd
SM 79 SOP 2 GEN

MPCW2201SP 6-30-2020 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MPCW2201SP 6-30-2020 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MPCW2201SP 6-30-2020 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

D262

NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY

All product names, domain names or product illustrations, including

 2016 RICOH USA, Inc. All rights reserved.

Untrained and uncertified users utilizing

Ricoh USA, Inc.

1. PRODUCT INFORMATION ......................................................... 1-1

2. INSTALLATION ........................................................................... 2-1

3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ................................................... 3-1

4. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................ 4-1

5. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE REFERENCE .................................... 5-1

6. TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................ 6-1

7. DETAILED DESCRIPTION .......................................................... 7-1

Important Safety Notices

Warnings, Cautions, Notes

 A Warning indicates a potentially hazardous situation. Failure to obey a Warning could

 A Caution indicates a potentially hazardous situation. Failure to obey a Caution could

General Safety Instructions

Switches and Symbols

Safety and Ecological Notes for Disposal

Safety Instructions for Ink Cartridges

Handling and Storing Ink Cartridges

5. Always store ink cartridges out of the reach of children.

Symbols and Trademarks

Symbol What it means

FFC (Flexible Film Cable)

Hex head screw

Hook (or tab release)

Knob screw (black)

Knob screw (sliver)

Screw (common screw)

1.1.1 MODEL NUMBERS AND NAMES

Model Number Name

D262-17 Ricoh MP CW2201 SP

D262-21 Ricoh MP CW2201 SP

D262-27 Ricoh MP CW2201 SP

Main Machines and Peripherals

No. Item Machine Code

1 Main Machine and Stand D262

2 Scanning Unit and Stand Standard

3 Roll Unit Standard

4 Exit Stacker Standard

5 Roll Unit RU6550 D3CR (Option)

Option No. Slot

Data Overwrite Security Type M19 D3BS SD Card Slot 1

OCR Unit Type M13 D3AC SD Card Slot 1

File Format Converter Type M23 D3CX Board A

IEEE 802.11 a/g/n Interface Unit Type M19 D3BR Board B

NFC Card Reader Type M23 D3DG USB

1.2 GUIDANCE FOR THOSE WHO ARE FAMILIAR WITH

1.2.1 COMPARISON TO MP CW2201

Item MP CW2201 MP CW2200

1st Copy Time  BK: 29sec  BK: 29sec

JOB Cancellation Will be improved from MP Limited Support

Manual Cut Will be supported Not Support

Force Print PS Driver, HDI Driver PS Driver

Printer Driver UI Will be improved from MP -

Setting Roll Paper Will be improved from MP -

Stacker Will be improved from MP -